Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide

Push Buttons andOperator InterfaceSpecifiers Guide

Type D “Domino” 16 mm Push Buttons

CONTENTS

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Non-Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Selector Switches and Potentiometer Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Illuminated Operators and Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Contacts and Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide

Type D – 16 mmSpecifications

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

4

11/97

Environment

Conforming to standards IEC 947-5-1, IEC 337-1, NF C 63-140, ASE 0119, ASE 1003, BS 4794, VDE 0660 part 200, UL 508,CSA C 22-2 n

°

14.

ApprovalsIn normal operation:CSA, ULASE, DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO: pending.

Protective treatment “TC” (All climates.)

Ambient air temperature Storage: from -40 to +70

°

C (-40 to +158

°

F). Operation: from -25 to +60

°

C (-13 to +140

°

F).

Operating positions All positions

Vibration resistance Mushroom head push button: 8 gn; other push buttons: 15 gn(10 Hz < Frequency < 500 Hz) conforming to IEC 68 2-6.

Shock resistance Push button: 70 gn; mushroom head push button: 15 gn; selector switch: 200 g conforming to IEC 68 2-27.

Electric shock protection Class II, conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030

Degree of protectionconforming IEC 529 and NF C 20-010

NEMA Type 1, 4, 4X (indoor), 13IP 65

Mechanical life Push button: 1 million operations. Mushroom head push button: 0.1 million operations Selector switch: 0.3 million operations.

Contact block characteristics

Rated insulation voltage Ui = 380 V - degree of pollution: 3 conforming to IEC 947-1.

Rated shock resistance voltage Uimp = 6 kV conforming to IEC 947-1.

Rated operating characteristics AC-15: B150, 5 A Continuous; DC-13: Q150, 2.5 A continuous

Contact operation Slow-make, N.O., slow-break, N.C., N.C. with direct opening operation conforming to EN60947-5-1 section 3.

Terminal referencing Conforming to CENELEC EN 50013.

Short circuit protection Fused 6 A gF conforming to IEC 269-1 and VDE 0660-200

Rated powerconforming to IEC 947-5-1(electrical durability)Connection by pinor connector

For 1 million operations

Voltage V 24 48 60 120 230 380

AC-15 72 VA 144 VA 180 VA 360 VA 460 VA 380 VA

DC-13 (L/R - 15 ms) 144 W 144 W 180 W 120 W 46 W

Connection- Pin 2.8 X 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.32 in)- Printed circuit connector- Female connector (conforming to DIN 41651) + ribbon cable

For Declaration of Conformity, see page 226.

Marking FileCCN

E164353NKCR

FileClass

LR 440873211 03


Type D – 16 mmOperators

5

11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved

k

Add desired bezel style code (see top of page). Only bezels 5 and 6 are available in this style operator.

f

Add desired bezel style code (see top of page). Only bezels 8 and 9 are available in this style operator.

t

Add desired bezel style code (see top of page). All four bezel styles are available in this style operator.

Non-Illuminated Operators

Legends are not included with operators.

Type Color Catalog Number

Momentary Flush Push Button, Square

Red D

k

A2R

Green D

k

A2G

Black D

k

A2S

White D

k

A2W

Yellow D

k

A2Y

Blue D

k

A2B

Momentary Flush Push Button, Round

Red D

f

A1R

Green D

f

A1G

Black D

f

A1S

White D

f

A1W

Yellow D

f

A1Y

Blue D

f

A1B

Momentary Extended Guard Push Button

Red D

t

A7R

Green D

t

A7G

Black D

t

A7S

White D

t

A7W

Yellow D

t

A7Y

Blue D

t

A7B

Momentary Push Mushroom Red D

t

B1R

Push Maintain/ Rotate Release Mushroom Red D

t

C1R

Toggle Switch White D

t

E1W

Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 11-12Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 10Application Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 9

Bezel Style 5Square Black

Bezel Style 6Square Chrome

Bezel Style 8Round Black

Bezel Style 9Round Chrome

D5A2R

D8A1G

D5A7Y

D6B1R

D5C1R

D8E1W


Type D – 16 mmSelector Switches and Potentiometer Knobs


6

11/97

d

Key is removable in all positions. Replacement key is 9001Z18, CP1 (key is marked 8D1).

t

Add desired bezel style code (see top of page). All four bezel styles are available in this style operator.

Selector Switches – Two Position


Maintained

Black D

t

G2S

Key

d

D

t

L30

Momentary Spring Return Black D

t

G7S

Selector Switches – Three Position


Maintained

Black D

t

G3S

Key

d

D

t

L80

Momentary Spring ReturnBoth Sides To Center Black D

t

G4S

Momentary Spring ReturnRight To Center Black D

t

G5S

Momentary Spring ReturnLeft To Center Black D

t

G6S

Potentiometer Control Knobs (potentiometer not supplied)

Type Catalog Number

Integrated Mounting 4 mm shaft diameter X 50 mm length D

t

R1S

PCB Board Mounting 4 mm shaft diameter X 50 mm length D

t

R3S

D5Gkk

D5L80

D8Rkk

Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 11-12Legends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 10Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 9






Type D – 16 mmPilot Lights and Illuminated Operators

7






t

Add desired bezel style code (see page 5). All four bezel styles are available in this style operator.

k

Add desired bezel style code (see page 5). Only style 5 and 6 are available in this style operator.

f

Add desired bezel style code (see page 5). Only style 8 and 9 are available in this style operator.

Illuminated Operators

Legends are not included with operators. See page 10 for legends.


Square Momentary Illuminated Push Button

Red D

k

A2R

Green D

k

A2G

White D

k

A2W

Yellow D

k

A2Y

Blue D

k

A2B

Round Momentary Illuminated Push Button

Red D

f

A1R

Green D

f

A1G

White D

f

A1W

Yellow D

f

A1Y

Blue D

f

A1B

Momentary Illuminated Extended Guard Button

Red D

t

A7R

Green D

t

A7G

White D

t

A7W

Yellow D

t

A7Y

Blue D

t

A7B

Square Push On - Push Off Illuminated Push Button

Red D

k

A2R

Green D

k

A2G

White D

k

A2W

Yellow D

k

A2Y

Blue D

k

A2B

Round Push On - Push Off Illuminated Push Button

Red D

f

A1R

Green D

f

A1G

White D

f

A1W

Yellow D

f

A1Y

Blue D

f

A1B

Pilot Lights

Legends are not included with operators. See page 10 for legends.


Square Pilot Light

Red D

k

V2R

Green D

k

V2G

White D

k

V2W

Yellow D

k

V2Y

Blue D

k

V2B

Round Pilot Light

Red D

f

V1R

Green D

f

V1G

White D

f

V1W

Yellow D

f

V1Y

Blue D

f

V1B

Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 11-12Legends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 10

D5A2R

D8A1G

D5A7Y

D9A1R

D5V2Y

D8V1G

Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 9


Type D – 16 mmContacts and Light Modules


8

11/97

k

Maintained operation is Push on - Push off.

d

Contact ratings and lamp voltage can be limited by the type of mounting. i.e. printed circuit termination might not carry full current because of the printed circuit board tracing.

Contact Blocks Only

Type Contact Arrangement Catalog Number

For snap mounting to operator, 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination.

N.O. DU10N.C. DU01

N.O. – N.C. DU11N.O. – N.O. DU20N.C. – N.C. DU02

Printed circuit board mounting with 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination For use with Z203 PCB mounting base. See page 9.

N.O. DUB10N.C. DUB01

N.O. – N.C. DUB11N.O. – N.O. DUB20N.C. – N.C. DUB02

For snap mounting to operator. Has printed circuit board stabs.

N.O. DV10N.C. DV01

N.O. – N.C. DV11N.O. – N.O. DV20N.C. – N.C. DV02

For soldering to printed circuit board. Does not snap onto operator.

N.O. DVB10N.C. DVB01

N.O. – N.C. DVB11N.O. – N.O. DVB20N.C. – N.C. DVB02

Ribbon cable connector. Snaps onto operator.

N.O. DR10N.C. DR01

N.O. – N.C. DR11N.O. – N.O. DR20N.C. – N.C. DR02

Module With Lamp Holder Only

Type Catalog Number

For snap mounting to operator, 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination. DUFPrinted circuit board mounting with 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination. For use with Z203 PCB mounting base. See page 9. DUFB

For snap mounting to operator. Has printed circuit board stabs. DVFFor soldering to printed circuit board. Does not snap onto operator. DVFBRibbon cable connector. Snaps onto operator. DRF

Module With Lamp Holder And Contacts

TypeContact

Arrangement6 to 120 V, 1.2 Watt Max.

d

Momentary Maintained

k

For snap mounting to operator, 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination.

N.O. DUF10 DUFR10N.C. DUF01 DUFR01

N.O. – N.C. DUF11 DUFR11N.O. – N.O. DUF20 DUFR20N.C. – N.C. DUF02 DUFR02

Printed circuit board mounting with 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination. For use with Z203 PCB mounting base. See page 9.

N.O. DUFB10

N/AN.C. DUFB01

N.O. – N.C. DUFB11N.O. – N.O. DUFB20N.C. – N.C. DUFB02

For snap mounting to operator. Has printed circuit board stabs.

N.O. DVF10 DVFR10N.C. DVF01 DVFR01

N.O. – N.C. DVF11 DVFR11N.O. – N.O. DVF20 DVFR20N.C. – N.C. DVF02 DVFR02

For soldering to printed circuit board. Does not snap onto operator.

N.O. DVFB10

N/AN.C. DVFB01

N.O. – N.C. DVFB11N.O. – N.O. DVFB20N.C. – N.C. DVFB02

Ribbon cable connector. Snaps onto operator.

N.O. DRF10 DRFR10N.C. DRF01 DRFR01

N.O. – N.C. DRF11 DRFR11N.O. – N.O. DRF20 DRFR20N.C. – N.C. DRF02 DRFR02

DU

kk

DUB

kk

DV

kk

DVB

kk

DR

kk

DUF

DUFB DVF

DVFB DRF

DUF

kkk

DUFB

kk

DVF

kkk

DVFB

kk

DRF

kkk

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 11-12Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 10Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 9


Type D – 16 mmAccessories

9


k

For use with illuminated operators of the same color as the LED.

t

Order must specify standard package quantity or multiples of that quantity.

Type Std. Pkg. Qty.

t

Catalog Number

Ring Nut Wrench 1 Z201

Lamp Remover Tool 1 Z02

Closing Plate Black-Square 1 Z205

Closing Plate Black-Round 1 Z223

Replacement Mounting Ring Nut 1 Z216

Type Voltage Assembly Code Std. Pkg. Qty.

t

Catalog Number

Incandescent(T 1

3

⁄

4)

6 Vac 06 10 Z206

12 Vac 12 10 Z207

24 Vac 24 10 Z208

48 Vac 48 10 Z209

60 Vac 60 10 Z210

LEDk 24 Vac/dc

24 V - Red R4 5 Z219R

24 V - Green G4 5 Z219G

24 V - Yellow Y4 5 Z219Y

LEDk 120 Vac 120 V - Red R2 1 Z220R

Type Std. Pkg. Qty.t Catalog NumberPrinted Circuit Board AdapterFor Type DU Contacts Only. 1 Z203

Wire Harness.For Type DU Contacts Only. 10 Z204

Type Std. Pkg. Qty.t Catalog NumberReplacement Key (No 8D1) 1 Z18

Adjustable Spacer (for rear fixing blocks) 4 Z220

Wire clip 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.32 in.) 100 Z231

Ribbon Cable Connector(for 4 wire DR Blocks) 25 Z228

Ribbon Cable Connector(for 6 wire DR Blocks) 25 Z229

Z201

Z02

Z205

Z223

Z216

Z2kk

Z203 Z204

Z18

Z220

Z231 Z22k

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType D – 16 mmLegend Plates

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved10

11/97

Engraving field is 16 mm x 22 mm. Factory engraving limited to 3 lines of 12 characters (including spaces). Black letters on silver field.

Order must specify standard package quantity or multiples of that quantity.

Type Std. Pkg. Qty. Catalog NumberLegend Plate Holder with Blank PlateUse with D5, D6 bezel 25 Z215

Legend Plate Holder Only, Use with D5D6 bezel 25 Z213

Legend Plate Holder with Blank LegendUse with D5, D6 bezel 25 Z222

Legend Plate Holder Only, Use with D5D6 bezel 25 Z221

Blank Plate without Holder (For use with all holders) 25 Z214Yellow Contrast Plate-Round, 50 mm 1 Z211Yellow Contrast Plate-Rectangular, 25 mm x 50 mm 1 Z212

Marking

Legend Plate with HolderAnodized Aluminum

Legends Only Mylar Inserts

For D5, D6 Operators

Only

For D8, D9 Operators

Only

Legend Plate

without Holder

Legend Plate without Holder

White with Black Letters

for Round Button

Illuminated Devices

White with Black Letters

for Square Button

Illuminated Devices

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Catalog Number

Blank Legend Z215 Z222 Z214 Z214 01D 01ASpecial Engraved 99Q2 99R2 99W2 99S2 N/A N/A

O 02Q2 02R2 02W2I 03Q2 03R2 03W2 03S2II 04Q2 04R2 04W2 04S2O I 05Q2 05R2 05W2 05S2II O I 34Q2 34R2 34W2 34S2 65DE 65AClose 65Q2 65R2 65W2 65S2 77DE 77ADown 77Q2 75R2 77W2 77S2 82DE 82AEmerg. Stop 82Q2 82R2 82W2 82S2 78DE 78AFast 78Q2 78R2 78W2 78S2 66DE 66AForward 66Q2 66R2 66W2 66S2Hand Auto 21Q2 21R2 21W2 21S2Hand O Auto 24Q2 24R2 24W2 24S2High 80Q2 80R2 80W2 80S2 80DE 80AIn 72Q2 72R2 72W2 72S2 72DE 72AInch 74Q2 74R2 74W2 74S2 74DE 74AJog 69Q2 69R2 69W2 69S2 69DE 69ALow 81Q2 81R2 81W2 81S2 81DE 81ALower 71Q2 71R2 71W2 71S2 71DE 71AOff 63Q2 63R2 63W2 63S2 63DE 63AOff On 85Q2 85R2 85W2 85S2On 62Q2 62R2 62W2 62S2 62DE 62AOpen 64Q2 64R2 64W2 64S2 64DE 64AOut 73Q2 73R2 73W2 73S2 73DE 73ARaise 70Q2 70R2 70W2 70S2 70DE 70AReverse 67Q2 67R2 67W2 67S2 67DE 67ARun 75Q2 75R2 75W2 75S2 75DE 75ASlow 79Q2 79R2 79W2 79S2 79DE 79AStart 17Q2 17R2 17W2 17S2Stop 18Q2 18R2 18W2 18S2Stop Start 90Q2 90R2 90W2 90S2Test 84Q2 84R2 84W2 84S2Up 76Q2 76R2 76W2 76S2 76DE 76A

Z215 Z213

Z222 Z221

Z214

Z211

Z212

Legend Plate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 12

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType D – 16 mm

Dimensions


Body

Mounting conforming to DIN EN 50 007 and IEC 947 forfixing holes with or without anti-rotation pip

Push-buttons and pilot lights

Headswith legend plate without legend plate

A: d25 Ø25 A: d25 Ø25D5A2k D5A1k D5A7k D8A7kD6A2k D9A1k D6A7k D9A7k

A: d25 Ø25 A: d25 Ø25 A: d25 Ø25 A: d25 Ø25 D5Gkk D8Gkk D5LkO D8LkO D5B1k D8B1k D5C1R D5C1R D6Gkk D9Gkk D6LkO D9LkO D6B1k D9B1k D6C1R D9C1R

Potentiometer heads Integrated fixing Board fixing

A: d25 Ø25 A: d25 Ø25 A: d25 Ø25 D5E1W D8E1W D5R1S D8R1S D5R3S D8R3S D6E1W D9E1W D6R1S D9R1S D6R3S D9R3S

DUkk DUBkk DVBkk DVkk DRkk

Wiring AccessoriesDUkk + Z204 DUBkk + Z203 Z204 Z203

1.725

25

9.8

16.2 +0.2-0.0

16.2

25 25

1.7

9.8

2525

2525

25 25

+0.2-0.0

A

13 18

M16

x1

1.5 - 6 8

A

15 18

M16

x1

1.5 - 6 6

A

26 18

M16

x1

1.5 - 6 6

55 18

M16

x1

1.5 - 6 6

A

È 3

1

29 18

M16

x1

A

1.5 - 6 6

È 3

1

29 18

M16

x1

A

1.5 - 6 6

A

20 18

M16

x1

1.5 - 6 6

A

27 34

1.5 - 6

8M7 x 0.75

50

4

A

27 18

M16

x1

1.5 - 6

42 - 65

42.5

9.5

13.5

42.5

17

40.5

17

40.5

9.5

13.5

41.5

9.5

13.5

52

9.5

13.5

52

17 15

18

16.5

2.1

2.5

12.5

1 ø

1.2

5

17

2.5

5.08

7 10.1

6

15.24

22

All dimensions are in mm's. To convert to approximate inches, divide mm by 25.4.

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType D – 16 mmDimensions


11/97

Pilot lightsHead Pilot lights + contact

BodyDUFDUFkk

DUFBDUFBkk

DVFBDVFBkk

DVFDVFkk

A: d25 Ø25 A: d 25 Ø25

D5V2k D8V1k D5A2k D8A1k

D6V2k D9V1k D6A2k D9A1k

DRFDRFkkk

DUFDUFkk+Z204

DUFBDUFBkk + Z203

Head + DVkk DVF DVFkk

Head + DUkkDUFDUFkk + Z204

Head + DUkkDUFDUFkk + Z203

Head +DRkkDRFDRFkkk

Blanking Plug

A: d 25 Ø25Z205 Z223

Adjustable spacerZ220

Legend plate carrierfor square headZ213

for round headZ221

Legend platesZ212 Z211

A

16 18

M16

x1

1.5 - 6

A

13 18

M16

x1

1.5 - 6 8

48

9.5

13.5

48

17

46

17

46

9.5

13.5

47

9.5

13.5

589.

513

.558

17

48.5 4

9.5

13.5

9.5

13.5

48.5

64

9.5

13.5

48.5

58.5

9.5

13.5

53.5

A

M16

x 1

15.5

37

39 -

58

18.516.2

24.5

44

25

44

25

1.7

50 17.9

16.2

25

1.7

50 17.9

16.2

All dimensions are in mms. To convert to approximate inches, divide mm by 25.4.

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType D – 16 mm

Dimensions


Push Buttons andOperator InterfaceSpecifiers GuideType J, O, and XVL – Pilot Lights

Class 9001

CONTENTS

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PageType J, Description and Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Type J, Dimensions and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Type O, Description and Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Type XVL, Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Type XVL, Selection and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType J – Pilot LightsDescription and Selection


11/97

JP1R29

JTR1R29

Pilot Lights, Push-To-Test and Remote Test Pilot Lights

Class 9001 Type J compact pilot lights are designed to be mounted in a .69" (11/16") diameter mounting hole. Each terminal will accept up to two #14 AWG wires (CU only). Type J compact pilot lights meet NEMA Type 4 (watertight) and NEMA Type 13 (oiltight) requirements. Type JT push-to-test pilot lights have contacts built into the encapsulated body. Type JTR remote test pilot lights have dual inputs for one push remote testing – all you need is a push button with a current rating equal to or greater than the total lamp draw. Type JTR remote test pilot lights can also be energized from two separate input signals of the same voltage and polarity. This is done by wiring the “test” terminal to the second input signal.

(1) See Page 18 for replacement LED lamps. For other voltage LED lamps contact local field office.k Supplied with “plastic” color caps. If “glass” color caps are desired, substitute G26, R26, etc., for G29, R29, etc. Example:

JP1G26, JP1R26, etc. To order a pilot light with color cap not listed above, add the color cap type number from the table below to the basic pilot light number. Example: For a standard 120 volt transformer style pilot light with a plastic amber color cap, order a 9001JP1A29. LED lamps are only for use with plastic red, green or yellow color caps.

t Remote test (Type JTR) only is available in AC.

Standard Pilot Light

Style/VoltageColor Cap Lamp

Volt/AmpReplacement

LampNone Redk Greenk Yellow kTrans/110-120Vac, 50-60 Hz JP1 JP1R29 JP1G29 JP1Y29 6.3 V, 0.15A 2550101020

Incandescent/120 Vac or dc JP38 JP38R29 JP38G29 JP38Y29 120 V, 0.015A 2550101040

Incandescent/24-28 Vac or dc JP35 JP35R29 JP35G29 JP35Y29 28 V, 0.040A 2550101024

Other Voltagest JPt JPtR29 JPtG29 JP tY29

LED – 24-28 Vac – JP35LRR29 JP35LGG29 JP35LYY29 28 V, 0.03A (1)

LED – 24-28 Vdc – JP35DRR29 JP35DGG29 JP35DYY29 28 V, 0.03A (1)

LED – 120Vac – JP38LRR29 JP38LGG29 JP38LYY29 28 V, 0.03A (1)

Push-To-Test Pilot Light


Volt/AmpReplacement

LampNone Red k Green k Yellow kTrans/110-120Vac, 50-60 Hz JT1 JT1R29 JT1G29 JT1Y29 6.3 V, 0.15A 2550101020

Incandescent/120 Vac or dc JT38 JT38R29 JT38G29 JT38Y29 120 V, 0.15A 2550101040

Incandescent/24-28 Vac or dc JT35 JT35R29 JT35G29 JT35Y29 28 V, 0.040A 2550101024

Other Voltagest JTt JTtR29 JTtG29 JTtY29

LED – 24-28 Vac – JT35LRR29 JT35LGG29 JT35LYY29 28 V, 0.03A (1)

LED – 24-28 Vdc – JT35DRR29 JT35DGG29 JT35DYY29 28 V, 0.03A (1)

LED – 120 Vac – JT38LRR29 JT38LGG29 JT38LYY29 28 V, 0.03A (1)

Remote Test Pilot Light


Volt/AmpReplacement

LampNone Red k Green k Yellow kTrans/110-120 Vac, 50-60 Hz JTR1 JTR1R29 JTR1G29 JTR1Y29 6.3 V, 0.15A 2550101020

Incandescent/120 Vac JTR38 JTR38R29 JTR38G29 JTR38Y29 120 V, 0.015A 2550101040

Incandescent/24-28 Vac JTR35 JTR35R29 JTR35G29 JTR35Y29 28 V, 0.040A 2550101024

Other Voltages (ac Only)t JTRt JTRtR29 JTRtG29 JTRtY29

LED – 24-28 Vac – JTR35LRR29 JTR35LGG29 JTR35LYY29 28 V, 0.03A (1)

Other Voltagest

VoltageJP/JTCode

ReplacementLamp

Volt/AmpJTR

CodeReplacement

LampVolt/Amp

Incandescent/6 Vac or dc 31 2550101020 6.3 V, 0.15A 31t 2550101003 3 V, 0.16A

Incandescent/12 Vac or dc 32 2550101022 12 V, 0.17A 32t 2550101022 12 V, 0.17A



File 25490Class 3211 03

File E42259CCN NKCR

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType J – Pilot Lights

Dimensions and Accessories


Type J Dimensions

Legend Plates

TypeMax. No. of

LinesMax. No. of Characters

Catalog Number

BlankBlack Field 2 8 JN100Red Field 2 8 JN100R

Special Marking (Specify Marking)

Black Field 2 8 JN199Red Field 2 8 JN199R

Blank Aluminum Field 2 16 JN700Special Marking (Specify Marking) Aluminum Field 2 16 JN799

Replacement Color Caps - Class 9001, Type J

ColorCatalog Number

Plastic GlassRed R29 R26Green G29 G26Amber A29 A26Blue L29 L26Clear C29 C26White W29 W26Yellow Y29 Y26

Replacement Parts - Class 9001, Type JType Catalog Number

Ring Nut 6512909601Locking Thrust Washer 6512909201Trim Washer 6512909301Rubber Sealing Washer 6512901801Note:Octagonal ringnuts can be tightened with standard tools, or use the reverse end of Square D wrench

Class 9001 Type K95.

Type A B C

JTR1 2.83" 1.20" .93"

JP, JT, JTR31

through JTR38

2.34" 1.11" .84"

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType O - Pilot LightsDescription and Selection


11/97

Type O

t This product is not recommended for continuous use at 120 V.

Approximate Dimensions

Instrument Type Incandescent Pilot Lights – Class 9001, Type O NEMA 13

Voltage AC/DC Average Current (Amps) Color Catalog Number

12 V 0.170

Red OR12

Green OG12

Amber OA12

Clear OC12

Yellow OY12

White OW12

Blue (Fluted) FB12

24 V 0.073

Red OR24

Green OG24

Amber OA24

Clear OC24

Yellow OY24

White OW24

Blue (Fluted) FB24

120 Vt 0.025

Red OR120

Green OG120

Amber OA120

Clear OC120

Yellow OY120

White OW120

Blue (Fluted) FB120

Replacement Lamps - Class 9001, Type O

Voltage Sylvania Lamp NumberSquare D Catalog

Number12 V 12PSB 255010500324 V 24PSB 2550105004

120 V 120PSB 2550105005

Replacement Lenses* - Class 9001, Type OColor Catalog Number

Red 2550420020

Green 2550420040

Amber 2550420060

Clear 2550420010

Yellow 2550420030

White 2550430040

Blue 2550470010

Minimum Order Quantity 10

1.8447

0.4110

0.8121

0.6817.5

0.205

0.02.5

mtg holerequired

width

thicknessA30064-963

max panelthickness

Dual Dimensions inchesmm

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXVL Miniature LED Pilot Lights

Specifications


GeneralThis new Telemecanique range of LED pilot lights meets the very latest requirements in signalling techniques.

Because of their small size, Ø8 and Ø12 mm fixing pilot lights are particularly suitable for the following applications:

• mounting on small control stations.• shallow depth mounting.• large number of signalling units on a control station (low power dissipation).Small diameter LED pilot lights also have sealed front faces (IP 65 option available). An unsealed Ø8 mm fixing model with protruding LED and black bezel (aesthetic appearance) is also offered.

Advantages:LED pilot lights have many advantages:

• very long life and so low maintenance costs (bulb test no longer required).• highly resistant to shocks, vibrations and over-voltage.• low power consumption which, for example, allows compatibility with programmable controller outputs

by parallel connection with the load, to give a direct indication of output state.• very high reliability.Quick fixing by means of tags for soldered clips for Ø8 mm type, or threaded connectors Ø12 mm type. Safe connection due to integral ballast resistor and reverse polarity protection device.

Dimensions


Conforming to standards IEC 947-5-1, NF C 63-140, VDE 0660-200.

Protective treatment Standard version: “TC” treatment.

Ambient temperature Operation: -25 °C to + 70 °C (-13 °F to +158 °F). Storage: -40 °C to + 70 °C (-40 °F to +158 °F).

Electric shock protection Class III conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030.

Degree of protection IP 40 (IP 65 with seal) conforming to IEC 529 and NF C 20-010.

Current consumption 25 mA.

Rated Insulation voltage 50 V conforming to NF C 20-040, VDE 0110.

Life Can exceed 100,000 hours.

Voltage limits including ripple (---—) 0.8 UN ≤ U ≤1.2 Un.

Terminal referencing Polarity marked + – conforming to CENELEC EN 50013.

Cabling

XVLA1kk, XVLA2kk: tags for 2.8 x 0.5 mm quick connectors, also for soldered connections.XVLA3kk: threaded connectors, clamping, capacity: min. 1 - 26 AWG solid or stranded, max. 1 - 16 AWG solid or stranded.

E

M12 x 1

10

6 45

O 1

6

O 12, with lens incorporated,protected LED XVL-A3

E - mounting plate thickness 1 to 6 mmE - mounting plate thickness 1 to 8 mm

O 8, with lens incorporated,protected LED XVL-A2

E

M8 x 0,5

12

341.5

O10

E - mounting plate thickness 1 to 8 mm

LED pilot lightsO8, with black bezel,visible LED XVL-A1..

E

M8 x 0.5

12

321.5

O12

MarkingFile LR 44087Class 3211 03

File E164353CCN NKCR2

All dimensions are in mms. To convert to approximate inches, divide mm by 25.4.

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXVL Miniature LED Pilot LightsSelection and Accessories


11/97

1 Quick Connects (2.8 mm x 0.5 mm)2 Screw Termination

With Black Bezel, Raised LEDDescription Supply Voltage DC Color Catalog Number

Ø8 mmwith integral ballast resistorand reverse polarity protection diode

Degree of protection IP 40

5 V

Green XVLA113

Red XVLA114

Orange-yellow XVLA115

12 V

Green XVLA123

Red XVLA124


24 V

Green XVLA133

Red XVLA134


48 V

Green XVLA143

Red XVLA144


With Integral Lens Cap, Covered LEDDescription Supply Voltage DC Color Catalog Number

Ø8 mm(1)

with integral ballast resistorand reverse polarity protection diode


5 V

Green XVLA213

Red XVLA214


12 V

Green XVLA223

Red XVLA224


24 V

Green XVLA233

Red XVLA234


48 V

Green XVLA243

Red XVLA244


Ø12 mm(2)

with integral ballast resistorand reverse polarity protection diode


5 V

Green XVLA313

Red XVLA314


12 V

Green XVLA323

Red XVLA324


24 V

Green XVLA333

Red XVLA334


48 V

Green XVLA343

Red XVLA344


AccessoriesDescription Catalog Number

Tightening tools(Sold singly)

For Ø8 mm pilot lights XVLX08

For Ø12 mm pilot lights XVLX12

Seals (IP 65)(Sold in lots of 10)

For Ø8 mm pilot lights XVLZ911

For Ø12 mm pilot lights XVLZ912

XVL-X..

XVL-Z91.

XVLA1kk

XVLA2kk

XVLA3kk

XVLXkk

XVLZ91k


XA2B 22 mm, Double Insulated

CONTENTS


General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Non-Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Mushroom Operators and Yellow Contrast Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Selector, Toggle, and Reset Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Pilot Lights and Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Illuminated Operators and Selector Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Square Illuminated Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Legend Plate Carriers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Accessories and Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31XALB General Purpose Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32XALB Enclosures and Base Mounted Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33XALB Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34XA2B 22 mm Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35


XA2B 22 mmDouble Insulated


20

11/97

Environment

Conformity to standards

XB2B, XD2P:

IEC-947-5-1, EN60947-5-1, NF C 63-140, ASE 0119, ASE 1003, BS 4794, VDE 0660-200, UL 508, CSA C 22-2 No. 14.

Approvals

CSA and UL:

push buttons and selector switches NEMA Type A600 - Q600, pilot lights and illuminated push buttons direct supply (120 V max); pilot lights and illuminated push buttons with transformer (600 V)ASE, DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO, BUREAU, VERITAS, SAHKOTARKASTUSKESKUS, GL, DNV, LROS

XD2P, standard version:

CSA A600-Q600, LROS.

Protective treatment Standard Version: “TC” (all climates).

Ambient temperature Storage: -40

°

C to +70

°

C (-40

°

F to +158

°

F.). Operating: -25

°

C to +70

°

C (-13

°

F to +158

°

F.).

Resistance to vibration 60 mm diameter mushroom head: 8 g. Other push buttons: 15 g. Small joystick controllers: 5g (from 40 to 50 Hz) conforming to IEC 68-2-6.

Resistance to shock Push buttons: 70 g. Mushroom head push buttons: 15 g.Selector switches: 120 g. Conforming to IEC 68-2-27.

Electric shock protection

XB2B, XD2P:

Class 1, conforming to IEC 536 and NF 20-030.

Degree of protection conforming to IEC 529 and NEC 20-010.

NEMA ratings XB2B: 1, 2, 4, 4x, 12K, 13, XB2B, XD2P.IP 65: flush and protecting, illuminated and non-illuminated push buttons (mounted).IP 40: double-headed push buttons (IP 65 on request).

Mechanical life

Push buttons -- 3 million operations. Latching mushroom head push buttons: 300,000 operations. Illuminated selector switches: 100,000 operations. (The product life expressed is based on average usage and normal operating conditions. Actual operating life will vary with conditions. The above statements are not intended to nor shall they create any express or implied warranties as to product operation or life. For information on the warranty offered on this product, please refer to the Square D terms and conditions of sale found in the Square D Digest.)


Nominal thermal current 10 A conforming to IEC 947-5-1, NF C 63-140, UL 508, CSA 22-2 No. 14, VDE 0660 part 2, NEMA Type A600-Q600.

Nominal insulation voltage 500V conforming to NF C 20-040, VDE 0110, IEC 158-1, 600V conforming to UL 508, 600v conforming toCSA 22-2 No. 14.

Insulation catagory Group C conforming to NF C 20-040 and VDE 0110.

Contact operation Slow-make N.O. or slow-break N.C. N.C. with direct opening operation conforming to EN 60 947-5-1 Section 3.

Contact resistance

≤

25 m

Ω

conforming to: NF C 93-050 method A or IEC 225-7 category 3.

Operating force Flush or projecting push buttons - with 1 NO contact: 2.25 lb - with 1 NC contact: 1.8 lbAdditional contacts - N.O.: add 1 lb - N.C.: add 0.7 lb.


Short circuit protection 10 A cartridge fuses, g1 or N conforming to IEC 269-1 and VDE 0660-200.

Rated powerconforming to IEC 947-5-1 Appendix Cduty categories AC15-DC13Operating frequency: 3,600 ops/hourLoad factor: 0.5AC supply (50-60 Hz)

Cabling

XB2B, XD2P:

Screw and captive clamp terminals. Recommended torque 15.62 lb-in. Capacity: minimum 1 x .5mm

2

(20 AWG), solid or stranded, maximum with or without cable end: 2 x 1.5 mm

2

(16 AWG) or 1 x 2.5 mm

2

(14 AWG) or by cable clips conforming to NF C 20-120 (on request).

1

0604

02

01

.06

.04

.02

.01

220 V127 V

24/48 V

1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60current in amperes

mill

ions

of o

pera

tions ith = 10 A

AC Ratings, Inductive - NEMA A600

35% Power factor

VA BreakAmperes VA

Continuouscarrying Amperes

Resistive 75%Power factor

Make, Break and continuous Amperes

Volts MakeAmperes

120 60 7200 6 720 10 10240 30 7200 3 720 10 10480 15 7200 1.5 720 10 10600 12 7200 1.2 720 10 10

DC Ratings, NEMA Type Q600Inductive and resistive

Volts Make and break Continuous

125 0.55 2.5

250 0.27 2.5

600 0.10 2.5

DC supplyPower broken in wattsfor 1 million operations

Voltage 24 V 48 V 120 VInductive

load 65 W 48 W 40 W

File E164353CCN NKCR

File LR 44087Class 3211 03

Marking


Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 29Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 32-34Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 35

XA2B Non-Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 21-23XA2B Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 25-27XA2B Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 24Contact Blocks & Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 28


XA2B 22 mmNon-Illuminated Operators

21


Operator

Type Size ColorCatalogNumber

Flush head

White ZA2BA1Black ZA2BA2Green ZA2BA3Red ZA2BA4

Yellow ZA2BA5Blue ZA2BA6Grey ZA2BA8

Flush headpremarked

Green “START” ZA2BA333Green “ON” ZA2BA341

White “I” ZA2BA131Black “O” ZA2BA232Green “I” ZA2BA331Red “O” ZA2BA432

Red “STOP” ZA2BA434Red “OFF” ZA2BA435

Transparent flush head(for use with ZB2BY1• stick on legendssee page 30)

Green ZA2BA38Red ZA2BA48

Yellow ZA2BA58Blue ZA2BA68Clear ZA2BA78

Extended head

White ZA2BL1Black ZA2BL2Green ZA2BL3Red ZA2BL4

Yellow ZA2BL5Blue ZA2BL6

Extended headpremarked

Red “STOP” ZA2BL434Red “O” ZA2BL432

Red “OFF” ZA2BL435

Silicone booted head

Black ZA2BP2Green ZA2BP3Red ZA2BP4

Yellow ZA2BP5Blue ZA2BP6

Neoprene booted head

Black ZA2BP02Green ZA2BP03Red ZA2BP04

Yellow ZA2BP05Blue ZA2BP06

Flush plunger(with full guard)

Black ZA2BA24Green ZA2BA34Red ZA2BA44

Yellow ZA2BA54Blue ZA2BA64

Flush plunger(with half guard)

Black ZA2BA22Green ZA2BA32Red ZA2BA42

Yellow ZA2BA52Blue ZA2BA62

Two button operators

Two flushBlack/Red ZA2BA9124Green/Red ZA2BA9134

Two flushpremarked

Black/Red “I/O” ZA2BA9224Green/Red “I/O” ZA2BA9234

Black/Red “START/STOP” ZA2BA9724Green/Red “START/STOP” ZA2BA9734

One flush,one extended

Black/Red ZA2BL9324Green/Red ZA2BL9334

One flush, one extendedpremarked

Black/Red “I/O” ZA2BL9424Green/Red “I/O” ZA2BL9434

Black/Red “START/STOP” ZA2BL9824Green/Red “START/STOP” ZA2BL9834

Flush headZA2BA•

Transparent flush headZA2BA•8

Booted headZA2BP•

Extended headZA2BL•

Application Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 20Contact Block Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 28Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 29

Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 32-34Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31


XA2B 22 mmMushroom Operators and Yellow Contrast Plates


22

11/97

f

Key release operators come with Ronis #455 keys (quantity 2) as standard. For replacement keys see page 30. For switches keyed with different keys, add the suffixes shown in the table below (no change in price). For other key numbers, contact local field office.

j

Trigger action mushroom heads are "tamper proof" whereby a change of contact state is not possible by “teasing” or floating the operator.

Yellow Contrast Plates

Yellow Contrast Plates comply with EN418 of the European Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC.

Operator

Type Size Color Catalog Number

Mushroom headmomentary

30 mm

Black ZA2BC24Green ZA2BC34Red ZA2BC44

Yellow ZA2BC54Blue ZA2BC64

40 mm

Black ZA2BC2Green ZA2BC3Red ZA2BC4

Yellow ZA2BC5Blue ZA2BC6

60 mmBlack ZA2BR2Red ZA2BR4

Mushroom headLatchingPush-Pull

30 mmBlack ZABT24Red ZABT44

40 mmBlack ZA2T2Red ZA2BT4

60 mmBlack ZA2BX2Red ZA2BX4

Mushroom headLatchingTurn to Release

30 mm Red ZA2BS4440 mm Red ZA2BS5460 mm Red ZA2BS64

Mushroom headLatching, Turn to Release Trigger Action

f

30 mm Red ZA2BS83440 mm Red ZA2BS844

Mushroom headLatchingKey to Release

j

30 mm Red ZA2BS7440 mm Red ZA2BS1460 mm Red ZA2BS24

Mushroom headLatching, Key to Release Trigger Action

fj

30 mm Red ZA2BS93440 mm Red ZA2BS944

Key Number Suffix

421 12

458A 10

520 14

3131A 20

PVC Yellow Legend Plates 60 mm diameter PVC Yellow Legend Plates 90 mm diameter

Text LanguageCatalog Number

Text LanguageCatalog Number

Blank N/A ZB2BY9101 Blank N/A ZB2BY8101Emergency Stop English ZB2BY9330 Emergency Stop English ZB2BY8330Arret d’Urgence French ZB2BY9130 Arret d’Urgence French ZB2BY8130Not Aus German ZB2BY9230 Not Aus German ZB2BY8230Parada de Emergencia Spanish ZB2BY9430 Parada de Emergencia Spanish ZB2BY8430Arresto Emergenza Italian ZB2BY9630 Arresto Emergenza Italian ZB2BY8630

Mushroom Head Momentary 30 mm

ZA2BC•4

Mushroom Head Turn to Release 40 mm

ZA2BS54

Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 20Contact Block Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 28Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 29Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 32-34Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31

Mushroom Head Momentary 40 mm

ZA2BC•

Mushroom Head Key to Release 40 mm

ZA2BS14

EMERGENCY

STOP

ZB2BY8330


XA2B 22 mmSelector, Toggle, and Reset Switches

23


t

When ordering extended lever, substitute “J” for “D” in part number (No additional cost).Example: ZA2BD3 becomes ZA2BJ3

f

Key selector switches come with Ronis #455 keys (quantity 2) as standard. For replacement keys see page 30.For other key numbers contact local field office.

For switches keyed with different keys, add the following suffixes:

Non-illuminated selector switches

Type Positions, ActionCatalogNumber

Standard handleor extended lever

t

2-maintained ZA2BD22-spring return from right to left ZA2BD43-maintained ZA2BD33-spring return to center from left and right ZA2BD53-spring return from right to center ZA2BD83-spring return from left to center ZA2BD7

Key selectors

Type Positions, ActionKey

removalCatalogNumber

Key switch

f

2-maintained Left ZA2BG22-maintained Left, Right ZA2BG42-spring return right to left Left ZA2BG63-maintained All ZA2BG03-maintained Center ZA2BG33-maintained Left, Right ZA2BG53-maintained Left ZA2BG93-spring return to centerfrom left and right Center ZA2BG7

3-spring return to centerfrom left Right ZA2BG1

3-spring return to centerfrom right Center ZA2BG8

Selector Switch Sequences (using contact block assemblies, page 28)

2 Position selector switch 3 Position selector switch

Contact block guide

Contact block guide

O X 1 N.O. (left or right) X O O 1 N.O. (left)X O 1 N.C. (left or right) O X O 2 NC wired in series (side-by-side)O X 1 N.O. O O X 1 N.O. (right)

and X X O 1 N.C. (right)X O 1 N.C. O X X 1 N.C. (left)

Note: View from front of panel X O X 2 NO wired in parallel (side-by-side)

Toggle switch

Description ColorCatalogNumber

Two position toggle switch Black ZA2BD28

Reset buttons (Mechanical overload resets 10 mm travel)

NEMA Type 4X(not suitablefor use withZA2BZ10•

body/contactassemblies)

FlushBlank

Green ZA2BA83Red ZA2BA84Blue ZA2BA86

with legendO Red ZA2BA8401R Blue ZA2BA8602

Extendedhead with legend O Red ZA2BL8401

Plunger (may be trimmed to length desired)The total operating distance may be set between 17 and 120 mm,as measured from the front face of the panel.

ZA2BZ13

Key Number Suffix

421 12

458A 10

520 14

3131A 20

StandardZA2BD•

ExtendedZA2BJ•

Key SwitchZA2BG•

Toggle SwitchZA2BD28

Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 20Contact Block Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 28Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 29Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 32-34Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 31

ZA2BA8602


XA2B 22 mmPilot Lights and Light Modules


24

11/97

a

Complete catalog number by adding one of the following voltages: 6, 12, 24, 48 or 120 V. If desired without bulb, omit voltage.

f

Additional primary voltages are available. Contact local field office for details.

Pilot light head


Standard

White ZA2BV01

Green ZA2BV03

Red ZA2BV04

Amber ZA2BV05

Blue ZA2BV06

Clear ZA2BV07

Special lens forneon and LED lamps

Green ZA2BV033

Red ZA2BV043

Amber ZA2BV053

Blue ZA2BV063

Clear ZA2BV073

Pilot light modules

Type Catalog Number

Direct supply (bulb included)

a (AC/DC)

ZA2BV6

a

Transformer type (AC only) 1.2 VA/6 V (bulb included)

f

24 V ZA2BV1

48 V ZA2BV2

110/120 V ZA2BV3

220/240 V ZA2BV94

440/480 V ZA2BV95

550/660 V ZA2BV98

Resistor type 130 V (bulb included)

220/250 V ZA2BV7

Lamps

Type Voltage AC/DC Watts Catalog Number

Incandescent

Replacement bulbs (Type BA9s)

6 1.5 DL1CB006

12 2.0 DL1CE012

24 2.0 DL1CE024

48 2.4 DL1CE048

130 2.6 DL1CE130

Neon(use with direct supply light module)

120 - NE51HRT120V

220 - NE51HRT220V

380 - NE51HRT380V

Type Color Voltage Part Number

LED

, BA9s base for Direct Supply blocks

Green 6 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0063

Red 6 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0064

Amber 6 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0065










LED

, BA9s base for retrofitting into transformer Light Modules

Green 9 Vac only DL1CJUS0093

Red 9 Vac only DL1CJUS0094

Amber 9 Vac only DL1CJUS0095

StandardZA2BV0•

ZA2BV6

Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 20Replacement parts (bulbs & lenses). . . . . . . . . . . Page 30Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 29

ZA2BV3

DLICE • • •(incandescent)

DLICJUS • • •(LED)

Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 32-34Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31


XA2B 22 mmIlluminated Operators

25


f

To upgrade to NEMA Type 3, 4 & 13 order silicon boot ZB2BW008.

Illuminated operators


Flush head

White ZA2BW31Green ZA2BW33Red ZA2BW34

Amber ZA2BW35Blue ZA2BW36Clear ZA2BW37

Flush head for neon and LED lamps

Green ZA2BW333Red ZA2BW343


Extended head



Extended head for neon and LED lamps



With half guard



Illuminated Turn-to-Releasemushroom head


Yellow ZA2BW75Blue ZA2BW76Clear ZA2BW77

Two button momentaryaction operatorsNEMA Type 1 only

f

Amber indicatorTwo flush

Black/Red ZA2BW81254Green/Red ZA2BW81354

Two flush premarked

Black/Red “I/O” ZA2BW82254Green/Red “I/O” ZA2BW82354

Black/Red “Start/Stop” ZA2BW87254Green/Red “Start/Stop” ZA2BW87354

Amber indicatorOne flush,one extended

Black/Red ZA2BW83254

Green/Red ZA2BW83354

One flush extended, premarked

Black/Red “I/O” ZA2BW84254Green/Red “I/O” ZA2BW84354

Black/Red “Start/Stop” ZA2BW88254Green/Red “Start/Stop” ZA2BW88354

Turn to releaseZA2BW7•

Half guardZA2BW3•2

Extended headZA2BW1•

Flush headZA2BW3•

Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 20Light modules with Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 28Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 29Replacement Parts (lenses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 30Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 32-34Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 31


XA2B 22 mmIlluminated Selector Switches


26

11/97

Selector Switches

Number of positions, action ColorCatalogNumber

2-maintained Green ZA2BK123

Red ZA2BK124

Amber ZA2BK125

Blue ZA2BK126

Clear ZA2BK127

2-spring return Green ZA2BK143

from right to left Red ZA2BK144

Amber ZA2BK145

Blue ZA2BK146

Clear ZA2BK147

3-maintained Green ZA2BK133

Red ZA2BK134

Amber ZA2BK135

Blue ZA2BK136

Clear ZA2BK137

3-spring return to Green ZA2BK153

center from right and left Red ZA2BK154

Amber ZA2BK155

Blue ZA2BK156

Clear ZA2BK157


from right to center Red ZA2BK184

Amber ZA2BK185

Blue ZA2BK186

Clear ZA2BK187


from left to center Red ZA2BK174

Amber ZA2BK175

Blue ZA2BK176

Clear ZA2BK177

Selector Switch Sequences (using light module/contact block assemblies, page 28)


Contact block guide

Contact block guide




Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 20Light modules with Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 28Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 29Replacement Parts (lenses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 30Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 32-34Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 31

Illuminated selectorZA2BK1••


XA2B 22 mmSquare Push Buttons

27


t

For use with contact block assemblies, page 28.

f

For use with pilot light modules, page 24.

j

For use with light module / contact block assemblies, page 28.

Standard operators

t

Description Type ColorCatalogNumber

Push buttons

Flush

Black ZA2CA2

Green ZA2CA3

Red ZA2CA4

Yellow ZA2CA5

Blue ZA2CA6

Extended head

Black ZA2CL2

Green ZA2CL3

Red ZA2CL4

Yellow ZA2CL5

Blue ZA2CL6

Standard pilot lights

f

White ZA2CV01

Green ZA2CV03

Red ZA2CV04

Yellow ZA2CV05

Blue ZA2CV06

Clear ZA2CV07

Illuminated push buttons

j

Flush push buttonheads

White ZA2CW31

Green ZA2CW33

Red ZA2CW34

Yellow ZA2CW35

Blue ZA2CW36

Clear ZA2CW37

Projectingpush button heads

White ZA2CW11

Green ZA2CW13

Red ZA2CW14

Yellow ZA2CW15

Blue ZA2CW16

Clear ZA2CW17

Accessories for square push buttons

Mounting Tool Ring Nut Wrench and Lens Extractor ZA2CZ12

Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 20Contact Block Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 28Light modules with Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 28Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31

ZA2CA

k

ZA2CVO

k

ZA2CW1

k


XA2B 22 mmContact Block Assemblies


28

11/97

N.C. contact is direct opening operation conforming to EN 60 947-5-1, Section 3.

+

Complete catalog number by adding one of the following voltages: 6, 12, 24, 48 or 120 V. If desired without bulb, omit voltage.

t

Select proper digit for desired primary voltage:

1

(24 V 50/60 Hz)

2

(48 V 50/60 Hz)

3

(110/120 V 50/60 Hz)

94

(220/240 V 60 Hz)

95

(440/480 V 60 Hz)

98

(550/600 V 60 Hz).

f

Additional primary voltages are available. Contact local field for details.

u

Non- illuminated devices can be configured with 6 contact blocks maximum (3 decks of 2).

j

Illuminated devices can be configured with a light module and 4 contact blocks maximum (2 decks of 2).

s

Contact blocks and light module assemblies are available with quick connectors. Add suffix “3” to end of part number. Example: ZB2BE101 becomes ZB2BE1013.

Contact block assembliescontact blocks and mounting collar for XA2B pilot devices

s

DescriptionContacts

N.O. N.C.Catalog Number

1 Contact block1 - ZA2BZ101

- 1 ZA2BZ102

2 Contact blocks

2 - ZA2BZ103

- 2 ZA2BZ104

1 1 ZA2BZ105

Additional contact blocks

u

Description Contact Type Catalog Number

For converting body/contact assemblies to 3, 4, 5 or 6 contacts max or replacing 1st or 2nd contact blocks

N.O. Standard ZB2BE101

N.C. Standard ZB2BE102

Mounting collar onlyfor attaching contact block(s) to operator heads

ZA2BZ009

Light module assembliesmounting collar with light module and contact blocks for XA2B pilot devices

s

DescriptionContacts


Direct supply incandescent bulb included (AC/DC)

j

Without contacts 1 - ZA2BW061+

1 Contact block - 1 ZA2BW062+

2 Contact blocks

2 - ZA2BW063+

- 2 ZA2BW064+

1 1 ZA2BW065+

Transfomer type (1.2 VA/6 V incandescent bulb included) (AC only)

fj

Without contacts

1 - ZA2BW0

t

1

1 Contact block - 1 ZA2BW0

t

2

2 Contact blocks

2 - ZA2BW0

t3

- 2 ZA2BW0t4

1 1 ZA2BW0t5

Resistor type (130 V incandescent bulb included) 220-250 V supply2 Contact blocks 1 1 ZA2BW075

Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 20Replacement Parts (bulbs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 30Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31

Contact block with mounting collar

ZA2BZ101

Additional contact blockZB2BE10k

Mounting collarZA2BZ009

Transformer typeZA2BWOt1

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXA2B 22 mm

Legend Plate Carriers


Legend plate carriers (30 x 40 mm) for XA2B pilot devicesComplete with “snap-in” (27 x 8 mm) legend plates, with standard text.“Start” functions: white characters on black. “Stop” functions: white characters on red.

Standard textsCatalogNumber

Standard textsCatalog Number

Auto-Hand ZA2BZ32364 Off ZA2BZ32312

Auto-O-Hand ZA2BZ32385 On ZA2BZ32311

Off-On ZA2BZ32367 Open ZA2BZ32313

Auto ZA2BZ32115 Power On ZA2BZ32326

Close ZA2BZ32314 Reset ZA2BZ32323

Down ZA2BZ32308 Reverse ZA2BZ32306

Emergency Stop ZA2BZ32330 Run ZA2BZ32334

Fast ZA2BZ32328 Slow ZA2BZ32327

Forward ZA2BZ32305 Start ZA2BZ32303

Hand ZA2BZ32316 Stop ZA2BZ32304

Inch ZA2BZ32321 Up ZA2BZ32307

Hand-O-Auto ZA2BZ32387


Complete with “snap-in”(27 x 8 mm) legend plates, blank

Black or red background ZA2BZ32101

White or yellow background ZA2BZ32102

Legend plate carriers only ZA2BZ32

Snap in blank only (27 X 8 mm)Black or red background ZA2BY4101

White or yellow background ZA2BY4102

Legend plate carriers (30 x 50 mm) for XA2Bf pilot devices


Complete with “snap-in”(27 x 18 mm) legend plates, blank

Black or red background ZA2BZ33101



Snap in blank only (27 x 18 mm)Black or red background ZA2BY5101

White or yellow background ZA2BY5102

Legend carrier for square aspect head (30 x 40 mm) for XA2B pilot devices

With “snap-in” blank legend plateBlack or red background ZA2BZ34101



No legend square aspect ring ZA2BZ31

Legend carrier for square aspect head (30 x 50 mm) for XA2B pilot devices

With “snap-in” blank legend plateBlack or red background ZA2BZ35101



Standard textZA2BZ32326

30 x 40 mmCarrier only

ZA2BZ32

30 x 50 mmZA2BZ33

30 x 40 mmSquare aspect

ZA2BZ34

30 x 50 mmSquare aspect

ZA2BZ35

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXA2B 22 mmAccessories and Replacement Parts


11/97

+ Complete lens part number by replacing with digit for desired color. (1-white, 3-green, 4-red, 5-amber, 6-blue, 7-clear). Example ZB2BV013 green standard pilot lens. Note: Jeweled lens not available in white.

j Complete boot part number by replacing with digit for desired color. (2-black, 3-green, 4-red, 5-yellow, 6-blue). Example ZB2BP013 green silicon boot.

AccessoriesType Description Catalog Number

Guards/Locks 60 mm mushroom guard (black plastic)no padlocking provision ZB2BZ19

Closing plates22 mm

Black plastic ZB2SZ3

Gray plastic ZB2SZ4

Blue metallic ZB2SZ2

Miscellaneous Accessories Add on push-on/push-off mechanism ZB2BZ21

Tools

Bulb extractor for use with BA9s XBFX13

Ring nut wrench ZA2BZ905

Lense removal key ZB2BZ8

Mylar circularlegends for use withtransparent flushhead operatorsSee page 21

No text ZB2BY1101

O ZBZBY1146

I ZBZBY1147

Auto ZB2BY1115

Hand ZB2BY1316

Off ZB2BY1312

On ZB2BY1311

Start ZB2BY1303

Stop ZB2BY1304

Forward ZB2BY1305

Reverse ZB2BY1306

Replacement PartsType Description Catalog Number

Replacement lenses

Lens – standard pilot light ZB2BV01k

Lens kit – standard pilot light (includes lens, diffuser and gasket) ZB2BV02k

Lens – pilot light (jeweled for LED and Neon) ZB2BV01k3

Lens – flush illuminated push buttons ZB2BW91k

Lens – flush illuminated push buttons (jeweled for LED and Neon) ZB2BW93k3

Lens – extended push buttons ZB2BW93k

Lens – extended push buttons (jeweled for LED and Neon) ZB2BW93k3

Lens – push-to-test ZB2BV01k1

Lens – rectangle for ZB2BW80000 series (2 button with indicator) ZB2BW90k

Lens – 40 mm mushroom W4042926400k

Replacement ring nut Standard nut for all operators ZB2BBZ901

Replacement bootsReplacement silicon boot for ZB2BP series operators ZB2BP01j

Replacement neoprene booty for ZB2BP series operators ZB2BP02j

Replacement keys Replacement key for standard selector switches and key release mushroom operators. Qty. 1- Ronis key #455. Q99900901

Key #421 Qty. 1 Q99900911

Key #458A Qty. 1 Q99900910

Key #520 Qty. 1 Q99900912

Key #3131A Qty. 1 Q99900915

ZB2-BV...

ZB2-BW93.

ZB2-BP012

ZA2-BZ901

Closing plateZB2SZ3

ZB2BVkkk

ZB2BW93k

ZB2BP012

ZA2 BZ901

Mylar circular legend

Push on/push offmechanism

ZB2BZ21

Q99900901

Q99900901

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXA2B 22 mmDimensions


All dimensions are in mm. To convert to inches, divide mm by 25.4.

O 3

0

19

O 3

0

19

ZA2BW3•• ZA2BW1••

55

11

ZA2BW8•••4 ZA2BW8•••4 ZA2BK1••

55

15

55

25.5

E

1.18 30dia.

.4712

1.18 30

.6617

1.18 30

.6617

1.18 30

.6516.5

1.18 30

.6617

1.57 40

1.8948

1.8948

1.18 302.36 60

1.2231

1.2231

1.57 40

1.2231

1.18 30

1.18 30

1.2231

.9424

1.2231

.9424

1.57 40

1.2231

.9424

2.36 60

1.9148.5

.9424

1.18 30

.7820

.9424

1.18 30

1.18 30

1.18 30

1.0025.5

1.0025.5

1.18 30

1.1830

.5915

1.67

42.5

1.67

42.5

.4311

.9424

.9424

1.6943

1.14 29

1.65 42

1.1830

.277

1.57 40

1.1830

1.57 40

1.1830

1.57 40

Panel cut-out(Thickness E = 1 to 5 mm)

Control units(operating heads)ZA2BA•• ZA2CA• ZA2BL• ZA2BP• ZA2CL•

ZA2BS844ZA2BS834ZA2B•••ZA2B•••ZA2B•••

ZA2BS9•4 ZA2BS24ZA2BS14ZA2BS74

ZA2BG•ZA2BJ••ZA2BD••ZA2BL••34 ZA2BA••34

Body contact assembliesZA2BZ10•

Mounting collarZA2BZ009

ZA2B (with 30 x 50 legend plate carrier)

ZA2B (with 30 x 40 legend plate carrier)

16.5

30

ZA2BVO•(bodies) ZA2BV6

42 29

36.5

ZA2BV7

42 42

42

33

60

ZA2BV3, BV4, BV5

33

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXALBGeneral Purpose Control Stations


11/97

The XALB line of standard push button wall stations are in IEC Type IP65, plastic enclosures for indoor and outdoor use. The units have UL, CSA, and IEC approvals. The enclosures are provided with 4 to 8 cable entry knockouts. Two knockouts are in the base. A cross reference between the base (contact blocks) and the cover (operators) is provided to avoid confusion.

* Yellow cover per EN418 of European Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC

Operators NameplatesWiring

diagramPart

Number

1 push button Start XALB101

1 push button Stop XALB111

1 push button(mushroom head) N/A XALB164

1 push button(mushroom head)

Turn to release

N/A*

XALJ174


Turn to release“No Tease”

XALJ178


key to releaseXALJ184


key to release“No Tease”

XALJ188

2 push buttons StartStop XALB211

2 push buttons ForwardReverse XALB221

1 pilot light2 push buttons

StartStop XALB371

3 push buttonsForwardReverse

StopXALB311

3 push buttonsUp

DownStop

XALB321

3 push buttonsOpenCloseStop

XALB341

120V max

Marking

File LR 44087



Class 3211 03

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXALB

Enclosures and Base Mounted Components


XALB Wall Stations use ZA2B operators, special base mounted contact blocks and light modules. Legends used are ZB2BYkk type from page 57.

j Complete catalog number by adding one of the following voltages: 6, 12, 24, 48 or 120 V. Replacement bulbs available on page 24. If desired without bulb, omit voltage.

f Base mounted transformer light modules require a separately mounted transformer which mounts in the open next to the light module (hole blanking plug provided).

t Additional primary voltages are available. Contact local field office for details.

Empty EnclosuresDescription Number of Holes Part Number

Light grey lid withdark grey base

1 XALB01

2 XALB02

3 XALB03

4 XALB04

5 XALB05

Yellow lid with grey base 1 XALJ01

Contact Blocks (base mounted)Description Symbol Function Part Number

Slow make 1 N/O XENL1111

Slow break, direct opening 1 N/C XENL1121

Contact Blocks (operator mounted)Description Symbol Function Part Number

Slow make, Slow break, (direct opening) 2 N/C, 1N/O ZA2BZ141

Pilot Light BodiesDescription Supply Voltage Part Number

Direct supply bulb included (AC/DC) j XALV6

Transformer Type (AC only)(1.2 VA/6 V Lamp Included)ft

120 V Primary XALV3

240 V Primary XALV94

480 V Primary XALV95

Direct through resistorBA9s, 130 V bulb included 230-240 V XALV7

Illuminated Push Button Bodies (1 N/C + 1 N/O)Description Supply Voltage Part Number

Direct supply (bulb included) (AC/DC) j ≤ 400 V XALW6

Transformer Type (AC only)(1.2 VA/6 V Lamp Included)ft

120 V Primary XALW3

240 V Primary XALW94

480 V Primary XALW95

Direct through resistorBA9s, 130 V bulb included 230-240 V XALW7

43

21

21

22

31

32

13

14

Non-Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 21-23Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 25Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 20Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 30Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 30Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 34

XALB03

XENL1111

XALV6

XALW6

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXALBDimensions


11/97

Single-way control stations XALB01, XALJ01, XALB1kk, XALJ1kk

2-way control stations XALB02, XALB2kk

3-way control stations XALB03, XALB3kk

4 and 5-way control stations XALB04, B05

(1) 62 mm with push button

(2) 77 mm with selector switch

(3) 82 mm with mushroom head push button

(4) 102 mm with trigger action mushroom head push button

(5) 2 knock-outs in sides for addition of CM12 cable glands

(6) 2 Ø 19 mm knock-outs for cable entry through base



(1) Pilot light



XAL b H H1 H2 (1) 6 knock-outs in sides for addition of CM12 cable glandsB04 164 128 108 62

B05 194 158 138 72 (2) 2 Ø 19 mm knock-outs for cable entry through base

512.0

4.17106

(1) (2)

(3) (4)

682.68

682.68

401.57

= =

==

= =

542.13

==

==

(5) (6) 2xø4.3

512.0

104

4.10

622.4

682.67

301.18

=

==

=

==

542.13

= =

=

==

=

401.57

(2)

(1)

2xØ4.3

1.9

482.

6868

622.4

134

5.28

2.5264 (1)

512.0

682.68

==

==

301.18

301.18

451.77

==

= =

= =54

2.1340

1.57

783.07

983.86

==

==

(3)

(2)

2xø4.3

(ZA2-BC44.BS44)3.22 / 82

b

65(ZA2-BP.)2.56

2.5164(ZA2-BVO.)

2.051

2.6066

==

==

301.18

301.18

301.18

301.18

==

H2

H1 H

=

=

= =

= =2.1354

1.5740

(2)

(1)

=

=

2xØ4.3

62(ZA2-BA...)2.40

Dual Dimensions:Millimeters

Inches

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXA2B 22 mm

Mounting Instructions


Panel cut-out: (legend plate carrier included)

Legend plate carrier mounting:

Fixing the operating head onto the body:

Removing the body:

3.3+ 0.20

24.1

+ 0

.40

1 5 mm 22.3+ 0.40 22.3

+ 0.40

clic

clic

1

2

3



11/97

Square D offers specialized control packages through the Modified Panels Group. Assemblies can be manufactured to meet your specific design criteria, incorporating special dimensions, enclosure types, and component makeup.

Specific control operator needs can be satisfied with products ranging fromstandard 30 mm push buttons to printed circuit board mounted pilot device assemblies.

In addition, Square D offers the widest variety of control products in numerous enclosure types to meet your electrical, environmental, anddimensional needs. Use of CAD designs, prototype assembly before production, and personalized service insures the product you receive will be exactly what you ordered...Guaranteed.

For additional information or receive a personalized proposal, contact your local Square D sales office.

Modified Panels by Square D


XB2B 22 mm

CONTENTS


General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Non-Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Mushroom Operators and Yellow Contrast Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Two Button Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Specialty Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Reset Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Pilot Lights and Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Light Module Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Specialty Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Accessories and Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58XAPA Glass-Reinforced Polyester Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61XAPG Diecast Metal Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62XAPE Flush Mount Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63XB2B 22 mm Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64


XB2B 22 mmGeneral Characteristics


38

11/97

Environment

Conformity to standards XB2B, XD2P: UL 508, IEC 947-5-1, EN60947-5-1, IEC337-1, IEC337-2, NF C 63-140, ASE 0119, ASE1003,BS 4794, VDE 0660-200, CSA C 22-2 No. 14, CSA C 22-2 No. 66

Approvals

UL:

push buttons and selector switches NEMA Type A600-Q600;pilot lights and illuminated push buttons direct supply (120 V max.);pilot lights and illuminated push buttons with transformer (600 V)

CSA:

push buttons and selector switches NEMA Type A600-Q600.pilot lights and illuminated push buttons direct supply (120 V max.);pilot lights and illuminated push buttons with transformer (600 V).ASE, DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO, BUREAU VERITAS, SAHKOTARKASTUSKESKUS, GL, DNV, LROS

XD2P,

standard version: CSA A600-Q600, LROS.

Protective treatment Standard version: TC “All climates”

Ambient temperature Operating: -25

°

C to +70

°

C (-13

°

F to +158

°

F) Storage: -40

°

C to +70

°

C (-40

°

F to +158

°

F )

Resistance to vibration 60 mm diameter mushroom head: 8 g. Other push buttons: 15 g. Small joystick controllers: 5 g (from 40 to 50 Hz)Conforming to IEC 68-2-6.

Resistance to shock Push buttons: 70 g. Mushroom head push-buttons: 15 g. Selector switches: 200 g. Conforming to IEC 68-2-27.

Protection against electric shock

XB2B, XD2P:

Class 1, conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030.

Degree of protectionconforming to IEC 529and NF C 20-010

NEMA ratings XB2B: 1, 2, 3, 4, 4X, 12K, 13, XB2B, XD2P: IP 65: flush and protecting, illuminated and non-illuminated push buttons (mounted). IP 66: booted and mushroom head push buttons, selector switches, pilot lights and small joystick controllers (mounted). IP 40: doubleheaded push buttons (IP 65 on request).

Mechanical life Push buttons—3 million operations (Latching mushroom head push buttons: 300,000 operations. Illuminated selector switches: 100,000 operations). The product life expressed is based on average usage and normal operating conditions. Actual operating life will vary with conditions. The above statements are not intended to nor shall they create any express or implied warranties as to product operation or life. For information on the limited warranty offered on this product, please refer to Square D terms and conditions of sale found in the Square D Digest.


Nominal thermal current 10 A conforming to IEC 947-5-1, NF C 63-140, UL 508, CSA 22-2 No. 14, VDE 0660 part 2, NEMA Type A600-Q600.

Nominal insulation voltage 500 V conforming to NF C 20-040, VDE 0110, IEC 158-1, 600 V conforming to UL 508, 600 V conforming to CSA 22-2 No. 14.

Insulation catagory Group C conforming to NF C 20-040 and VDE 0110.

Contact operation Slow- make N.O. or slow-break N.C. N.C. with direct opening operation conforming to EN60947-5-1section 3.

Contact resistance

≤

25 m

Ω

conforming to: NF C 93-050 method A or IEC 225-7 category 3.

Operating force Flush or projecting push buttons - with 1 NO contact: 2.25 lb - with 1 NC contact: 1.8 lbAdditional contacts - N.O.: add 1 lb - N.C.: add 0.7 lb.


Short circuit protection 10 A cartridge fuses, Gl or N conforming to IEC 269-1and VDE 0660-200.

Rated powerconforming to IEC 947-5-1 Appendix Cduty categories AC11-DC11Operating frequency: 3,600 ops/hourLoad factor: 0.5AC supply (50-60 Hz)

Cabling

XB2B, XD2P:

Screw and captive clamp terminals. Recommended torque 15.62 lb-in. Capacity: minimum 1 x .5 mm

2

(20 AWG) solid or stranded, maximum with or without cable end: 2 x 1.5 mm

2

(16 AWG) or 1 x 2.5 mm

2

(14 AWG) or by quick connector conforming to NF C 20-120 (on request).

1

0604

02

01

.06

.04

.02

.01

220 V127 V

24/48 V

1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60current in amperes

mill

ions

of o

pera

tions ith = 10 A

DC supplyPower broken in wattsfor 1 million operations

Voltage 24 V 48 V 120 V

Inductiveload 65 W 48 W 40 W

AC Ratings, Inductive - NEMA A600

35% Power factor

VA BreakAmperes VA

Continuouscarrying Amperes

Resistive 75%Power factor

Make, Break and continuous Amperes

Volts MakeAmperes

120 60 7200 6 720 10 10

240 30 7200 3 720 10 10

480 15 7200 1.5 720 10 10

600 12 7200 1.2 720 10 10

DC Ratings, NEMA Type Q600Inductive and resistive

Volts Make and break Continuous125 0.55 2.5

250 0.27 2.5

600 0.10 2.5



Marking



XB2B 22 mmNon-Illuminated Operators

39


Operator

Type Color CatalogNumber

Flush head

White ZB2BA1

Black ZB2BA2

Green ZB2BA3

Red ZB2BA4

Yellow ZB2BA5

Blue ZB2BA6

Grey ZB2BA8

Flush head premarked

White “I” ZB2BA131

Black “START” ZB2BA230

Black “O” ZB2BA232

Green “I” ZB2BA331

Red “O” ZB2BA432

Green “START” ZB2BA333

Green “ON” ZB2BA341

Red “STOP” ZB2BA434

Red “OFF” ZB2BA435

Metallic flush head(metal pusher)

Black ZB2BA29

Green ZB2BA39

Red ZB2BA49

Yellow ZB2BA59

Transparent flush headUse with mylar circular legend (ZB2BY1

kkk

) See page 57

Green ZB2BA38

Red ZB2BA48

Amber ZB2BA58

Blue ZB2BA68

Clear ZB2BA78

Guarded head

White ZB2BA16

Black ZB2BA26

Green ZB2BA36

Red ZB2BA46

Yellow ZB2BA56

Blue ZB2BA66

Operating heads with black metal bezel

To order, add suffix 7 to the above references (except

ZB2BP2

TO ZB2BP6

).Example:

ZB2BA2

becomes

ZB2BA27

.

Flush headZB2BA•

Metallic flush headZB2BA•9

Transparent flush headZB2BA•8

Guarded headZB2BA•6

Contact Block Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 46Specialty Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 53Application Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 38Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 57Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 55Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 56Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 58-59


XB2B 22 mmNon-Illuminated Operators


40

11/97

Type ColorCatalogNumber

Extended head

White ZB2BL1

Black ZB2BL2

Green ZB2BL3

Red ZB2BL4

Yellow ZB2BL5

Blue ZB2BL6

Extended head premarked

Red “O” ZB2BL432

Red “STOP” ZB2BL434

Red “OFF” ZB2BL435

Silicon booted head

Black ZB2BP2

Green ZB2BP3

Red ZB2BP4

Yellow ZB2BP5

Blue ZB2BP6

Neoprene booted head

Black ZB2BP02

Green ZB2BP03

Red ZB2BP04

Yellow ZB2BP05

Blue ZB2BP06

Flush with reinforced dust, damp, and cutting oil protection

White ZB2BA15

Black ZB2BA25

Green ZB2BA35

Red ZB2BA45

Yellow ZB2BA55

Blue ZB2BA65

Transparent silicon booted push buttonUse with mylar circular legend (ZB2BY1

kkk

) See page 57.

Green ZB2BP38

Red ZB2BP48

Yellow ZB2BP58

Blue ZB2BP68

Clear ZB2BP78


To order, add suffix

7

to the above references (except

ZB2BP2 TO ZB2BP6

and

ZB2BP02 TO ZB2BP06

).Example:

ZB2BL2

becomes

ZB2BL27.

Operator

Extended headZB2BL•

Extended head marked stopZB2BL434

Silicon booted headZB2BP•

Flush with reinforced protectionZB2BA•5

Contact Block Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 46Specialty Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 53Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 38Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 57Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 55Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 56Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 58-59


XB2B 22 mmMushroom Operators and Yellow Contrast Plates

41


Yellow Contrast Plates

Operator

Type Size ColorCatalogNumber

Mushroom headMomentary

30mm

Black ZB2BC24

Green ZB2BC34

Red ZB2BC44

Yellow ZB2BC54

Blue ZB2BC64

40mm

Black ZB2BC2

Green ZB2BC3

Red ZB2BC4

Yellow ZB2BC5

Blue ZB2BC6

60mm

Black ZB2BR2

Green ZB2BR3

Red ZB2BR4

Yellow ZB2BR5

Blue ZB2BR6

Mushroom headKey release

a

40mm Red ZB2BS14

60mm Red ZB2BS24

Mushroom head push buttonwith trigger action

f

Key release

a

40mm Red ZB2BS944

Mushroom headturn to release 40mm Red ZB2BS54

Premarked “EMO” 40mm Red ZB2BS5430

Mushroom head push buttonwith trigger action

f

Turn to release40mm Red ZB2BS844

Mushroom headturn to release 60mm Red ZB2BS64

Mushroom headpush-pull 40mm

Black ZB2BT2

Red ZB2BT4

Premarked “EMERGENCY STOP” 40mm Red ZB2BT43

Mushroom headpush-pull 60mm

Black ZB2BX2

Red ZB2BX4

a

Key release operators come with Ronis #455 keys (quantity 2) as standard. For replacement keys see page 56. For other key numbers contact local field office.

f

Trigger action mushroom heads are “tamper proof” whereby a change of contact state is not possible by “teasing” or floating the operator.

Guards / Locks

Type Size Color CatalogNumber

Metal 40 mm with finger cutout and 7 mm holes for padlocking

Red

ZB2BZ1804

Plastic 60 mm (for 40 mm turn to release)

Yellow

ZB2BZ1905

PVC Yellow Legend Plates 60 mm diameter PVC Yellow Legend Plates 90 mm diameter

Text Language Catalog Number Text Language Catalog Number


Contact Block Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 46Specialty Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 53Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 38Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 57Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 55Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 56Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 58-59

ZB2BY8330

Mushroom head 40mmZB2BC•

Mushroom head 60mmZB2BR•

Mushroom headkey release

ZB2BS•4

Mushroom headturn to release

ZB2BS54

Mushroom headwith trigger action

turn to releaseZB2BS844

EM

ERGENCY

STOP

4/98


XB2B 22 mmLever and Key Operators


42

11/97

a

When ordering extended lever subsitute J for D. Example:

ZB2BD2

becomes

ZB2BJ2

.

f

Key selector switches come with Ronis #455 keys (quanitity 2) as standard. For replacement keys see page 21. For switches keyed with different keys, add the suffixes shown in the table below (no change in price). For other key numbers contact local field office.

Lever Operators

Type Number of positions, actions Lever Color Catalog Number

Standard orExtended lever

a

2-maintainedBlack ZB2BD2White ZB2BD201Red ZB2BD204

2-spring returnfrom right to left

Black ZB2BD4White ZB2BD401Red ZB2BD404

3-maintainedBlack ZB2BD3White ZB2BD301Red ZB2BD304

3-spring return to centerfrom left and right


3-spring return fromright to center


3-spring return fromleft to center


Key Operators

Type Number of positions, actions, key removal Catalog Number

Key switch

f

2-maintained key removal from left ZB2BG22-maintained key removal from left or right ZB2BG42-spring return from right to left, key removal from left ZB2BG63-maintained key removal from center ZB2BG33-maintained key removal from left and right ZB2BG53-maintained key removal from left ZB2BG93-maintained key removal from all positions ZB2BG03-spring return left or right to center, key removal from center ZB2BG73-spring return left to center key removal right ZB2BG13-spring return right to center key removal center ZB2BG83-spring return right to center key removal left ZB2BG08

Selector Switch Sequences (using contact block assemblies, page 46)


Contact block guide

Contact block guide






7

to the above references.Example:

ZB2BD3

becomes

ZB2BD37

.

Key Number Suffix

421 12458A 10520 14

3131A 20

Contact Block Assemblies .....................................................................Page 46Specialty Contacts................................................................................ Page 53Application Information ..........................................................................Page 38Legend Plates........................................................................................Page 57Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55Replacement Parts ................................................................................Page 56Dimensions.....................................................................................Pages 58-59

Standard leverZB2BD•••

Extended lever

a

ZB2BJ•••

Key switchZB2BG••


XB2B 22 mmTwo Button Operators

43


Momentary operators

Type Marked

f

ColorCatalogNumber

Two flush

Black/Red ZB2BA9124

Green/Red ZB2BA9134

I,O Black/Red ZB2BA9224

I,O Green/Red ZB2BA9234

STOP, START Black/Red ZB2BA9724

STOP, START Green/Red ZB2BA9734

One flush, one extended

Black/Red ZB2BL9324

Green/Red ZB2BL9334

I,O Black/Red ZB2BL9424

I,O Green/Red ZB2BL9434

STOP, START Black/Red ZB2BL9824

STOP, START Green/Red ZB2BL9834

f

Additional markings available on special order. Contact local field office for details.



7


ZB2BA9124

becomes

ZB2BA91247

.

2 Button maintained operators

TypeNumber ofcontact(s)

Button 1 Button 2CatalogNumber

Flush interlocked push buttons(30 mm centers, maintained,mechanically interlocked)Units include contact block(s) as shown.

1 NO-Black Black XB2BF521

1 NO-Black Red XB2BF551

1 NO-Green Red XB2BF581

2 NO-Black NO-Black XB2BF523

2 NO-Black NO-Red XB2BF553

2 NO-Green NO-Red XB2BF583

2 NO-Black NO-Black XB2BF525

2 NO-Black NC-Red XB2BF555

2 NO-Green NC-Red XB2BF585


Replacement push button operators only(with no spring return in head)for XB2BF

Black ZB2BAW80424194002

Green ZB2BAW80424194003

Red ZB2BAW80424194004



7


ZB2BF521

becomes

ZB2BF5217

.

Two flushZB2BA9•••

One flush, one extendedZB2BL94••

Start/stopZB2BL98••

InterlockedXB2BF5••

Contact Block Assemblies ............................................................... Page 46Specialty Contacts.......................................................................... Page 53Application Information .................................................................... Page 38Legend Plates.................................................................................. Page 57Accessories ..................................................................................... Page 55Replacement Parts .......................................................................... Page 56Dimensions............................................................................... Pages 58-59


XB2B 22 mmSpecialty Operators


44

11/97

t

Units come with 1 N.O. contact in each direction. Screw terminals. Contact blocks cannot be added or removed from the above arrangements. For other requirements, contact local sales office.

f

Customer to supply potentiometer, unit accepts 1/4" diameter, 1.625" (43-47 mm) length shaft potentiometer.

These 2 direction and 4 direction position charts are viewed from behind the panel, thereby reversing east and west positions. When lever is moved away from center, only one contact changes from N.O. to N.C. The other contact blocks in the swtich are unaffected.

Operators


Wobble sticksBlack ZB2BB2

Red ZB2BB4

Potentiometer operator

f

Black ZB2BD922

Joysticks

t

Contacts supplied

2-maintained XD2PA12

2-spring return XD2PA22

4-maintained XD2PA14

4-spring return XD2PA24

Two step push buttons (contacts supplied)

TypeContact1st step

Contact2nd step

CatalogNumber

Flush head

N.O. N.O. XB2BA

k

41

N.O. N.C. XB2BA

k

42

N.O.+N.C. N.O. XB2BA

k

43

N.O.+N.C. N.O.+N.C. XB2BA

k

44

k

Replace

k

with desired color head. (1-white, 2-black, 3-green, 4-red, 5-yellow, 6-blue).

Two position toggle switch (maintained)


Two position toggle switchNEMA Type 1 only Black ZB2BD28



7


ZB2BD922

becomes

ZB2BD9227

.

2 Position

OPERATED

CENTER

X

OPERATED

CENTER

X

4 Position

OPERATED

CENTER

X

OPERATED

CENTER

X

OP

ER

AT

ED

CE

NT

ER

OP

ER

AT

ED

CE

NT

ER

X X

Wobble sticks

Potentiometer operator

Joysticks

Contact Block Assemblies .....................................................................Page 46Specialty Contacts ................................................................................ Page 53Application Information ..........................................................................Page 38Legend Plates........................................................................................Page 57Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55Replacement Parts ................................................................................Page 56Dimensions .....................................................................................Pages 58-59


XB2B 22 mmReset Operators

45


Reset operators

Type DescriptionAdjustable

length of rodColor

CatalogNumber

Flush head

0.39" (10 mm) TravelPanel thickness: 0.04" - 0.12" (1-3 mm)Tightened by nut

0.24" - 0.63"(6 - 16 mm)

Black XB2BA821

Red XB2BA841

Blue XB2BA861

0.63" - 1.02"(16 - 26 mm)

Black XB2BA822

Red XB2BA842

Blue XB2BA862

0.55" (14 mm) TravelPanel thickness: 0.04" - 0.23" (1-6 mm)Tightened by 2 screw mountingbase (supplied)

1.18" - 2.25"(30 - 57 mm)

Black XB2BA921

Red XB2BA941

Blue XB2BA961

2.16" - 3.23"(55 - 82 mm)

Black XB2BA922

Red XB2BA942

Blue XB2BA962

0.55" (14 mm) TravelPanel thickness: 0.04" - 0.23" (1-6 mm)Tightened by 2 screw mountingbase (supplied)

3.15" - 4.2"(80 - 107 mm)

Black XB2BA923

Red XB2BA943

Blue XB2BA963

4.13" - 5.2"(105 - 132 mm)

Black XB2BA924

Red XB2BA944

Blue XB2BA964

5.12"- 6.18"(130 - 157 mm)

Black XB2BA925

Red XB2BA945

Blue XB2BA965

6.1" - 7.16"(155 - 182 mm)

Black XB2BA926

Red XB2BA946

Blue XB2BA966

7.08" - 8.15"(180 - 207 mm)

Black XB2BA927

Red XB2BA947

Blue XB2BA967

8.07" - 9.13"(205 - 232 mm)

Black XB2BA928

Red XB2BA948

Blue XB2BA968

9.05" - 10.1"(230 - 257 mm)

Black XB2BA929

Red XB2BA949

Blue XB2BA969



7


ZB2BA944

becomes

ZB2BA9447.

XB2BA8kk

XB2BA9kk30 to 82 mm

XB2BA9kk80 to 257 mm

Application Information .........................................................................Page 38Legend Plates .......................................................................................Page 57Dimensions ....................................................................................Pages 58-59

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mmContact Blocks


11/97

t Quick connect contact blocks will accept commercially available female quick slide connector (1 x 0.25" or 2 x 0.11")f Non-illuminated devices can be configured with 6 contacts maximum (3 decks of 2). N.C. contact is direct opening operation conforming to EN 60 947-5-1, Section 3.

Mounting base with contact block(s) “Screw clamp connection”

N.O. N.C.

Type ContactsN.O. N.C. Catalog Number

1 Contact Block1 - ZB2BZ101

- 1 ZB2BZ102

2 Contact Blocks

2 - ZB2BZ103

- 2 ZB2BZ104

1 1 ZB2BZ105

Additional contact blocks

Type ContactsN.O. N.C. Catalog Number

For making up body assemblieswith 3, 4, 5 or max. of 6 contact blocksor replacing 1st or 2nd contact blockf

1 - ZB2BE101

- 1 ZB2BE102

Mounting base with contact block(s) “Quick connect” t

TypeContacts


1 Contact Block1 - ZB2BZ1013

- 1 ZB2BZ1023

2 Contact Blocks

2 - ZB2BZ1033

- 2 ZB2BZ1043

1 1 ZB2BZ1053

Additional contact blocks “Quick Connect” *

TypeContacts


For making up body assemblieswith 3, 4, 5 or max. of 6 contact blocksor replacing 1st or 2nd contact blockf

1 - ZB2BE1013

- 1 ZB2BE1023

Spare partsDescription Catalog Number

Mounting Base only With fixing screws ZB2BZ009

Quick Connect t Fitting by customer ZB2BZ003

Non-Illuminated Operators .............................................................Pages 39-41Specialty Contacts ............................................................................... Page 53Application Information..........................................................................Page 38Accessories...........................................................................................Page 55Replacement Parts................................................................................Page 56Dimensions ....................................................................................Pages 58-59

ZB2BZ101

ZB2BE10k

ZB2BZ009

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mm

Pilot Lights and Light Modules


Direct supplyZB2BV6

Transformer typeZB2BV3

StandardZB2BV••

Special lens for neon and LED bulbsZB2BV0••

t Complete catalog number by adding one of the following voltages: 6, 12, 24, 48 or 120 V. If desired without bulb, omit voltage.f Light module assemblies are available with quick connectors. Add suffix “3” to end of part number.

Example: ZB2BV6 becomes ZB2BV63.

Pilot light heads


Standard

White ZB2BV01

Green ZB2BV03

Red ZB2BV04

Amber ZB2BV05

Blue ZB2BV06

Clear ZB2BV07

Special lens for neon and LED bulbs

Green ZB2BV033

Red ZB2BV043

Amber ZB2BV053

Blue ZB2BV063

Clear ZB2BV073

Glass lens (NEMA Type 1 only)

Green ZB2BV032

Red ZB2BV042

Amber ZB2BV052

Clear ZB2BV072

Pilot light modules f

TypeCatalogNumber

Direct supply (incandescent bulb included)t (AC/DC) ZB2BV6t

Transformer type (1.2 VA/6 V bulb included) (AC only)

24 V: 50-60 Hz ZB2BV1

48 V: 50-60 Hz ZB2BV2

110 V: 50 Hz 110-120 V: 60 Hz ZB2BV3

127 V: 50 Hz ZB2BV91

220 V: 50 Hz ZB2BV4

240 V: 50 Hz 220-240 V: 60 Hz ZB2BV94

380 V: 50 Hz ZB2BV5

415 V: 50 Hz ZB2BV9

440-480 V: 60 Hz ZB2BV95

500 V: 50 Hz ZB2BV8

550-660 V: 60 Hz ZB2BV98

Resistor type (130 V bulb included).

220/250 V (AC/DC) ZB2BV7

Replacement Bulbs................................................................................Page 56Application Information ..........................................................................Page 38Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55Replacement Parts ................................................................................Page 56Dimensions .....................................................................................Pages 58-59

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mmIlluminated Operators


11/97

Operator

Type ColorCatalog Number

Flush head White ZB2BW31

Green ZB2BW33

Red ZB2BW34

Amber ZB2BW35

Blue ZB2BW36

Clear ZB2BW37

Flush head for neon and LED lamps Green ZB2BW333

Red ZB2BW343

Amber ZB2BW353

Blue ZB2BW363

Clear ZB2BW373

Extended head White ZB2BW11

Green ZB2BW13

Red ZB2BW14

Amber ZB2BW15

Blue ZB2BW16

Clear ZB2BW17

Extended head for neon and LED lamps Green ZB2BW133

Red ZB2BW143

Amber ZB2BW153

Blue ZB2BW163

Clear ZB2BW173

Silicon booted flush head Green ZB2BW53

Use with mylar circular legend (ZB2BY1kkk ) Red ZB2BW54

See page 57 Amber ZB2BW55

Blue ZB2BW56

Clear ZB2BW57

Push to test Green ZB2BV031

Red ZB2BV041

Amber ZB2BV051

Blue ZB2BV061

Clear ZB2BV071

Operating heads with black metal bezelTo order, add suffix 7 to the above references.Example: ZB2BV071 becomes ZB2BV0717.

Light Module Assemblies .......................................................................Page 52Specialty Light Modules.........................................................................Page 54Application Information ..........................................................................Page 38Legend Plates........................................................................................Page 57Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55Replacement Parts ................................................................................Page 56Dimensions .....................................................................................Pages 58-59

Flush HeadZB2BW3•

Flush Head for LEDZB2BW3••

Extended HeadZB2BW1•

Extended Head for LEDZB2BW1••

Silicon Booted Flush HeadZB2BW5•




t Additional color indicators available, contact local field office for details.f To upgrade to NEMA Type 3, 4, 13 order clear silicon boot ZB2BW008.

Mushroom operator

Type Color CatalogNumber

40 mm Mushroon head Green ZB2BW43

2 position momentary Red ZB2BW44

Amber ZB2BW45

Blue ZB2BW46

Clear ZB2BW47

40 mm Mushroom head Green ZB2BW63

2 position maintained Red ZB2BW64

Amber ZB2BW65

Blue ZB2BW66

Clear ZB2BW67

Two button with amber indicatort NEMA Type 1 onlyf

Type Marked Color CatalogNumber

Two Flush Black/Red ZB2BW81254

Green/Red ZB2BW81354

I,O Black/Red ZB2BW82254

I,O Green/Red ZB2BW82354

START,STOP Black/Red ZB2BW87254

START,STOP Green/Red ZB2BW87354

One flush, one extended Black/Red ZB2BW83254

Green/Red ZB2BW83354

I,O Black/Red ZB2BW84254

I,O Green/Red ZB2BW84354

START,STOP Black/Red ZB2BW88254

START,STOP Green/Red ZB2BW88354

Operating heads with black metal bezelTo order, add suffix 7 to the above references.Example: ZB2BW64 becomes ZB2BW647.

Light Module Assemblies.......................................................................Page 52Specialty Light Modules ........................................................................Page 54Application Information..........................................................................Page 38Legend Plates .......................................................................................Page 57Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55Replacement Parts ................................................................................Page 56Dimensions.....................................................................................Pages 58-59

40 mm Mushroom headZB2BW••

Two FlushAmber Indicator

ZB2BW8••54

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mmIlluminated Operators


11/97

Selector Switches

Number of positions, action ColorCatalogNumber

2-maintained Green ZB2BK123

Red ZB2BK124

Amber ZB2BK125

Blue ZB2BK126

Clear ZB2BK127

2-spring return Green ZB2BK143

from right to left Red ZB2BK144

Amber ZB2BK145

Blue ZB2BK146

Clear ZB2BK147

3-maintained Green ZB2BK133

Red ZB2BK134

Amber ZB2BK135

Blue ZB2BK136

Clear ZB2BK137

3-spring return to Green ZB2BK153

center from right and left Red ZB2BK154

Amber ZB2BK155

Blue ZB2BK156

Clear ZB2BK157


from right to center Red ZB2BK184

Amber ZB2BK185

Blue ZB2BK186

Clear ZB2BK187


from left to center Red ZB2BK174

Amber ZB2BK175

Blue ZB2BK176

Clear ZB2BK177

Selector Switch Sequences (using contact block assemblies, page 52)2 Position selector switch 3 Position selector switch

Contact block guide

Contact block guide




Operating heads with black metal bezelTo order, add suffix 7 to the above references.Example: ZB2BK123 becomes ZB2BK1237.

Selector switchZB2BK1kk

Light Module Assemblies.......................................................................Page 52Specialty Light Modules.........................................................................Page 54Application Information ..........................................................................Page 38Legend Plates........................................................................................Page 57Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55Dimensions.....................................................................................Pages 58-59




40 mm Mushroom head

Type Pushpositiont Color Catalog Number

1N.O. - 1N.C.♦Catalog Number

2N.O. - 2N.C.

Non-illuminatedM: MaintainedSR: Spring Return

M White XB2BN111 XB2BN112M Green XB2BN311 XB2BN312M Red XB2BN411 XB2BN412M Amber XB2BN511 XB2BN512M Blue XB2BN611 XB2BN612M Clear XB2BN711 XB2BN712

SR White XB2BN121 XB2BN322SR Red XB2BN421 XB2BN422SR Amber XB2BN521 XB2BN522SR Blue XB2BN621 XB2BN622SR Clear XB2BN721 XB2BN722

IlluminatedDirect supply


SR White XB2BN1261 XB2BN1262SR Green XB2BN3261 XB2BN3262SR Red XB2BN4261 XB2BN4262SR Amber XB2BN5261 XB2BN5262SR Blue XB2BN6261 XB2BN6262SR Clear XB2BN7261 XB2BN7262

IlluminatedTransformer Type 110/120 V



IlluminatedTransformer Type220/240V



Mushroom lens only

White W40429264001Green W40429264003Red W40429264004

Amber W40429264005Blue W40429264006Clear W40429264007

t Position status: Position 1 - Pull. Spring return, Position 2- Center, Maintained, Position 3 - Push. Maintained or spring return. f Contacts cannot be modified or interchanged; therefore operators are not sold separately.

1 N.O./1 N.C. 2 N.O./2 N.C.Pos. 1Pull

Pos. 2Center

Pos. 3Push

Pos. 1Pull

Pos. 2Center

Pos. 3Push

Non-IlluminatedXB2BN•••

Illuminated(Direct Supply)

XB2BN••6•

Illuminated(Transformer type)

XB2BN••••

Application Information...........................................Page 38Legend Plates ........................................................Page 57Accessories............................................................Page 55Replacement Parts.................................................Page 56Dimensions......................................................Pages 58-59

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mmLight Module Assemblies


11/97

+ Complete catalog number by adding one of the following voltages: 6, 12, 24, 48 or 120 V AC/DC.Note: If desired without bulb, omit voltage.

t Select proper digit for voltage desired: 1 (24 V 50/60 Hz) 2(48 V 50/60 Hz) 3 (110/120 V 50/60 Hz).94 (220/240 V 60 Hz) 95 (440/480 V 60 Hz) 98 (550/600 V 60 Hz).

f Illuminated devices can be configured with a light module and 4 contacts maximum (2 decks of 2).j Additional primary voltages available, contact local field office for details.k Contact blocks and light module assemblies are available with quick connectors. Add suffix “3” to end of part number.

Example: ZB2BW061 becomes ZB2BW0613. N.C. contact is direct opening operation conforming to EN 60 947-5-1, Section 3.

Light module assemblies with contact block(s) N.O. N.C.screw clamp connectorsk

Type Contacts Catalog

NumberN.O. N.C.

Direct supply (incandescent bulb included) (AC/DC)

Without contactsf - - ZB2BW060+

1 Contact block 1 - ZB2BW061+

- 1 ZB2BW062+

2 Contact blocks 2 - ZB2BW063+

- 2 ZB2BW064+

1 1 ZB2BW065+

Transformer type (1.2 VA/6 V AC incandescent bulb included) (AC only)j

Without contactsf - - ZB2BW0t0

1 Contact block 1 - ZB2BW0t1

- 1 ZB2BW0t2

2 Contact blocks 2 - ZB2BW0t3

- 2 ZB2BW0t4

1 1 ZB2BW0t5

Resistor type (130 V incandescent bulb included) 220-250 V supply

2 Contact blocks 1 1 ZB2BW075

Additional contact blocks f N.O. N.C.

TypeContacts Catalog

NumberN.O. N.C.For making up body assemblieswith 3 or maximum 4 contact blocksor replacing 1st or 2nd contact block

1 - ZB2BE101

- 1 ZB2BE102

Direct supplyZB2BW06k

Resistor typeZB2BW075

Transformer typeZB2BW03k

Additional contact blockZB2BE10k

Illuminated Operators .................................................................... Pages 48-50Specialty Light Modules........................................................................ Page 54Application Information ......................................................................... Page 38Legend Plates....................................................................................... Page 57Accessories .......................................................................................... Page 55Replacement Parts ............................................................................... Page 56Dimensions .................................................................................... Pages 58-59


Specialty Contact Blocks


Specialty contact blocks N.O. N.C.

Type DescriptionNumber ofcontacts

CatalogNumber

Low voltage / low currentGold flashed contacts5-24 volt 0.1-100 mA

Contact block without mounting base

1-N.O. ZB2BE1016

1-N.C. ZB2BE1026

1-N.O. ZB2BZ1016

1-N.C. ZB2BZ1026

Overlapping, sequencing &time delay contact blocks

Contact block w/o mounting base

1-N.O.

Early closing ZB2BE201

1-N.C.

Late opening ZB2BE202

Overlapping block w/mounting base1-NO (early closing) &

1-NC (late opening) ZB2BZ106

Sequencing block w/mounting base1-NO(early closing) &

1-N.O. ZB2BZ107

0.1-30 sec. time delay block w/mounting base

1-N.O. &

1-N.C. ZB2BZ91

10-180 sec. time delay block w/mounting base

1-N.O. &

1-N.C. ZB2BZ92

Contact blocks for ringtongue lugs with widths smaller than 0.312” (8 mm)

1-N.O. ZB2BE1019

1-N.C. ZB2BE1029

Application Information......................................................................... Page 38Accessories.......................................................................................... Page 55Replacement Parts .............................................................................. Page 56Dimensions ................................................................................... Pages 58-59

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mmSpecialty Light Modules


11/97

c When ordering, specify voltage required (6-120 V) Example: ZB2BV156120V

Specialty Light ModulesType Description Supply Voltage Catalog Number

Flashing pilot light base Light Module with incandescent bulb included 120 Vac ZB2BV184

Flashing illuminated push button base Light Module with incandescent bulb and 1 N.O./1 N.C. included 120 Vac ZB2BW1845

Typical Wiring Diagrams

Type Description Supply Voltage Catalog Number

Remote test pilot light base Single Diode <380 V ac or dc ZB2BV156c

Typical Wiring Diagram – Single Diode

Type Description Supply Voltage Catalog Number

Remote test pilot light base Dual Diode <380 Vac or dc ZB2BV68

Typical Wiring Diagram – Dual Diode

X1 Y1

X2 Y2

X1 Y1

X2 Y2

X1 Y1

X2 Y2

X1 Y1

X2 Y2

X1 Y1

X2 Y2

X1 Y1

X2 Y2

Off Flashing On Wiring in parallel

-X1,+X2

Test X1 X2

Test

X1

X2

M

Illuminated Operators.....................................................................Pages 48-50Application Information..........................................................................Page 38Legend Plates .......................................................................................Page 57Accessories...........................................................................................Page 55Replacement Parts................................................................................Page 56Dimensions ....................................................................................Pages 58-59

Flashing pilot light baseZB2BV184

Remote testpilot light base

ZB2BV156


Accessories and Replacement Parts


XB2B Accessories

Type DescriptionCatalogNumber

BootsSilicon boot for rectangular push button w/indicator light ZB2BW008

Silicon boot for rectangular push button w/o light ZB2BA008

Guards/Locks

40 mm for Momentary Mushrooms

Blue ZB2BZ1601

Black ZB2BZ1602

Red ZB2BZ1604

Yellow ZB2BZ1605

40 mm with finger cut-out for push-pull

Blue ZB2BZ1701

Black ZB2BZ1702

Red ZB2BZ1704

Yellow ZB2BZ1705

40 mm with finger cut-out and 7mm holes for padlocking

Blue ZB2BZ1801

Black ZB2BZ1802

Red ZB2BZ1804

Yellow ZB2BZ1805

60 mm mushroom guard (black plastic)no padlocking provision ZB2BZ19

Padlock attachment(makes flush operator inaccessible) ZB2BZ6

Closing plates22 mm

Black plastic ZB2SZ3

Gray plastic ZB2 SZ4

Blue metallic ZB2SZ2

Miscellaneousaccessories

Adapter for mounting into 1 3/16" (30 mm) holeand used with 30 mm P.B. nameplate ZB2BZ41

Adapter for mounting into 30 mm hole and use withXB2B nameplate ZB2BZ4

Base only-for mounting contact blocks ZB2BZ009

Add on push-on/push-off mechanism ZB2BZ21

Bulb extractor for use with BA9s XBFX13

ZB2BZ16kk

ZB2BZ17kk

ZB2BZ18kk

ZB2SZ3

ZB2BZ21

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mmAccessories and Replacement Parts


11/97

DL1CE• • •(incandescent)

DL1CJUS• • •(LED)

ZB2-BV...ZB2BVkkk

ZB2-BW93.ZB2BW93k

ZB2-BP012ZB2BP012

Q99900901Q99900901

k Complete lens part number by replacing with digit for desired color. (1- white, 3- green, 4-red, 5- amber, 6- blue, 7-clear). Example ZB2BV013 green standard pilot lens. Note: Jeweled lens not available in white.

j Complete boot part number by replacing with digit for desired color. (2- black, 3- green, 4- red, 5- yellow, 6- blue, 7-clear).Example ZB2BP013 green silicon boot.

Lamps


IncandescentReplacement bulbs (Type BA9s)

6 1.5 DL1CB006

12 2.0 DL1CE012

24 2.0 DL1CE024

48 2.4 DL1CE048

130 2.6 DL1CE130


120 - NE51HRT120V

220 - NE51HRT220V

380 - NE51HRT380V


LED, BA9s base for Direct Supply blocks













LED, BA9s base for retrofitting into transformer Light Modules

Green 9 Vac only DL1CJUS0093

Red 9 Vac only DL1CJUS0094

Amber 9 Vac only DL1CJUS0095

Replacement Lenses, Boots and Keys

Type Description Catalog Number

Replacement lenses

Lens - standard pilot light ZB2BV01k

Lens kit - standard pilot light(includes lens, diffuser & gasket) ZB2BV02k

Lens - pilot light(jeweled for LED & Neon) ZB2BV01k3

Lens - flush illuminated push buttons ZB2BW91k

Lens - flush illuminated push buttons(Jeweled for LED & Neon) ZB2BW93k3

Lens - extended push buttons ZB2BW93k

Lens - extended push buttons(jeweled for LED & Neon) ZB2BW93k3

Lens - push-to-test ZB2BV01k1

Lens - rectangle for ZB2BW80000 series(2 button with indicator) ZB2BW90k

Lens - 40 mm mushroom W4042926400k

Replacement boots

Replacement silicon boot for ZB2BPseries operators ZB2BP01j

Replacement neoprene boot for ZB2BPseries operators ZB2BP02j

Replacement keys

Replacement key for standard selector switches and key release mushroom operators. Qty. 1 - Ronis key #455 Q99900901

Key # 421 Qty. 1 Q99900911

Key # 458A Qty. 1 Q99900910

Key # 520 Qty. 1 Q99900912

Key # 3131A Qty. 1 Q99900915


Legend Plates


a All nameplates are black w/white lettering except “Stop”, “Emergency Stop” and “Reset” which are red w/white lettering.For black “Reset” change final digit of catalog number to 2.

j Please specify lettering when ordering. Two lines with 11 characters (including spaces) maximum on each line.

PVC Standard legend plates 30 x 40 mmTexta Catalog Number Texta Catalog Number

Close ZB2BY2314 On ZB2BY2311Down ZB2BY2308 Off On ZB2BY2367Emergency Stop ZB2BY2330 Open ZB2BY2313Fast ZB2BY2328 Open Close ZB2BY2376Forward ZB2BY2305 Open-O-Close ZB2BY2388For Rev ZB2BY2371 Out ZB2BY2339For-O-Rev ZB2BY2384 Power On ZB2BY2326Hand Off Auto ZB2BY2387 Raise ZB2BY2335High ZB2BY2338 Reset ZB2BY2323High Low ZB2BY2369 Reverse ZB2BY2306In ZB2BY2503 Right ZB2BY2309Inch ZB2BY2321 Run ZB2BY2334Jog For ZB2BY2381 Slow ZB2BY2327Jog Rev ZB2BY2380 Start ZB2BY2303Jog Run ZB2BY2365 Stop ZB2BY2304Left ZB2BY2310 Stop Start ZB2BY2366Low ZB2BY2336 Up ZB2BY2307Lower ZB2BY2337 Up Down ZB2BY2370Man-Auto ZB2BY2372 Up-O-Down ZB2BY2389Off ZB2BY2312

PVC Yellow Legend Plates 60 mm diameter PVC Yellow Legend Plates 90 mm diameterText Language Catalog Number Text Language Catalog Number


Type Description Catalog Number

PVC blank legend

Blank Black or red background-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY2101Blank Yellow or white background-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY4101

Blank Red background-45 mm x 67.5 mm (For use w/mushroom head operators) ZB2BY5101

Blank Oversized legend-48 mm x 48 mm(For use with XB2 operators) XBCY22011

Blank Black or red background- 30 mm x 48 mm(For use w/2 position joysticks) ZD2GY2201

Metal legend plates

Silver 30 x 40 mm ZB2BY201130 x 50 mm ZB2BY6011

Black 30 x 40 mm ZB2BY202130 x 50 mm ZB2BY6021

Red 30 x 40 mm ZB2BY204130 x 50 mm ZB2BY6041

PVC custom engraved

Special engravingj Black background, white letters-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY2002Special engravingj Red background, white letters-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY2004Special engravingj White background, black letters-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY4001Special engravingj Yellow background, black letters-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY4005Special engravingj Red background, white letters-45 mm x 67.5 mm ZB2BY5004

Mylar Circular LegendsType Description Catalog Number

Mylar circularlegends for use withtransparent flushhead operatorsSee page 39, 48

No text ZB2BY1101O ZBZBY1146I ZBZBY1147Auto ZB2BY1115Hand ZB2BY1316Off ZB2BY1312On ZB2BY1311Start ZB2BY1303Stop ZB2BY1304Forward ZB2BY1305Reverse ZB2BY1306

EMERGENCY

STOP

ZB2BY8330

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mmDimensions


11/97

ZB2BA•ZB2BA•8ZB2BA•9ZB2BW3•

.4712

1.14 29 1.14 29

.6717

ZB2BA•6

1.14 29

.7920

ZB2BL•ZB2BW1•

.8722

1.18 30

ZB2BH•

1.14 29

.5915

ZB2BP•ZB2BW5•

1.57 40

1.2632

ZB2BC•ZB2BT•ZB2BS54ZB2BW4•

2.36 60

1.3434

ZB2BR•ZB2BX•ZB2BS64

1.57 40

1.2532

.9424

ZB2BS14

2.36 60

1.3434

.9123

ZB2BS24

1.0627

1.54 39

ZB2BJ•••

1.14 29

.9123

.8321

ZB2BG•

1.14 29

.5514

ZB2BVO•ZB2BVO•3

1.14 29

.7519

ZB2BVO•1

1.18 30

.9825

ZB2BVO•2

1.14 29

1.4637

.6316

ZB2BD922

1.1830

1.79

42.5

.4311

ZB2BA91•4

.5915

ZB2 BL93•4

2.17 55

1.1830

.4311

ZB2BW81•••

.5915

ZB2BW83•••

.98

Maximum travel = 25mm in all directions

3.4688

1.14 2922

ZB2BB•

1.57 40

1.8547

ZB2BS844

1.57 40

1.8547

.9424

ZB2BS944

1.14 29

1.0627

ZB2BD•••ZB2BK1•••


Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mmDimensions


2.36 60

1.77

45

0.47

12

dia.

1.14

29

cent

ers

1.18 30

XB2BF5••

40°

40°

3.11

79

XD2PA••

1.69

43

0.94

24

0.94

24

Contact blocks and bases onlyZB2BZ10•, ZB2BZ10••, ZB2BE10•, ZB2BE10••,ZB2BE20•

1.57 40

1.46

37

ZB2BV6

1.57 40

2.28

58

ZB2BV1, ZB2BV2ZB2BV3, ZB2BV9•

1.57

x1.1

8

40x3

0

2.40

61

ZB2 BW06•

1.57

x1.1

8

40x3

0

2.60

66

ZB2BW075

1.57

x1.1

8

40x3

0

3.23

82

ZB2BW0••1.

57x1

.18

40x3

0

2.32

59

ZB2BW184ZB2BW1845ZB2BV68

3.54

901.73

44

1.87

47.5

ZB2BZ9•

Operator

Nameplate

Panel

Contact blockwith mounting base

Adder contact block

MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (Minimum spacing)General mounting set-up

dia.

0.886

22.5

1.18

30

1.57 40

Standard pushbuttons and pilot lights

1.18

30

3.35 85

dia.

0.886

22.5

3.35 85

3.35

85

dia.

0.886

22.5

2 Position Joysticks 4 Position Joysticks

1.50

38

1.85 47

dia.

0.886

22.5

Rectangular units w/o indicator

2.36 60

1.73

44

dia.

0.886

22.5

Rectangular units w/ indicator

1.57 40

1.65

42

ZB2BV7

+0.4-0.0

+0.4-0.0

+0.4-0.0

+0.4-0.0

+0.4-0.0


Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXAPInsulated and Metal Control Station Enclosures


11/97

Characteristics

Glass-reinforced polyester insulated enclosures XAPA

Material Glass-reinforced polyester.

Approvals Special version: CSA COFFRET 4 and 5.

Protective treatment Standard version: “TC” and “TH” treatments.

Ambient temperature Operation: -25 °C to +70 °C. Storage: -40 °C to +70 °C.

Degree of protection IP 65 conforming to IEC 529 and IP 657 conforming to NF C 20-010. NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13.

Electric shock protection Class II conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030.

Flame resistance CSTB: M3, NF C 20-455: 850 °C, IEC 92: 960 °C, UL 94: VO.

Chemical resistance High degree of resistance to acids, bases, sea water, mineral salts, all solvents, petrol, diesel, oils and greases.

Cable entry Undrilled.

Diecast metal enclosures XAPG

Material Zinc alloy (XAPG1-XAP4) Aluminum (XAPG5...)

Approvals Special version: CSA COFFRET 4 and 5, UL COFFRET 1, 3, 4 and 12K.

Protective treatment Standard version: “TC” treatment. Special version: “TH” treatment.


Degree of protection IP 65 conforming to IEC 529 and IP 657 conforming to NF C 20-010. NEMA Types 4, 13.

Electric shock protection Class I conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030.

Chemical resistance Special treatments on request.

Cable entry Tapped entries for cable glands (see dimensions page).

Flush mount enclosures XAPE

Material and color Anodized aluminum front plate. Insulated protective rear cover.

Protective treatment Standard version: “TC” and “TH” treatments.


Degree of protection IP 65 conforming to IEC 529 and IP 657 conforming to NF C 20-010. NEMA Types 4X, 13.

Electric shock protection Class I conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030.

Chemical resistance High degree of resistance to organic acids, diluted mineral acids, salts, alcohol, acetone, chloride and fluoride solvents, oils and petrol.

Cable entry With rear cover: knock-out cable entries.

Marking


Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXAPA

Glass-Reinforced Polyester Enclosures


Undrilled Enclosures, Glass-Reinforced PolyesterType HxW Dimensions (mm) Catalog Number

NEMA 4, 4X, 13Usable depth 83 mm

without hinges

85 x 146 XAPA1100

85 x 226 XAPA2100

151 x 241 XAPA3100

with hinges 151 x 241 XAPA4100

Undrilled Grounding Plate Sheet steel with ground screw

For XAPA1100 XAPZ100


For XAPA3100 and 4100 XAPZ300

XAP a b G H

A1100 85 146 70 105

A2100 85 226 70 180

A3100 151 241 135 200

A4100 151 241 135 200

Cable entries not drilled(1) 11 mm for XAPA4kkk stations with hinges(2) 2 x Ø 5.6 mm untapped holes, depth

12 mm

Drilled Insulated Enclosures, Glass-Reinforced Polyester

TypeNumber of Knock-outs

22 mmNumber of Rows

Catalog NumberVertical Horizontal

NEMA 4, 4X, 13Usable depth 83 mm

40 mm centerline spacing of holes

1 1 1 XAPA1110

2 1 2 XAPA1120

4 2 2 XAPA1104

8 2 4 XAPA2108

16 4 4 XAPA3116

Drilled Grounding Plate Sheet steel with ground screw






For Ø 22 mm control and signalling units

XAP a b b1 b2 G H

A1110 85 146 – – 70 105

A1120 85 146 40 – 70 105

A1104 85 146 40 30 70 105

A2108 85 226 40 30 70 180

A3116 151 241 40 30 135 200

Cable entries not drilled(2) 2 x 5.6 mm untapped holes, depth 12 mm

P=83

87

b

a

H(2)

G

(1)

==

==

b

a

Undrilled Insulated enclosuresXAPA1100, XAP2100 Fixing XAPA3100, XAPA4100

P=83

87 b2

b1b1

==

b

b2= = = =

==

H

G

(2)

Insulated enclosures with cut-outsXAPA Fixing

XAPA1100 XAPA2100

XAPA1104 XAPA2108

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXAPGDiecast Metal Enclosures


11/97

c a

g

h

b

XAPG 39400

XAP G29703

t 25.4 mm = 1"

Undrilled DieCast Enclosures (Painted Grey RAL 7032)

Type Material Usable DepthH x W x D t

Dimensions (mm)Catalog Number

NEMA Type 4, 13Zinc

49 mm

80 x 80 x 51.5 XAPG19100

130 x 80 x 51.5 XAPG29100

175 x 80 x 51.5 XAPG39100

74.5 mm

80 x 80 x 77 XAPG19400

130 x 80 x 77 XAPG29400

175 x 80 x 77 XAPG39400

220 x 80 x 77 XAPG49400

Aluminum 74.5 mm 310 x 85 x 77 XAPG59400

Drilled DieCast Enclosures (Painted Grey RAL 7032)

Type Material Usable DepthNumber of

22 mm knock-outsCatalog Number

NEMA Type 4, 1330 mm centerlinespacing of holes

Zinc

49 mm

2 XAPG19702

3 XAPG29703

4 XAPG39704

74.5 mm

2 XAPG19802

3 XAPG29803

4 XAPG39804

NEMA Type 4, 1340 mm centerlinespacing of holes

Zinc

49 mm

1 XAPG19201

2 XAPG29202

3 XAPG39203

74.5 mm

1 XAPG19501

2 XAPG29502

3 XAPG39503

4 XAPG49504

Aluminum 74.5 mm 5 XAPG59505

CatalogNumber

a b c g h Conduit openingsuppliedIN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm

XAPG19201 3.15 80 3.15 80 2.03 51.5 1.97 50 2.56 65 3⁄4" NPT

XAPG29202 3.15 80 5.12 130 2.03 51.5 1.97 50 4.53 115 3⁄4" NPT

XAPG39203 3.15 80 6.90 175 2.03 51.5 1.97 50 6.30 160 3⁄4" NPT

XAPG19501 3.15 80 3.15 80 3.03 77 1.97 50 2.56 65 3⁄4" NPT

XAPG29502 3.15 80 5.12 130 3.03 77 1.97 50 4.53 115 3⁄4" NPT

XAPG39503 3.15 80 6.90 175 3.03 77 1.97 50 6.30 160 3⁄4" NPT

XAPG49504 3.15 80 8.66 220 3.03 77 1.97 50 8.07 205 3⁄4" NPT

XAPG59505 3.35 85 12.20 310 3.03 77 2.16 55 11.60 295 3⁄4" NPT

XAPG19702 3.15 80 3.15 80 2.03 51.5 1.97 50 2.56 65 3⁄4" NPT

XAPG29703 3.15 80 5.12 130 2.03 51.5 1.97 50 4.53 115 3⁄4" NPT

XAPG39704 3.15 80 6.90 175 2.03 51.5 1.97 50 6.30 160 3⁄4" NPT

XAPG19802 3.15 80 3.15 80 3.03 77 1.97 50 2.56 65 3⁄4" NPT

XAPG29803 3.15 80 5.12 130 3.03 77 1.97 50 4.53 115 3⁄4" NPT

XAPG39804 3.15 80 6.90 175 3.03 77 1.97 50 6.30 160 3⁄4" NPT

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXAPE

Flush Mount Enclosures


25.4 mm = 1"

Drilled Flush Plates

Type MaterialNumber of

22mm holesH x W

Dimensions (mm)Catalog Number

NEMA Type 4, 1330mm centerlinespacing of holes

AnodizedAluminum

1 72 x 72 XAPE301

2 105 x 72 XAPE302

3 138 x 72 XAPE303

4 171 x 72 XAPE304

5 204 x 72 XAPE305

Optional Back Box (for finger protection, if required)Type Material Catalog Number

Protective rear covers InsulatingFiberglass

For flush plate XAPE301 XAPE901





For Ø 22 mm control and signalling units

Front plate

XAP b b1 H

E301 72 44 56

E302 105 77 89

E303 138 110 122

E304 171 143 155

E305 204 176 188

Protective rear cover for front plate XAPE30k

XAP b P

E901 52 82.5

E902 85 82.5

E903 118 82.5

E904 151 82.5

E905 184 82.5

Flush mounting enclosuresFront plate with cut-outs for Ø 22 mm control and signalling unitsXAPE30k

Mounting of front plate and protective rear cover

XAPE303 XAPE305

XAPE302

XAPE301

P=Usable depth80

P

59

= =

b

14.5

5

4 x 04.2

56= = ==

H

72

56= =

==

b

3030

30 b1 H

60 4 x M4

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mmMounting Instructions


11/97

Mounting Instructions for ZB2B

1. The panel knockout must be 7/8" (22.3 mm) with a panel thickness of 1 to 6 mm (0.04 in to 0.23 in). No anti-rotation notch is required.

2. Insert the operator through the knockout.3. Bayonet lock the operator into the diecast mounting base with a 1/8 clockwise turn.4. Orient the angled fixing screws at 12 and 6 o’clock and alternately tighten the 2 screws.5. The fixing screws will bite into the metal of the inside panel door and provide anti-rotation and a

tamperproof installation.

1 6 mm

22.3 mm+0.4–0.0


Printed Circuit Board ComponentsXA2B-XB2B

CONTENTS


General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Electrical Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Assembly Items, Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Panel Cutouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Printed Circuit Board Drilling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70


Printed Circuit Board Components XA2B-XB2BGeneral Characteristics


66

11/97

Environment (typical ZA2B or ZB2B operator)

Compatibility This method of connection for the XA2B and XB2B uses special electrical blocks, combined with a range of standard operators.

Conformity to standards IEC 947-5-1, NF C 63-140, ASE 0119, ASE 1003, BS 4794, VDE 0660 part 200, UL 508, CSA C 22-2 No. 14.

Approvals UL Recognized, CSA Certified

Protective treatment “TC” (All climates.)

Ambient air temperature Storage: from -40

°

C to +70

°

C (-40

°

F to +158

°

F). Operation: from -25

°

C to +70

°

C (-13

°

F to +140

°

F).

Operating positions All positions

Resistance to vibration 60 mm mushroom head push buttons: 4 g; Other push buttons: 10 g; Joystick controller: 5 g.

Resistance to shock Push buttons: 70 g; Mushroom head push buttons: 15 g; Selector switches: 120 g. Conforming to IEC 68 2-27.

Electric shock protection Class II, conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030

Mechanical life 1 million operations (latching mushroom head push buttons: 300,000 operations, illuminated selector switches: 100,000 operations.

Setting up characteristics

Printed circuit board assembly The special sub-bases, type

ZA2BZ079

or ZB2BZ079,

must be used (see page 68)

Printed circuit board Thickness: from 1.6 to 3.2 mm

Flow soldering Maximum temperature: 250

°

CSpeed: 1.2 m/sec


Rated insulation voltage 300 V conforming to UL 508 and CSA C 22-2 No. 14, 250 V conforming to NF C 20-040, VDE 0110.

Insulation category Group C conforming to NF C 20-040 and VDE 0110.

Contact operation Slow break (N.C. contact with direct opening operation).

Operating forceFlush and projecting push buttons - with 1 N.O. contact: 2.25 lb - with 1 N.O. contact: 1.8 lb

Additional contacts: -N.O.: +1.13 lb, N.C.: +0.7 lb

Terminal referencing Unmarked

Short circuit protection 10 A cartridge fuses gF.

Rated powerconforming to IEC 947-5-1 Utilization category: B300 - Q300

MarkingFile E164353

NKCR2FileClass

LR 440873211 03


Printed Circuit Board Components XA2B-XB2BElectrical Blocks

67


Contact Blocks

Description Part Number

Normally Open Contact Block ZB2BE701

Normally Closed Contact Block ZB2BE702

Pilot Light Block

Pilot Light Block Direct Supply ZB2BV67

Combination Blocks Pilot Light + Contact(s)

Pilot Light Block (Direct Supply)1 Normally Open Contact ZB2BW0671

Pilot Light Block (Direct Supply)+ 1 Normally Closed Contact ZB2BW0672

Pilot Light Block (Direct Supply)+ 2 Normally Open Contact ZB2BW0673

Pilot Light Block (Direct Supply)+ 1 Normally Open Contact and 1 Normally Closed Contact

ZB2BW0675

13

14

NO

21

22

NC

X1

X2

X1

X2

13

14

X1

X2

11

12

X1

X2

13

14

23

24

X1

X2

21

22

13

14


ZB

2-BE

701

France

ZB2BE701

ZB

2-BE

702

France

ZB2BE702

ZB

2-BV

67

ZB2BV67

ZB

2-BW

0672

ZB2BW0672


Printed Circuit Board Components XA2B-XB2BAssembly Items, Spare Parts


68

11/97

Assembly Items

For best LED light output, match lamp with lens color and use jeweled style lenses.

Description Part Number

Socket Adapter for all Electrical Blocks ZB2BZ010

Operator Fixing Sub-Base for XB2B ZB2BZ079

Operator Fixing Sub-Base for XA2B ZA2BZ079

Screw for Fixing Blocks onto Sub-Base ZB2BZ005

Screw for Fixing Blocks onto sub-Base with Socket Adapter ZB2BZ006

Lamps


Incandescent

Replacement bulbs (Type BA9s)

6 1.5 DL1CB006

12 2.0 DL1CE012

24 2.0 DL1CE024

48 2.4 DL1CE048

130 2.6 DL1CE130


120 - NE51HRT120V

220 - NE51HRT220V

380 - NE51HRT380V


LED

, BA9s base for Direct Supply blocks













ZB2BZ010

ZB2BZ079

ZA2BZ079

ZB2BZ005

DL1CEO**

DL1CJUS****


Printed Circuit Board Components XA2B-XB2BPanel Cutouts

69


Panel cut-outs

Overall tolerances of the panel/printed circuit assembly

The sum of the absolute values of the drilling tolerance must not exceed 0.5 mm (0.196”).

– in the horizontal direction X – and in the vertical direction Y

Dimension - A on the panel

Dimensions - B on the panel

- C on the printed circuit - D on the printed circuit

i.e.: t

1

+ t

2

= 0.5 mm max.

Mounting Precautions

a. Panel cut-out diameter: b. When the head and fixing sub-base assembly are fixed and tightened onto the panel, the sub-base (ZA2BZ079 or ZB2BZ079)

must be oriented at a maximum angle

±

5

°.

Fixing sub base screws (ZB2BZ079) must be tightened with same torque value.c. If any of the heads are fitted with legend plate carriers, it is essential that

all

the products are fitted with legend plate carriers.d. Note: the following heads cannot be used with the electrical blocks on page 67:

– double headed push button operators with indicator light ZB2BW8– ZA2C square head operators

Dimensions in mm and inches

(30 mm)

Y

X

(40

mm

)(4

0 m

m )

Ø 22.3

A ± t1A ' ± t1

A '' ± t1

B ±

t1

B '

± t1

B ''

± t1

(0.878" )

(1.181")(30 mm)(1.181")

(1.5

74")

(1.5

74")

+ 0.4 mm0.0 mm

+ 0.016"0.0"

∅ 22.3 mm 0.0 mm+0.4 mm

0.878"+0.016"

0.0"


Printed Circuit Board Components XA2B-XB2BPrinted Circuit Board Drilling


70

11/97

Legends for printed circuit drilling and terminal marking

3 different types of drilling are necessary:

drilling for two adjacent blocks

C ± t2C ' ± t2

C '' ± t2

410

8.3

5 4

3

24.6

20

19

15

D ±

t2D

' ±

t2

D ''

± t2

D '

'' ±

t2 C''' ± t2

13

14

21

22

11

14

13

12

4

3

N/Ocontact block

13

14

N/Ccontact/block

21

22

Direct Supplyindicator light

block

X1

X2

Indicator contact"combination"

block

11

12

13

14

X1

X2

Indicator contact"combination"

block

23

24

13

14

X1

X2

Y

X

5 4

2010

4

(1) (2)

(3) (4)

24,60

22,75

26

18,7

5

X1-X2 : bulbs1-2-3-4 : contacts

Socket adapter (ZB2BZ010)

ZB2-BZ010

Fra

nce

30 mm

18

14

13

14

23

24

20

X1

X2

X1

X2

X1

X2

X1

X2

View from the electrical block side: Dimensions in mm.

HOLES FOR CONNECTIONS: Ø 1.5 mm ± 0.1 (Ø 0.059" ± 0.0039")→

→

→CENTERING HOLE OF THE ELECTRICAL BLOCK: Ø 4.5 mm ± 0.1 (Ø 0.177" ± 0.0039")

SCREWDRIVER CLEARANCE HOLE: (Ø 0.275" ± 0.0039") (As Required):for the introduction of an electrical block assembling screw to a sub-base.It is recommended to fit a screw every 90 mm (3.54") horizontally and 120 mm (4.72") vertically

13 14 Terminal marking conforming to CENELEC EN 50013.Indicates the function of the electrical block.


Type K and SK 30 mm Push Buttons

CONTENTS


Type K and SK Common Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Type K Heavy Duty Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73- 86Type K Voltage Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Type K and SK Selector Switch Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Type K Heavy Duty Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Type K Heavy Duty Pilot Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Type K Heavy Duty Joysticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Type SK Corrosion Resistant Operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Type SK Corrosion Resistant Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Type SK Corrosion Resistant Potentiometers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Type SK Corrosion Resistant Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Type K, SK, KX, and T Light Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Type K, SK, KX, and T Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Hazardous Location Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Type K and SK “H” Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Type K and SK Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Type K and SK Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 105Type K and SK Application Data and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Type K and SK Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Type K and SK Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Class 9001


Class 9001, Type K, SK — 30 mmCommon Operators


72

11/97

For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.

“START” Push Buttons

OperatorStyle Description Contact

BlockButtonColor Type Legend

Plate

30.5 mmIndustrial (Metal)

Black KR1BH13 KN201SP

30.5 mmCorrosion Resistant

(Non Metallic)

Black SKR1BH13 KN101SP

“OFF – ON” Selector Switch

OperatorStyle Description

ContactSequence

KnobColor Type Legend

PlateContact Block

Included


1 00 1

Black KS11BH13 KN244SP

30.5 mmCorrosionResistant

(Non Metallic)

Black SKS11BH13 KN144SP

RED – 120 Vac – “ON” Pilot Light

Operator Style Description Type Legend Plate

30.5 mmIndustrial(Metal)

KP1R31 KN203SP


(Non Metallic)SKP1R31 KN103SP

RED – 120 Vac – “ON” Push-To-Test Pilot Light



KT1R31 KN203SP


(Non Metallic)SKT1R31 KN103SP

“STOP” Push Buttons

OperatorStyle Description Contact

BlockButtonColor Type Legend

Plate


Red KR1RH13 KN202RP


(Non Metallic)

Red SKR1RH13 KN102RP

“HAND – OFF – AUTO” Selector Switch

OperatorStyle Description

ContactSequence

KnobColor Type Legend

PlateContact Block

Included


1 0 00 0 1

Black KS43BH13 KN260SP

30.5 mmCorrosionResistant

(Non Metallic)

Black SKS43BH13 KN160SP

GREEN – 120 Vac – “OFF” Pilot Light



KP1G31 KN204SP


(Non Metallic)SKP1G31 KN104SP

GREEN – 120 Vac –“OFF” Push-To-Test Pilot Light



KT1G31 KN204RP


(Non Metallic)SKT1G31 KN104RP

FileCCN

E42259NKCR

FileClass

LR 254903211 03

Marking



Class 9001, Type K, SK — 30 mmHeavy Duty Operators

73

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved11/97

①

The universal push button operators contain one each of the following color inserts: black, red, green, yellow, orange, blue and white.

➁

See table below.

➂

Knob has the words “Emergency Stop” in raised letters highlighted in white for readability. Available in red snap-in mushroom buttons only.

➃

See table below.

➄

These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks – for maximum block usage – see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.

EXAMPLE: KR24B + H2(2 - KA1) = KR24BH2

Non-Illuminated Momentary Push Button Operators – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13

For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Contact blocks and legend plate not included unless otherwise noted.

Description ColorOperator With

1 N.O. and 1 N.C.Contact (KA1)

Operator With1 N.O. Contact

(KA2)

Operator With1 N.C. Contact

(KA3)

Operator OnlyWith No

Contacts

➄

Full Guard

Black KR1BH13 KR1BH5 KR1BH6 KR1B

Red KR1RH13 KR1RH5 KR1RH6 KR1R

Green KR1GH13 KR1GH5 KR1GH6 KR1G

Universal

①

KR1UH13 KR1UH5 KR1UH6 KR1U

Other

➁

KR1

➁

H13 KR1

➁

H5 KR1

➁

H6 KR1

➁

No Guard




Universal

①


Other

➁

KR3

➁

H13 KR3

➁

H5 KR3

➁

H6 KR3

➁

Extended Guard




Universal

①


Other

➁

KR2

➁

H13 KR2

➁

H5 KR2

➁

H6 KR2

➁

1

3

⁄

8

'' DiameterMushroom Button

Snap-In Mushroom Button



Red

➂

KR4R05H13 KR4R05H5 KR4R05H6 KR4R05


Other

➃

KR4

➃

H13 KR4

➃

H5 KR4

➃

H6 KR4

➃

Screw-On Mushroom Button With Set Screw Security




Other

➃

KR24

➃

H13 KR24

➃

H5 KR24

➃

H6 KR24

➃

2

1

⁄

4

'' DiameterMushroom Button




Red

➂

KR5R05H13 KR5R05H5 KR5R05H6 KR5R05


Other

➃

KR5

➃

H13 KR5

➃

H5 KR5

➃

H6 KR5

➃





Other

➃

KR25

➃

H13 KR25

➃

H5 KR25

➃

H6 KR25

➃

Color

➁

For KR1, 2, 3Choose Color and Place Code in

Type Number

➃

For KR4, 5, 24, 25Choose Color and Place Color

Code in Type Number

BlueYellowWhite

OrangeGray

LYWSE

LY–S–

Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Color Inserts and Mushroom Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105


Class 9001, Type K, SK — 30 mmHeavy Duty Operators


74

11/97

Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Multifunction Operators

Meets UL Type 13/NEMA Type 13 and UL Type 6/NEMA Type 6, which UL and NEMA consider an equivalent to UL Type 4/NEMA Type 4.For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Legend plate and contact blocks not included unless otherwise noted.

Description ColorWith 2 N.O.Contacts(2 KA2)

With 1 N.O.& 1 N.C.Contact

(KA2, KA3)

WithoutContacts

⑨

MomentaryDual

Function

Universal

①

Green-RedOther

➁

KR6UH7KR6GRH7KR6

➁

H7

KR6UH37KR6GRH37KR6

➁

H37

KR6UKR6GRKR6

➁

MomentaryInterlocked

Dual Function

Universal

①

Green-RedOther

➁

KR67UH7KR67GRH7KR67

➁

H7

KR67UH37KR67GRH37KR67

➁

H37

KR67UKR67GRKR67

➁

MaintainedInterlocked

Dual Function

Universal

①

Green-RedOther

➁

KR7UH7KR7GRH7KR7

➁

H7

KR7UH37KR7GRH37KR7

➁

H37

KR7UKR7GRKR7

➁

Description Color –Contacts

See

⑩

(KA2, KA3)

WithoutContacts

⑨

Both ButtonsMaintained Interlocked

Assembly

Universal

➂

Other

➃

– KR11UH1KR11

➃

H1KR11UKR11

➃

One Button MomentaryOne Button MaintainedInterlocked Assembly

Universal

➂

Other

➃

– KR12UH1H1KR12

➃

H1H1KR12UKR12

➃

1

5

⁄

8

" Dia. Knob xFor 1

3

⁄

8

" or 2

1

⁄

4

" Dia. Knob - see Includes Type KN379 Legend Plate Marked

Pull To StartPush To Stop

Description Color With 2 N.C. Contacts(1 KA3, 1 KA5)

With 1 N.O. 1 N.C. Contact(1 KA1)

Without Contacts

⑨

3 PositionMomentary Pull -

Maintained Neutral - Momentary PushNon-Illuminated

RedGreen

Other

➄

KR8RH25KR8GH25KR8

➄

H25

–––

KR8RKR8GKR8

➄

2 PositionMaintained Pull - Maintained PushNon-Illuminated

Red Green

Other

➄

–––

KR9RH13KR9GH13KR9

➄

H13

KR9RKR9GKR9

➄

1

5

⁄

8

" Dia. Knob xFor 1

3

⁄

8

" or 2

1

⁄

4

" Dia. Knob - see

Includes Type KN379 Legend

Plate MarkedPull To StartPush To Stop

Description VoltageWith Red Knob With 2

N.C. Contacts(1 KA3, 1 KA5)

With Other Color Knob With 2 N.C. Contacts

(1 KA3, 1 KA5)

With Other Color Knob Without Contacts

⑨

3 PositionMomentary Pull -

Maintained Neutral - Momentary Push

Illuminated

110-120 V, 50-60 HzOther – Transformer, LED, Flashing

⑦

Other – Full Voltage, Resistor, Neon

⑧

KR8P1RH25KR8P

➅

RH25KR8P

➅

RH25

KR8P1

➄

H25KR8P

➅➄

H25KR8P

➅➄

H25

KR8P1

➄

KR8P

➅➄

KR8P

➅➄

Description VoltageWith Red Knob With 1

N.O. & 1 N.C. Contact (KA1)

With Other Color Knob With 1 N.O. & 1 N.C.

Contact (KA1)


2 PositionMaintained Pull - Maintained Push

Illuminated

110-120 V, 50-60 HzOther – Transformer, LED, Flashing

⑦

Other – Full Voltage, Resistor, Neon

⑧

KR9P1RH13KR9P

➅

RH13KR9P

➅

RH13

KR9P1

➄

H13KR9P

➅➄

H13KR9P

➅➄

H13

KR9P1

➄

KR9P

➅➄

KR9P

➅➄

12

12

11

12

12

1211

①

Universal for KR6, 67, 7 includes 2 inserts each of black, red and green.

➁

Choose one color for each button. R = red, G = green, B = Black.

EXAMPLE: A KR6 with left red and right black = KR6RB

➂

Universal for KR11, 12 includes 2 each of black, red, green, yellow, orange, blue, white.

➃

Choose one color for each button from table and insert color code in type number.

EXAMPLE: A KR11 with top button grey and bottom button orange = KR11ES

➄

Choose one color from table and insert color code in type number.

EXAMPLE: KR9 with a yellow knob = KR9Y

➅ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table on page 76. EXAMPLE: KR8P➅ with a 277 V 50-60 Hz voltage = KR8P8⑦ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., green LED

uses green knob) or use clear knob..⑧ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.⑨ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks. For maximum block usage

see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.EXAMPLE: KR67BB + H8(2 KA3) = KR67BBH8

⑩ KR11UH1 has 1 - KA1 (1 N.O., 1 N.C.) and KR12UH1H1 has 2 - KA1 (2 N.O., 2 N.C.).To obtain a red knob with “Push Emergency Stop” printed on the red knob – substitute “R05” in place of “R”. Not available in 13⁄8" or 21⁄4" diameter knobs.For 13⁄8" or 21⁄4" Dia. Knob:a) Order -20 or -21 knob from page 105.b) Order 9001K54 adapter (no charge) - allows -20 or -21 knob to fit on push pull

operators. Voids UL and NEMA Type 6 rating.c) Can order assembled operator by replacing color code with -20 or -21. Example: 9001 KR9R would be 9001KR9R20 or 9001KR9R21. No price adder.

These colors are not available on illuminated push-pull operators.

Other Color Code SelectionColor KR6, KR7, KR67 KR11, KR12 KR8, KR9

BlackRed

GreenBlue

YellowWhite

OrangeClear

AmberGray

BRG–––––––

BRGLYWS––E

B RGLYW

S CA–

11

12

Voltage Assembly Codes See Page 76

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type K, SK — 30 mm

Heavy Duty Operators

75© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved11/97

Illuminated Push Button Operators – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Legend plate and contact block not included unless otherwise noted.

DescriptionVoltage

andFrequency

StyleWith Red Color Cap and 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. Contact

(KA1)

With Green Color Cap and 1 N.O. and 1 N.C.

Contact (KA1)

With Other Color Cap Without Contact Block ①

Full GuardIlluminated

Push ButtonClear Plastic Top

110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer K1L1RH13 K1L1GH13 K1L1➄


24-28 Vac-dc Full Voltage K1L35RH13 K1L35GH13 K1L35➄

For other Voltagessee Table ➁

Transformer or Flashing K1L➁RH13 K1L➁GH13 K1L➁➄

Full Voltage K1L➁RH13 K1L➁GH13 K1L➁➄

Resistor or Neon ➂ K1L➁RH13 K1L➁GH13 K1L➁➄

LED ➃ K1L➁RH13 K1L➁GH13 K1L➁➄


Push ButtonMetal Top









No GuardIlluminated

Push Button









13⁄8 InchIlluminatedMushroom

110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer K2L1R20H13 K2L1G20H13

Order K2L ➁➄Above ➅


24-28 Vac-dc Full Voltage K2L35R20H13 K2L35G20H13


Transformer or Flashing K2L➁R20H13 K2L➁G20H13

Full Voltage K2L➁R20H13 K2L➁G20H13

Resistor or Neon ➂ K2L➁R20H13 K2L➁G20H13

LED➃ K2L➁R20H13 K2L➁G20H13

21⁄4 InchIlluminatedMushroom


Order K2L ➁➄Above ➅


24-28 Vac-dc Full Voltage K2L35R21H13 K2L35G21H13


Transformer or Flashing K2L➁R21H13 K2L➁G21H13

Full Voltage K2L➁R21H13 K2L➁G21H13

Resistor or Neon ➂ K2L➁R21H13 K2L➁G21H13

LED➃ K2L➁R21H13 K2L➁G21H13

① These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage seepage 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type number.Example: K2L36R20+H2(2 KA1)=K2L36R20H2

➁ Add the Voltage assembly code as chosen from Voltage assembly code table on page 76.Example: K2L➁ with a 240 Vac-dc Voltage = K2L25

➂ On neon Voltages use clear color caps only.➃ The color of the color cap must be the same color as the LED Voltage chosen (i.e., red LED uses

red color cap) or use clear color cap.➄ Add the color code as chosen from the color cap table.

Example: K2L25➄ with a blue 13⁄8 mushroom button = K2L25L20➅ The only difference between a no guard (K2L➁) operator and mushroom button operators is the

color cap.

Color Caps

ColorColor Codes

➄ K1LK2L, K3L

➄ 13⁄8 InchMushroom

➄ 21⁄4 InchMushroom

RedGreenBlue

YellowWhiteClear

Amber

RGLYWCA

R20G20L20Y20W20C20A20

R21G21L21Y21W21C21A21

Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Color Caps & Mushroom Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 105Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 96Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 96Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106


Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type K, SK — 30 mmVoltage Assembly Codes


11/97

This page lists light module code numbers that are used in op-erators listed on pages 74-75.

• Neon type light modules – use CLEAR color caps only.• LED light modules use a lamp with 7 element LED clus-

ters that provide illumination similar to incandescent illu-mination.

• LED light modules require the color cap color and theLED color be the same or use a clear color cap.

Voltage Assembly Codes

Voltage Description Voltage Assembly Code

Separate Light Module Type Number

6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc

Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3131LR31LG31LY

KM31KM31LRKM31LGKM31LY

12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc

Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3232LR32LG32LY


18 Vac-dc Resistor 33 KM33


Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3535LR35LG35LY




Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3636LR36LG36LY


Use clear color caps only with neon light modules.




Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3737LR37LG37LY


110-120 V, 25-30 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz

TransformerTransformer

Flashing

21

F1

KM2KM1

KMF1

120 Vac-dc120 Vac Only120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc

ResistorNeon

LED RedLED GreenLED Yellow

3811

38LR38LG38LY

KM38KM11

KM38LRKM38LGKM38LY

208-220 V 50-60 Hz Transformer 3 KM3

220-240 V 25-30 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz


Flashing

47

F7

KM4KM7

KMF7

240 Vac-dc240 Vac-dc

ResistorNeon

2512

KM25KM12

277 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer 8 KM8

380 Vac-dc Neon 13 KM13

380-480 V, 50-60 Hz480 Vac-dc

TransformerNeon

514

KM5KM14

550 Vac-dc550-600 V, 50-60 Hz

Neon Transformer

56

KM15KM6

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type K and SK — 30 mm

Selector Switch Selection Guide


Shown below is a simplified method of selecting a selectorswitch to meet almost any combination of contact sequences.

Step No. 1Determine the contact sequence(s) required. Set up a target ta-ble like the one shown for the example below.

Step No. 2Look for a cam type common to all sequences in Table 1, 2 or3. For the example above, Table 2 would be used. For the con-tact sequences A(1 0 0), B(0 1 0) and C(0 0 1) of the exampleabove, cam types F and L are common to all 3 sequences.

Step No. 3Next, the cam type common to all the sequences (If severalcam types are common, choose one.) is used to find the oper-ator type number. Go to the proper page number as indicatedin the table below:

If for the example above:

A manual return operator with a standard black knob is required andIf the F cam type were chosen, the operator type number would be:

Type K Line – Class 9001 Type KS46B (From page 80)Type SK Line – Class 9001 Type SKS46B (From page 92)

If the L cam type were chosen, the operator type number would be:Type K Line – Class 9001 Type KS401B (From page 80)Type SK Line – Class 9001 Type SKS401B (From page 92)

Step No. 4:Determine the contact blocks required by using the same tableused for Step No. 2.


The F cam type were chosen:A 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 2 would be used for sequence A(1 0 0).A 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 1 would be used for sequence B(0 1 0).A 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 1 or 2 would be used for sequence C(0 0 1).

The L cam type were chosen:A 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 2 would be used for sequence A(1 0 0).A 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 1 or a 9001 KA3 mounted on side no. 2would be used for sequence B(0 1 0).A 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 1 would be used for sequence C(0 0 1).

Example:Contact

Sequence

A 1 0 0

B 0 1 0

C 0 0 1

0 – contact open1 – contact closed

Number of Positions Push Button Line Page Number

2 Type KType SK 78, 79, 90, 91

3 Type KType SK 80, 81, 92, 93

4 Type KType SK 82, 94

One Type KA1 double circuit block can be used in place of oneType KA2 single circuit block and one Type KA3 single circuitblock mounted on the same side.

For “H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99For Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 107-108

The KA5 must be the last block on either side. If more than one KA5 is required on eitherside – contact your local Square D sales office.

Table 1 – 2 Position Selector Switch

If you requirecontact sequence Use Sel. Sw.

with cam typeUse contactblock type

Mount onside No.

(See page 99)

1 0E KA3 1 or 2

D KA2 1 or 2

0 1E KA2 1 or 2

D KA3 1 or 2




Mount on side No.

(See page 99)

1 0 0

G M KA2 1

L KA2 2

C E KA3 1

B C E F G J KA3 2

B G J KA5 2

0 1 0

D E J L KA2 1

D E KA2 2

F KA3 1

L KA3 2

0 0 1

C F KA2 1 or 2

B D G L KA3 1

D KA3 2

B KA5 1

M KA2 2

1 1 0

B KA2 1

C F KA5 1 or 2

M KA3 2

0 1 1

B G J KA2 2

G KA5 1

L KA5 2

M KA3 1

1 0 1

J KA3 1

D E J L KA5 1

D E KA5 2




Mount onside No.

(See page 99)

1 0 0 0 H (A) KA3 2

0 1 0 0 H (B) KA2 1

0 0 1 0 H (C) KA2 2

0 0 0 1 H (D) KA3 1

1 0 0 1 H A & D Wired in Parallel

1 1 0 0 H A & B Wired in Parallel

0 1 1 0 H B & C Wired in Parallel

0 0 1 1 H C & D Wired in Parallel

1 1 1 0 H A, B & C Wired in Parallel

0 1 1 1 H B, C & D Wired in Parallel

1 0 1 0 H A & C Wired in Parallel

0 1 0 1 H B & D Wired in Parallel

1 1 0 1 H KA5 2

1 0 1 1 H KA5 1

KA1 KA3 KA2= +

= +

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type K — 30 mmHeavy Duty Selector Switches


11/97

Selector Switch Knobs

Color

StandardKnob

GlovedHand Knob

CoinOperated

➁KnobCode

Type➁

KnobCode

Type➁

KnobCode

Type

BlackRed

GreenYellowOrange

BlueWhiteAmberClear

BRGYSLWAC

B11R8G8Y8

S11L8W8A8C8

FBFRFGFYFSFLFWFAFC

B25R24G24Y24S25L24W24A24C24

TBTRTGTY–

TL––

TC

B18R16G16Y16

–L16

––

C16

➂ Key Withdrawal Code

Code

1 Yes No

Code

2 No Yes

Code

3 Yes Yes

Non-Illuminated 2 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Legend plate and contact block not included unless noted.

Contact Block Required 1 — Contact Closed0 — Contact Open

ContactBlock

Position

QuantityandType

Mounton

Side Left Right Left Right

KA1#2

KA3#2 1 0 0 1

KA2#2 0 1 1 0

KA1#1

KA3#1 1 0 0 1

KA2#1 0 1 1 0

CAM E D

Non-Illuminated Operators Type Type

Manual Return

Operator Only ①

Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table)➁Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 1,2,3)➂➃

KS11KS11BKS11➁

KS11K➂

KS12KS12BKS12➁

KS12K➂

With Contact Block(s)

With Standard Black Knob (See Table for Other Colors, Replace B in Type Number with Other Color Code)With 1 KA1 on Side #2 (H13)With 1 KA1 on Side #1 (H1)With 1 KA1 on Side #1 and 1 KA1 on Side #2 (H2)

KS11BH13KS11BH1KS11BH2

–––

Spring Return from Left Operator Only ①

Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table)➁Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 2 only)➃

KS25KS25BKS25➁KS25K2

––––

Spring Return From Right Operator Only ①

Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table)➁Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 1 Only)➃

––––


Top View

Side 2Side 1

Operator LocatingNotch

KA1KA3

KA2

KA1KA3

KA2

① These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.Example:KS11K1+H13(KA1-SIDE 2)=KS11K1H13.

➁ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table at right.Example: KS11➁ with a green gloved hand knob = KS11FG

➂ Add the key withdrawal code from key withdrawal code table.Example: KS11K➂ that the key can be withdrawn in the right position only = KS11K2

➃ All key operated devices are furnished as standard with Square D number E10 (key only part no. is 2941101100) key change. The following 20 additional key changes are available at no extra cost: E11-E13, E16, E21-E26, E28-E33, CH501, CH674, SR251, T107.Occasionally it is desirable to have several devices with dissimilar key changes, but all operable by a single master key. The following key changes with master keying provisions are avail-able.

Example: For individual key, not master keyed an E29 is chosen. The type number isKS11K2E29.All key operators come standard with 2 keys. Replacement keys can be purchased by specifying the key required i.e., E10, E24, E36 key only, etc.

Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 105

Key No. Total Key ChangesAvailable

Master Key (E99)

Part No.

E36 thru E60 25 2941151990

OR

OR

OR

OR

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type K — 30 mm

Heavy Duty Selector Switches


➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.Example: K12J35FR+H2(2 KA1) = K12J35FRH2.

➁ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from the voltage assembly code table below.Example: K25J➁ with a 60 Vac-dc Voltage = K25J37.

➂ Add the color code as chosen form the knob color table at right.Example: K25J35➂ with a green knob = K25J35G.

➃ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., red LED usered knob) or use clear knob.

➄ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.

Illuminated 2 Position Selector Switch Operators – ULTypes 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Legend plate and contact block not included unless noted.


ContactBlock

Position

QuantityandType

Mounton


KA1#2

KA3#2 1 0 0 1

KA2#2 0 1 1 0

KA1#1

KA3#1 1 0 0 1

KA2#1 0 1 1 0

CAM E D

Illuminated Operators Type Type

Manual Return ➀Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or

LED ➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄

K11J1K11J1RK11J➁K11J➁

K11J➁➂

K11J➁➂


K12J➁➂

K12J➁➂

Spring Return from Left ➀Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or



K25J➁➂

K25J➁➂

–––––

–

Spring Return From Right ➀Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or


–––––

–


K34J➁➂

K34J➁➂


Color

StandardKnob

GlovedHand Knob

CoinOperated

➂KnobCode

Type➂

KnobCode

Type➂

KnobCode

Type

RedGreenYellowBlueWhiteAmberClear

RGYLWAC

R8G8Y8L8W8A8C8

FRFGFYFLFWFAFC

R24G24Y24L24W24A24C24

TRTGTYTL––

TC

R16G16Y16L16

––

C16

Top View

Side 2Side 1


KA1KA3

KA2

KA1KA3

KA2


Add form number to standard Type number, e.g. Type K11J1 Form Y178.

Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105





Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3131LR31LG31LY



Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3232LR32LG32LY




Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3535LR35LG35LY




Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3636LR36LG36LY



Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3737LR37LG37LY


110-120 V, 25-30 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz


Flashing

21

F1

KM2KM1

KMF1


ResistorNeon


3811

38LR38LG38LY

KM38KM11

KM38LRKM38LGKM38LY


220-240 V 25-30 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz


Flashing

47

F7

KM4KM7

KMF7


ResistorNeon

2512

KM25KM12



380-480 V, 50-60 Hz480 Vac-dc

TransformerNeon

514

KM5KM14

550 Vac-dc550-600 V, 50-60 Hz

Neon Transformer

15 6

KM15KM6

Two Color Selector SwitchUsed to indicate red in left position and green in right position on illuminated operators.

Knob Factory Assembled Form Number

Standard Y178

Gloved Hand Y1781

OR

OR OR

OR



11/97

Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 105


ColorStandard

Knob GlovedHand Knob

CoinOperated

➁KnobCode

Type➁

KnobCode

Type➁

KnobCode

Type

BlackRed

GreenYellowOrange

BlueWhiteAmberClear

BRGYSLWAC

B11R8G8Y8

S11L8W8A8C8

FBFRFGFYFSFLFWFAFC

B25R24G24Y24S25L24W24A24C24

TBTRTGTY–

TL––

TC

B18R16G16Y16

–L16

––

C16

Non-Illuminated 3 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted

CONTACT BLOCK REQUIRED 1 — Contact Closed 0 — Contact Open

ContactBlock

Position

QuantityandType

Mounton

Side

Center

Left Right

Center

Left Right

Center

Left Right

Center

Left Right

Center

Left Right

Center

Left Right

Center

Left Right

Center

Left Right

Center

Left Right

KA1#2

KA3#2 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0

KA2#2 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

KA1#1

KA3#1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1

KA2#1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

CAM B C D E F G J L M

Non-Illuminated Operators Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type

Manual Return

Operator Only ➀

Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 4 through 10) ➂➃

KS42KS42BKS42➁

KS42K➂

KS43KS43BKS43➁

KS43K➂

KS44KS44BKS44➁

KS44K➂

KS45KS45BKS45➁

KS45K➂

KS46KS46BKS46➁

KS46K➂

KS47KS47BKS47➁

KS47K➂

KS49KS49BKS49➁

KS49K➂

KS401KS401BKS401➁

KS401K➂

KS402KS402BKS402➁

KS402K➂


With Standard Black Knob (See Table for Other Colors, Replace B in Type Number with Other Color Code)With 1 KA1 on side #2 (H13)With 1 KA1 on side #1 (H1)With 1 KA1 on side #1 and 1 KA1 on side #2 (H2)










Spring Return from Left to Center

Operator Only ➀

Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 5, 6 or 9 only) ➂➃

KS62KS62BKS62➁

KS62K➂

KS63KS63BKS63➁

KS63K➂

KS64KS64BKS64➁

KS64K➂

KS65KS65BKS65➁

KS65K➂

KS66KS66BKS66➁

KS66K➂

KS67KS67BKS67➁

KS67K➂

KS69KS69BKS69➁

KS69K➂

KS601KS601BKS601➁

KS601K➂

KS602KS602BKS602➁

KS602K➂

Spring Return From Right to Center

Operator Only ➀

Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 4, 5 or 7 Only) ➂➃

KS72KS72BKS72➁

KS72K➂

KS73KS73BKS73➁

KS73K➂

KS74KS74BKS74➁

KS74K➂

KS75KS75BKS75➁

KS75K➂

KS76KS76BKS76➁

KS76K➂

KS77KS77BKS77➁

KS77K➂

KS79KS79BKS79➁

KS79K➂

KS701KS701BKS701➁

KS701K➂

KS702KS702BKS702➁

KS702K➂

Spring Return Both Sides to Center

Operator Only ➀

Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 5 Only) ➂➃










Top View

Side 2Side 1


KA1KA3

KA2

KA1KA3

KA2

➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.EXAMPLE: KS43K6+H13(KA1-SIDE 2)=KS43K6H13.

➁ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table at right.EXAMPLE: KS43➁ with a green gloved hand knob = KS43FG

➂ Add the key withdrawal code from key withdrawal code table below.EXAMPLE: KS43K➂ that the key can be withdrawn in the right position only = KS43K6

➃ All key operated devices are furnished as standard with Square D number E10 (key only partno. is 2941101100) key change. The following 20 additional key changes are available at noextra cost:E11-E13, E16, E21-E26, E28-E33, CH501, CH674, SR251, T107.Occasionally it is desirable to have several devices with dissimilar key changes, but all op-erable by a single master key. The following key changes with master keying provisions areavailable.

EXAMPLE: For individual key, not master keyed an E29 is chosen. The type number isKS43K6E29.

All key operators come standard with 2 keys. Replacement keys can be purchased byspecifying the key required i.e., E10, E24, E36 key only, etc.

Key No. Total Key ChangesAvailable

Master Key (E99)

Part No.

E36 thru E60 25 2941151990

3-Position Switches

➂ Code ➂ Code

4 Yes No No 8 Yes No Yes

5 No Yes No 9 No Yes Yes

6 No No Yes 10 Yes Yes Yes

7 Yes Yes No

OR

OR

OR

OR


Heavy Duty Selector Switches


Illuminated 3 Position Selector Switch OperatorsFor use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted


ContactBlock

Position

QuantityandType

Mounton

Side

Center

Left Right

Center

Left Right

Center

Left Right

Center

Left Right

Center

Left Right

Center

Left Right

Center

Left Right

Center

Left Right

Center

Left Right

KA1#2

KA3#2 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0

KA2#2 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

KA1#1

KA3#1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1

KA2#1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0



Manual Return ①

Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltages Transformer, Flashing or LED➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄With Other Color Knob and Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄


K42J➁➂K42J➁➂


K43J➁➂K43J➁➂


K44J➁➂K44J➁➂


K45J➁➂K45J➁➂


K46J➁➂K46J➁➂


K47J➁➂K47J➁➂


K49J➁➂K49J➁➂

K401J1K401J1RK401J➁K401J➁K401J➁➂K401J➁➂

K402J1K402J1RK402J➁K402J➁K402J➁➂K402J➁➂

Spring Return Left

ToCenter ①

Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄


K62J➁➂K62J➁➂


K63J➁➂K63J➁➂

K64J1K64J1RK641➁K64J➁

K64J➁➂K64J➁➂


K65J➁➂K65J➁➂


K66J➁➂K66J➁➂


K67J➁➂K67J➁➂


K69J➁➂K69J➁➂

K601J1K601J1RK601J➁K601J➁K601J➁➂K601J➁➂

K602J1K602J1RK602J➁K602J➁K602J➁➂K602J➁➂

Spring Return

Right To Center ①



K72J➁➂K72J➁➂


K73J➁➂K73J➁➂


K74J➁➂K74J➁➂


K75J➁➂K75J➁➂


K76J➁➂K76J➁➂


K77J➁➂K77J➁➂


K79J➁➂K79J➁➂

K701J1K701J1RK701J➁K701J➁K701J➁➂K701J➁➂

K702J1K702J1RK702J➁K702J➁K702J➁➂K702J➁➂

Spring Return

Both Sides To

Center ①



K52J➁➂K52J➁➂


K53J➁➂K53J➁➂


K54J➁➂K54J➁➂


K55J➁➂K55J➁➂


K56J➁➂K56J➁➂


K57J➁➂K57J➁➂


K59J➁➂K59J➁➂

K501J1K501J1RK501J➁K501J➁K501J➁➂K501J➁➂

K502J1K502J1RK502J➁K502J➁K502J➁➂K502J➁➂

Top View

Side 2Side 1


KA1KA3

KA2

KA1KA3

KA2

Non-Illuminated only.


Color

StandardKnob Gloved

Hand Knob

CoinOperated

KnobCode ➂ Type Knob

Code ➂ Type KnobCode ➂ Type

BlackRed

GreenYellowOrange

BlueWhiteAmberClear

BRGYSLWAC

B11 R8G8Y8

S11 L8W8A8C8

FBFRFGFYFSFLFWFAFC

B25 R24G24Y24

S25 L24W24A24C24

TBTRTGTY–

TL––

TC

B18 R16G16Y16

–L16

––

C16

① These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.EXAMPLE: K43J35+H(2 KA1)=K43J35FRH2

➁ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table on page 82.EXAMPLE: K43J➁ with a 60 Vac-dc voltage=K43J37

➂ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table below.EXAMPLE: K43J35➂ with a green knob = K43J35G

➃ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e. red LED usered knob) or use a clear knob.


Basic Operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 100-101Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Two Color Selector Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 79Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105


OR

OR

OR

OR



11/97

➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.EXAMPLE: KS88K11 + H13(KA1-SIDE 2) = KS88K11H13.

➁ Add the color code as chosen from knob color tableEXAMPLE: KS88➁ with a green gloved hand knob = KS88FG

➂ Add the key withdrawal code from key withdrawal code table below.EXAMPLE: KS88K➂ that the key can be withdrawn in the right position only = KS88K12

➃ All key operated devices are furnished as standard with Square D number E10 (keyonly part no. is 2941101100) key change. The following 20 additional key changes areavailable at no extra cost: E11-E13, E16, E21-E26, E28-E33, CH501, CH674, SR251, T107.Occasionally it is desirable to have several devices with dissimilar key changes, but all op-erable by a single master key. The following key changes with master keying provisions areavailable.

EXAMPLE: For individual key, not master keyed an E29 is chosen. The type number isKS88K11E29.All key operators come standard with 2 keys. Replacement keys can be purchased by spec-ifying the key required i.e., E10, E24, E36 key only, etc.

➄ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table below.EXAMPLE: K88J➄ with a 60 Vac-dc voltage = K88J37

➅ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen, (i.e., red LED usered knob) or use clear knob.

➆ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.

Non-Illuminated and Illuminated 4 Position Selector SwitchOperatorsFor use in hazardous locations – See page 98.UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted

CONTACT BLOCK REQUIRED1 — Contact

Closed0 — Contact Open

Contact Block Position Quantity and Type Mount on Side

1 0 0 0KA1#2

KA3#2

KA2#2 0 0 1 0

KA1#1

KA3#1 0 0 0 1

KA2#1 0 1 0 0

Non-Illuminated Operators Cam Type

Manual Return ➀Operator Only ➀ Without Knob With Standard Black Knob With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁ Key Operated with E10 Key (Codes 11,12,13,14,15) ➂➃

HHHH

KS88KS88BKS88 ➁

KS88K ➂

Spring Return From Left - Spring Return From Right-Maintained in the Two Mid PositionsOperator Only ➀Without Knob With Standard Black Knob With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁

HHH

KS89KS89BKS89➁

Illuminated Operators Cam Type

Manual Return ➀Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and With Other Voltages Transformer, Flashing or LED ➅Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➆With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➅With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➆

HHHHHH

K88J1K88J1RK88J➄K88J➄

K88J➄➁K88J➄➁

Spring Return From Left - Spring Return From Right-Maintained in the Two Mid Positions

Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and With Other Voltages Transformer, Flashing or LED ➅Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➆With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➅With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➆

HHHHHH

K89J1K89J1RK89J➄K89J➄

K89J➄➁K89J➄➁

Key No.Total KeyChangesAvailable

Master Key (E99)

Part No.

E36 thru E60 25 2941151990

Top View

Side 2Side 1


KA1KA3

KA2

KA1KA3

KA2


Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105





Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3131LR31LG31LY



Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3232LR32LG32LY




Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3535LR35LG35LY




Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3636LR36LG36LY



Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3737LR37LG37LY


110-120 V, 25-30 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz


Flashing

21

F1

KM2KM1

KMF1


ResistorNeon


3811

38LR38LG38LY

KM38KM11

KM38LRKM38LGKM38LY


220-240 V 25-30 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz


Flashing

47

F7

KM4KM7

KMF7


ResistorNeon

2512

KM25KM12



380-480 V, 50-60 Hz480 Vac-dc

TransformerNeon

514

KM5KM14

550 Vac-dc550-600 V, 50-60 Hz

Neon Transformer

156

KM15KM6

➂ Key Withdrawal Code:

4-Position Switches

Code

11 Yes No No Yes

12 No No No Yes

13 Yes No No No

14 Yes Yes Yes Yes

15 No Yes Yes Yes


Color

StandardKnob Gloved

Hand Knob

CoinOperated

➁ See table on page 81.

OR

OR

OR

OR


Heavy Duty Pilot Lights


Pilot Lights – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Type 4 & 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plates Not Included

Description Voltage StyleWith Red

Fresnel Color Cap

With Green Fresnel Color

Cap

With OtherColor Cap

Without Color Cap

Standard Pilot Light(Plastic fresnel

Color Cap Shown)

110-120 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz

24-28 Vac-dcFor Other Voltages See

Table ➀

TransformerTransformerFull Voltage

Transformer, Flashing or LED ➂Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➃

KP1R31KP7R31

KP35R31KP➀R31KP➀R31

KP1G31KP7G31

KP35G31KP➀G31KP➀G31

KP1 ➁KP7 ➁

KP35 ➁KP ➀➁KP ➀➁

KP1KP7

KP35KP ➀KP ➀

Push To Test Pilot Light

(Glass Color Cap Shown)

110-120 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz

24-28 Vac-dcFor Other Voltages

See Table ➀


Transformer, Flashing or LED ➂Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➃

KT1R31KT7R31

KT35R31KT➀R31KT➀R31

KT1G31KT7G31

KT35G31KT➀G31KT➀G31

KT1 ➁KT7 ➁

KT35 ➁KT ➀➁KT ➀➁

KT1KT7

KT35KT ➀KT ➀


(Glass Color Cap Shown)

120 Vac Only24-28 Vac Only

For Other VoltagesSee Table ➀➄

Resistor ➄Full Voltage ➄

Full Voltage or Resistor ➄

KTR38R31KTR35R31KTR➀R31

KTR38G31KTR35G31KTR➀G31

KTR38 ➁KTR35 ➁KTR ➀➁

KTR38KTR35KTR ➀

Pilot Light For Intrinsically

Safe Circuits(NEMA Type 4X)

Intrinsically safe equipment must not release electrical or thermal energy capa-ble of igniting certain explosive or combustible hazardous atmospheres, for which the equipment has been tested.These pilot lights are intrinsically safe when used with a suitable approved bar-rier or barrier relay (Class 8501 Type TO or NY2). These pilot lights are Factory Mutual (FM approved). Consult your local Square D Sales Office for further de-tails.These pilot lights are fully encapsulated – there are no replaceable parts – ex-cept for the SK40 ring nut. Use KN100 series plastic legend plates as shown on pages 100 and 101.

KP44R KP44G

KP44Y(YellowColorCap)

—

OperatingVoltage Range Nominal Current

V max. = 32 VI max. = 165 mA20-30 V

AC/DC 25 mA

Typical Wiring Diagrams


R

M

M O.L.

L2

321

L1

STOPSTART

L2

C

Test

L1

M

STOP

LSI

M3

(TEST) C

(TEST) C L2

L2

L1(SIG)

CR

M2

M1

L2(TEST) C

START

TEST BUTTONL1 L2

L1(SIG)

L1(SIG)

Push-To-Test Pilot Light


➀ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table on page 82.EXAMPLE: KT①R31 with a 60VAC red LED voltage=KT37LRR31

➁ Add the color code as chosen from the color cap table. EXAMPLE: KP1➁ with a bluefresnel cap = KP1L31

➂ The color cap must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., green LED use agreen color cap) or use clear cap.

➃ On neon voltages use clear color caps only.➄ On remote test pilot lights use only full voltage or resistor voltage assembly codes. Do not

choose LED, neon or transformer codes. For AC use only.

Basic Operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 100-101Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96

Push-To-Test Ground Detector Pilot Light(Contact Block Included — But NOT Legend Plate or Color Cap)

Used in pairs to indicate a grounded condition in a control circuit fed from a grounded center-tapped transformer. The Type KT50 is commonly used in press control circuits, and fulfills therequirements of the ground detector called for in ANSI B11.1 (1971), Par. E3.6.5. Consult local Square D Sales Office for proper application.

Voltage and Frequency Type

110-120 V, 50-60 Hz KT50

Color

➁ Plastic Fresnel ➁ Plastic Domed ➁ Glass

AmberBlueClearGreenRed

WhiteYellow

A31L31C31G31R31W31Y31

A9L9C9G9R9W9Y9

A6L6C6G6R6W6Y6

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type K — 30 mmHeavy Duty Joysticks


11/97

Joy Stick Operators – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Contact Blocks And Legend Plate Not Included Unless Otherwise Noted

DescriptionOperator

WithContacts

OperatorWithout

Contacts ➀

3 Position-Center

Off

Momentary Contact —Spring Return to Center

Without Latch K71H7 K71

With Latch K70H7 K70

Maintained ContactWithout Latch K73H7 K73


3 Position-Center

Off






5 Position-Center

Off






The joystick operator is ideal for applications where only one circuit is to be energized at one time. The three position joy stick closes one circuit each in Up-Down or Right-Left position with all circuits open in center position. The five position operator closes one circuit each in Up, Down, Left and Right positions with all circuits open in center position.Momentary contact operators are spring return to the center position. Maintained operators remain in each position and must be reset manually. Operators with latch cannot be operated until the latch button in center of handle is pressed.

➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage – see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type number.Use Legend Plate 9001KN900

Contact Arrangements

Operator Contact BlockType

Contact BlockLocation

(See Fig. 2)

Contact(See Fig. 2)

Handle position (with ref. to Nib, See Fig. 1)

1 2 OFF 3 4

3 Position OperatorKA3 POS 1 A 1 0 0

KA3 POS 2 A 0 0 1

3 Position Operator

KA2 POS 1 B 1 0 0

KA2 POS 2 B 0 0 1

5 Position Operator

KA1 POS 1A 0 1 0 0 0

B 1 0 0 0 0

KA1 POS 2A 0 0 0 0 1

B 0 0 0 1 0

(1) Contact Closed (0) Contact Open

Without Latch

With Latch

Figure 1

Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106

Figure 2

1.6 mm MIN - 6.3mm MAX

InchesMM

Dimensions


Heavy Duty Operators


Selector Push Button Operators – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included

Inserts are field convertible. For colors not listed, order operator without insertplus separate color insert from page 105. Up to two Type KA contact blockscan be mounted in tandem (total of four blocks). Selector push buttons cannotbe illuminated.

➀ Order color inserts from page 105.➁ Cams are not interchangeable.

Key Operated Push Button – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13

ContactBlock

Required

Two Position Operators ThreePosition

Operators

Order Contact Blocks From Pages97-98.

1 — Contact ClosedxxXXxxXxxxxxxxxxxxxF — FreexXXxX0 — Contact OpenxxxxxxxxxXxxxxxxxxxxxD — Depressed Maintained

QuantityandType

Mounton

Side

Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Center Right

F D F D F D F D F D F D F D F D F D F D F D D F D F D F D

1-KA-1#2 0 0

0 11 00 1

0 00 1

1 00 0

0 00 1

1 10 0

1 10 0

1 00 1

1 00 1

0 00 1

1 00 1

- 0- 1

1 00 1

1 00 0

1 10 0

1-KA-1#1 0 0

0 11 10 0

0 00 1

1 00 0

1 10 0

0 00 1

1 00 1

1 10 0

1 10 0

0 00 1

1 00 1

- 0- 1

1 10 0

1 00 0

1 00 1

CAM ➁ P R S T Y Z U

Color Insert Type Type Type Type Type Type Type

Without Insert ➀Black

KQ11KQ11B

KQ12KQ12B

KQ13KQ13B

KQ14KQ14B

KQ15KQ15B

KQ18KQ18B

KQ27KQ27B

Color Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 105Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 99Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 102Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106


Key operated push buttons are used wherever unauthorizeduse of a push button is to be discouraged. Examples are lock-ing a “Start” push button in the extended position or locking a“Stop” push button in the depressed position. The operator canalso be locked in the flush position –holding all contacts open.Up to two Type KA contact blocks can be mounted in tan-dem (total of four blocks).

All key operated push buttons are furnished as standard with Square D number E10 keychange.

See page 82 for other key changes (Note 4).

Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included

DescriptionPositions In Which

Push Button Can Be Locked TypeExtended Flush Depressed

Push button operable only with key in lock. Key is removable in locked position only.

X––X

–X–X

––XX

KR131KR132KR133KR137

Push button operable with or without key in lock. Push button can be locked with key only. Key removable in both locked or un-locked position.

X––X

–X–X

––XX

KR141KR142KR143KR147

Unit is set by rotating key, with button in ex-tended position. Key is removable only in this set position. When pushed, the button will then lock in position indicated at right.

––

X–

–X

KR152KR153

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type K — 30 mmHeavy Duty Operators


11/97

➀ The dial plate only is Class 9001 Type KN905. ➁ Complete Type No. by adding suffix No. from table below. Example: Type K2105➂ Complete Type No. by adding suffix No. from table below. Example: Type K2385➃ For use with 9050 Type T. Pontentiometer shaft diameter 1/4” (6 mm), 7/8” (22 mm) length.Not UL Listed, CSA Certified, or CE Mark.

Potentiometer (with Dial Plate ➀ – NEMA Types 4, 13)Watts Description Type

2

Operator only – Single PotOperator with Single Pot

Operator only – Tandem PotOperator with Tandem Pot

K20K21 ➁

K22K23 ➂

➁ ➂ Complete Type No. by adding suffix No. from table below.Example: Type K2105

Suffix➁

Ohms Suffix➁

Ohms Suffix➁

Ohms Suffix➂

Ohms

Front Rear

01023803040532390633

50100200250500

10001500200025003500

070840093510361112

5 K10 K15 K25 K35 K50 K75 K

100 K250 K

1337141516

17 ➃

500 K750 K

1.0 Meg2.5 Meg5.0 Meg5.0 Meg

8283858889

1000500010 K50 K

100 K

1000500010 K50 K

100 K

Emergency “Break Glass” Operator –UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13

Operator is held in a depressed position by a glass disc. When the glass discis broken with the hammer, button returns to a normal extended position.Package of 5 discs included with operator. For a N.C. circuit, use a 9001KA3 or the N.C. contact of a 9001KA1 or the N.C. contact of a 9001KA4.For a N.O. circuit, use the N.O. contact of a 9001KA4 or 9001KA6.

Type

K15

9001 K15 Replacement PartsDescription Part Number

Yellow bumperHammer and chain

Lower ring nutTop ring nut

Package of 5 replacement discsClip to hold hammer

310521110131052067506512232801

9001K409001K57

2540902240

Time Delay Push Button – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13

Time Delay After Release of Button

Note:When mounted in top or bottomhole of Type K enclosures, de-vice requires one additionalspace below or above operator.When mounted other than in topor bottom hole, device may re-quire two additional spaces, oneabove and one below operator.Closing plates must be installedon unused holes.

DescriptionType (All Colors)

FullGuard

ExtendedGuard

NoGuard

Timed Cont.1 N.O. and 1

N.C.

KRD1UH1 KRD2UH1 KRD3UH1

Timed Cont.2 N.O. and 2

N.C.

KRD1UH2 KRD2UH2 KRD3UH2

Timing period is adjustable from 0.1 second to 60 secondsand begins after button has been released. Devices includea package of seven color inserts for color coding the pushbutton. Contacts are quick make – quick break.

Rocker Arm Operating Lever

Allows two standard push buttons to be operated independent-ly of each other. Order push buttons and legend plates frompages 72 and 100 — specify which marking is to be inverted.

Type

K50

Alternate Action – (Push-On Push-Off) Module

This module can be added to standard 9001 Type K, KX, SK or T mo-mentary push button operators. Contact blocks mounted behind thismodule (maximum of 2) will be held in the depressed position whenthe operator is operated once and released to their normal positionwhen the operator is operated again. For a N.C. circuit, use a 9001KA3 or the N.C. contact of a 9001KA1 or the N.C. contact of a9001KA4. For a N.O. circuit, use the N.O. contact of a 9001KA4 or9001KA6.

Type

K85

Wobble Stick

For easy operation of any standardpush button.

Type

K8

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SK — 30 mm

Corrosion Resistant Operators


Non-Illuminated Momentary Push Button Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Contact Blocks And Legend Plate Not Included Unless Otherwise Noted

Description ColorOperator With 1 N.O.

and1 N.C. Contact (KA1)

Operator With (KA2)

Operator With 1 N.C. Contact(KA3)

Operator Only With No Contacts ➄

Full Guard

Black SKR1BH13 SKR1BH5 SKR1BH6 SKR1B

Red SKR1RH13 SKR1RH5 SKR1RH6 SKR1R

Green SKR1GH13 SKR1GH5 SKR1GH6 SKR1G

Universal ➀ SKR1UH13 SKR1UH5 SKR1UH6 SKR1U

Other ➁ SKR1➁H13 SKR1➁H5 SKR1➁H6 SKR1➁

No Guard





Other ➁ SKR3➁H13 SKR3➁H5 SKR3➁H6 SKR3➁

Extended Guard





Other ➁ SKR2➁ SKR2➁H5 SKR2➁H6 SKR2➁

13/8 Mushroom Button

Snap In Mushroom Button



Red ➂ SKR4R05H13 SKR4R05H5 SKR4R05H6 SKR4R05


Other ➃ SKR4➃H13 SKR4➃H5 SKR4➃H6 SKR4➃






21/4 Mushroom Button




Red ➂ SKR5R05H13 SKR5R05H5 SKR5R05H6 SKR5R05








➀ The universal push button operators include one each of the following color inserts: black,red, green, yellow, orange, blue and white.

➁ See table below.➂ Knob has the words “Emergency Stop” in raised letters highlighted in white for readability.

Available in red snap-in mushroom buttons only.➃ See table below.➄ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –

see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber. EXAMPLE: SKR24B + H2(2-KA1) = SKR24BH2

Color➁ For SKR1,2,3

Choose Color and Place Color Code in Type Number

➃ For SKR4,5,24,25Choose Color and Place

Color Code in Type Number

BlueYellowWhiteOrangeGray

LYWSE

LY–S–

Color Inserts and Mushroom Knobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 105Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SK — 30 mmCorrosion Resistant Operators


11/97

Multifunction Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate And Contact Blocks Not Included Unless Otherwise Noted

Description Color Contacts ➇ Without Contacts ➆

Both Buttons MaintainedInterlocked Assembly

Universal ➀Other ➁

SKR11UH1SKR11➁H1

SKR11USKR11➁

One Button MomentaryOne Button MaintainedInterlocked Assembly

Universal ➀Other ➁

SKR12UH1H1SKR12➁H1H1

SKR12USKR12➁

Non-Illuminated15/8" Diameter Knob

Includes Type KN179WPLegend Plate Marked

Pull To Start Push To Stop

Description Color With 2 N.C. Contacts(1 KA3, 1 KA5)

With 1 N.O. 1 N.C. Contact (1 KA1)

WithoutContacts ➆

3 POSITIONMomentary Pull-

Maintained Neutral-Momentary Push

Red ➈Green

Other ➂

SKR8RH25SKR8GH25SKR8➂H25

–––

SKR8RSKR8GSKR8➂

2 POSITIONMaintained Pull-Maintained Push

Red ➈Green

Other ➂

–––

SKR9RH13SKR9GH13SKR9➂H13

SKR9RSKR9GSKR9➂

Illuminated15/8" Diameter Knob

Includes Type KN179WP Legend Plate Marked

Pull to Start Push To Stop

Description VoltageWith Red Knob ➈

With 2 N.C. Contacts (1 KA3, 1 KA5)

With Other Color Knob With 2 N.C. Contacts

(1 KA3, 1 KA5)

With Other Color Knob Without Contacts ➆

3 POSITIONMomentary Pull-

Maintained Neutral-Momentary Push

110-120 V, 50-60 HzOther – Transformer, LED,

Flashing ➄Other – Full Voltage, Resistor,

Neon ➅

SKR8P1RH25SKR8P➃RH25

SKR8P➃RH25

SKR8P1➂H25SKR8P➃➂H25

SKR8P➃➂H25

SKR8P1➂SKR8P➃➂

SKR8P➃➂

Description Voltage With Red ➈ Knob With 1 N.O. & 1 N.C. Contact (KA1)

With Other Color Knob With 1 N.O. & 1 N.C. Contact (KA1)


2 POSITIONMaintained Pull-Maintained Push

Illuminated

110-120 V, 50-60 HzOther – Transformer, L.E.D.,

Flashing ➄Other – Full Voltage, Resistor,

Neon ➅

SKR9P1RH13SKR9P➃RH13

SKR9P➃RH13

SKR9P1➂H13SKR9P➃➂H13

SKR9P➃➂H13

SKR9P1➂SKR9P➃➂

SKR9P➃➂

➀ Universal for SKR11,12 includes 2 each of black, red, green, yellow, orange, blue, white.➁ Choose one color for each button from table and insert color code in type number.

EXAMPLE: An SKR11 with top button gray and bottom button orange = SKR11ES➂ Choose one color from table and insert color code in type number.

EXAMPLE: SKR9 with a yellow knob=SKR9Y➃ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table on page 89.

EXAMPLE: SKR8P➃ with a 277 V 50-60 Hz voltage=SKR8P8➄ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., green LED uses

green knob) or use a clear knob.➅ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.➆ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –

see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type number.

➇ SKR11UH1 has 1 KA1(1N.O., 1N.C.) and SKR12UH1H1 has 2 KA1 (2N.O., 2N.C.).➈ To obtain a red knob with “Push Emergency Stop” printed on the red knob – substitute “R05” in

place of “R”. Not available in 1 3/8” or 2 1/4”.

These colors are not available on illuminated push-pull operators.

Color SKR11, SKR12➁ SKR8, SKR9 ➂

BlackRed

GreenBlue

YellowWhite

OrangeClear

AmberGray

BRGLYWS––E

B RGLYW

S CA–

Color Inserts and Mushroom Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106


Corrosion Resistant Operators


Illuminated Push Button Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate Not Included Unless Otherwise Noted

DescriptionVoltage

andFrequency

Style

With Red ColorCap and 1 N.O.

and 1 N.C.Contact (KA1)

With Green ColorCap and 1 N.O.

and 1 N.C.Contact (KA1)

With OtherColor Cap

Without ContactBlocks ➀


Push Button

110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer SK1L1RH13 SK1L1GH13 SK1L1➄


24-28 Vac/dc Full Voltage SK1L35RH13 SK1L35GH13 SK1L35➄

For other voltagesSee Table ➁

Transformer, Flashing SK1L➁RH13 SK1L➁GH13 SK1L➁➄

Full Voltage SK1L➁RH13 SK1L➁GH13 SK1L➁➄

Resistor, Neon ➂ SK1L➁RH13 SK1L➁GH13 SK1L➁➄

LED ➃ SK1L➁RH13 SK1L➁GH13 SK1L➁➄

No GuardIlluminated

Push Button



24-28 Vac/dc Full Voltage SK2L35RH13 SK2L35GH13 SK2L35➄


Transformer, Flashing SK2L➁RH13 SK2L➁GH13 SK2L➁➄

Full Voltage SK2L➁RH13 SK2L➁GH13 SK2L➁➄

Resistor, Neon ➂ SK2L➁RH13 SK2L➁GH13 SK2L➁➄

LED ➃ SK2L➁RH13 SK2L➁GH13 SK2L➁➄

13/8 InchIlluminatedMushroom

110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer SK2L1R20H13 SK2L1G20H13

Order SK2L➁ ➄ ➅


24-28 Vac/dc Full Voltage SK2L35R20H13 SK2L35G20H13


Transformer, Flashing SK2L➁R20H13 SK2L➁G20H13

Full Voltage SK2L➁R20H13 SK2L➁G20H13

Resistor, Neon ➂ SK2L➁R20H13 SK2L➁G20H13

LED ➃ SK2L➁R20H13 SK2L➁G20H13

21/4 InchIlluminatedMushroom


Order SK2L➁ ➄ ➅


24-28 Vac/dc Full Voltage SK2L35R21H13 SK2L35G21H13


Transformer, Flashing SK2L➁R21H13 SK2L➁G21H13

Full Voltage SK2L➁R21H13 SK2L➁G21H13

Resistor, Neon ➂ SK2L➁R21H13 SK2L➁G21H13

LED ➃ SK2L➁R21H13 SK2L➁G21H13



Voltage Description Voltage Assembly CodeSeparate Light Module

Type Number


Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3131LR31LG31LY



Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3232LR32LG32LY




Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3535LR35LG35LY




Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3636LR36LG36LY



Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3737LR37LG37LY


110-120 V, 25-30 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz


Flashing

21

F1

KM2KM1

KMF1


ResistorNeon


3811

38LR38LG38LY

KM38KM11

KM38LRKM38LGKM38LY


220-240 V 25-30 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz


Flashing

47

F7

KM4KM7

KMF7


ResistorNeon

2512

KM25KM12



380-480 V, 50-60 Hz480 Vac-dc

TransformerNeon

514

KM5KM14

550 Vac-dc550-600 V, 50-60 Hz

Neon Transformer

156

KM15KM6

➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber. EXAMPLE: SK2L36R20 +H2 (2 KA1) =SK2L36R20H2.

➁ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table atright. EXAMPLE: SK2L➁ with a 240 Vac-dc voltage=SK2L25.

➂ On neon voltages use clear color caps only.➃ The color of the color cap must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., red LED

uses red color cap) or use a clear cap.➄ Add the color code as chosen from the color cap table below. EXAMPLE: SK2L25➄ with

a blue 13/8" mushroom button=SK2L25L20.➅ The only difference between a no guard (SK2L) operator and mushroom button operators is

the color cap.

Color Caps and Mushroom Knobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106

Color Caps

ColorColor Codes

SK1LSK2L

13/8 InchMushroom

21/4 InchMushroom

RedGreenBlue

YellowWhiteClear

Amber

RGLYWCA

R20G20L20Y20W20C20A20

R21G21L21Y21W21C21A21

➄ ➄ ➄

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SK — 30 mmCorrosion Resistant Selector Switches


11/97

Non-Illuminated 2 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted


ContactBlock

Position

QuantityandType

Mounton


Top View

KA1KA3

KA1#2

KA3#2 1 0 0 1

KA2 KA2#2 0 1 1 0

KA1

KA3

KA1#1

KA3#1 1 0 0 1

KA2KA2#1 0 1 1 0

CAM E D

Non-Illuminated Operators Type Type

Manual Return

Operator Only ➀Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁

SKS11SKS11BSKS11 ➁



With Standard Black Knob (See Table for Other Colors,Replace B in Type Number with Other Color Code)With 1 KA1 on Side #2 (H13)With 1 KA1 on Side #1 (H1)With 1 KA1 on Side #1 and 1 KA1 on Side #2 (H2)

SKS11BH13SKS11BH1SKS11BH2

–––

Spring Return from Left Operator Only ➀Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁


–––

Spring Return From Right Operator Only ➀Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁

–––


Side 2Side 1


➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.Example: SKS11FB+H13(KA1-Side 2) = SKS11FBH13

➁ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table below.Example: SKS11➁ with a green gloved hand knob = SKS11FG


Color

StandardKnob

GlovedHand Knob

CoinOperated

➁KnobCode

Type➁

KnobCode

Type➁

KnobCode

Type

BlackRed

GreenYellowOrange

BlueWhiteAmberClear

BRGYSLWAC

B11R8G8Y8

S11L8W8A8C8

FBFRFGFYFSFLFWFAFC

B25R24G24Y24S25L24W24A24C24

TBTRTGTY–

TL––

TC

B18R16G16Y16

–L16

––

C16

Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105

OROR

OROR


Corrosion Resistant Selector Switches


➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber. Example: SK12J35FR+H2(2 KA1) = SK12J35FRH2.

➁ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code tablebelow. Example: SK25J➁ with a 60 Vac-dc Voltage = SK25J37

➂ Add the color code as chosen from the knob color table at right. Example: SK25J35➂ witha green knob = SK25J35G

➃ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., red LED usered knob) or use a clear knob.


Illuminated 2 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted


ContactBlock

Position

QuantityandType

Mounton


Top View

KA1KA3

KA1#2

KA3#2 1 0 0 1

KA2 KA2#2 0 1 1 0

KA1KA3

KA1#1

KA3#1 1 0 0 1

KA2 KA2#1 0 1 1 0

CAM E D

Illuminated Operators Type Type

Manual Return ➀Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄

SK11J1SK11J1RSK11J➁SK11J➁

SK11J➁➂SK11J➁➂

SK12J1SK12J1RSK12J➁SK12J➂

SK12J➁➁SK12J➁➂

Spring Return from Left ➀Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄



––––––

Spring Return From Right ➀Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄

––––––




Color

StandardKnob

GlovedHand Knob

CoinOperated

➂KnobCode

Type➂

KnobCode

Type➂

KnobCode

Type

RedGreenYellowBlueWhiteAmberClear

RGYLWAC

R8G8Y8L8W8A8C8

FRFGFYFLFWFAFC

R24G24Y24L24W24A24C24

TRTGTYTL––

TC

R16G16Y16L16

––

C16

Side 2Side 1



Add form number to standard Type number, e.g. Type SK11J1 Form Y-178.

Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Boots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 95Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105



Separate Light Module Type

Number


Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3131LR31LG31LY



Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3232LR32LG32LY



24-28Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc

Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3535LR35LG35LY




Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3636LR36LG36LY



Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3737LR37LG37LY


110-120 V, 25-30 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz


Flashing

21

F1

KM2KM1

KMF1


ResistorNeon


3811

38LR38LG38LY

KM38KM11

KM38LRKM38LGKM38LY


220-240 V 25-30 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz


Flashing

47

F7

KM4KM7

KMF7


ResistorNeon

2512

KM25KM12



380-480 V, 50-60 Hz480 Vac-dc

TransformerNeon

514

KM5KM14

550 Vac-dc550-600 V, 50-60 Hz

NeonTransformer

156

KM15KM6

Two Color Selector SwitchUsed to indicate red in left position and green in right position on illuminated operators.

Knob Factory AssembledForm Number

Standard Y178

GlovedHand Y1781

OR

OR OR

OR

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SK — 30 mmCorrosion Resistant Selector Switches


11/97

Non-Illuminated 3 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted


ContactBlock

Position

QuantityandType

Mounton

Side

Center Center Center Center Center Center Center Center Center

Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right

Top View

KA1KA3

KA1#2

KA3#2 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0

KA2KA2#2 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

KA1KA3

KA1#1

KA3#1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1

KA2KA2#1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0



Manual Return

Operator Only➀

Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table)➁

SKS42SKS42BSKS42➁

SKS43SKS43BSKS43➁

SKS44SKS44BSKS44➁

SKS45SKS45BSKS45➁

SKS46SKS46BSKS46➁

SKS47SKS47BSKS47➁

SKS49SKS49BSKS49➁

SKS401SKS401BSKS401➁


With Con-tact Block(s)

With Standard Black Knob (See Table for Other Colors, Replace B in Type No. with Color Code)With 1 KA1 on side #2 (H13)With 1 KA1 on side #1 (H1)With 1 KA1 on side #1 and 1 KA1 on side #2 (H2)










Spring Return from

Left to Center

Operator Only➀


SKS62SKS62BSKS62➁

SKS63SKS63BSKS63➁

SKS64SKS64BSKS64➁

SKS65SKS65BSKS65➁

SKS66SKS66BSKS66➁

SKS67SKS67BSKS67➁

SKS69SKS69BSKS69➁



Spring Return From

Right to Center

Operator Only➀


SKS72SKS72BSKS72➁

SKS73SKS73BSKS73➁

SKS74SKS74BSKS74➁

SKS75SKS75BSKS75➁

SKS76SKS76BSKS76➁

SKS77SKS77BSKS77➁

SKS79SKS79BSKS79➁



Spring Return Both

Sides to Center

Operator Only➀


SKS52SKS52BSKS52➁

SKS53SKS53BSKS53➁

SKS54SKS54BSKS54➁

SKS55SKS55BSKS55➁

SKS56SKS56BSKS56➁

SKS57SKS57BSKS57➁

SKS59SKS59BSKS59➁



Side 2Side 1


Basic Operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 100-101Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Cams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105

OR

➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage – see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type number.EXAMPLE: SKS43FB+H13(KA1-POS 2) = SKS43FBH13.

➁ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table below.EXAMPLE: SKS43➁ with a green gloved hand knob = SKS43FG.


ColorStandard


CoinOperated

➁KnobCode

Type➁

KnobCode

Type➁

KnobCode

Type

BlackRed

GreenYellowOrange

BlueWhiteAmberClear

BRGYSLWAC

B11R8G8Y8

S11L8W8A8C8

FBFRFGFYFSFLFWFAFC

B25R24G24Y24S25L24W24A24C24

TBTRTGTY–

TL––

TC

B18R16G16Y16

–L16

––

C16

OROR

OR


Corrosion Resistant Selector Switches


Add form number to standard Type number, e.g. Type SK43J1 Form Y178.


Two Color Selector SwitchUsed to indicate red in left position and green in right position on illumi-nated operators.


Standard Y178

Gloved Hand Y1781

Voltage Assembly Codes (Con’t.)

Voltage DescriptionVoltage

AssemblyCode

SeparateLight ModuleType Number

110-120 V, 25-30 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz


Flashing

21

F1

KM2KM1

KMF1


ResistorNeon


3811

38LR38LG38LY

KM38KM11

KM38LRKM38LGKM38LY


220-240 V 25-30 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz


Flashing

47

F7

KM4KM7

KMF7


ResistorNeon

2512

KM25KM12



380-480 V, 50-60 Hz480 Vac-dc

TransformerNeon

514

KM5KM14

550 Vac-dc550-600 V, 50-60 Hz

Neon Transformer

156

KM15KM6

Illuminated 3 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted


ContactBlock

Position

QuantityandType

Mounton

Side



Top View

KA1KA3

KA1#2

KA3#2 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0

KA2 KA2#2 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

KA1KA3

KA1#1

KA3#1

0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1

KA2 KA2#1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0


Illuminated Operators Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type

Manual Return➀

















SK401J➁➂SK401J➁➂


SK402J➁➂SK402J➁➂

Spring Return Left

To Center➀

















SK601J➁➂SK601J➁➂


SK602J➁➂SK602J➁➂

Spring Return

Right To Center➀

















SK701J➁➂SK701J➁➂


SK702J➁➂SK702J➁➂

Spring Return

Both Sides To Center➀

















SK501J➁➂SK501J➁➂


SK502J➁➂SK502J➁➂

Side 2Side 1


➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.EXAMPLE: SK43J35FR+H2(2KA1) = SK43J35FRH2.

➁ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table at right.EXAMPLE: SK43J➁ with a 60 Vac-dc voltage = SK43J37.

➂ Add the color as chosen from knob color table on page 91.EXAMPLE: SK43J35➂ with a green gloved hand knob = SK43J35FG.

➃ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e. red LED usered knob) or use a clear kob.




AssemblyCode



Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3131LR31LG31LY



Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3232LR32LG32LY




Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3535LR35LG35LY




Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3636LR36LG36LY



Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3737LR37LG37LY


For additional product information and accessoriesSee Page 92

OR

OR

OR

OR


93

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved11/97

Add form number to standard Type number, e.g. Type SK43J1 Form Y178.


Two Color Selector Switch

Used to indicate red in left position and green in right position on illumi-nated operators.


Standard Y178

Gloved Hand Y1781

Voltage Assembly Codes (Con’t.)


AssemblyCode


110-120 V, 25-30 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz


Flashing

21

F1

KM2KM1

KMF1


ResistorNeon


3811

38LR38LG38LY

KM38KM11

KM38LRKM38LGKM38LY


220-240 V 25-30 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz


Flashing

47

F7

KM4KM7

KMF7


ResistorNeon

2512

KM25KM12


380 Vac-dc Neon

13 KM13

380-480 V, 50-60 Hz480 Vac-dc

TransformerNeon

514

KM5KM14

550 Vac-dc550-600 V, 50-60 Hz

Neon

Transformer156

KM15KM6

Illuminated 3 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13

For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted


ContactBlock

Position

QuantityandType

Mounton

Side



Top View

KA1KA3

KA1#2

KA3#2 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0

KA2 KA2#2 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

KA1KA3

KA1#1

KA3#1

0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1

KA2 KA2#1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

CAM

B C D E F G J L M

Illuminated Operators Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type

Manual Return

➀

Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED

➃

Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor

➄

With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED

➃

With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor

➄

SK42J1SK42J1RSK42J

➁

SK42J

➁

SK42J

➁➂

SK42J

➁➂

SK43J1SK43J1RSK43J

➁

SK43J

➁

SK43J

➁➂

SK43J

➁➂

SK44J1SK44J1RSK44J

➁

SK44J

➁

SK44J

➁➂

SK44J

➁➂

SK45J1SK45J1RSK45J

➁

SK45J

➁

SK45J

➁➂

SK45J

➁➂

SK46J1SK46J1RSK46J

➁

SK46J

➁

SK46J

➁➂

SK46J

➁➂

SK47J1SK47J1RSK47J

➁

SK47J

➁

SK47J

➁➂

SK47J

➁➂

SK49J1SK49J1RSK49J

➁

SK49J

➁

SK49J

➁➂

SK49J

➁➂

SK401J1SK401J1RSK401J

➁

SK401J

➁

SK401J

➁➂

SK401J

➁➂


➁

SK402J

➁

SK402J

➁➂

SK402J

➁➂

Spring Return Left

To Center

➀


➃


➄


➃


➄

SK62J1SK62J1RSK62J

➁

SK62J

➁

SK62J

➁➂

SK62J

➁➂

SK63J1SK63J1RSK63J

➁

SK63J

➁

SK63J

➁➂

SK63J

➁➂

SK64J1SK64J1RSK64J

➁

SK64J

➁

SK64J

➁➂

SK64J

➁➂

SK65J1SK65J1RSK65J

➁

SK65J

➁

SK65J

➁➂

SK65J

➁➂

SK66J1SK66J1RSK66J

➁

SK66J

➁

SK66J

➁➂

SK66J

➁➂

SK67J1SK67J1RSK67J

➁

SK67J

➁

SK67J

➁➂

SK67J

➁➂

SK69J1SK69J1RSK69J

➁

SK69J

➁

SK69J

➁➂

SK69J

➁➂


➁

SK601J

➁

SK601J

➁➂

SK601J

➁➂


➁

SK602J

➁

SK602J

➁➂

SK602J

➁➂

Spring Return

Right To Center

➀


➃


➄


➃


➄

SK72J1SK72J1RSK72J

➁

SK72J

➁

SK72J

➁➂

SK72J

➁➂

SK73J1SK73J1RSK73J

➁

SK73J

➁

SK73J

➁➂

SK73J

➁➂

SK74J1SK74J1RSK74J

➁

SK74J

➁

SK74J

➁➂

SK74J

➁➂

SK75J1SK75J1RSK75J

➁

SK75J

➁

SK75J

➁➂

SK75J

➁➂

SK76J1SK76J1RSK76J

➁

SK76J

➁

SK76J

➁➂

SK76J

➁➂

SK77J1SK77J1RSK77J

➁

SK77J

➁

SK77J

➁➂

SK77J

➁➂

SK79J1SK79J1RSK79J

➁

SK79J

➁

SK79J

➁➂

SK79J

➁➂


➁

SK701J

➁

SK701J

➁➂

SK701J

➁➂


➁

SK702J

➁

SK702J

➁➂

SK702J

➁➂

Spring Return

Both Sides To Center

➀


➃


➄


➃


➄

SK52J1SK52J1RSK52J

➁

SK52J

➁

SK52J

➁➂

SK52J

➁➂

SK53J1SK53J1RSK53J

➁

SK53J

➁

SK53J

➁➂

SK53J

➁➂

SK54J1SK54J1RSK54J

➁

SK54J

➁

SK54J

➁➂

SK54J

➁➂

SK55J1SK55J1RSK55J

➁

SK55J

➁

SK55J

➁➂

SK55J

➁➂

SK56J1SK56J1RSK56J

➁

SK56J

➁

SK56J

➁➂SK56J➁➂






SK501J➁➂SK501J➁➂


SK502J➁➂SK502J➁➂

Side 2Side 1


➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.EXAMPLE: SK43J35FR+H2(2KA1) = SK43J35FRH2.

➁ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table at right.EXAMPLE: SK43J➁ with a 60 Vac-dc voltage = SK43J37.

➂ Add the color as chosen from knob color table on page 91.EXAMPLE: SK43J35➂ with a green gloved hand knob = SK43J35FG.

➃ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e. red LED usered knob) or use a clear kob.




AssemblyCode



Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3131LR31LG31LY



Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3232LR32LG32LY




Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3535LR35LG35LY




Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3636LR36LG36LY



Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

3737LR37LG37LY


For additional product information and accessoriesSee Page 92

OR

OR

OR

OR


Corrosion Resistant Selector Switches and Potentiometers


11/97

➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type num-ber.EXAMPLE: SKS88FB + H13(KA1-SIDE 2) = SKS88FBH13.

➁ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table at right.EXAMPLE: SKS88➁ with a green gloved hand knob = SKS88FG.

➂ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from Voltage Assembly Code Table on page 93.EXAMPLE: SK88J➂ with a 60 Vac-Vdc voltage = SK88J37.

➃ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., red LED usered knob) or use a clear knob.

➄ On neon voltages, use clear knobs only.

Non-Illuminated and Illuminated 4 Position Selector Switch Oper-ators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted. For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.

CONTACT BLOCK REQUIRED

1 — Contact Closed

0 — Contact Open

Contact Block Position Quantity and Type Mount on Side

1 0 0 0

Top View

KA1

KA3

KA1#2

KA3#2

KA2KA2#2 0 0 1 0

KA1

KA3

KA1#1

KA3#1 0 0 0 1

KA2KA2#1 0 1 0 0

Non-Illuminated Operators Cam Type

Manual Return Operator Only ➀ Without Knob With Standard Black Knob With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁

HHH

SKS88SKS88BSKS88➁

Spring Return From Left Spring Return From Right Maintained in the Two Mid Positions Operator Only ➀ Without Knob

With Standard Black Knob With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁

HHH

SKS89SKS89BSKS89➁


Manual Return ➀ Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Without Knob and With Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃ Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄ With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃ With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄

HHHHHH

SK88J1SK88J1RSK88J➂SK88J➂

SK88J➂➁SK88J➂➁

Spring Return From Left Spring Return From Right Maintained in the Two Mid Positions Operator Only ➀ Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Without Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃ Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄ With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃ With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄

HHHHHH

SK89J1SK89J1RSK89J➂SK89J➂

SK89J➂➁SK89J➂➁

i

Side 2Side 1



➅ The dial plate only is Class 9001 Type SKN905.➈ For use with 9050 Type T.♦ Potentiometer shaft diameter = 1/4" (6 mm), length = 7/8" (22 mm).Not UL Listed, CSA Certified, or CE Marked.

Black and orange are opaque and for use on non-illuminated operators only.

Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105

Potentiometer♦ (with Dial Plate ➅)Watts Description Type

2

Operator only – Single Pot Operator with Single Pot Operator only – Tandem PotOperator with Tandem Pot

SK-20SK-21 ➆SK-22SK-23 ➇

➆ ➇ Complete Type No. by adding suffix No. from table below.Example: Type SK2105 or SK2385

Suffix➆

Ohms Suffix➆

Ohms Suffix➆

Ohms Suffix➇

Ohms

Front Rear

01023803040532390633

50 K100 K200 K250 K500 K

1000 K1500 K2000 K2500 K3500 K

070840093510361112

500010 K15 K25 K35 K50 K75 K

100 K250 K

1337141516

17➈

500 K750 K

1.0 Meg2.5 Meg5.0 Meg5.0 Meg

8283858889

1000500010 K50 K

100 K

1000500010 K50 K

100 K


ColorStandard


CoinOperated

➁KnobCode

Type➁

KnobCode

Type➁

KnobCode

Type

BlackRed

GreenYellowOrange

BlueWhiteAmberClear

BRGYSLWAC

B11 R8G8Y8

S11 L8W8A8C8

FBFRFGFYFSFLFWFAFC

B25 R24G24Y24

S25 L24W24A24C24

TBTRTGTY–

TL––

TC

B18 R16G16Y16

–L16

––

C16

OR

OR

OR

OR


Corrosion Resistant Pilot Lights


Pilot Lights – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate Not Included.

Description Voltage Style

With Red Fresnel Color

Cap

With Green Fresnel Color

Cap

With Other Color Cap

Without Color Cap

StandardPilot Light

(Plastic fresnel color cap shown)

110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer SKP1R31 SKP1G31 SKP1➁ SKP1

220-240 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer SKP7R31 SKP7G31 SKP7➁ SKP7

24-28 Vac-dc Full Voltage SKP35R31 SKP35G31 SKP35➁ SKP35

For other voltagessee Table ➀

Transformer, Flashing or LED ➂ SKP➀R31 SKP➀G31 SKP➀➁ SKP➀

Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➃ SKP➀R31 SKP➀G31 SKP➀➁ SKP➀

Push-To-TestPilot Light


110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer SKT1R31 SKT1G31 SKT1➁ SKT1

220-240 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer SKT7R31 SKT7G31 SKT7➁ SKT7

24-28 Vac-dc Full Voltage SKT35R31 SKT35G31 SKT35➁ SKT35

For other voltagessee Table ➀

Transformer, Flashing or LED ➂ SKT➀R31 SKT➀G31 SKT➀➁ SKT➀

Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➃ SKT➀R31 SKT➀G31 SKT➀➁ SKT➀

Remote TestPilot Light


120 Vac Only Resistor ➄ SKTR38R31 SKTR38G31 SKTR38➁ SKTR38

24-28 Vac Only Full Voltage ➄ SKTR35R31 SKTR35G31 SKTR35➁ SKTR35

For other voltagessee Tables ➀➁➄ Full Voltage or Resistor➄ SKTR➀R31 SKTR➀➄G31 SKTR➀➁➄ SKTR➀

Pilot Light For Intrinsically Safe Circuits(NEMA 4X)

Intrinsically safe equipment must not release electrical or thermal en-ergy capable of igniting certain explosive or combustible hazardous at-mosphere, for which the equipment has been tested.These pilot lights are intrinsically safe when used with a suitable ap-proved barrier or barrier relay (Class 8501 Type TO or NY2). These pi-lot lights are Factory Mutual (FM approved). Consult your local Square D Sales Office for further details.These pilot lights are fully encapsulated — there are no replaceable parts — except for the SK40 ring nut. Use KN100 series plastic legend plates as shown on pages 100 and 101

KP44R KP44G

KP44Y(YellowColorCap)

–

Operating Volt-age Range Nominal Current

V max = 32 VI max = 165 mA

20-30 Vac/dc 25 mA

Typical Push-To-Test Wiring Diagram

Typical Remote Test Pilot Light Wiring Diagram

Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 96Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106

R

M

M O.L.

L2

321

L1

STOPSTART

L2

C

Test

L1

M

STOP

LSI

M3

(TEST) C

(TEST) C L2

L2

L1(SIG)

CR

M2

M1

L2(TEST) C

START

TEST BUTTONL1 L2

L1(SIG)

L1(SIG)

➀ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table, page 93.EXAMPLE: SKT➀R31 with a 60Vac red LED voltage = SKT37LRR31.

➁ Add the color code as chosen from the color cap table below.EXAMPLE: SKP1➁ with a blue fresnel cap = SKP1L31.

➂ The color cap must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., green LED use agreen color cap) or use a clear cap.

➃ On neon voltages use clear color caps only.➄ Use only full voltage or resistor voltage assembly codes on remote test pilot lights. Do not

choose LED, or neon transformer codes. For AC use only.

Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Light Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96

Color Caps

Color

➁ PlasticFresnel

➁ PlasticDomed


WhiteYellow

A31L31C31G31R31W31Y31

A9L9C9G9R9W9Y9


Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K, SK, KX and T - 30 mmLight Modules


11/97

Standard Light Modules for Types K, SK,. and KX Control Units ➃

For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.• Neon type light modules — use CLEAR color caps only.• LED light modules require the color cap color and the LED color be the same or use a clear color cap.

Shallow Depth Light Modules For Types K and SK Control UnitsFor use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Reduces the depth of illuminated push buttons with contact blocks by over 33%.• LED light modules require the color cap color and the LED color be the same or use a clear color cap.

➀ 9001 K, SK, KX.➁ Do not use on any remote test version pilot light.➂ LED lamps shown here will also function in Class 9001 Type J pilot lights.➃ For Series A through F light modules – see page 106.➄ All light modules with a LED above 12 V use a 14 V Bipolar LED.➅ 9001K, SK, T

Voltage Description

For UseWith Single Lamp Ill.

Operators as Indicated➀

Light Module

Type No. ➄

Voltage Assembly

CodeRating

Replacement Lamps ➂ ➃

LampNumber(ANSI)

Lamp PartNumber ➄


Full VoltageLED RedLED GreenLED Yellow

AllAll Except ➁All Except ➁All Except ➁


3131LR31LG31LY

0.9 VA0.65 VA0.65 VA0.65 VA

755 2550101020650880520165088052036508805202



AllAll Except ➁ All Except ➁All Except ➁


3232LR32LG32LY

1.2 VA0.50 VA0.50 VA0.50 VA

756 2550101037650880520165088052036508805202

18 Vac-dc Resistor All KM33 33 1.4 VA 756 2550101037



AllAll Except ➁ All Except ➁ All Except ➁


3535LR35LG35LY

1.2 VA0.50 VA0.50 VA0.50 VA

757 2550101002650880520465088052066508805205




AllAll Except ➁All Except ➁ All Except ➁


3636LR36LG36LY

2.6 VA0.50 VA0.50 VA0.50 VA

48MB 2550101025650880520465088052066508805205



AllAll Except ➁All Except ➁ All Except ➁


3737LR37LG37LY

3.0 VA0.50 VA0.50 VA0.50 VA

60MB 2550101026650880520465088052066508805205

110-120 V, 25-30 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz

TransformerTransformerFlashing

All Except ➁ All Except ➁ All Except ➁

KM2KM1KMF1

21F1

2.2 VA2.4 VA0.85 VA

1490755267

255010100325501010202550101036

120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc

ResistorFull VoltageNeonLED RedLED GreenLED Yellow

AllAllAll Except ➁All Except ➁All Except ➁All Except ➁

KM38KM38KM11KM38LRKM38LGKM38LY

38381138LR38LG38LY

3.0 VA3.0 VA0.2 VA4.0 VA4.0 VA4.0 VA

120MB120MBNE51H

255010102725501010272550101013650880520465088052066508805205

208-220 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer All Except ➁ KM3 3 2.5 VA 755 2550101020

220-240 V, 25-30 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz



KM4KM7KMF7

47F7

2.2 VA2.0 VA2.0 VA

1490755267

255010100325501010202550101036


ResistorNeon

All Except ➁ All Except ➁ and KX

KM25KM12

2512

6.0 VA0.3 VA

120MBNE51H

25501010272550101013

277 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer All Except ➁ KM8 8 2.4 VA 755 2550101020

380 Vac-dc Neon All Except ➁ and KX KM13 13 0.4 VA NE51H 2550101013

380-480 V, 50-60 Hz480 Vac-dc

TransformerNeon


KM5KM14

514

2.8 VA0.5 VA

755NE51H

25501010202550101013

550 Vac-dc550-600 V, 50-60 Hz

NeonTransformer

All Except ➁ and KXAll Except ➁

KM15KM6

156

0.6 VA2.5 VA

NE51H755

25501010132550101020

Replacement lamps for Series G 120Vac LED Light Modules➂

Voltage Description Lamp Part Number

120 Vac Only LED Red 6508805207

120 Vac Only LED Green 6508805209

120 Vac Only LED Yellow 6508805208

Voltage DescriptionFor Use With Single

Lamp Ill. Operators as Indicated ➅

Light Module Type No. ➄

Voltage Assembly

CodeRating

Replacement Lamps ➂ ➃

Lamp Number(ANSI)

Lamp PartNumber ➄


Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

All Except ➁ and KXAll Except ➁ and KXAll Except ➁ and KXAll Except ➁ and KX


5555LR55LG55LY

1.2 VA0.5 VA0.5 VA0.5 VA

757 2550101002650880520465088052066508805205


Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

All Except ➁ and KXAll Except ➁ and KXAll Except ➁ and KXAll Except ➁ and KX


5858LR58LG58LY

3.0 VA0.5 VA0.5 VA0.5 VA

120MB 2550101027650880520465088052066508805205

2.78 in70.61 mm

1.75 in44.45 mm

StandardDuty

ShallowDepth

1.8948.01

1.8747.50

1.1228.45

1.7343.94

1.8747.50

Side View Top View

Side Viewshown with 9001 KA contact block

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mm

Contact Blocks


For push buttons or two position selector switches (Types K or SKS11, K or SKS12, K orSKS25, K or SKS34, K or SK11J, K or SK12J, K or SK25J and K or SK34J) only. For se-quencing or overlapping contacts on other operators — consult local Square D Sales Office.

Standard Contact BlocksDescription Symbol Type

(Clear Cover)

KA1

(Green Cover)

KA2

(Red Cover)

KA3

(Clear Cover)

N.O. ContactEarly Closing

KA4

(Red Cover)

N.C. ContactLate Opening

KA5

(Green Cover)


KA6

Additional Circuit Arrangements AvailableSequencing N.O. Contact of

KA4 closes beforeN.O. Contact on

KA1 KA4 KA1

Order OneType KA4 andOne Type KA1

Overlapping N.O. Contact of

KA4 closesbefore N.C.

Contact of KA5Opens

KA4 KA5


Minimum order quantity is 25.

Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not FINGERSAFE®

Contact Blocks, But Provide:• Terminals that accept ring tongue/fork tongue connectors• Short single circuit contact blocks (0.75" deep vs. 0.97" deep

on the FINGERSAFE® Contact Blocks)• Same as old style Series G product available prior to 3/89. • Use form Y238 (add to catalog # as suffix)

Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not FINGERSAFE® Contact Blocks, But Have “Quick Connect” Terminals.

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 107Maximum Block Usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 103

Symbol

Contact BlocksWith Binder Head Screws

(not Fingersafe)

Gold Flashed ContactsWith Standard

Pressure Wire Terminals

Type Quantity Type

KA21 25-Up KA31

KA22 25-Up KA32

KA23 25-Up KA33

N.O. EarlyClosing

KA24 25-Up KA34


KA25 25-Up KA35

Symbol Type Symbol Type

KA1G

N.O. Contact Early Closing

KA4G

KA2GN.C. Contact Late Opening

KA5G

KA3G


KA6G

Symbol Type

KA12

KA13

Maximum Current Ratings For Control Circuit Contacts – Types KA1-KA6, KA21-25, KA31-35, KA1G-KA6G

Volts

AC

Volts

DC

Inductive (NEMA Type A600)35% Power Factor Resistive 75%

Power FactorMake, Break

and ContinuousAmperes

Inductive and Resistive (NEMA Type P600)

Make Break ContinuousCarryingAmperes

Make and Break Continuous

CarryingAmperes

Amperes VA Amperes VA KA1 KA2KA3 KA4 KA5

KA6

120240480600

60301512

7200720072007200

6.03.01.51.2

720720720720

10101010

10101010

125250600

1.10.550.2

1.10.550.2

1.1––

1.10.550.2

101010

The Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks have been improved. The most noticeable change is that the terminals are Fingersafe contact blocks (meeting VDE 0106 Part 100). They also have one screw mounting and captive backed out plus/minus terminal screws. These contact blocks still use the same reliable double break direct acting contacts used since 1965. Because of the wiping action of these contacts, they are suitable for use with programmable controllers. All contact blocks listed below will accept up to 2 #12-#24 solid or stranded wires. Types KA1, KA3, KA31, and KA33 NC contacts are direct opening.

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mmReed Contact Blocks & Hazardous Location Information


11/97

In hazardous locations, it is not always required to use explosion-proofequipment like the Class 9001 Type BR control stations. It can savemoney to know what type of hazardous location exists. If you're not surewhat type of hazardous location exists, the “Summary of Classification”Chart may help. If not, contact your local electrical inspector. When youknow what class, division, and group(s) exists, see the table in the lowerlefthand corner of this page for what Square D has to offer.

① An intrinsically safe system requires either a Class 8501 Type TO or NY2 barrier relay or anintrinsically safe barrier to restrict the energy available in the area classified as a hazardousarea to a level less than that required to cause an explosion. In an intrinsically safe system,any non-illuminated Class 9001 operator or control station with standard contacts can beused. No illuminated operators, except the Class 9001 Type KP44 intrinsically safe pilot light,may be used.

➁ Any Class 9001 Type K, SK or KX operator can be used in an area classified as Class I, Divi-sion 2 hazardous locations.1. Only logic (KA40 series) or power (KA50 series) reed contact blocks are used.2. All Type K and SK illuminated operators are UL approved for use in Class I Division 2

areas. 3. Type KX illuminated operators do not use 4 lamp light modules, or 2 lamp light modules

other than the transformer type. 4. The operators are mounted in Type KY, KYSS, KYAF, SKY enclosures.

➂ Any Class 9001 Type K, SK, or KX operator mounted in a Class 9001 Type KY, KYSS, KYAF,SKY enclosure may be used, except potentiometer operators.

For ➁ and ➂: UL Listed: File E10054(N), CCN NOIV.For : Add Form Y243 to single lamp Push To Test pilot lights.

Summary Of Classification Chart

Class Division Group

I. Gas 1. Hazard May ExistMay Exist In Atmosphere Under Normal Operating Conditions.

A. Acetylene

B. Hydrogen and Manufactured Gases containing Hydrogen

C. Petrochemicals (e.g. ethylene)

D. Petrochemicals (e.g. alcohol)

2. Potential HazardA. May be present in

atmosphere only under abnormal circumstances.

B. Location adjacent to Division 1 location.

A. Acetylene

B. Hydrogen and Manufactured Gases Containing Hydrogen



II. Dust 1. Hazard May ExistMay Exist In Atmosphere Under Normal Operating Conditions.

E. Conductive and Combustible Dust (Resistivity <105 ohms/cm)

F. Carbonaceous Dusts (Resistivity >102 ohm/cm but ≤ 108ohm/cm)

G. Non-Conductive Combustible Dust (Resistivity > = 105 ohms/cm)




III. Fibers1. Production Areas Easily Ignitable Fibers or Flyings

2. Handling and Storage Areas Easily Ignitable Fibers or Flyings

ForUse

Class Division Group(s)

I 1 A 1. Intrinsically Safe System ①

I 1 B, C, D 1.2.

9001 BR stationIntrinsically Safe System ①

I 2 A1.

2.

9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➁Intrinsically Safe System ①

I 2 B, C, D

1.2.

3.

9001 BR station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➁Intrinsically Safe System ①

II 1 E, F, G 1.2.


II 2 E, F

1.2.

3.


II 2 G

1.2.

3.

9001 BR station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➂Intrinsically Safe System ①

III 1, 2 –

1.2.

3.

9001 BR Station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➂Intrinsically Safe System ①

All contact blocks listed below will accept #12-18 solid or stranded wire.

The maximum number of logic and/or power reed contact blocks per opera-tor is as indicated on page 103 for standard contact blocks, except:• On 3 position selector switches with cams “C,” “D,” “E,” “F,” “G,” “L,” or “M”

mount reed blocks on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tan-dem.

• On 4 position selector switches, mount reed blocks on one side only (ei-ther side), maximum 2 in tandem.

• On joysticks or on Type KR8 or SKR8 push-pull operators, mount reed blockson one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem.

The power reed contact blocks can be used with standard industrial relays and starters throughNEMA Size 4. Minimum voltage is 5 volts and the minimum current is 1 mA.➃ Inductive Rating – 35% Power Factor.➄ Inductive and Resistive Ratings.

Hermetically Sealed Logic Reed Contact BlocksSuitable for use on low energy level circuits

Description Symbol Type

KA41

KA42

KA43

KA44

KA45

Max. Volts AC/DCMaximum Load

Res. Ind. Cont.32/30

120/1000.25 A 8 VA

0.10 A3 VA

0.5 A0.5 A

Hermetically Sealed Power Reed Contact BlocksDescription Symbol Type

KA51

KA52

KA53

KA54

KA55

Volts

AC NEMA Type C300 ➃Make Break Continuous

Carrying AmpsAmps VA Amps VA

120240

10.005.00

12001200

1.0000.500

120120

3.03.0

Volts

DC NEMA Type Q150 ➄Make Break Continuous


115 0.50 58 0.50 58 3.0

Pilot Light For Intrinsically Safe Circuits — NEMA Type 4XIntrinsically safe equipment must not release electrical or thermal en-

ergy capable of igniting certain explosive or combustible hazardous at-mosphere, for which the equipment has been tested.

Listed below are pilot lights that are intrinsically safe when used with a suitable approved barrier or barrier relay (Class 8501 Type TO or NY2. These pilot lights are Factory Mutual FM# J.I. OH4A2,AX,3610 (FM ap-proved). Consult your local Square D Sales Office for further details.

These pilot lights are fully encapsulated – there are no replaceable parts – except for the SK40 ring nut. Use KN100 series plastic legend plates as shown on pages 100 and 101.

OperatingVoltageRange

NominalCurrent

LensColor Type

V max. = 32 V 20-30 VAC/DC 25 mA

RedGreenYellow

KP44RKP44GKP44YI max. = 165 mA

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K and SK

"H" Numbers


The design of the Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks allowsthem to be mounted side by side and/or in tandem.

The system illustrated below has been set up to enable an op-erator and a particular arrangement of contact blocks to bespecified by a single type number. Operators and contactblocks will be shipped completely assembled.

EXAMPLE: A Type KR1B push button with 2 Type KA1 contactblocks would be Class 9001 Type KR1BH2.

For Types K and SK

Suffix No.(Add to

OperatorType No.)

Positions

1 2 3 4 5 6

H1H2H3H4H5H6H7H8H9

H10H11H12H13H14H15H16H17H18H19

KA1KA1KA1KA1KA2KA3KA2KA3KA4KA4KA1KA2

KA2KA2KA1KA3KA1

KA1KA1KA1

KA2KA3KA1KA5KA1KA3KA1KA3KA3KA3KA1KA1KA1

KA1KA1

KA2

KA2

KA2KA3KA1

KA1

KA1KA3

KA3

KA1KA3KA1

H21 KA2 KA3

H23H24H25H26H27H28H29

KA1KA1KA5KA1KA3KA1KA1


KA1

KA4KA3

KA1

KA1

KA5

KA1

KA1

KA1

KA3

H31H32H33H34

KA2

KA1KA5

KA2KA1KA3KA1

KA1

KA3KA1

H36H37H38H39H40H41H42H43H44H45H46H47H48



KA3

KA2KA2

KA3

KA3KA4

KA2KA3KA4KA2KA2

KA3KA2KA2KA5KA4

KA3 KA3

H50H51H52H53H54H55H56H57H58H59H60H61H62H63H64

KA5KA5KA3KA4KA4KA1KA2KA5

KA1KA1KA2KA1KA1KA3


KA2

KA3

KA3

KA2KA2KA2

KA1KA1KA5KA3KA3KA2

KA3KA4

KA2

KA5

KA1

KA3

Top View

“H” Numbers not shown in their sequence are no longer used.

Suffix No.(Add to

OperatorType No.)

Positions

1 2 3 4 5 6

H66 KA3 KA1 KA3 KA1

H71H72H73H74H75H76H77H78H79H80H81

KA3KA3KA1KA1KA1KA1KA1KA1KA3KA4KA1

KA3KA5KA1KA2KA3KA2

KA2KA3KA4KA1

KA3

KA3KA5KA3KA2KA1

KA5KA2

KA3

KA5KA3KA2

KA5KA5KA5KA3

KA3KA2

H82H83

KA12KA35

KA12KA33

KA13 KA13

H86H87

KA3KA3

KA2KA2

KA3KA3 KA2 KA3

H89H90H91H92H93H94H95



KA3KA1KA3KA3KA1

KA3KA2KA2KA5KA3

KA3

KA3KA5KA3

KA3KA3

H97H98H99H100

KA1KA1KA2KA1

KA3KA1KA2KA3

KA1KA2KA1

KA2KA2KA2KA2

KA2KA2

H101H102H103H104H105H106H107


KA2KA3KA1KA1

KA31KA2

KA2

KA3KA1

KA5

KA2KA3KA3KA2

KA2

KA2

KA2

KA2

H109H110H111H112H113H114

KA3KA3KA4KA33KA1KA21

KA3KA3KA4KA33KA1

KA2KA3KA4

KA5

KA3KA5

KA3 KA3

H115H116H117H118H119H120H121H122



KA5KA3KA1

KA5KA3KA3

KA3KA2KA2

KA3

KA5KA5

KA2

H124H125H126H127H128H129H130H131H132H133H134H135H136H137H138H139H140H141H142H143H144H145H146H147H148H152H153H154H155H156H157H158H159

KA5KA42KA43KA41KA2KA2KA2KA2KA3KA3KA3KA3KA45KA3KA5KA44KA43KA1KA3


KA3KA5

KA3

KA2

KA3KA2

KA45KA3KA5

KA43KA1KA1K85

KA52


KA2KA1

KA3

KA2


KA41KA5

KA53

KA2KA1KA1KA3KA3

KA3

KA2

KA3

KA2KA2

KA44KA2

KA4

KA2

KA1

KA3KA2

KA2

KA2KA2

KA2

H161H162H163H164H165H166H167H168H170H171H172H173H174H175H176H177H178H179

KA52KA2K85K85

KA55KA22

KA54KA53KA23KA54KA1KA6KA4KA3K85

KA53

K85

KA22KA23KA22KA51KA51KA23KA51KA3KA2

KA4

KA55

KA5KA4KA4

KA1KA5

KA3

KA4

KA51

KA3KA5

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mmLegend Plates


11/97

➀ Legend plate has red background with silver letters.➁ Legend plate has red background with black letters.

StandardMarkings

Plastic Legend PlatesFor Use With Types K and SK Operators

Aluminum Legend PlatesFor Use With Type K Operators

1.7" Square 21/4" Square 21/2" SquareBlack

Legend

KN200

BlackLegend

KN300

BlueLegend

KN800

Silver Legend

with Black Letters

WhiteLegend

with Black

Letters

Black Legend

with White

Letters

Silver Legend

with Black

Letters

White Legend

with Black

Letters

Black Legend

with White

Letters

Silver Legend

withBlack

Letters

White Legend

with Black

Letters

Black Legend

with White

Letters

For Push Button or Pilot Light

BlankBlank(red)StartStopOnOff

Emerg. StopForwardReverseCloseOpenDown

UpFastSlowHighLowInch

InJogJog For.Jog Rev.LowerOut

ResetRunStart JogTestRaiseDecrease

IncreaseLeftRightCycle StartFeed StartCycle Stop

Motor RunMotor StopPower OnPull To StartPush To Stop

KN200SPKN200RP ➁KN201SPKN202RP ➁KN203SPKN204RP ➁

KN205RP ➁KN206SPKN207SPKN208SPKN209SPKN210SP

KN211SPKN212SPKN213SPKN214SPKN215SPKN216SP




KN236SPKN237SPKN238SP

N/A

KN200WPKN200RP ➁KN201WPKN202RP ➁KN203WPKN204RP ➁

KN205RP ➁KN206WPKN207WPKN208WPKN209WPKN210WP

KN211WPKN212WPKN213WPKN214WPKN215WPKN216WP




KN236WPKN237WPKN238WP

N/A

KN200BPKN200RP ➁KN201BPKN202RP ➁KN203BPKN204RP ➁

KN205RP ➁KN206BPKN207BPKN208BPKN209BPKN210BP

KN211BPKN212BPKN213BPKN214BPKN215BPKN216BP




KN236BPKN237BPKN238BP

N/A








KN179SP








KN179WP








KN179BP








KN779SP








KN779WP








KN779BP

KN200KN200R ➀KN201KN202 ➀KN203KN204 ➀

KN205 ➀KN206KN207KN208KN209KN210

KN211KN212KN213KN214KN215KN216




KN236KN237KN238

N/A

KN300KN300R ➀KN301KN302 ➀KN303KN304 ➀

KN305 ➀KN306KN307KN308KN309KN310





KN336KN337KN338

KN379

KN800KN800R ➀KN801KN802 ➀KN803KN804 ➀

KN805 ➀KN806KN807KN808KN809KN810





KN836KN837KN838

N/A

For Selector Switch or Selector Push Button

For.-Rev.Hand-Auto.High-LowJog-RunMan.-Auto.Off-On

On-OffOpen-CloseRaise-LowerRun-JogSlow-FastStart-Stop

Up-DownLow-HighStop-StartLeft-RightOn-AutoAuto-Off-Hand

For.-Off-Rev.Hand-Off-Auto.Man.-Off-Auto.Open-Off-CloseUp-Off-DownLow-Off-High

Jog-Stop-RunHigh-Low-OffHigh-Off-LowAuto-Man.-Off





KN267SPKN270SPKN277SPKN278SP





KN267WPKN270WPKN277WPKN278WP





KN267BPKN270BPKN277BPKN278BP



































KN267KN270KN277KN278











Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mm

Legend Plate Order Information


Other colors available:

The maximum number of characters and lines given above is a practical maximum and isbased on a minimum size of characters to facilitate easy reading.

Legend Plate Description Type

KN100PPlastic

Standard Markings Select fromTable on p. 100

Special Marking(Specify Marking

Required)

Silver Field, Black Letters KN199SPWhite Field, Black Letters KN199WPRed Field, Black Letters KN199RP

Black Field, White Letters KN199BP

KN200


Specify Marking(Specify Marking

Required)

Black Field KN299

Red Field KN299R

KN200P(Plastic)



Required)



KN300



Required)

Black Field KN399

Red Field KN399R

KN400Blank KN400

Any Marking (Specify Marking) KN499

KN500

Standard Markings Select fromTable Below


Required)

Black Field KN599Green Red

Field KN519

KN600Blank Black Field

Red FieldKN600

KN600RAny Marking

(Specify Marking)Black FieldRed Field

KN699KN699R

KN700PPlastic



Required)



KN800



Required)

Blue Field KN899

Red Field KN899R

KN900Blank KN900

Any Marking (Specify Marking) KN999

PlateColor

LetterColor

1.7 InchSquare

2.25 InchSquare

2.5 InchSquare

BlankLegendPlates

YellowGreenBlueRed

OrangeBurnt Orange

BlackWhiteWhiteWhiteWhiteBlack

KN200YPKN200GPKN200LPKN200CPKN200APKN200HP



SpecialEngravedLegendPlates

YellowGreenBlueRed

OrangeBurnt Orange

BlackWhiteWhiteWhiteWhiteBlack




Maximum Number of Lines and Characters for Type KN Legend Plates

Type KN100 KN200 KN300 KN400 KN500 KN600 KN700 KN800 KN900Max. No. of

Char. per Line 16 14 18 18 8per field 22 17 18 18 per

pos.

Max. No. ofLines 2 1 3 2 2

per field 4 2 2 1 per pos.

Approximate Dimensions (Inches)Type A B

KN200 31/32 15/8KN300 115/64 13/4KN500 31/32 15/8KN600 19/16 21/4

Mounting Hole For All Types K, SK, and KX Control Units

HOLE PUNCH:Use Greenlee Tool #60242 for punching mounting hole and notch.

Minimum Centerline Spacing for Type K & SK Control UnitsLegend

Plate OperatorCenterline Spacing (Inches)

A B C D E FLEGEND PLATE ORIENTATION POS #1

KN-2KN-5

Standard Push Button13/8" Dia. Mushroom 21/4" Dia. Mushroom Selector Switch Knobs

1.751.752.251.75

1.311.311.311.31

1.441.441.441.44

2.252.252.252.25

1.691.692.251.69

0.880.881.120.88

KN3


2.002.002.252.00

1.311.311.311.31

1.441.441.441.44

2.252.252.252.25

1.751.752.251.75

0.880.881.120.88

KN4


1.941.942.251.74

1.311.311.311.31

1.441.441.441.44

2.252.252.252.25

1.621.622.251.62

0.880.881.120.88

KN6


2.382.382.382.38

1.621.621.621.62

1.441.441.441.44

2.252.252.252.25

2.252.252.252.25

1.121.121.121.12

LEGEND PLATE ORIENTATION POS #2

KN2KN5


1.621.622.251.62

1.311.311.311.31

1.441.441.441.44

2.252.252.252.25

1.751.752.251.75

0.880.881.120.88

KN3


1.751.752.251.75

1.311.311.311.31

1.441.441.441.44

2.252.252.252.25

2.002.002.252.00

0.880.881.120.88

KN4


1.621.622.251.62

1.311.311.311.31

1.441.441.441.44

2.252.252.252.25

1.941.942.251.94

1.001.001.121.00

KN6


2.252.252.252.25

1.311.311.311.31

1.621.621.621.62

2.382.382.382.38

2.382.382.382.38

0.880.881.120.88

Special Legend Plates x

Type KN500(For Use with DualFunction OperatorsKR6, KR7 and KR67)

TypeStandard Markings

Green Red

KN500KN501KN502

BlankStartOn

BlankStopOff

Type Black Black

KN520KN521KN522KN523KN524KN525KN526

BlankStartOnForwardUpHighOpen

BlankStopOffReverseDownLowClose

Or

D30052-287

PartMetalGroundedEnclosure

E

D

DD

A

F

B

C

1.13

1.31

Type KN200, KN300KN500, KN600

Type KN400

1 85

31

31

32

32

A

B

KN800KN100*P

KN900KN700*P

TypeType

TypeType

1.105

.833

.690Dia.1.200

sq.2.210

1

Sq.2.437

1.218

.817

.690

200Dia.200

87

87

2

2

16

4

1

1

11

11

1

43

.200

InchesMM

Dimensions

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mmAccessories


11/97

t The mushroom guard has finger holes for pushpull operators. B=Black G=Green R=Red Y=Yellow R=Red Y=Yellow

Mushroom Button Guards

AluminumMushroom

Guard for 13/8"Mushroom

ButtonOperator

(KR4, KR24)

Yellow PlasticExtendedMushroomGuard for 13/8"

MushroomButtonOperators

AluminumMushroom

Guard for 21/4"Mushroom

ButtonOperator

Type Type Used On Type Used On

K48 K56 KR4, SKR4 K68 KR5

K56Mt KR8, KR9, SKR8,SKR9 K685 KR25

Padlock AttachmentsUsed On Description Type

For Type K non- illumi-nated push button — Std. or mushroom (KR4, KR5 mushroom buttons only).

Holds button in depressed position . . . and can be padlocked.

K4

Type K5For Types K and SK non-illuminated push buttons with or without protective boots.

Holds button in depressed position when padlocked.

K5

Type K97

K97

For Types K and SK non-illuminated push buttons, cover type attachment.

Attachment can be padlocked. Does not hold button in depressed position.

K6

For Types K and SK push-pull operator and illuminated push buttons.

Holds button in depressed position . . . and can be padlocked.

K62

For Types K and SK push buttons, cover type attachment.

Similar to K6 shown above EXCEPT without lockout provision and with spring loaded cover.

K60

For KR11U and KR12U .

Holds maintained button in depressed position . . . and can be padlocked.

K96

For Type KR9 & SKR9 Push-Pull operators-Non-Illuminated andIlluminated

Holds button in depressed position- Can be padlocked

K162

k Use KU27 for maintained contact push buttons.

Padlock AttachmentsUsed On Description Type

For Types K and SK selector switches (will not work with gloved hand knob) and potentiometers

Cover type attach-ment that can be padlocked to keep unauthorized personnel from tampering with the operator.

K7

For Types K and SK selector switches (will not work with gloved hand knob) and potentiometers

Same as 9001 K7 except that this lockout is spring loaded.

K107

For Types K and SK illuminated push buttons (with or without guard) and key operated push buttons

Cover type attach-ment that can be padlocked to keep unauthorized personnel from tampering with the operator.

K108

For Types K and SK illuminated push buttons (with or without guard) and key operated push buttons

Same as 9001 K108 except that this lockout is spring loaded.

K109

For Types K and SK maintained push-pull operators using 13/8" dia. mushroom buttons (-20 series as shown on Page 15-72).

Cover type attach-ment that holds mushroom button in depressed position and can be padlocked.

K110

Protective Boots

KU1 KU17 KU37 KU27

These Type KU protective boots are not required for UL Type 4 rating on the Type K operators or UL Type 4 or 4X rating on the Type SK operators. Protective boots are still recommended for very dirty environments or severe hose down. The K1 (see Page 15-73) wrench is required for installation of these boots.

For Non-IlluminatedPush Buttonsk Clear Color for Type

Color Type Standard Knob Selector Switch KU17

BlackRedBlueBrownGreenYellowClearClear(Provides Full Guard)

KU1KU2KU3KU4KU5KU6KU7KU8

Gloved Hand Cap for use on std.knob Selector Switch KU18

Standard Pilot Light and Maintained Contact Push Buttons KU27

Push-to-Test and Illuminated Push Button Without Guard KU37

Illuminated Push But. With Guard KU47

j Meets UL and NEMA Types 1, 2, 3, 4, 4X, 6, 12 and 13.q Meets UL and NEMA Types 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 12 and 13.

Closing Plates

Description

Round(11/2'' Dia.)

Type Type

Gray K11q K51j

ChromePlated K12q K52j

Dimensions .................................................................Page 108


Basic Operators, Application Data


Selector Switch Angular Travel (Types K and SK)

Maximum Contact Block Usage(Includes Types K and SK)

2 blocks mounted side by side only: Any 2, 3 or 4 position springreturn selector switch (non-illuminated, illuminated or keyed).

2 blocks mounted in tandem on one side only: Any 2 operatorinterlocked push button.

2 blocks mounted in tandem (total of four blocks): Any selectorpush button, keyed push button, 2, 3, or 4 position maintainedselector switch (non-illuminated, illuminated or keyed), pushpull operators (non-illuminated or illuminated), joy stick, dualpush button.

3 blocks mounted in tandem (total of six blocks): Single mo-mentary push buttons (non-illuminated or illuminated).

Non Hazardous Locations

TypesK, SK

FileCCN

E42259NKCR

FileClass

LR254903211 03 Marking

Hazardous Locations (see page 98)

TypesK, SK

FileCCN

E10054NNOIV

FileClass

LR268173218 02 Marking

Operator Service Temperature Range:-22 °F to + 140 °F at 50% relative humidity-30 °C to + 60 °C

Environmental Ratings:Types K: The Type K (Series H) operators are UL approved

for use in Types 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 6, 12 and 13 flat surface enclosures.

Type SK: The Type SK operators are UL approved for use inTypes 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 6, 12 and 13 flat surface enclosures.

Types K, SK: For hazardous location use — see page 98.

Dimensions:Types K and SK: See pages 107-108.

Mounting Hole Dimensions:See page 101.

Minimum Centerline Spacing:Types K and SK: See page 101.


.

➀ Operator can be converted to an illuminated operator by removing the liner (6509704901) and adding a light module.➁ Operator can be converted to a non-illuminated operator by adding liner (6509704901).➂ Operator includes jumper wires for push-to-test conversion.➃ These operators can be supplied with 13/8" or 21/4" dia. mushroom buttons. For 13/8": Add 20 to type number. The refers to the color chosen - see page 74, 88, or 105.

For 21/4": Add 21 to type number. The refers to the color chosen - see page 74, 88, or 105. Voids UL and NEMA Type 6 Rating.

Basic Operators(Does not include Color Caps, Mushroom Buttons, Knobs, Selector Switch Cams, Contact Blocks, Light Modules or Legend Plates)

DescriptionUL Types/NEMA Types

4, 13 4, 4X, 13

Non Illuminated Push Button (Full Guard). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR1 SKR1

Non Illuminated Push Button (Extended Guard). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR2 SKR2

Non Illuminated Push Button (No Guard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR3 SKR3

Non Illuminated Push Button (Mushroom Button/screw on). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR20 SKR20

Non Illuminated Dual Push Button (Momentary). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR6 –

Non Illuminated Dual Push Button (Momentary Interlocked) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR67 –

Non Illuminated Dual Push Button (Maintained Interlocked) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR7 –

Momentary Pull - Maintained Neutral - Momentary Push. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR8 ➀➃ SKR8 ➀

Maintained Pull - Maintained Push . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR9 ➀➃ SKR9 ➀

Illuminated Push Button (Full Guard - Plastic Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K1L ➁ SK1L ➁

Illuminated Push Button and Push To Test (No Guard). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K2L ➁➂ SK2L➁➂

Illuminated Push Button (Full Guard - Metal Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K3L ➁ –

Standard Pilot Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KP SKP

3 Pos. Maintained Selector Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KS4 ➀ SKS4 ➀

3 Pos. Spring Return Both Sides To Center – Selector Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KS5 ➀ SKS5 ➀

3 Pos. Spring Return Left To Center – Selector Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KS6 ➀ SKS6 ➀

3 Pos. Spring Return Right To Center – Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KS7 ➀ SKS7 ➀

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mmApplication Data, Materials


11/97

Type K Operator Materials:Push Button and Push To Test Pilot Light(Types KR and KT)

Gasket – NitrileSeal – NitrileSeal Cap – Amorphous AcetalDecorative Ring – Polyester FilmCompensating Washer – PolypropyleneLock Ring – Amorphous NylonStem – Thermoplastic PolyesterBase Cap – Thermoplastic PolyesterKnob – PolycarbonateLiner – PolypropyleneHold Down Spring for Type K-15 – NeopreneOperator Base – ZincOperator Base (KR8) – PolyesterReturn Spring – Music Wire or Stainless Steel (KT only)Ring Nuts – Aluminum or ZincSpringkeeper – SteelLocking Thrust Washer – ZincColor Insert – Polyethylene

Selector Switch (Types KS)

Gasket – NitrileSeal – NitrileBearing Washer – Polyester FilmCompensating Washer – PolypropyleneCam Follower – Delrin 100Liner – PolypropyleneKnob – PolycarbonateCam Carrier – Amorphous NylonCam Rotor – Celenex 3300Cam Profile– Delrin 100Operator Base – ZincDetent Spring – Stainless SteelRing Nuts – Aluminum or ZincSeal keeper – Stainless SteelLocking Thrust Washer – Zinc

Pilot Light (Type KP)

Gasket – NitrileCompensating Washer – PolypropyleneLens – Glass or PolycarbonateLight Module Housing – Thermoplastic PolyesterOperator Base – ZincGlass Lens Ring – Anodized Aluminum

Contact Block And Light Module Materials:

Contact Block (Type KA)

Housing – Amorphous NylonContact Slider – Phenolic, Nylon or AcetalTerminal – SteelSaddle Clamp – SteelSpring – Stainless SteelContacts – Silver and CopperBlade – Beryllium CopperMounting Screw – SteelLabel – Paper

Type SK Operator Materials:Push Button and Push To Test Pilot Light(Types SKR and SKT)

Base – Thermoplastic PolyesterStem – Acetal (non-illuminated push button)

Thermoplastic Polyester (illuminated push buttonand push-to-test pilot light)

Seal – NitrileGasket – NitrileSpring – 302 Stainless SteelSpring Support – CRSLock Ring – NylonTrim Washer – PolypropyleneLocking Thrust Washer – Thermoplastic PolyesterRing Nut – Thermoplastic PolyesterColor Insert – Polyethylene (non-illuminated push button)Color Cap – Polycarbonate (illuminated push button and

push-to-test pilot light)Mushroom Button – Acetal (non-illuminated push button)

Polycarbonate (illuminated push button)Liner – Polypropylene (non-illuminated push button)

Selector Switch (Types SKS)

Base – Thermoplastic PolyesterSeal – NitrileGasket – NitrileSeal Keeper – 302 Stainless SteelSpring – 302 Stainless SteelCam Follower – Delrin 100Bearing Washer – Polyester FilmCam Carrier – TrogamidCam Profile – Delrin 100Liner – Polypropylene (non-illuminated only)Knob – PolycarbonateTrim Washer – PolypropyleneLocking Thrust Washer – Thermoplastic PolyesterSpring Support – CRS

Pilot Light (Type SKP)

Gasket – NitrileBase – Thermoplastic PolyesterTrim Washer – PolypropyleneLocking Thrust Washer – Thermoplastic PolyesterRing Nut – Thermoplastic PolyesterColor Cap – Polycarbonate

Light Module (Type KM)

Housing – Thermoplastic PolyesterSocket – SteelTerminal – Steel with Tin PlateSaddle Clamp – SteelTranslating Pin – PolycarbonateTransformer – Thermoplastic Polyester, Steel, Copper,

Polyvinyl Chloride, Polytetrafluorethylene, Acetate, Paper

Lamp Spring – Tin Plated Music Wire


Accessories


➀ Includes one each of the following color inserts: Black, Red, Green, Yellow, Orange, Blue,and White.

➁ “EMERGENCY STOP” is in raised letters and hot stamped white across the front of themushroom button.

➂ The mushroom button kits listed here may be assembled to a 9001 KR1U or SKR1U to forma 9001 KR4 or SKR4.

➃ The mushroom button kits listed here may be assembled to a 9001 KR1U or SKR1U to forma 9001 KR5 or SKR5.

➄ The mushroom button kits listed here may be assembled to a 9001 KR20 to form a 9001KR24 or SKR20 to form a 9001 SKR24.

➅ The mushroom button kits listed here may be assembled to a 9001 KR20 to form a 9001KR25 or a SKR20 to form a 9001 SKR25.

➆ These color caps are opaque and are for use on non–illuminated operators only.➇ Includes two of each of the following color inserts: Black, Red, and Green.➈ May be used on KR8 and KR9 operators. Order mushroom button and K54 adapter (no

charge) from page 106. Using the K54 adapter voids Type 6 rating.➉ Red knob with “Push Emergency Stop” marked on top of knob.

Description Color Type PackageQty.

Color inserts forKR1, KR2, KR3, SKR1,

SKR2, SKR3, KR11,KR12, SKR11, SKR12,

KRD, T, TRD

BlackBlueGray

GreenOrange

RedUniversal ➀

WhiteYellow

T6BKT6BET6GYT6GNT6OET6RDT6U

T6WHT6YW

101010101010101010

13/8'' Snap-inMushroom knob

for KR4 and SKR4 ➂

BlackBlue

GreenOrange

RedRed ➁Yellow

K16BK16LK16GK16SK16R

K16R05K16Y

1111111

21/4" Snap-inMushroom knob

for KR5 and SKR5 ➃

BlackBlue

GreenOrange

RedRed ➁Yellow

K17BK17LK17GK17SK17R

K17R05K17Y

1111111

13/8" Screw-onMushroom knob

for KR24 and SKR24➄

BlackBlue

GreenOrange

RedYellow

K92BK92LK92GK92SK92RK92Y

111111

21/4" Screw-onMushroom knob

for KR25 and SKR25 ➅

BlackBlue

GreenOrange

RedYellow

K93BK93LK93GK93SK93RK93Y

111111

15/8" Push-Pull Knobs for KR8,KR9, SKR8, SKR9 Operators

AmberBlack ➆

BlueClearGreen

Orange ➆Red

Red ➉WhiteYellow

A22B23L22C22G22S23R22

R2205W22Y22

1111111111

Color Inserts forDual Function Operators

KR6, KR7, KR67

BlackGreenRed

Universal ➇

B19G19R19U19

10101010

Standard ColorCaps for Illuminated

Push ButtonsK1L, K2L, K3L, SK1L, SK2L


WhiteYellow

A7L7C7G7R7W7Y7

1111111

Description Color Type PackageQty.

13/8" Mushroom Knob for Illuminated Push Buttons

K2L, SK2L ➈

AmberBlueClearGreen RedWhiteYellow

A20L20C20G20R20W20Y20

1111111

21/4" MushroomKnob for Illuminated

Push ButtonsK2L, SK2L ➈


A21L21C21G21R21 W21Y21

1111111

Plastic FresnelPilot Light Lens

for KP, KT, SKP, SKT


A31L31C31G31R31W31Y31

1111111

Domed PlasticPilot Light Lens

for KP, KT, SKP, SKT


A9L9C9G9R9W9Y9

1111111

Glass Pilot LightLens for KP, KT


A6L6C6G6R6W6Y6

1111111

Standard Selector Switch Knob for K and SKSelector Switches

AmberBlack ➆

BlueClearGreen

Orange ➆ RedWhiteYellow

A8B11L8C8G8S11R8W8Y8

111111111

Gloved Hand Selector Switch Knob for K and SKSelector Switches

AmberBlack ➆

BlueClearGreen

Orange ➆ RedWhiteYellow

A24B25L24C24G24S25R24W24Y24

111111111

Coin Operated SelectorSwitch Knob for K and SK

Selector Switches

Black ➆BlueClearGreen RedYellow

B18L16C16G16R16Y16

111111

Color Inserts for KQand TQ Selector

Push Buttons

BlackBlue

GreenOrange RedWhiteYellow

T5BKT5BET5GNT5OET5RDT5WHT5YW

10101010101010

Cam Type

Selector Switch Cams

BCDEFGHJLM

K13BK13CK13DK13EK13FK13GK13HK13JK13L

3105402402

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mmReplacement Parts


11/97

➀ Maintained button of two button operator.➁ Momentary button of two button operator.➂ Secondary ring nut (holds knob on selector switch or potentiometer).

➃ GE44 and GE755 are interchangeable (GE755 gives longer life). If a GE-44 lamp is ordered,a GE755 (2550101020) will be substituted. For a replacement lamp in a current series lightmodule see the light module listing on page 96.

Ring NutsUsed On Type Used On Type

K1L K44 SK1L SK44K30-K37 6512233501 – –K70-K73 6512233501 – –K20, K21,K22, K23 K45 SK20, SK21,

SK22, SK23 SK45

K20, K21,K22, K23 ➂ K46 SK20, SK21,

SK22, SK23 ➂ SK46

K2L K49 SK2L SK49K3L K111 – –KP, KTR K40 SKP, SKTR SK40KR1 K41 SKR1 SK41KR11 K42 SKR11 SK42KR12 ➀ K42 SKR12 ➀ SK42KR12 ➁ K41 SKR12 ➁ SK41KR13-, 14-, 15- K55 – –KR2 K42 SKR2 SK42KR20 K49 – –KR24 K49 – –KR25 K49 – –KR3 K40 SKR3 SK40KR4 K41 SKR4 SK41KR5 K41 SKR5 SK41KR6 K47 – –KR67 K47 – –KR7 K47 – –KR8, KR89 K58 SKR8, SKR89 SK58KR9 K41 SKR9 SK41KS K45 SKS SK45

KS ➂ K46 SKS ➂ SKRU11 SKRU1,2,3,4,5,10

SK46SK41SK40

KT K49 SKT SK49

Replacement Lamps For Series A thru F (black) Light Modules

LightModule Type

Lamp No.(ANSI)

Square D Replacement Lamps

Part NumberKM1 GE44 ➃ –KM2 GE1490 2550101003KM3 GE44 ➃ –KM4 GE1490 2550101003KM5 GE44 ➃ –KM6 GE44 ➃ –KM7 GE44 ➃ –KM8 GE44 ➃ –KM9 GE755 2550101020KM11 CMDK1A5 2550105014KM12 CMDK1A5 2550105014KM13 CMDK1A5 2550105014KM14 CMDK1A5 2550105014KM15 CMDK1A5 2550105014KM21 SYL 12PSB 2550105003KM22 SYL 12PSB 2550105003KM23 SYL 28PSB 2550105008KM25 SYL 120PSB 2550105005KM31 SYL 6PSB 2550105007KM32 SYL 12PSB 2550105003KM34 SYL 24PSB 2550105004KM35 SYL 28PSB 2550105008KM36 SYL 48PSB 2550105009KM37 SYL 60PSB 2550105010KM38 SYL 120PSB 2550105005

Selector Switch CamsCam Type Cam Type

BCDEF

K13BK13CK13DK13EK13F

GHJLM

K13GK13HK13JK13L

3105402402

➄ Allows Type -20 and -21 mushroom color caps to be used on push pull operators. Use of9001 K54 voids Type 6 rating.

Repair PartsDescription Part Number

E10 KeyE11 through E33 keysD10 KeyMaster Key for E36 – E60Gray cap for KR11, KR12, SKR11, or SKR12Clear plastic top (only) for 9001 K44 & SK44

Ring NutGasket for Type K and SK Push-Pull KnobGasket for Plastic Illuminated LensGasket for Type K and SK selector switch knobBlack Compensating Gasket (Type K and SK

Operators)Liner for Non Illuminated OperatorsLocking Thrust Washer Nylon SpacerLocking Thrust Washer (Std. Type SK Operator)Push Pull Mushroom Adapter ➄Rubber Boot for JoystickKnob on Joysticks without latch

2941101100Refer to page 822940601100294115199031052170014487D63XI

6509701801650970190131054064016509702001

6509704901651223120165097050016512240601K5465122432014458D20X3

KU Replacement Ring Nuts (Threaded Inside and Out)Used On Part Number

KU1 through KU8, KU27, KU37, KU47 3105204101

KU17, KU18 3105205901

InterlockFor mechanically interlocking two push buttons so that only one button can be depressed at a time. A Type K3 attachment is furnished with the 9001 KR11, KR12, SKR11, SKR12, SKRU1 and SKRU11 operators. However, maintained operators are supplied here and the K3 interlock serves to release one of the buttons when the other is depressed. When used with momentary contact buttons, the K3 interlock does not hold the buttons in the depressed position. It simply prevents pushing both buttons at the same time.The Type K3 interlock can be mounted behind the operators, or behind Type KA contact blocks as shown. Operators and blocks not included.

Type

K3

Screwdriver

Used to tighten mounting screws oncontact blocks and light modules.

Type No.

K69

Wrench

K95 K1

Where Used Type

For tightening ring nuts on Types K, KX, SK and J control units K95

For protective cap kits K1


Dimensions


1.625

41.3C30052-247

Type KS

1.8145.9

1.4135.8

B30052-272

IlluminatedStandardKnobType KType SK

LightModule

Approximate Dimensions — Consult your local Square D Sales Office for latest version of dimension drawings.

Interlocked Push ButtonsTypes KR11, KR12

SKR11, SKR12, and K3 Interlock

Key OperatedSelector Switch

MushroomButtons

PilotLights

SelectorSwitches

PushButtons

Push Pull

Type: K22 w/o Potentiometer K23 w/ Potentiometer SK22 w/o Potentiometer SK23 w/ Potentiometer

Type: K20 w/o Potentiometer K21 w/ Potentiometer SK20 w/o Potentiometer SK21 w/ Potentiometer

PotentiometerType K

Type SK

All ReedContact Blocks

All Type KAExcept Reed

Dimensions When Using Contact Blocks

Key OperatedPush Button

Type No.

“A” Dim.

“B” Dim.Depressed (Stop)

Midway (Neutral)

Extended (Start)

KR8, SKR8 13/8 19/16 13/4

3/4

KR9, SKR9 1 -- 15/16

3/4

KR8P, SKR8P 13/8 19/16 13/4

113/16KR9P,

SKR9P 1 -- 15/16

26 421.661.03

.062 6

.25Min Max

Panel Thickness

.5614

C30052-246

NoGuardType KR3Type SKR3

.5614

C30052-246

FullGuardType KR1Type SKR1

.5614

C30052-246

ExtendedGuardType KR2Type SKR2

B30052-270

Push ButtonIlluminatedNo GuardType K2L

Light Module

31.81.25 1.81

45.9

B30052-270

IlluminatedFull GuardType SK1L

Light Module31.81.25

1.8145.9

1.6341.4

Dia

A B

Illuminated andNon-IlluminatedTypes KR8, KR9KR8P, KR9P

B30052-285

( Illuminated Shown )

1.4135.8

1.12528.6

1.72

43.7

C30052-247

C30052-247

1.1930.2

C30052-247

Coin OperatedType KS

1.6642

1.5239

1.3434

1.9650

.062

.256

min max

panel thickness

In.mmDual Dims

C65075-235

1.6642

1.5239

2.85

72

,062

.256

min max

panel thickness

.062

.25

6min max

Panel Thickness

0.56

14

1.66

42

.97

25

2.63

67

2.1053

0.5614

1.6041

3.6693

65075-323

Panel Thickness1/16 min-1/4 max

2.2557

1.3835

B30052-270

IlluminatedType K2LType SK2L

Light Module31.81.25

1.8145.9

2.2557

1.3835

1.0626.9

C30052-246

Non-IlluminatedTypesKR4, KR5KR24, KR25SKR4, SKR5

1.6642

1.0326

1.7544

thru 2.2557

Spacing betweenOperator Center Line

1.1329

1.25max32

30052-284Type KR11, 12

.062

min max.25

6

panel thickness

1.125

28.6

1.81

45.98

Light Module

1.28

33

2.78

71

B30052-271

C30052-271

Push-To-TestType KTType SKT

StandardType KPType SKP

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mmDimensions


11/97

1.6140.9

0.7519.05

Approximate Dimensions — Consult your local Square D Sales Office for latest version of dimension drawings.

Type K4

Mushroom Button GuardsType K56Y, K56YM

Rocker Arm Operating LeverType K50

Protective Boots

Emergency“Break Glass” Operator

Type K15

Padlock Attachments

SelectorPush Button

Type KQ

Dual Function Operator

Types KR6, KR7

Time Delay Push Button

Type K68

Type K6, K60, and K97

Type K48

Type K96 Type KU27

9001K56YM includes finger holes.

Type No. Dimension A Dim. B

KRD1UH1KRD1UH2 Full Guard 9/16 21/2

KRD2UH1KRD2UH2 Ext. Guard 11/16 21/2

KRD3UH1KRD3UH2 No Guard 9/16 21/2

Type K62

Type K7, K107, K108,K109, and K110

Type K5

Alternate Action Module “Push-on,

Push-off”

Type K85

2.050.8

BA 2.563.5

3.2883.3

2.2557.21 1

16 4

panel thickness

min max

Type KRD

1.2833

4.69119

.6617

B30051-248

.062

.256

min max

1.6642

.97

25

2.63

67

Panel Thickness

1.5038

Dia.

A65075-075

0.6916

1.5038

Dia.

1.3636

A65075-079

TYPE KU37

TYPE KU171.5141

Dia.

1.3940

A65075-077A65075-101

A65075-060

1.6241

Dia

2.0050

TYPE KU18

TYPE KU471.4537

Dia

411.61

A65075-078

1.50 Dia38

1.0827

Type KU1 to KU8

20* max.

20* max.

3.0

76.2

1.9449.28

STOP

C65013-001-27

1.7544.45

50.82.0

max

min

START

2.7570

2.5064

1.1429

A65075-233

1.8848 Dia

1.6943

0.195 Dia

1.0025

2.3860 Dia

B65075-232

1.7344 Dia

Dia1.63

41

1.0928

B65075-231

2.2055.88

471.84

2.6166

B65075-071

2.5665

1.5239

1.7945

2.2958 B65075-074

1.9650

2.2657

0.9825

1.6241

1.9850

1.7244

1.5640

2.2256 max

0.8121

C65075-234

2.2958

1.7945

0.9726

For K67

B65075-069

2.2056

1.9449

1.8547

562.20

B65075-065

Push Button andOperator InterfaceSpecifiers Guide

Type KX 30 mm Push Buttons

Class 9001

CONTENTS


Type KX Square Multifunction Complete Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Type KX Square Oiltight/Watertight Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Type KX Selector Switch Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Type KX Square Multifunction Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Type KX Square Multifunction Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Type KX Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Type KX Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Types K, SK, KX, and T Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Hazardous Location Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Application Data, Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Type KX Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124


Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mmSquare Multifunction Complete Operators


110

11/97

The operators listed below come complete with color caps, legend inserts/plates, contact blocks, and light modules (illuminatedoperators only) and can be ordered using the short type number. If the operator you desire is not listed below, see pages 110through 119. For a component breakdown of each of the operators listed on this page, refer to Product Data M-603.


Buttons are mechanically interlocked.

Description ButtonColor

LegendMarking Contacts Type

Number

Non-Illuminated

GreenRed

StartStop

KXRA101KXRA102

Green Start KXRA133

Red Stop KXRA134

RedMushroom

Emerg.Stop KXRN105

RedMushroom

Emerg.Stop KXRN135

Illuminated110-120 V,50-60 HzTransf.

GreenRed

StartStop

KXRB103KXRB104

RedMushroom

Emerg.Stop KXRP106

Dual Push Buttons

Description Top Button (#1) Bottom Button (#2) Contacts TypeNumber

Green-Mom.-Start Red-Mom.-Stop KXRC111

Green-Mom.-Start Red-Mom.-Stop KXRC136

Green-Mom.-Up

Green-Mom.-Down

KXRD112

Green-Mom.-Open

Green-Mom.-Close

KXRD113

Green-Mom.-Fwd.

Green-Mom.-Rev.

KXRD114

Green-Mom.-Up

Green-Mom.-Down

KXRD140

Green-Mom.-Open

Green-Mom.-Close

KXRD141

Green-Mom.-Fwd.

Green-Mom.-Rev.

KXRD142

Green-Maint.-Start

Red-Maint.-Stop

KXRE115

Green-Mom.-Reset

Red-Maint.-Stop

KXRF116

Dual Push Button With One Pilot Light

DescriptionTop

Button(#1)

MiddleLens(#2)

BottomButton

(#3)Contacts Type

Number

Pilot Lightat 110-120 V,

50-60 Hz Transf.

Green-Mom.-Start

Red-On

Red-Mom.-Stop KXRG117

Green-Mom.-Start

Red-On

Red-Mom.-Stop KXRG137

GreenMom.

-BlankRed-Blank

Green-Mom.

-Blank KXRH118

Green-Maint.

-StartRed-On

Red-Maint.

-Stop KXRJ119

Green-Mom.-Reset

Red-On

Red-Maint.

-Stop KXRK120

Dual Push Button With Dual Pilot Lights

Description TopButton (#1)

LeftLens (#2)

RightLens (#3)

BottomButton (#4) Contacts Type

Number

Pilot Lightsat 110-120 V,

50-60 Hz Transf.

Green-Mom.-Start

Red-On

Green-Off

RedMom.-Stop KXRL121

White-Mom.-Number 1

White1

Blue2

Blue-Mom.-Number 2 KXRL132

Green-Mom.-Start

Red-On

Green-Off

Red-Mom.-Stop KXRL138

Green-Mom.

-Blank

Red-Blank

Red-Blank

Green-Mom.

-Blank

KXRM122

If all four lamps are illuminated at the same time continuously – do NOT operate above120 Vac.

Selector Switches

Non-Illuminated

Description Positions Legend Knob Contacts TypeNumber

2-Maint. Off-On Black 1 00 1 KXSA125

2-Maint. Off-On Black 0 1 KXSA139

3-Maint. Hand-Off-Auto. Black 1 0 00 0 1 KXSD126

3-Maint. Hand-Off-Auto. Black

1 0 00 0 11 0 00 0 1

KXSD127

Illuminated - 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz, Transf.

Description Positions Legend Knob Contacts TypeNumber

2-Maint. Off-On Red 1 00 1 KXSJ128

3-Maint. Hand-Off-Auto. Red 1 0 00 0 1 KXSM129

3-Maint. Hand-Off-Auto. Red

1 0 00 0 11 0 00 0 1

KXSM130

Single Pilot Light

Description LensColor

LegendMarking

TypeNumber

110-120 V,50-60 HzTransf.

Standard RedGreen

OnOff

KXPA107KXPA108

Push-To-Test

RedGreen

OnOff

KXTA109KXTA110

Dual Push To Test Pilot Light

(Pushing Button #1 Tests Pilot Light #2 — Pushing Button #4 Tests Pilot Light #3)

Description TopButton (#1)

LeftLens (#2)

RightLens (#3)

BottomButton (#4)

TypeNumber

Pilot Lightsat 110-120 V,

50-60 Hz Transf.

GreenBlank

RedBlank

RedBlank

GreenBlank KXTC123

Dual Pilot Light

Description Left Lens (#1) Right Lens (#2) Type Number

110-120 V,50-60 Hz. Transf.

RedOn

GreenOff KXPB124

Four Field Pilot Light

Description TopLeft (#1)

TopRight (#2)

BottomLeft (#3)

BottomRight (#4)

TypeNumber

110-120 V,50-60 HzTransf.

WhiteBlank

BlueBlank

GreenBlank

RedBlank KXPC131

Remote Test

120 V, AC ResistorWhiteBlank

BlueBlank

GreenBlank

RedBlank KXTE150

1234

123

12

1234


Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mmSquare Multifunction Complete Operators

111


9001 KX

Operator Code

Cam Code

VoltageCode

KeyWithdrawal

Code

OhmValueCode

ColorCode

ContactBlockCode

A

A

A

AA

A

A B

B

B B

B

C

CC

D

D

This information is also available on the Class 9001 Type KX key sheet M-8091 which is available from your local Square D sales office.

Operator Codes and Operator Description

Selector Switches

SASBSCSDSESFSGSHSJSKSLSMSNSOSPSQSRSSSTSVSWSXSYSZ

Non-illuminated – 2 position maintained selector switchNon-illuminated – 2 position spring return from leftNon-illuminated – 2 position spring return from rightNon-illuminated – 3 position maintained selector switchNon-illuminated – 3 position spring return from left to centerNon-illuminated – 3 position spring return from right to centerNon-illuminated – 3 position spring return both sides to centerNon-illuminated – 4 position maintained selector switchIlluminated – 2 position maintained selector switchIlluminated – 2 position spring return from leftIlluminated – 2 position spring return from rightIlluminated – 3 position maintained selector switchIlluminated – 3 position spring return left to centerIlluminated – 3 position spring return right to centerIlluminated – 3 position spring return both sides to centerIlluminated – 4 position maintained selector switchKey Operated – 2 position maintained selector switch – Key Codes 1, 2, 3Key Operated – 2 position spring return from left – Key Code 2Key Operated – 2 position spring return from right – Key Code 1Key Operated – 3 position maintained selector switch – Key Codes 4-10Key Operated – 3 position spring return left to center – Key Codes 5, 6, 9Key Operated – 3 position spring return right to center – Key Codes 4, 5, 7Key Operated – 3 position spring return both sides to center – Key Code 5Key Operated – 4 position maintained selector switch – Key Codes 11, 12, 13, 14

Push Buttons

RARBRCRDRERFRGRHRJRKRLRMRNRP

Standard Single Momentary Push Button – Non-illuminatedStandard Single Momentary Push Button – IlluminatedTwo Momentary Push Buttons with NO InterlockTwo Momentary Push Buttons with InterlockTwo Maintained Push Buttons with InterlockOne Momentary – One Maintained Push Button with InterlockTwo Momentary Push Buttons with NO Interlock and a Single Pilot LightTwo Momentary Push Buttons with Interlock and a Single Pilot LightTwo Maintained Push Buttons with Interlock and a Single Pilot LightOne Momentary – One Maintained Push Button with Interlock and a Single Pilot LightTwo Momentary Push Buttons with NO Interlock and a Dual Pilot LightTwo Momentary Push Buttons with Interlock and a Dual Pilot LightMushroom Single Momentary Push Button – Non-illuminatedMushroom Single Momentary Push Button – Illuminated

Pilot Lights

PAPBPCTATBTCTDTE

Standard Pilot LightStandard Dual Pilot LightStandard Four-Field Pilot LightSingle Push-To-Test Pilot LightSingle Remote Test Pilot LightDual Push-To-Test Pilot LightDual Remote Test Pilot LightRemote Test Four-Field Pilot Light

Potentiometers

BABBBCBD

Operator Only – Single PotOperator with Single PotOperator Only – Tandem PotOperator with Tandem Pot

1 Yes No 11 Yes No No Yes

2 No Yes 12 No No No Yes

3 Yes Yes 13 Yes No No No

14 Yes Yes Yes Yes

4 Yes No No 8 Yes No Yes

5 No Yes No 9 No Yes Yes

6 No No Yes 10 Yes Yes Yes

7 Yes Yes No

Only voltage codes 31, 34, 35 and 38 may be used with KXTE.

Only resistor and full voltage styles may be used with KXTB and KXTD.

For Use With

Voltage andFrequency

CodeNo.

KXPAKXRAKXRBKXRGKXRHKXRJKXRKKXRNKXRPKXSKXTAKXTB

Transformer

110-120 V, 50-60 Hz 1

110-120 V, 50-60 HzFlashing Type F1

208-220 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz

37

220-24 V, 50-60 HzFlashing Type F7

277 V, 50-60 Hz380-480 V, 50-60 Hz550-600 V, 50-60 Hz

856

Resistor

18 V, AC or DC32 V, AC or DC

120 V, AC or DC240 V, AC or DC

33233825

Full Voltage

6 V, AC or DC12-14 V, AC or DC24-28 V, AC or DC48 V, AC or DC60 V, AC or DC

120 V, AC or DC

313235363738

KXPBKXRLKXRMKXTCKXTD

Transformer

110-120 V, 50-60 Hz208-220 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz277 V, 50-60 Hz380-480 V, 50-60 Hz550-600 V, 50-60 Hz

137856

Full Voltage

6 V, AC or DC24 V, AC or DC28 V, AC or DC

120 V, AC or DC

31343538

Resistor

12 V, AC or DC48 V, AC or DC60 V, AC or DC

120 V, AC or DC

32363738

KXPC

KXTE

Transformer 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz 1

Full Voltage 6 V, AC or DC120 V, AC or DC

3138

Resistor

12 V AC24 V AC28 V AC48 V AC60 V AC

120 V AC

323435363738

Legend/Color Location

KXRAKXRBKXRNKXRPKXPAKXTA

KXRGKXRHKXRJKXRK

KXPB

KXPCKXTE

KXRCKXRDKXREKXRF

KXRLKXRMKXTC

KXS

Potentiometers have black knobs

Contact Block(s) Required To Obtain These Sequences

2 Position 3 Position 4 Position

1 = Contact Closed 0 = Contact Open

KA – 1 Mtd. on Side 2(Code H13)

1 00 1

0 11 0

1 0 00 1 1

1 0 00 0 1

0 0 10 1 0

1 0 00 1 0

1 0 00 0 1

1 0 00 1 1

1 0 00 1 1

0 1 01 0 0

1 1 00 0 1

1 0 0 00 0 1 0

KA – 1 Mtd. on Side 1(Code H1)

1 00 1

0 11 0

0 0 11 1 0

1 0 00 0 1

0 0 10 1 0

1 0 00 1 0

0 1 00 0 1

0 0 11 0 0

1 0 10 1 0

0 0 10 1 0

0 1 11 0 0

0 0 0 10 1 0 0

Use These Cam Codes E D B C D E F G J L M H

With TheseOperatorCodes

SA – SBSJ – SKSR – SS

SC – SLST

SD – SE – SF – SGSM – SN – SO – SPSV – SW – SX – SY

SHSQSZ

Not available with text or with certain operators (see selection in this section).

Color Code Color

RGALWB

RedGreenAmberBlueWhiteBlack

For KXBB

Code Ohms

010203040506070809101112131415163233353637383940

5010025050010002500500010 K25 K50 K100 K250 K500

1.0 Meg2.5 Meg5.0 Meg

1500350035 K75 K750 K200200015 K

For KXBD

CodeOhms

Front Rear

8283858889

1000500010 K50 K

100 K

1000500010 K50 K

100 K

Not used on standard type pilot lights (KXPA, KXPB, KXPC, KXTB, KXTD, KXTE) or potentiometers (KXBA, KXBB, KXBC, KXBD).See page 122 for Proper H Number

For Use WithSelector Switches

ONLY

For Use WithIlluminated Operators

ONLY

For Use WithKey-operated Selector

Switches ONLY

For Use WithPotentiometers

ONLY

Insert the proper color code(s) for the lens or knob required. For location of color codes,

see table below.

1

123

1

2

12 3

4

121

1 2

43


Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mmSquare Multifunction Operators


112

11/97

Non-Illuminated Push Buttons


All non-illuminated push buttons are of the no guard type. Tomake the Type KXRA operator a full guard type (does not applyto the KXRN operators), add a shroud from page 119. If legendinserts are required to be assembled into the operator, see in-structions on page 118.

Momentary operators on this page will accept up to three TypeKA contact blocks mounted in tandem (total of six blocks).

Maintained operators on this page will accept up to two TypeKA contact blocks mounted in tandem (total of four blocks).

Add 2 color codes from button cover table. See example below.

Example:

To get a Dual Push Button similar to a 9001KXRCGR except the top button is blue, order a 9001KXRCLR.

Description ButtonType

ButtonCoverColor

TypeNumber

Single ButtonMomentary

Standard

No CoverGreenRed

AmberWhiteBlue

KXRAKXRAGKXRARKXRAAKXRAWKXRAL

Mushroom

No CoverRed

GreenAmberWhiteBlue

KXRNKXRNRKXRNGKXRNAKXRNWKXRNL


MechanicalInterlock

Button CoverColor Type

Number(1)Top

(2)Bottom

Dual Push Button(Non–illuminated

Only)

BothMomentary No

NoneGreenAmberAmberOther

NoneRedRed

GreenOther

KXRCKXRCGRKXRCARKXRCAGKXRC

BothMomentary Yes

NoneGreenGreenRed

AmberOther

NoneRed

GreenRed

AmberOther

KXRDKXRDGRKXRDGGKXRDRRKXRDAAKXRD

BothMaintained Yes

NoneGreenGreenRed

AmberOther

NoneRed

GreenRed

AmberOther

KXREKXREGRKXREGGKXRERRKXREAAKXRE

Top ButtonMomentary

Bottom ButtonMaintained

Yes

NoneGreenGreenGreenOther

NoneRed

GreenAmberOther

KXRFKXRFGRKXRFGGKXRFGAKXRF

Two required per operator. When ordering an assembled operator — specify two codenumbers. The first code will be assembled into #1 and the second code will be assembledinto #2.

Not available with text.

Example:

Class 9001 Type KXRAG with a KA1 contact block is Type KXRAGH13. Types KA1 and KA3 NC contacts are direct opening

Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119Lockouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 120 -121“H” Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 122Legend Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 118Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 124Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 123Completely Assembled Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 110Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 120 -121

Button Covers

Description For Use on Color TypeNumber Code

IncludesKXN100

KXRA


KXAR1KXAG1KXAA1KXAL1KXAW1KXAB1

RGALWB

IncludesKXN100

KXRN

RedGreenAmberBlueWhite

KXARM1KXAGM1KXAAM1KXALM1KXAWM1

RGALW

IncludesKXN200

KXRCKXRDKXREKXRF



RGALWB

Standard Contact Blocks

Symbol Contact BlockType

Contact Block AssembledTo Operator

Suffix

KA1 H13

KA2 H5

KA3 H6

1

2


Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mmSquare Oiltight/Watertight Operators

113


Illuminated Push Buttons


All illuminated push buttons are of the no guard type. To makethem a full guard type (does not apply to the KXRP operators),add a shroud from page 119. If legend inserts are required to beassembled into the operators, see instructions on page 118.

Momentary operators on this page will accept up to three TypeKA contact blocks mounted in tandem (total of six blocks).

Maintained operators on this page will accept up to two Type KAcontact blocks mounted in tandem (total of four blocks).

To order operators with color caps other than those listed below,substitute the proper color code from the Button Cover Table.

Example:

To get a Dual Push Button/Single Pilot Light similar to a 9001 KXRG1GGR exceptthe pilot light is white, order a 9001 KXRG1GWR.

Insert the proper voltage code from page 116 (single lamp).

Insert the proper voltage code from page 116 (single lamp).


MechanicalInterlock Voltage Button

Cover ColorType

Number

TwoPush Buttons

(1 & 3)One PilotLight (2)

BothMomentary No

No Light Module No Covers KXRG

110-120 V50-60 Hz

Trans.

No CoversGreen-Red-RedGreen-Green-RedGreen-Amber-Red

KXRG1KXRG1GRRKXRG1GGRKXRG1GAR

OtherVoltages No Covers KXRG

BothMomentary Yes

No Light Module No Covers KXRH

110-120 V50-60 Hz

Trans.

No CoversGreen-Red-GreenGreen-Amber-GreenRed-Green-Red

KXRH1KXRH1GRGKXRH1GAGKXRH1RGR

OtherVoltages No Covers KXRH

BothMaintained Yes

No Light Module No Covers KXRJ

110-120 V50-60 Hz

Trans.


KXRJ1KXRJ1GRRKXRJ1GGRKXRJ1GAR

OtherVoltages No Covers KXRJ

TopMomentary

BottomMaintained

Yes

No Light Module No Covers KXRK

110-120 V50-60 Hz

Trans.


KXRK1KXRK1GRRKXRK1GGRKXRK1GAR

OtherVoltages No Covers KXRK

Description ButtonType Voltage Button

Cover ColorType

Number

SingleButton

Momentary

Standard

No Light Module No Cover KXRA

110-120 V50-60 Hz

Trans.

No CoverGreenRedAmberWhiteBlue

KXRB1KXRB1GKXRB1RKXRB1AKXRB1WKXRB1L

OtherVoltages

No CoverGreenRed

KXRB

KXRB

GKXRB

R

Mushroom

No Light Module No Cover KXRN

110-120 V50-60 Hz

Trans.

No CoverRedGreenAmberWhiteBlue

KXRP1KXRP1RKXRPIGKXRPIAKXRPIWKXRPIL

OtherVoltages

No CoverRedGreen

KXRP

KXRP

RKXRP

G

Not available with text.

Insert the proper voltage code from page 117 (dual lamp).

Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 119Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 119Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 120 -121Completely Assembled Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 110Legend Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 118Boots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 119Lamp and Lens Removal Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 119Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 124Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 123Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 116 - 117“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 122Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 120 - 121

Button Covers

Description For Use on Color Type Number Code

IncludesKXN100

KXRAKXRB


KXAR1KXAG1KXAA1KXAL1KXAW1

RGALW

IncludesKXN100

KXRNKXRP


KXARM1KXAGM1KXAAM1KXALM1KXAWM1

RGALW

IncludesKXN400

KXRG (Pos. 1 & 3)KXRH (Pos. 1 & 3)KXRJ (Pos. 1 & 3)KXRK (Pos. 1 & 3)KXRL (Pos. 1 & 4)KXRM (Pos. 1 & 4)



RGALWB

IncludesKXN300

KXRG (Pos. 2)KXRH (Pos. 2)KXRJ (Pos. 2)KXRK (Pos. 2)



RGALW

IncludesKXN500

KXRL (Pos. 2 & 3)KXRM (Pos. 2 & 3)



RGALW

Replacement Parts

Ring NutAdapter Assembly w/o Liner

Spring ClipAdapter with Liner

6508901401650890335065089009026508903351


MechanicalInterlock

Voltage andFrequency

Button Cover Color

TypeNumber

TwoPush Buttons

(1 & 4)Two Pilot

Lights (2 & 3)

BothMomentary No

No Light Module No Covers KXRL

110-120 V50-60 Hz

Transformer

No CoversGreen-Green-Red-Red

Green-Red-Red-Green

Red-Green-Green-Red

KXRL1

KXRL1GGRR

KXRL1GRRG

KXRL1RGGR

OtherVoltages No Covers KXRL

BothMomentary Yes

No Light Module No Covers KXRM

110-120 V50-60 Hz

Transformer

No CoversGreen-Green-Red-Red

Green-Red-Red-Green

Red-Green-Green-Red

KXRM1

KXRM1GGRR

KXRM1GRRG

KXRM1RGGR

OtherVoltages No Covers KXRM

1234

123


Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mmSelector Switch Selection Guide


114

11/97

Shown below is a simplified method of selecting a selectorswitch to meet almost any combination of contact sequences.

Step No. 1

Determine the contact sequence(s) required. Set up a targettable like the one shown for the example below.

Step No. 2

Look for a cam type common to all sequences in Table 1, 2 or3. For the example above, Table 2 would be used. For the con-tact sequences A(1 0 0), B(0 1 0) and C(0 0 1) of the exampleabove, cam types F and L are common to all 3 sequences.

Step No. 3

Next, the cam type common to all the sequences (If severalcam types are common, choose one.) is used to find the oper-ator type number. Go to the proper page number as indicatedin the table below:


A manual return operator with a standard black knob is required andIf the F cam type were chosen, the operator type number would be:

Type KX Line – Class 9001 Type KXSDFB (from page 115)If the L cam type were chosen, the operator type number would be:

Type KX Line – Class 9001 Type KXSDLB (from page 115)

Step No. 4:

Determine the contact blocks required by using the same tableused for Step No. 2.


The F cam type were chosen:

A 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 2 would be used for sequence A(1 0 0).A 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 1 would be used for sequence B(0 1 0).A 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 1 or 2 would be used for sequence C(0 0 1).

The L cam type were chosen:

A 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 2 would be used for sequence A(1 0 0).A 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 1 or a 9001 KA3 mounted on side no.2 would be used for sequence B(0 1 0).A 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 1 would be used for sequence C(0 0 1).

One Type KA1 double circuit block can be used in place of oneType KA2 single circuit block and one Type KA3 single circuitblock mounted on the same side.

“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 122Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 124

Example:

ContactSequence

A 1 0 0

B 0 1 0

C 0 0 1

0 – contact open1 – contact closed

Number of Positions Push Button Line Page Number

2 Type KX 115

3 Type KX 115

4 Type KX 115

KA1 KA3 KA2= +

= +

The KA5 must be the last block on either side. If more than one KA5 is required on eitherside – contact your local Square D sales office.




Mount onside No.

(See page 122)

1 0E KA3 1 or 2

D KA2 1 or 2

0 1E KA2 1 or 2

D KA3 1 or 2




Mount on side No.

(See page 122)

1 0 0

G M KA2 1

L KA2 2

C E KA3 1

B C E F G J KA3 2

B G J KA5

2

0 1 0

D E J L KA2 1

D E KA2 2

F KA3 1

L KA3 2

0 0 1

C F KA2 1 or 2

B D G L KA3 1

D KA3 2

B KA5

1

M KA2 2

1 1 0

B KA2 1

C F KA5

1 or 2

M KA3 2

0 1 1

B G J KA2 2

G KA5

1

L KA5

2

M KA3 1

1 0 1

J KA3 1

D E J L KA5

1

D E KA5

2




Mount onside No.

(See page 122)

1 0 0 0 H (A) KA3 2

0 1 0 0 H (B) KA2 1

0 0 1 0 H (C) KA2 2

0 0 0 1 H (D) KA3 1

1 0 0 1 H A & D Wired in Parallel

1 1 0 0 H A & B Wired in Parallel

0 1 1 0 H B & C Wired in Parallel

0 0 1 1 H C & D Wired in Parallel

1 1 1 0 H A, B & C Wired in Parallel

0 1 1 1 H B, C & D Wired in Parallel

1 0 1 0 H A & C Wired in Parallel

0 1 0 1 H B & D Wired in Parallel

1 1 0 1 H KA5

2

1 0 1 1 H KA5

1


Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mmSquare Multifunction Selector Switches

115


Add form number to standard type number, example: Type KXSMC1 Form Y178.

Two Color Selector Switch Kit

— Used to indicate red in left position and green in right position and off in the center on 3 position illuminated selector switches.

Used With

Factory Assembled Form No.

2 pos. s/s3 pos. s/s

Y178Y178


For Use On Color TypeNumber Code

All SelectorSwitch

OperatorsEXCEPT

KeyOperated

BlackGreenRed

AmberBlueWhite

KXAB6KXAG6KXAR6KXAA6KXAL6KXAW6

BGRALW


The selector switches listed below do not include a legend plate. Legend plates are required to be assembled into the opera-tors. Maintained selector switches will accept up to two Type KA contact blocks mounted in tandem (a total of four blocks). Springreturn selector switches will accept a maximum of two Type KA contact blocks mounted side by side. To order a selector switchwith a knob other than black, substitute the proper color code from the selector switch knob table. Example: To get a selector switch similar to a 9001KXSDCB except with a red knob, order a KXSDCR.

Note: All key operated selector switches are furnished as standard with Square D number E10 key change. See 30 mm push buttons types K and SK page 85 for other key changes. Insert the proper key withdrawal code from the table below. Insert the proper color code from the selector switch knob table below. Insert proper voltage code from page 116.

Non-Illuminated Selector Switches

Contact Block(s)Required To ObtainThese Sequences

1 = Contact Closed 0 = Contact Open 4 Position2 Position 3 Position

Left Right Left Right CenterLeft Right

CenterLeft Right

CenterLeft Right

CenterLeft Right

CenterLeft Right

CenterLeft Right

CenterLeft Right

CenterLeft Right

CenterLeft Right

KA-1 Mtd. on Side 2(Code H13)

1 00 1

0 11 0

1 0 00 1 1

1 0 00 0 1

0 0 10 1 0

1 0 00 1 0

1 0 00 0 1

1 0 00 1 1

1 0 00 1 1

0 1 01 0 0

1 1 00 0 1

1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

KA-1 Mtd. on Side 1(Code H1)

1 00 1

0 11 0

0 0 11 1 0

1 0 00 0 1

0 0 10 1 0

1 0 00 1 0

0 1 00 0 1

0 0 11 0 0

1 0 10 1 0

0 0 10 1 0

0 1 11 0 0

0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

CAM E D B C D E F G J L M HManual Return – Operator OnlyWithout KnobStandard Black KnobOther ColorsKey Operated

KXSAEKXSAEBKXSAEKXSRE

....

....

....

....

KXSDBKXSDBBKXSDBKXSVB

KXSDCKXSDCBKXSDCKXSVC

KXSDDKXSDDBKXSDDKXSVD

KXSDEKXSDEBKXSDEKXSVE

KXSDFKXSDFBKXSDFKXSVF

KXSDGKXSDGBKXSDGKXSVG

KXSDJKXSDJBKXSDJKXSVJ

KXSDLKXSDLBKXSDLKXSVL

KXSDMKXSDMBKXSDMKXSVM

KXSHHKXSHHBKXSHHKXSZH

Spring Return from LeftWithout KnobStandard Black KnobOther Colors Key Operated (Code 2 Only)

KXSBEKXSBEBKXSBEKXSSE

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....Spring Return from RightWithout KnobStandard Black KnobOther Colors Key Operated (Code 1 Only)

....

....

....

....

KXSCDKXSCDBKXSCDKXSTD

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....Spring Return – Left to CenterWithout KnobStandard Black KnobOther Colors Key Operated (Code 5, 6, or 9 Only)

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

KXSEBKXSEBBKXSEBKXSWB

KXSECKXSECBKXSECKXSWC

KXSEDKXSEDBKXSEDKXSWD

KXSEEKXSEEBKXSEEKXSWE

KXSEFKXSEFBKXSEFKXSWF

KXSEGKXSEGBKXSEGKXSWG

KXSEJKXSEJBKXSEJKXSWJ

KXSELKXSELBKXSELKXSWL

KXSEMKXSEMBKXSEMKXSWM

....

....

....

....Spring Return – Right to CenterWithout KnobStandard Black KnobOther Colors Key Operated (Code 4, 5, or 7 Only)

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

KXSFBKXSFBBKXSFBKXSXB

KXSFCKXSFCBKXSFCKXSXC

KXSFDKXSFDBKXSFDKXSXD

KXSFEKXSFEBKXSFEKXSXE

KXSFFKXSFFBKXSFFKXSXF

KXSFGKXSFGBKXSFGKXSXG

KXSFJKXSFJBKXSFJKXSXJ

KXSFLKXSFLBKXSFLKXSXL

KXSFMKXSFMBKXSFMKXSXM

....

....

....

....

Spring Return – Both Sides to CenterWithout KnobStandard Black KnobOther Colors Key Operated (Code 5 Only)

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

KXSGBKXSGBBKXSGBKXSYB

KXSGCKXSGCBKXSGCKXSYC

KXSGDKXSGDBKXSGDKXSYD

KXSGEKXSGEBKXSGEKXSYE

KXSGFKXSGFBKXSGFKXSYF

KXSGGKXSGGBKXSGGKXSYG

KXSGJKXSGJBKXSGJKXSYJ

KXSGLKXSGLBKXSGLKXSYL

KXSGMKXSGMBKXSGMKXSYM

....

....

....

....

Illuminated Selector SwitchesManual ReturnWithout KnobStandard Red KnobOther Colors

KXSJEKXSJERKXSJE

....

....

....

KXSMBKXSMBRKXSMB

KXSMCKXSMCRKXSMC

KXSMDKXSMDRKXSMD

KXSMEKXSMERKXSME

KXSMFKXSMFRKXSMF

KXSMGKXSMGRKXSMG

KXSMJKXSMJRKXSMJ

KXSMLKXSMLRKXSML

KXSMMKXSMMRKXSMM

KXSQHKXSQHRKXSQH

Spring Return from LeftWithout KnobStandard Red KnobOther Colors

KXSKEKXSKERKXSKE

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....Spring Return from RightWithout KnobStandard Red KnobOther Colors

....

....

....

KXSLDKXSLDRKXSLD

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....Spring Return – Left to CenterWithout KnobStandard Red KnobOther Colors

....

....

....

....

....

....

KXSNBKXSNBRKXSNB

KXSNCKXSNCtRKXSNC

KXSNDKXSNDRKXSND

KXSNEKXSNERKXSNE

KXSNFKXSNFRKXSNF

KXSNGKXSNGRKXSNG

KXSNJKXSNJRKXSNJ

KXSNLKXSNLRKXSNL

KXSNMKXSNMRKXSNM

....

....

....Spring Return – Right to CenterWithout KnobStandard Red KnobOther Colors

....

....

....

....

....

....

KXSOBKXSOBRKXSOB

KXSOCKXSOCRKXSOC

KXSODKXSODRKXSOD

KXSOEKXSOERKXSOE

KXSOFKXSOFRKXSOF

KXSOGKXSOGRKXSOGv

KXSOJKXSOJRKXSOJ

KXSOLKXSOLRKXSOL

KXSOMKXSOMRKXSOM

....

....

....Spring Return – Both Sides to CenterWithout KnobStandard Red KnobOther Colors

....

....

....

....

....

....

KXSPBKXSPBRKXSPB

KXSPCKXSPCRKXSPC

KXSPDKXSPDRKXSPD

KXSPEKXSPERKXSPE

KXSPFKXSPFRKXSPF

KXSPGKXSPGRKXSPG

KXSPJKXSPJRKXSPJ

KXSPLKXSPLRKXSPL

KXSPMKXSPMRKXSPM

....

....

....

Key Withdrawal Codes — The key withdrawal code numbers listed below indicate the positions in which the key can be withdrawn (removed) from the selector switch.

2-Position Switches 4-Position Switches

Code Code

1 Yes No 11 Yes No No Yes2 No Yes 12 No No No Yes3 Yes Yes 13 Yes No No No

14 Yes Yes Yes Yes3-Position Switches

Code Code

4 Yes No No 8 Yes No Yes5 No Yes No 9 No Yes Yes6 No No Yes 10 Yes Yes Yes7 Yes Yes No

CAMSCam Type

BCDEFGHJLM

K13BK13CK13DK13EK13FK13GK13HK13JK13L

3105402402

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type KX — 30 mmSquare Multifunction Pilot Lights


11/97

Add voltage assembly code. Remote test AC only. Use only full voltage or resistor assembly code. Do not use transformer. Add color code.

No neon light modules available.

Single Standard Pilot Light For use in hazardous locations – See page 121.

DescriptionVoltage

andFrequency

StyleThese operators include a blank KXN100 Legend Insert Without

Color CapType

With RedColor CapType

With GreenColor Cap Type

With OtherColor Cap Type

Type KXPASingle Standard

Pilot Light

110-120 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz

24-28 Vac-dc


KXPA1RKXPA7RKXPA35R

KXPA1GKXPA7GKXPA35G

KXPA1KXPA7KXPA35

KXPA1KXPA7KXPA35

See Table Below For Voltage, Frequency

and Assembly Code

Transformer or FlashingResistor

Full Voltage

KXPARKXPARKXPAR

KXPAGKXPAGKXPAG

KXPAKXPAKXPA

KXPAKXPAKXPA

Type KXTASingle Push-To-Test Pilot Light

110-120 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz

24-28 Vac-dc


KXTA1RH1KXTA7RH1KXTA35RH1

KXTA1GH1KCTA7GH1KXTA35GH1

KXTA1KXTA7

KXTA35

KXTA1H1KXTA7H1KXTA35H1


and Assembly Code

Transformer or FlashingResistor

Full Voltage

KXTA RH1KXTARH1KXTARH1

KXTAGH1KXTAGH1KXTAGH1

KXTAKXTAKXTA

KXTAH1KXTAH1KXTAH1

Type KXTBSingle RemoteTest Pilot Light

24 Vac120 Vac

Resistor/Full Voltage

KXTB35RKXTB38R

KXTB35GKXTB38G

KXTB35KXTB38

KXTB35KXTB38

Choose Resistor orFull Voltage Required from Table Below.

KXTBR KXTBG KXTB KXTB

Single Lamp Light Module Codes

Voltage Description For Use with Single Lamp ILL. Operators As Indicated

AssemblyCode

Separate LightModule

Type No.

RatedVA

(Watts)

Replacement Lamps

Lamp Number(ANSI)

Lamp PartNumber

6 Vac-dc Full Voltage All 31 KM31 0.9 755 2550101020

12-14 Vac-dc Full Voltage All 32 KM32 1.2 756 2550101037

18 Vac-dc Resistor All 33 KM33 1.4 756 2550101037

24-28 Vac-dc Full Voltage All 35 KM35 1.2 757 2550101002

32 Vac-dc Resistor All 23 KM23 2.5 757 2550101002

48 Vac-dc Full Voltage All 36 KM36 2.6 SYL48MB 2550101025


110-120 V, 25-30 Hz Transformer All Except KXTB 2 KM2 2.2 1490 2550101003


110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Flashing All Except KXTB F1 KMF1 3.9 267 2550101036

120 Vac-dc Resistor All 38 KM38 3.0 SYL120MB 2550101027


208-220 V 50-60 Hz Transformer All Except KXTB 3 KM3 7.1 755 2550101020



220-240 V 50-60 Hz Flashing All Except KXTB F7 KMF7 7.7 267 2550101036

240 Vac-dc Resistor All 25 KM25 5.5 SYL120MB 2550101027

277 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer All Except KXTB 8 KM8 4.3 755 2550101020



Basic Operators (Without Light Modules, Color Caps, or Legend Inserts)

Description Type

Single Standard Pilot Light KXPA

Single Push-to-Test Pilot Light KXRA

Dual Standard Pilot Light KXPB

Dual Push-to-Test Pilot Light KXRL

Four Field Pilot Light KXPC

Button CoversFor Use On Color Type Number Code

KXPAIncludes KXN100



RGALW

KXTA-KXTBIncludes KXN100



RGALW

Completely Assembled Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 110Legend Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 118Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119Lamp and Lens Removal Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 124Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 123

R

M

M O.L.L2

321L1

Stop Start

Test

L2

C

L1

M

STOP

LSI

M3

(TEST) C

(TEST) C L2

L2

L1(SIG)

CR

M2

M1

L2(TEST) C

START

TEST BUTTONL1 L2

L1(SIG)

L1(SIG)

Typical Push to Test Pilot Light Wiring Diagram

Typical Remote Test Pilot Light Wiring Diagram

1234

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type KX — 30 mm

Square Multifunction Pilot Lights


If all four lamps are illuminated at the same time continuously — DO NOT operate above 120 Vac. Remote Test Pilot Lights are AC only. Use only full voltage or resistor assembly code. Do not use trans-former.

➀ Add the voltage assembly code number in the type number. Example: KXTD➀RG with a 60 Vac voltage = KXTD37RG.➁ Add the color codes from the button cover table below. Example: KXPB1➁➁ with a white and blue button cover = KXPB1WL.

2 and 4 Lamp Pilot Lights – These operators include blank legend inserts For use in hazardous locations – See page 121.

Description Voltage andFrequency Style

With 1 = Red 2 = Green

Type

With1 = Red 2 = Red

3 = Green 4 = Green

With Other Button CoverColors Type ➁

Without Button CoverType

Type KXPBDual Lamp Pilot Light

110-120 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz

28 Vac-dc


KXPB1RGKXPB7RGKXPB35RG

....

....

....

KXPB1➁➁KXPB7➁➁KXPB35➁➁

KXPB1KXPB7KXPB35

See Table Below For Voltage, Frequency and Assembly Codes➀

TransformerFull Voltage

Resistor

KXPB➀RGKXPB➀RGKXPB➀RG

....

....

....

KXPB➀➁➁KXPB➀➁➁KXPB➀➁➁

KXPB➀KXPB➀KXPB➀

Type KXTCDual Lamp Push-To-

Test Pilot Light

110-120 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz

28 Vac-dc


....

....

....

KXTC1RRGGH2KXTC7RRGGH2KXTC35RRGGH2

KXTC1➁➁➁➁H2KXTC7➁➁➁➁H2KXTC35➁➁➁➁H2

KXTC1H2KXTC7H2KXTC35H2


and Assembly Codes➀

TransformerFull Voltage

Resistor

....

....

....

KXTC➀RRGGH2KXTC➀RRGGH2KXTC➀RRGGH2

KXTC➀➁➁➁➁H2KXTC➀➁➁➁➁H2KXTC➀➁➁➁➁H2

KXTC➀H2KXTC➀H2KXTC➀H2

Type KXTDDual Lamp Remote

Test Pilot Light

120 Vac Resistor KXTD38RG .... KXTD38➁➁ KXTD38

See Table Below For Voltage, Frequency and Assembly Codes➀

Full VoltageResistor KXTD➀RG .... KXTD➀➁➁ KXTD➀

Type KXPC (4 Lamp) Type KXTE

(Remote Test 4 Lamp)

110-120 V, 50-60 Hz24 Vac-dc

TransformerResistor

....

....KXPC1RRGG

KXPC35RRGGKXPC1➁➁➁➁

KXPC35➁➁➁➁KXPC1

KXPC35

See Table Below For Other Voltages And Assembly Codes ➀

Full Voltageor Resistor

....

.... KXPC➀RRGG KXPC➀➁➁➁➁ KXPC➀

See Table Below For Other Voltages And Assembly Codes ➀

Full Voltageor Resistor .... KXTE➀RRGG KXTE➀➁➁➁➁ KXTE➀

Voltage Description For Use with Dual or Four Lamp Operators As Indicated

AssemblyCode ➀

Separate LightModule Type No.

RatedVA (Watts)

Lamp Number(ANSI) Lamp Part Number

6 Vac-dc12 Vac-dc24 Vac-dc28 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc

110-120 V, 50-60 Hz120 Vac-dc

208-220 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz

277 V, 50-60 Hz380-480 V, 50-60 Hz550-600 V, 50-60 Hz

Full VoltageResistor

Full VoltageFull Voltage

ResistorResistor

TransformerResistor

TransformerTransformerTransformerTransformerTransformer

KXPB, KXRLKXRM, KXTC

3132343536371

3837856

KXAKM231KXAKM232KXAKM234KXAKM235KXAKM236KXAKM237KXAKM21

KXAKM238KXAKM23KXAKM27KXAKM28KXAKM25KXAKM26

0.92.01.81.22.63.02.43.02.42.42.42.42.4

6PSB12PSB24PSB28PSB48PSB60PSB6PSB

120PSB6PSB6PSB6PSB6PSB6PSB

2550105007255010500325501050042550105008255010500925501050102550105007255010500525501050072550105007255010500725501050072550105007

6 Vac12 Vac24 Vac28 Vac48 Vac60 Vac

120 Vac

Full VoltageResistor

Full VoltageFull Voltage

ResistorResistorResistor

KXTD

31323435363738


0.92.01.81.22.63.03.0

6PSB12PSB24PSB28PSB48PSB60PSB

120PSB

2550105007255010500325501050042550105008255010500925501050102550105005

6 Vac-dc12 Vac24 Vac28 Vac48 Vac60 Vac

110-120 V, 50-60 Hz120 Vac

Full VoltageResistorResistorResistorResistorResistor

TransformerResistor

KXPC

3132343536371

38


KXAKM438

0.92.01.81.22.63.02.43.0

6PSB12PSB24PSB28PSB48PSB60PSB6PSB

120PSB

25501050072550105003255010500425501050082550105009255010501025501050072550105005

6 Vac24 Vac28 Vac

120 Vac

Full VoltageResistorResistorResistor

KXTE

31343538

KXAKMR431KXAKMR434KXAKMR435KXAKMR438

0.91.81.23.0

6PSB24PSB28PSB

120PSB

2550105007255010500425501050082550105005

Button CoversFor Use On Color Type No. Code

KXPB, KXTDIncludes 2-KXN200


KXAC28➂KXAC28➂KXAC28➂KXAC28➂KXAC28➂

R➃G➃A➃L➃W➃

KXTC (Pos. 1 & 4)Includes KXN400



RGALW

KXTC (Pos. 2 & 3)Includes KXN500



RGALW

KXTE, KXPCIncludes 1–KXN100


KXAC48➄KXAC48➄KXAC48➄KXAC48➄KXAC48➄

R➅G➅A➅L➅W➅

1 2

1

2 3

4

1 2

1 2

3 4

➂ Each KXAC28 includes a clear cover and 1 each of all colors. Only 1-KXAC28 should berequired per KXPB operator –unless the same color is required for #1 and #2 – then 2-KXCA28 should be ordered.

➃ When specifying color codes – the first will be installed in #1 and the second in #2. ➄ Each KXAC48 includes a clear cover and 1 each of all colors. Only 1-KXCA48 should be

required per KXPC operator –unless the same color is required for more than 1 position. If2 of the same colors are required – order 2-KXAC48, etc.

➅ When specifying color codes — the first will be installed in #1, the second in #2, the third in#3 and the fourth in #4.

Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119Completely Assembled Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 110Legend Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 118Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 124Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 123

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type KX — 30 mmLegends


11/97

These legend inserts are for the pilot lights in the center of the operator. These legend inserts are for the push button portion of the operator. These Legend Inserts have Vertical Printing.

For Push Buttons or Pilot Lights

Used On

KXRA, KXRBKXRN, KXRPKXPA, KXPCKXTA, KXTBKXTE

KXRC, KXRDKXRE, KXRF

KXPBKXTD

KXRG, KXRHKXRJ,

KXRK

KXRG, KXRHKXRJ, KXRKKXRL, KXRMKXTC

KXRL, KXRMKXTC

Marking

BlankStartStopOnOff

Emerg. StopForwardReverse

CloseOpenDown

UpJog

ResetRun

Cycle StartMotor RunPower On

KXN100KXN101KXN102KXN103KXN104KXN105KXN106KXN107KXN108KXN109KXN110KXN111KXN118KXN123KXN124KXN132KXN136KXN138


KXN200KXN201VKXN202VKXN203VKXN204VKXN205VKXN206VKXN207VKXN208VKXN209VKXN210VKXN211VKXN218VKXN223VKXN224VKXN232VKXN236VKXN238V




Special-Marking KXN199 KXN299 KXN299V KXN399 KXN499 KXN599

For Selector Switches

Used On

KXSA, KXSB, KXSC, KXSD,KXSE, KXSF, KXSG, KXSH,KXSJ, KXSK, KXSL, KXSM,KXSN, KXSO, KXSP, KXSQ

KXSR, KXSS, KXST,KXSV, KXSW, KXSX,

KXSY, KXSZ

Marking

BlankFor.-Rev.

Hand-AutoMan-Auto

Off-OnOn-Off

Open-CloseStart-Stop

Auto-Off-HandHand-Off-AutoMan-Off-Auto

KXN600KXN639KXN640KXN643KXN644KXN645KXN646KXN651KXN658KXN660KXN662

KXN700KXN739KXN740KXN743KXN744KXN745KXN746KXN751KXN758KXN760KXN762

Spcl. Marking KXN699 KXN799

1.2331

1.2331

1.2331

0.5614

0.56141.23

31

0.4812

0.4311

0.267

Square

1.3334

0.7619

Square

KXN-600

1.3334

0.7619

Square

KXN-700

KXN100

KXN200(POS 1)

KXN300(POS 1)

KXN300(POS 2)

KXN300(POS 3)

KXN400(POS 1)

KXN400(POS 4)

KXN-400

(POS 2)

KXN-400

(POS 3)KXN200(POS 2)(POS 1)

(PO

S 1

)

(PO

S 2

)

KXN200V

KXN200V

KXRA, KXRBKXRN, KXRPKXPA, KXPCKXTA, KXTBKXTE

KXRG, KXRHKXRJ, KXRK

KXRL, KXRMKXTC

KXPB, KXTDKXRC, KXRDKXRE, KXRF

KXS

KXN600

KXN700

All Type KX push buttons and pilot lights have a blank insert asstandard. These blank inserts can be custom marked using amarking pen, a mechanical lettering set, press letters, or a tapelettering machine that marks a tape which can then be trans-ferred to the blank insert.

To have legend inserts installed into the operators, order theoperator as normal and then tell where to install the legendinserts using the numbered positions shown on the operatorordered.

Example: 9001KXRL1GRGRH2 with a9001KXN 401 in pos. 19001KXN 503 in pos. 29001KXN 504 in pos. 39001KXN 402 in pos. 4

Letter Height For Standard LegendsKXN100KXN200KXN300KXN400KXN500KXN600KXN700

1⁄4 Inch (6 mm)3⁄16 Inch (4.75 mm)3⁄16 Inch (4.75 mm)3⁄16 Inch (4.75 mm)3⁄16 Inch (4.75 mm)

1⁄8 Inch (3 mm)1⁄8 Inch (3 mm)

Maximum Number of Lines and Charactersfor Type KXN Legend Inserts

LetterHeight Number of KXN199 KXN299

HorizontalKXN299Vertical KXN399 KXN499 KXN599

1⁄4"(6 mm)

CharactersPer Line 7 7 3 7 7 3

Lines PerLegend Insert 4 2 4 1 1 1

3⁄16"(4.75 mm)



1⁄8"(3 mm)



Maximum Number of Lines and Charactersfor Type KXN699 and KXN799 Legend Plates

Position LetterHeight

Characters PerMarking Area

A and C B

3⁄16"(4.75 mm) 6 6

1⁄8"(3 mm) 8 9

3⁄16"(4.75 mm) 10 5

1⁄8"(3 mm) 13 7


Accessories


① Dial Plate only – Order Class 9001 Type KXN905. ② Uses same potentiometer as Class 9001 Type K and SK. Potentiometer shaft diameter = 1/4" (6 mm), length = 7/8" (22 mm)Not UL Listed, CSA Certified, or CE Marked.

Lockout for Push Buttons

Holds button indepressed position

Used On Type No.

KXRA-KXRCKXRD-KXREKXRF-KXRGKXRJ-KXRKKXRL-KXRMKXRH-KXRB

KXAK4

Closing Plate

UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13Square Closing Plate (Chrome Plated)

Same size as KX Bezel

Type No.

KXAK52

Boot for Push Buttons and Pilot Lights

Transparent boot usedto exclude harmful

Contaminants

Used On Type No.

All KXPush Buttons and

Pilot LightsKXAKU7

Boot For Selector Switches

Description Used On Knob Color Type No.

Transparent boot with knob used on selector switches to exclude

harmful contaminants.

All KX selector switches and potentiometer

operators (except key op.)

BlackRed

Green

KXAKU17BKXAKU17RKXAKU17G

Potentiometer (With Dial Plate) ①② Watts Description Type No.

2

Operator only — Single PotOperator with Single Pot

Operator only — Tandem PotOperator with Tandem Pot

KXBAKXBBKXBC

KXBD

Complete Type No. by adding suffix No. from table below.Example: Type KXBB05 or KXBD85

Suffix Ohms Suffix Ohms Suffix

Ohms SuffixOhms

Front Rear

01023803040532390633

50100200250500

10001500200032003500

0708400935103611

500010 K15 K25 K 35 K50 K75 K100 K

121337141516

250 K500 K750 K

1.1 Meg2.2 Meg5.0 Meg

8283858889

1000500010 K50 K

100 K

1000500010 K50 K

100 K

Shrouds

Used to color code the Type KX operators.

Type Used On Color Type No.

FullShroud

All PushButtonsand Pilot

Lights

GrayRed

GreenYellowBlackBlue

KXAK41EKXAK41RKXAK41GKXAK41YKXAK41BKXAK41L

ShortShroud

AnyKX

Operator

GrayRed

GreenYellowBlackBlue

KXAK40EKXAK40RKXAK40GKXAK40YKXAK40BKXAK40L

Basic OperatorsDescription Type

2 pos. maintained2 pos. spring return from right2 pos. spring return from left3 pos. maintained3 pos. spring return from right3 pos. spring return from left3 pos. spring return from both sides4 pos. maintained

KXSAEKXSBEKXSCDKXSDKXSEKXSFKXSGKXSHH

LinerType No.

6508900401

Wrench

Used to tighten ring nut on operators.

Type No.

K95

Lamp and Lens Removal Kit

Used to remove lamp and lens on allilluminated operators and pilot lights.

Type No.

KXALLRT

Screwdriver

Used to tighten mounting screws oncontact blocks and light modules.

Type No.

K69

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mmContact Blocks


11/97

For push buttons or two position selector switches (Types K or SKS11, K or SKS12, K orSKS25, K or SKS34, K or SK11J, K or SK12J, K or SK25J and K or SK34J) only. For sequenc-ing or overlapping contacts on other operators — consult local Square D Sales Office.



(Clear Cover)

KA1

(Green Cover)

KA2

(Red Cover)

KA3

(Clear Cover)


KA4

(Red Cover)


KA5

(Green Cover)


KA6

Additional Circuit Arrangements Available

SequencingN.O. Contact of

KA4 closes beforeN.O. Contact on KA1 KA4 KA1


OverlappingN.O. Contact of

KA4 closes before N.C.Contact of KA5 Opens KA4 KA5


Symbol

Contact BlocksWith Binder Head Screws

(not Fingersafe)

Gold Flashed ContactsWith Standard

Pressure Wire Terminals

Type Quantity Type

KA21 25-Up KA31

KA22 25-Up KA32

KA23 25-Up KA33

N.O. EarlyClosing

KA24 25-Up KA34


KA25 25-Up KA35


Contact Blocks, But Provide:• Terminals that accept ring tongue/fork tongue

connectors• Short single circuit contact blocks (0.75" deep

vs. 0.97" deep on the FINGERSAFE® Contact Blocks)

• Same as old style Series G product available prior to 3/89.

• Use form Y238 (add to catalog # as suffix)

Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not FINGERSAFE® Contact Blocks, But Have “Quick Connect” Terminals.

Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 124


KA1G


KA4G


KA5G

KA3G


KA6G

Symbol Type

KA12

KA13


Volts

DC


Make and Break ContinuousCarryingAmperesKA1 KA2

KA3 KA4 KA5KA6

125250600

1.10.550.2

1.10.550.2

1.1..........

1.10.550.2

101010

Volts

AC

Inductive (NEMA Type A600)35% Power Factor

Resistive 75%Power FactorMake, Break


Make Break ContinuousCarryingAmperesAmperes VA Amperes VA

120240480600

60301512

7200720072007200

6.03.01.51.2

720720720720

10101010

10101010

FileCCN

E42259NKCR

FileClass

LR 254903211 03

Marking

The Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks have been improved. The most noticeable change is that the terminals are Fingersafecontact blocks (meeting VDE 0106 Part 100). They also have one screw mounting and captive backed out plus/minus terminalscrews. These contact blocks still use the same reliable double break direct acting contacts used since 1965. Because of thewiping action of these contacts, they are suitable for use with programmable controllers. All contact blocks listed below will acceptup to 2 #12-#24 solid or stranded wires. Types KA1, KA3, KA31, and KA33 NC contacts are dirct opening.


Reed Contact Blocks & Hazardous Location Information


In hazardous locations, it is not always required to use explo-sion-proof equipment like the Class 9001 Type BR control sta-tions. It can save money to know what type of hazardouslocation exists. If you're not sure what type of hazardous loca-tion exists, the “Summary of Classification” Chart may help. Ifnot, contact your local electrical inspector. When you knowwhat class, division, and group(s) exists, see the table in thelower lefthand corner of this page for what Square D has to of-fer.

An intrinsically safe system requires either a Class 8501 Type TO or NY2 barrier relay or an in-trinsically safe barrier to restrict the energy available in the area classified as a hazardous areato a level less than that required to cause an explosion. In an intrinsically safe system, any non-illuminated Class 9001 operator or control station with standard contacts can be used. No illu-minated operators, except the Class 9001 Type KP44 intrinsically safe pilot light, may be used.

Any Class 9001 Type K, SK or KX operator can be used in an area classified as Class I,Division 2 hazardous locations.1.Only logic (KA40 series) or power (KA50 series) reed contact blocks are used.2.All Type K and SK illuminated operators are UL approved for use in Class I Division 2 areas. 3.Type KX illuminated operators do not use 4 lamp light modules, or 2 lamp light modulesother than the transformer type. 4.The operators are mounted in Type KY, KYSS, KYAF, SKY enclosures.

Any Class 9001 Type K, SK, or KX operator mounted in a Class 9001 Type KY, KYSS, KYAF,SKY enclosure may be used, except potentiometer operators.

For and : UL Listed: File E10054N, CCN NOIV.For : Add Form Y243 to single lamp Push To Test pilot lights.

Summary Of Classification ChartClass Division Group

I. Gas 1. Hazard May ExistMay Exist In Atmos-phere Under Normal Operating Conditions.

A. Acetylene







A. Acetylene




II. Dust 1. Hazard May ExistMay Exist In Atmos-phere Under Normal Operating Conditions.


F. Carbonaceous Dusts (Resistivity >102 ohm/cm but ≤108ohm/cm)





III. Fibers 1. Production Areas Easily Ignitable Fibers or Flyings


ForUse

Class Division Group(s)I 1 A 1. Intrinsically Safe System

I 1 B, C, D 1.2.

9001 BR stationIntrinsically Safe System

I 2 A1.

2.

9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnoteIntrinsically Safe System

I 2 B, C, D

1.2.

3.

9001 BR station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnoteIntrinsically Safe System

II 1 E, F, G 1.2.

9001 BR stationIntrinsically Safe System

II 2 E, F

1.2.

3.


II 2 G

1.2.

3.


III 1, 2 ....

1.2.

3.

9001 BR Station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnoteIntrinsically Safe System


The maximum number of logic and/or power reed contact blocks per operator isas indicated for standard contact blocks, except:

• On 3 position selector switches with cams “C,” “D,” “E,” “F,” “G,” “L,” or “M,” mountreed blocks on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem.

• On 4 position selector switches, mount reed blocks on one side only (eitherside), maximum 2 in tandem.

The power reed contact blocks can be used with standard industrial relays and starters through NEMA Size 4. Minimum voltage is 5 volts and the minimum current is 1 mA.① Inductive Rating – 35% Power Factor. ➁ Inductive and Resistive Ratings



KA41

KA42

KA43

KA44

KA45



120/1000.25A 8 VA

0.10A3 VA

0.5 A0.5 A


KA51

KA52

KA53

KA54

KA55

VoltsAC NEMA Type C300①

Make Break ContinuousCarrying AmpsAmps VA Amps VA

120240

10.005.00

12001200

1.0000.500

120120

3.03.0

VoltsDC NEMA Type Q150

Make Break ContinuousCarrying AmpsAmps VA Amps VA

115 0.50 58 0.50 58 3.0

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type KX“H” Numbers


11/97

Suffix No. (Add to Operator Type No.)

Positions1 2 3 4 5 6

H1H2H3H4H5H6H7H8H9H10H11H12H13H14H15H16H17H18H19


KA2KA2KA1KA3KA1

KA1KA1KA1


KA1KA1

KA2

KA2

KA2KA3KA1

KA1

KA1KA3

KA3

KA1KA3KA1

H21 KA2 KA3 H23H24H25H26H27H28H29



KA1

KA4KA3

KA1

KA1

KA5

KA1

KA1

KA1

KA3H31H32H33H34

KA2

KA1KA5

KA2KA1KA3KA1

KA1

KA3KA1

H36H37H38H39H40H41H42H43H44H45H46H47H48



KA3

KA2KA2

KA3

KA3KA4

KA2KA3KA4KA2KA2

KA3KA2KA2KA5KA4

KA3 KA3

H50H51H52H53H54H55H56H57H58H59H60H61H62H63H64


KA1KA1KA2KA1KA1KA3


KA2

KA3

KA3

KA2KA2KA2

KA1KA1KA5KA3KA3KA2

KA3KA4

KA2

KA5

KA1

KA3

H66 KA3 KA1 KA3 KA1H71H72H73H74H75H76H77H78H79H80H81

KA3KA3KA1KA1KA1KA1KA1KA1KA3KA4KA1

KA3KA5KA1KA2KA3KA2

KA2KA3KA4KA1

KA3

KA3KA5KA3KA2KA1

KA5KA2

KA3

KA5KA3KA2

KA5KA5KA5KA3

KA3KA2

H82H83

KA12KA35

KA12KA33

KA13 KA13

H86H87

KA3KA3

KA2KA2

KA3KA3 KA2 KA3

H89H90H91H92H93H94H95



KA3KA1KA3KA3KA1

KA3KA2KA2KA5KA3

KA3

KA3KA5KA3

KA3KA3

H97H98H99H100

KA1KA1KA2KA1

KA3KA1KA2KA3

KA1KA2KA1

KA2KA2KA2KA2 KA2

KA2

H101H102H103H104H105H106H107


KA2KA3KA1KA1 KA31KA2

KA2

KA3KA1

KA5

KA2KA3KA3KA2

KA2

KA2

KA2

KA2

H109H110H111H112H113H114


KA3KA3KA4KA33KA1

KA2KA3KA4

KA5

KA3KA5

KA3 KA3

The design of the Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks allowsthem to be mounted side by side and/or in tandem.

The system illustrated below has been set up to enable an op-erator and a particular arrangement of contact blocks to bespecified by a single type number. Operators and contactblocks will be shipped completely assembled.

EXAMPLE: A Type KXRCGR push button with 2 Type KA1 contact blocks would be Class9001 Type KXRCGRH2.

“H” Numbers not shown in their sequence are no longer used.

Suffix No. (Add to Operator Type No.)

Positions

1 2 3 4 5 6

H115H116H117H118H119H120H121H122



KA5KA3KA1

KA5KA3KA3

KA3KA2KA2

KA3

KA5KA5

KA2

H124H125H126H127H128H129H130H131H132H133H134H135H136H137H138H139H140H141H142H143H144H145H146H147H148H152H153H154H155H156H157H158H159

KA5KA42KA43KA41KA2KA2KA2KA2KA3KA3KA3KA3KA45KA3KA5KA44KA43KA1KA3


KA3KA5

KA3

KA2

KA3KA2 KA45KA3KA5 KA43KA1KA1K85

KA52


KA2KA1

KA3

KA2


KA41KA5

KA53

KA2KA1KA1KA3KA3

KA3

KA2

KA3

KA2KA2

KA44KA2

KA4

KA2

KA1

KA3KA2

KA2

KA2KA2

KA2

H161H162H163H164H165H166H167H168H170H171H172H173H174H175H176H177H178H179

KA52KA2K85K85KA55KA22

KA54KA53KA23KA54KA1KA6KA4KA3K85KA53

K85

KA22KA23KA22KA51KA51KA23KA51KA3KA2

KA4

KA55

KA5KA4KA4

KA1KA5

KA3

KA4

KA51

KA3KA5

For Type KX


Application Data, Materials


The Type KX operators are UL and CSA Listed as follows:

The KX operators are rated UL Types 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 6, 12, 13/NEMA Types 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4X, 6, 12, 13 without the use of protectiveboots. Boots are recommended for dirty environments or areasthat are hosed down with water under very high pressure.

Operator Service Temperature Range:-22 °F to +140 °F at 50% relative humidity-30 °C to +60 °C

Mounting Hole For Type KX Control Units

Use Greenlee Tool #60242 for punching mounting hole and notch.

Selector Switch Angular Travel

FileCCN

E42259NKCR

FileClass

25490C3211 03

Maximum Number of Contact Blocks Per OperatorMom. Push Button —Three mounted in tandem for a total of six.

Maint. Push Button —Two mounted in tandem for a total of four.

Selector Switch —Two mounted in tandem for a total of four.

Marking

Type KX Operator Materials

Single Push Button(KXRA, KXRB, KXRN, KXRP, KXTA)Gasket – NitrileLocking Head – ZAMAC #3Screws – SteelTerminals – SteelButton – PolycarbonateSeal – NitrileSeal Retainer – SteelBezel – ZincStem – PolycarbonateStem Cover – PolycarbonateLegend Insert – PolyesterReturn-Spring – Music WireRing Nut – Zinc or AluminumAdaptor – ZincAdaptor Mounting Clip – Music WireLiner – Nylon

Dual Push Button (Non-Illuminated and Illuminated)(KXRC, KXRD, KXRE, KXRF, KXRG, KXRH, KXRJ, KXRK, KXRL, KXRM, KXTC)Gasket – NitrileSeal – NitrileSeal Retainer – BrassBezel – ZincButton Stem – Stainless SteelButton – PolycarbonateButton Cover – PolycarbonateLegend Insert – PolyesterLamp Cover – PolycarbonateLens Retainer – PolycarbonateLens – PolycarbonateReturn-Spring – Music WireRing Nut – Zinc or AluminumAdaptor – ZincAdaptor Mounting Clip – Music WireLiner – NylonRetainer Ring – SteelInterlock Pad – PolyesterInterlock – Sintered SteelInterlock – Nylon (KXRD)Pin – Steel (KXRE, KXRF)Detent Bearing – Steel (KXRE, KXRF)Detent Spring – Music Wire (KXRE, KXRF)Interlock – Steel (KXRM)Baffle – SteelLocking Head – ZAMAC #3Screws – SteelStem – PolycarbonateStem Cover – PolycarbonateTerminals – Steel

Selector Switch (Non-Illuminated and Illuminated)(KXS)Gasket – NitrileSeal – NitrileSeal Retainer – SteelReturn Spring – Music WireCam Rotor – Celenex 3300Cam Follower – Delrin 100Cam Carrier – TrogamidCam Profile – Delrin 100Bearing – PolyesterBezel – ZincKnob – Polycarbonate or NylonKnob Ring Nut – PolycarbonateKnob Seal – NitrileLegend Plate – ABSPlug Insert – PolyesterKey Plug – Zinc, Brass, Music WireKey – BrassLocking Head – ZincLocking Head Seal – NitrileInsert – ZincAdaptor – ZincAdaptor Mounting Clip – Music WireLiner – NylonRing Nut – Zinc or AluminumTerminals – SteelScrews – Steel

Contact Block Type (KA)Housing– Amorphous NylonContact Slider– Nylon or AcetalTerminal– SteelSaddle Clamp– SteelSpring– SteelContacts– Silver and CopperBlade– Beryllium CopperLabel– Paper

Shrouds– Delrin 507Lockout– 410 Stainless SteelClosing Plate– ZAMAC #3Boots– NeoprenePotentiometer (KXBA, KXBB, KXBC, KXBD):

Pot – Clarostat Types J and EJOperator – ZAMAC #3Legend Plate – ABSKnob – PolycarbonatePrinted circuit board – PhenolicCam Rotor – PolyesterCam – AcetalCam Carrier – NylonAdaptor – ZAMAC #3Adaptor Spring – Square Music WireSpacer – Fiber BoardGasket – Buna NTerminal – BrassScrews – SteelBezel – Zinc Locking Head – ZAMAC #3

Legend Inserts (KXN100, KXN200, KXN300, KXN400, KXN500) – .005 Thk. Matte PolyesterLegend Plates (KXN-600, KXN-700) – ABS

Pilot Light(KXPA, KXPB, KXPC, KXTE)O-Ring – NitrileBezel – ZincButton – PolycarbonateButton Cover – PolycarbonateButton Stem – PolycarbonateScrews – SteelTerminals – SteelLens Assembly – PolycarbonateBaffle – SteelRing Nut – Zinc or AluminumAdaptor – ZincAdaptor Mounting Clip – Music Wire

Light Module (Single Lamp KM)Housing – Thermoplastic PolyesterSocket – SteelTerminal – Steel with Tin PlateSaddle Clamp – SteelTranslating Pin – PolycarbonateTransformer – Thermoplastic Polyester, Steel, Copper, Polyvinyl Chloride,Polytetrafluoroeth-ylene, Acetate, PaperLamp Spring – Tin Plated Music Wire

Light Module (2 Lamp KXAKM2)Adaptor Screw – SteelHousing – Thermoplastic PolyesterLamp Terminal – CopperTerminal – SteelSaddle Clamp – SteelContact Spring – CopperTranslating Pin – PolycarbonateTransformer – Thermoplastic Polyester, Steel, Copper, Polyvinyl Chloride, Polytetrafluoroeth-ylene, Acetate, Paper

Light Module (4 Lamp KXAKM4)Housing – Thermoplastic PolyesterLamp Terminal – CopperAdaptor Screw – SteelTerminal – SteelSaddle Clamp – SteelTransformer – Nylon, Steel, Copper, Polyvinyl Chloride, Polytetrafluoroethylene, Acetate, Paper


Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type KX — 30 mmDimensions


11/97

Approximate Dimensions – Consult your local Square D Sales Office for latest version of dimension drawings.

Single Push Button OperatorNon-Illuminated

Selector Switch OperatorNon-Illuminated

Single Pilot Light

Dual Push Button OperatorNon-Illuminated

Key Operator Selector Switch Dual Lamp Pilot Light

Single Push Button OperatorIlluminated

Selector Switch OperatorIlluminated

Four Lamp Pilot Light

Dual Push Button OperatorIlluminated

Single Pot Potentiometer Operator Double Pot Potentiometer Operator

Dual Lamp Push Button Operator Shroud Boot Lockout

1.4737

1.0727

2.8272

1.8547

0.8822

.062

Min. .256

Max.

panel thickness

65075-125

KX RAKX RN 0.87

22

1.4737

1.2832

2.8272

1.8547

0.8822

.062

Min. .256

Max.

panel thickness

65075-125

KX SAKX SBKX SCKX SD

KX SEKX SFKX SGKX SH

1.4737

0.6416

65075-125

2.0051

.062

Min.

panel thickness

1.4737

2.8272

1.8547

0.8822

.062

Min. .256

Max.

panel thickness

65075-125

KX RCKX RDKX REKX RF

0.8722

1.4737

2.5465

2.8272

1.8547

0.8822

.062

Min. .256

Max.

panel thickness

65075-125

KX SRKX SSKX STKX SV

KX SWKX SXKX SYKX SZ

1.4737

2.7570

0.8722 22

0.85

65075-125 .062

Min. .256

Max.

panel thickness

1.4737

1.0727

2.0051

.062

Min. .256

Max.

panel thickness

65075-125

KX RBKX RPKX TA

0.9023

side 2side 1

1.4737

1.2832

65075-125

KX SJKX SKKX SLKX SM

.062

.256

Min. Max.

2.0051

panel thickness

side 1side 2

KX SNKX SOKX SPKX SQ

1.4737

3.1079

0.6416

0.8522

65075-125.062

Min. .256

Max.

panel thickness

1.4737

2.0051

.062

Min. .256

Max.

panel thickness

65075-125

KX RGKX RHKX RJKX RX

0.8722

side 2side 1

1.4737

KX BAKX BB

65075-125

1.2832

2.1555

0.8522

panel thickness.062

Min. .256

Max.

1.4737

KX BAKX BB

65075-125

1.2832

3.2081

0.8522

panel thickness.062

Min. .256

Max.

1.4737

4.69119

2.7570

0.8522

.062

Min. .256

Max.

panel thickness

65075-125

KX RLKX RMKX TC

0.8722

0.9725

1.6041

0.9324

65075-183

SHROUD

Panel Thickness0.062

Min. 0.256

Max.

1.5740

1.0627

65075-183

1.4737

2.2858

1.0827

65075-183

Minimum Centerline Spacings For Type KX21⁄4" Vertically 15⁄8" Horizontally


Type T 30 mm Push Buttons

Class 9001

CONTENTS


Type T Foundry Duty Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Type T Foundry Duty Selector Switches and Selector Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . 127Type T Foundry Duty Operators and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Legend Plates and Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131List of Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132


Class 9001, Type T – 30 mmFoundry Duty Operators


126

11/97

Non-Illuminated Push Button

– Legend Plate Not Included

Description Color Insert Type

HalfGuard

Universal

— Includes one of each color insert — Black, red, green, yellow, orange, blue and white.

BlackRed

GreenBlue

TR50

TR1TR2

TR15TR19

FullGuard

Universal


BlackRed

TR51

TR6 TR7

ExtendedGuard

Universal


BlackRed

TR52

TR35TR36

NoGuard

Universal


BlackRed

TR53

TR13TR14

MushroomButton

1

3

⁄

8

" Dia. Black1

3

⁄

8

" Dia. Red2

1

⁄

4

" Dia. Black2

1

⁄

4

" Dia. Red1

3

⁄

8

" Dia. Yellow2

1

⁄

4

" Dia. GreenNo Mushroom Head

TR3TR4

TR10TR11TR22TR25TR59

Pilot Lights

– Legend Plate Not Included

Description Voltage andFrequency

Standard Pilot Light Push-To-Test Pilot Light

With RedPlastic

Color Cap

With GreenPlastic

Color Cap

With RedGlass

Color Cap

With GreenGlass

Color Cap

Type Type Type Type

Transformer

110-120 V, 50-60 Hz208-220 V, 50-60 Hz380-480 V, 50-60 Hz550-600 V, 50-60 Hz

TP1R1TP3R1TP5R1TP6R1

TP1G1TP3G1TP5G1TP6G1



Neon

120 Vac or dc240 Vac or dc380 Vac or dc480 Vac or dc550 Vac or dc

TP7R1TP8R1TP9R1

TP10R1TP11R1

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

Resistor 120 Vac or dc240 Vac or dc

TP19R1TP20R1

TP19G1TP20G1

TP32R2TP33R2

TP32G2TP33G2

FullVoltage

6 Vac or dc12 Vac or dc18 Vac or dc

24-28 Vac or dc60 Vac or dc120 Vac or dc

TP12R1TP13R1TP14R1TP15R1TP18R1TP19R1

TP12G1TP13G1TP14G1TP15G1TP18G1TP19G1

TP27R2TP28R2TP29R2TP30R2TP64R2TP32R2

TP27G2TP28G2TP29G2TP30G2TP64G2TP32G2

Type T illuminated operators and pilot lights use Type K light modules.For replacement lamps and VA ratings refer to listing on page 132.

Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 130Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 130

Illuminated Push Button

– Contact Blocks (1 N.O.-1 N.C.) Included; Legend Plate Not Included

Description Voltage andFrequency

(Without Guard Shown)

Without Guard With Guard

With RedColor Cap

With Green

Color Cap

With RedColor Cap

WithGreen

Color Cap

Type Type Type Type

Transformer

110-120 V, 50-60 Hz208-220 V, 50-60 Hz380-480 V, 50-60 Hz550-600 V, 50-60 Hz





Resistor 120 Vac or dc240 Vac or dc

TP52R3TP53R3

TP52G3TP53G3

TP59R3TP60R3

TP59G3TP60G3

FullVoltage

6 Vac or dc12 Vac or dc18 Vac or dc

24-28 Vac or dc60 Vac or dc

TP47R3TP48R3TP49R3TP50R3TP63R3

TP47G3TP48G3TP49G3TP50G3TP63G3

TP54R3TP55R3TP56R3TP57R3TP68R3

TP54G3TP55G3TP56G3TP57G3TP68G3

Separate Color Caps

Plastic Color Caps forStandard Pilot Lights

Only

Glass Color Caps forStandard or Push To Test

Pilot Lights

Plastic Color Caps forIlluminated Push

Buttons

Color Type Type Type

Red R1 R2 R3

Green G1 G2 G3

Amber A1 A2 A3

Blue B1 B2 B3

Clear C1 C2 C3

White W1 W2 W3

Yellow ..... Y2 .....


FileCCN

E42259NKCR

FileClass

LR 254903211 03

Marking


Class 9001, Type T – 30 mmFoundry Duty Selector Switches

127


Key Withdrawal Code: See table below for proper code number. All key operated selector switches are furnished as standard with Square D number NQ1101 key.

For replacement key, order9001NQ1101.

No other keys are available.

Fits onto Type TS1 knob.

Selector Switch Operators

–

Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included

Description Contact BlockRequired

1 - Contact Closed 0 - Contact Open

2 Position 3 Position 4 Position

Selector Switch

QuantityandType

Mounton

SideLeft Right Left Right Left Right

Center Center Center Center Center

Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right

1-KA1#2 1 0

0 11 00 1

0 11 0

1 0 00 1 1

1 0 00 0 1

0 0 10 1 0

1 0 00 1 0

1 0 00 0 1

1 0 0 00 0 1 0

1-KA1#1 1 0

0 11 00 1

0 11 0

0 0 11 1 0

1 0 00 0 1

0 0 10 1 0

1 0 00 1 0

0 1 00 0 1

0 0 0 10 1 0 0

CAMA E D B C D E F H

Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type

Manual Return

Standard Black Knob Key Operated

TS1TS1K

. . . . . .

. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .

TS2TS2K

TS3TS3K

TS4TS4K

TS5TS5K

TS6TS6K

TS401

Spring Return - Left to Center


. . . . . .

. . . . . .TS14

TS14K2

. . . . . .

. . . . . .TS15

TS15K

TS16TS16K

TS17TS17K

TS18TS18K

TS19TS19K

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

Spring Return - Right to Center


. . . . . .

. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .

TS27TS27K1

TS511TS21K

TS521TS22K

TS531TS23K

TS541TS24K

TS551TS25K

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

Spring Return - Both Sides to Center


. . . . . .

. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .TS8

TS8K5TS9

TS9K5TS10

TS10K5TS11

TS11K5TS12

TS12K5. . . . . .. . . . . .

Key Withdrawal Arrangement For Selector Switches

Positions marked “YES” are those in which the key can be withdrawn, locking the switch in that position.

2-Position Switches 3-Position Switches

No. No. No.

1

Yes No

4

Yes No No

8

Yes No Yes

2

No Yes

5

No Yes No

9

No Yes Yes

3

Yes Yes

6

No No Yes

10

Yes Yes Yes

7

Yes Yes No

Selector Push Button Operators

–

Legend Plate And Contact Block Not Included

ContactBlocks

Required

Two Position Operators

1 = Contact Closed F = Free0 = Contact Open D = Depressed

1 — KA1

Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right

F D F D F D F D F D F D F D F D F D F D F D F D

1 00 1

0 01 1

1 10 0

0 00 1

0 00 1

1 00 0

1 10 0

1 00 1

. . . . . .

. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .

2 — KA1

1 00 1

0 01 1

1 00 1

0 00 1

0 00 1

1 00 0

1 00 1

1 10 0

0 00 1

1 00 1

0 00 1

1 10 0

1 00 1

0 01 1

1 10 0

0 00 1

0 00 1

1 00 0

1 10 0

1 00 1

0 00 1

1 10 0

1 10 0

0 00 1

Cam Z Y R T P S

Half GuardBlack Insert

Full GuardBlack Insert

Extended GuardBlack Insert

TQ1

TQ11

TQ62

TQ2

TQ12

TQ56

TQ36

TQ39

TQ69

TQ26

TQ48

TQ59

TQ42

TQ45

TQ71

TQ50

TQ53

TQ73

Gloved Hand Knob For Selector Switch

Type

T7

Adapter Kit

Allows a Type T Operator to be mounted in Type K mounting hole.

Part Number

3042654250


Class 9001, Type T – 30 mmFoundry Duty Operators & Accessories


128

11/97

Padlock Attachments

Latch TypePadlock Attachment

Cover TypePadlock Attachment

Selector SwitchPadlock Attachment

Latch TypePadlock Attachment

Type Type Type Type

TL1 TL2 TL3 TL5

Locks button in depressed position. Must be used with operator having standard half guard. Can be

used with mushroom buttons.

(Padlock not furnished.) Must be used with operator having standard half guard. (Padlock not furnished.) Locks button (with Type TU cap) in depressed

position. Does not include cap.

Maintained Contact Arrangement

Type

TM1

Use with two Type TR push buttons and one contact block. The contact block should always be assembled to the “Stop”operator. Not for use on illuminated push buttons.

Alternate Action (Push-on Push-off) Module

This module can be added to standard 9001 Type K, KX, SK or T oper-ators. Contact blocks mounted behind this module (maximum of 2) will be held in the depressed position when the operator is operated once and released to their normal position when the operator is operated again.

For a N.C. circuit, use a 9001KA3 or the N.C. contact of a 9001 KA1 or the N.C. contact of a 9001KA4. For a N.O. circuit, use the N.O. contact of the 9001KA4 or a 9001KA6.

Type

K85

Screwdriver

Used to tighten mounting screws on Type K contact blocksand light modules.

Type

K69

Protective Cap

The Type TU1 thru 6 cap will prevent metal shavings and other foreign matter from interfering with proper operation of oil tight push buttons. They are for use with the KY, KZ and KYAF enclosures and can be used with TN legend plates.

Color Type

BlackRed

BrownGreenYellow

TU1TU2TU4TU5TU6

Watertight Cap

These caps are for use on the Class 9001 Type KYSS NEMA Type 4 water tight enclosures. To retain the watertight seal (NEMA Type 4), sepa-rately mounted legend plates must be used (not available from Square D).

Color

For Push Buttons

For Selector Sw.

Type Type

BlackRedBlue

BrownGreenYellow

TU11TU12TU13TU14TU15TU16

TU51TU52TU53TU54TU55TU56

Clear Silicone Cap

–For standard pilot lightsFor push to test pilot lights and illuminated push buttons

TU17

TU27

Push Button Wrench

Type

T1

Simplifies installation of Type T units.

Trim Washer

Type

TN5

For use where legend plate is not required. Keeps ringnut from marring panel finish.

Liner

Part Number

310501401


Class 9001, Type T – 30 mmFoundry Duty Operators

129


These switches are furnished with special contact blocks.

Symbol 104 is same as 103 except contacts A1 and B1 are not furnished.

Three Position Master Switches


3-Position Master Switch, Complete with Contact Block Maintained

Contact Spring Return to Center

103104

TS80E2TS82D1

3-Position Master Switch, Without

Contact Block TS80

Basic Operators

Illuminated Push ButtonWith Full Guard

Less Color Cap And Light Module

Standard Pilot LightLess Color Cap And Light

Module

Illuminated Push ButtonWithout Guard And

Push To Test Pilot LightLess Color Cap, Light Module

And Contact Block

Type Type Type

T1L TP T2L

Maintained Push Button With 1

3

⁄

8

" Mushroom Button

Button locks in the depressed position – Turning knurled ring releases operator to its normal position. Price includes nameplate:

"Push-to-Stop Rotate Collar CW to Start".

Color Type

BlackRed

GreenBrownYellowOrange

Blue

TRM3TRM4TRM20TRM21TRM22TRM23TRM24

Time Delay Push Button

Timing period is adjustable from 0.2 second to 60 seconds and begins after push button has been released. Devices require the space of two standard operators. Devices include a package of seven color inserts for color coding the push button. Contacts are quick make - quick break.

Type listed is half guard version. Legend plate not included.

Description

TimedContact1 N.O. &1 N.C.

Type

TRD150

Correct Drilling For Mounting All Devices

1

7

⁄

32

" diameter hole may be cut with Greenlee knockout punch, No. 60246,available through electrical wholesalers.

Enclosure Minimum Spacings

Type TL1 or TL2 padlock attachments can be added to TR-Type operatorswithout adding to overall dimensions or without interference to otheroperators mounted adjacent.

Type TM1 maintained contact device may be installed on two push buttonunits mounted from 1

1

⁄

16

" (min.) to 2

1

⁄

2

" (max.) apart, arranged either verti-cally or side by side. The contact block should always be assembled to theoperator designated as Stop, Off or Safe.


Class 9001, Type T – 30 mmLegend Plates & Contact Blocks


130

11/97

Contact Blocks

All Type T Operators Accept Type KA Blocks. Types KA1 and KA3 N.C. contacts are direct opening.

Type K

SymbolType K Equivalent

Type T

Type Type

KA1 TA

KA2 TA2

KA3 TA1

Type T

TwoTypeKA1

OneTypeTB

TwoTypeKA2

OneTypeTD

TwoTypeKA3

OneTypeTC

2 Pole Double Throw For Tandem Mounting

With Type TB Contact Block Only

Symbol Type

TF

Note: A Special Purpose Block is not required to mount a Type K Block in tandem.

Contact Block Rating — Maximum AC

Type K and Type T

Volts

AC Amperes – NEMA Type A600

Inductive PilotDuty

35% Power Factor

Resistive75%

Power Factor

Make Break ContinuousMake, Break,

andContinuous

120240480600

60301512

63

1.51.2

10101010

10101010

Contact Block Rating – Maximum DC

Volts

Type K Type T

DC Inductive and Resistive DC AmperesInductive Pilot Duty

Make and BreakKA5

ContinuousCarryingAmperes

Makeand

Break

Con-tinuousKA1 KA2

KA3 KA4

120240600

1.10.550.2

1.10.550.2

1.1........

1.10.550.2

101010

2.2........

10........

The maximum number of characters and lines given above is a practical maximum and isbased on a minimum size of characters to facilitate easy reading. When fewer charactersthan the maximum are required the size of the characters is changed to permit the best read-ability.

Dimensions

For dimensions of operators, see Approval Drawing Pads 9001-16, 9001-17, and 9001-18. These can be requested from yourlocal Square D sales office.

Legend Plates

TN-200

Standard legend plate markings and special markings are listed in 30mm Push Buttons Types K and SK – order as Type TN2... or TN3... rather than Type KN.

Example: Legend plate marked “Forward,” order TN206 or TN306.

Special Legend Plates

Description Type

DoubleHeaded

TN4

Extra large

For customer's enclosure only. Minimum

spacing between operators must be 2

5

⁄

16

" vertically and 2

1

⁄

4

" hori-zontally.

TN6

Maximum Number Of Lines And CharactersFor Type TN Legend Plates

Type

TN2 TN3 TN4 TN6

Max. No. of Characters per Line

16 16 16 22

Max. No. of Lines

1 3 2 4


Class 9001, Type T – 30 mmLight Modules

131


Standard Light Modules for Type T Control Units

➃

• Neon type light modules — use CLEAR color caps only..

Shallow Depth Light Modules For Type T Control Units

• Reduces the depth of illuminated push buttons with contact blocks by over 33%.

➀

9001 K, SK, KX.➁ Do not use on any remote test version pilot light.➂ For Series A through F light modules – see page 106.➃ 9001K, SK, T

Voltage Description

For UseWith Single Lamp Ill.

Operators as Indicated➀

Light Module

Type No.

Voltage Assembly

CodeRating

Replacement Lamps ➂

LampNumber(ANSI)

Lamp PartNumber

6 Vac-dc Full Voltage All KM31 31 0.9 VA 755 2550101020

12-14 Vac-dc Full Voltage All KM32 32 1.2 VA 756 2550101037


24-28 Vac-dc Full Voltage All KM35 35 1.2 VA 757 2550101002


48 Vac-dc Full Voltage All KM36 36 2.6 VA 48MB 2550101025

60 Vac-dc Full Voltage All KM37 37 3.0 VA 60MB 2550101026

110-120 V, 25-30 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz



KM2KM1KMF1

21F1

2.2 VA2.4 VA0.85 VA

1490755267

255010100325501010202550101036

120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc

ResistorFull VoltageNeon

AllAllAll Except ➁

KM38KM38KM11

383811

3.0 VA3.0 VA0.2 VA

120MB120MBNE51H

255010102725501010272550101013

208-220 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer All Except ➁ KM3 3 2.5 VA 755 2550101020

220-240 V, 25-30 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz



KM4KM7KMF7

47F7

2.2 VA2.0 VA2.0 VA

1490755267

255010100325501010202550101036


ResistorNeon


KM25KM12

2512

6.0 VA0.3 VA

120MBNE51H

25501010272550101013

277 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer All Except ➁ KM8 8 2.4 VA 755 2550101020

380 ac-dc Neon All Except ➁ and KX KM13 13 0.4 VA NE51H 2550101013

380-480 V, 50-60 Hz480 Vac-dc

TransformerNeon


KM5KM14

514

2.8 VA0.5 VA

755NE51H

25501010202550101013

550 Vac-dc550-600 V, 50-60 Hz

NeonTransformer

All Except ➁ and KXAll Except ➁

KM15KM6

156

0.6 VA2.5 VA

NE51H755

25501010132550101020

Voltage DescriptionFor Use With Single

Lamp Ill. Operators as Indicated ➃

Light Module Type No.

Voltage Assembly

CodeRating

Replacement Lamps ➂

Lamp Number(ANSI)

Lamp PartNumber

24-28 Vac-dc Full Voltage All Except ➁ and KX KM55 55 1.2 VA 757 2550101002

110-120 Vac-dc Full Voltage All Except ➁ and KX KM58 58 3.0 VA 120MB 2550101027

2.78 in70.61 mm

1.75 in44.45 mm

StandardDuty

ShallowDepth

1.8948.01

1.8747.50

1.1228.45

1.7343.94

1.8747.50

Side View Top View

Side Viewshown with 9001 KA contact block


FileCCN

E42259NKCR

FileClass

LR 254903211 03

Marking

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type T – 30 mmList of Materials


11/97

Type TR push button

Base — Chrome plated zinc alloy die castingRing nut, stem and mushroom knob — Anodised aluminiumStem on mushroom head type — Stainless steelReturn spring — Stainless steelSeal washer — Cork/neoprene rubberOperating disc — Zinc plated steelGasket — Buna N rubberColor inserts — PolyethyleneSpring cup — BrassAllen screw on mushroom head — Steel alloy with Zinc oxide finish

Type TS selector switchRing nut, gasket, seal washer, return spring and spring cupsame as Type TR above.

Base and switch knob — Chrome plated zinc alloy die castingShaft — Stainless steelCam — Zinc alloyColor inserts — NylonBall Bearing — Stainless steelBall bearing spring — Stainless steelScrew and lock washer — Zinc plated steel Circlip — Spring steel with black phosphate finishGuide and spacer — Zinc plated steel (spring return type)Seal — Buna N rubber (spring return type)Various pins — Brass or zinc plated steel (spring return type)

Type TSK key operated selector switchAs type TS except as follows:

Lock barrel — Chrome plated zinc alloy die castingLock — Zinc alloy, brass tumblers, steel springs & stainless steel capKnob — Zinc alloy with aluminium shaftLock plate — Brass

Type TP pilot light

Base — Bright zinc plated zinc alloy castingRing nut — AluminiumReflector — AluminiumGasket — Buna N rubberLens — Glass in aluminium holder with Buna N rubber seals or

PolycarbonateLabel — PaperLight module — Type KM as supplied by Square D Ashville

Type TP push to test and illuminated push button

Base — Bright zinc plated zinc alloy castingRing nut — AluminiumOperator — Glass filled polyesterSpring support — Zinc plated steelGasket — Buna N rubberSeal — Nitrile rubberSpring — Stainless steelLock ring — TrogamidLens — PolycarbonateLabel — PaperLight module and contact block — Type KM and KA as supplied

by Square D Asheville

Type T contact block

Contact block — Melamine phenolicContacts — SilverContact backing — BrassMoving contact — Copper/silverOperating button — PhenolicStem — BrassCollar — Zinc alloyTerminal clamps — Zinc plated steelScrews — Zinc plated steelCover — Epoxy/glass laminateSprings — Stainless steel


CONTENTS


General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Options, Replacement Parts, and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Wiring and LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Class 8330

™

Control BusVersion 2

30 mm Push Button Modules


SERIPLEX

Control Bus Version 230 mm Push Button Modules


134

11/97

1.2 N•m(11 lb-in)

INSTALLLINER

0°

90°180°

270°

KX

K, SK & T

K, SK & T

KM

KA6•KM

KA6•

KA

KM35•BP

INSTALLLINER

The

Class 9001 Dedicated Module for 30mm Push Buttons

provides an interface between the SERIPLEX control bus andany of the Square D Class 9001 Type K, SK, KX and T push but-tons, pilot lights and selector switches (exceptions: 5-positionjoy stick and Type KX multi-lamp operators). Single-bit bus inter-face circuitry is used in this module. If multiplexed operation isused by the CPU interface card, the push button module isscanned every frame. This adaptor module is not capable of be-ing multiplexed (See page 9 for details).

Features

• Can be used with any Type K, SK, KX or T push button, pilotlight or selector switch operator (exceptions: 5-position joystick operators and Type KX multi-lamp operators)

• Performs control for illuminated and non-illuminated push but-ton operators

• Relay output dedicated modules are for illuminated operatorswith a standard Type KM light module

• Bus powered lamp modules don’t require an auxiliary powersupply or additional power conductors

• Bus powered lamp modules use high visibility, low currentconsumption LED lamps, providing long life and greater sys-tem flexibility

• LED indicators provided on all modules showing power-onstatus, input status and output status – a convenient installa-tion and troubleshooting aide

• Modules use quick and easy IDC panel cabling including pre-terminated cable (Catalog #CBL2222P38C05L20)

Assembly and Dimensions

With insulation displacement connector

See page 135 for general purpose ratings.

Contacts Closed = x Contacts Open = o

For additional information, see catalog 8330CT9601R11/96.

Dedicated Modules for Non-illuminated Operators

Catalog Number Input Type Address A Input Type Address B Output Type

9001KA61

N.C. N.O. none

9001KA62

— N.O. none

9001KA63

N.C. — none

Dedicated Modules for Illuminated Operators Using a Class 9001 Type KM Light Module

Catalog Number Input TypeAddress A

Input TypeAddress B

Output TypeAddress B

9001KA60KM

— — Electromechanical Relay

9001KA61KM

N.C. N.O. Electromechanical Relay

9001KA62KM

— N.O. Electromechanical Relay

9001KA63KM

N.C. — Electromechanical Relay

Dedicated Modules Using Bus Powered LED Lamps for Illuminated Operators

Catalog Number Input TypeAddress A

Input TypeAddress B

Output TypeAddress B

9001KM350BPA

— — LED Lamp - Amber

9001KM350BPG

— — LED Lamp - Green

9001KM350BPR

— — LED Lamp - Red

9001KM351BPA

N.C. N.O. LED Lamp - Amber

9001KM351BPG

N.C. N.O. LED Lamp - Green

9001KM351BPR

N.C. N.O. LED Lamp - Red

9001KM352BPA

— N.O. LED Lamp - Amber

9001KM352BPG

— N.O. LED Lamp - Green

9001KM352BPR

— N.O. LED Lamp - Red

9001KM353BPA

N.C. — LED Lamp - Amber

9001KM353BPG

N.C. — LED Lamp - Green

9001KM353BPR

N.C. — LED Lamp - Red

Selector Switch Logic Table (Operators only. Select 2-input modules from table above.)

Class 9001 Operator Type

KS42 KS43 KS44 KS11 KS25 KS46 KS88

Cam Type B C D E F H X

Knob Position

Address A (N.C.) x o o x o o o o x x o x o o x o o o o x x o

Address B (N.O.) o x o o o x o x o o x o o x o x o o o o x x

1.50

38.1

inmm

1.6241.1

2.16

54.9


SERIPLEX

Control Bus Version 230 mm Push Button Modules

135


Example: To order conformal coating for catalog number 9001KA61, change to 9001KA61T.

The fracture torque leads to damage of the screw shaft, stripping of the thread or deformation of the screw slot.

Options, Replacement Parts and Accessories

Catalog Number Description

SPX30MMXCAM

4-position selector switch cam for use with SERIPLEX modules for 30mm operators

SPXLEDA1

Replacement LED Lamp – amber

SPXLEDG1

Replacement LED Lamp – green

SPXLEDR1

Replacement LED Lamp – red

SPXUSER2

Replacement user label (has marking surface for addresses and control words). Quantity 10.

9001KXALLRT

Lamp Removal Tool

add a ‘

T

’ to the end of a catalog number

Conformal coating. Increases Micro-Environmental Category rating from MEC pollution degree II to MEC pollution degree III, as outlined in IEC 664-1, section 2.5.1. Conformal coating meets MIL-I-46058C.

Specifications

SERIPLEX bus power requirements: Nominal voltage rating Power supply voltage range at 25

°

C

24 Vdc19.2 to 30 Vdc including ripple

Bus power supply current drain (25

°

C, 24 Vdc)

no relay output: 7 mA typicalrelay output: 16 mA typicalbus powered LED lamp: 18 mA typical

Worst case bus power supply current drain (-25

°

C, 30 Vdc)

no relay output: 8 mArelay output: 24 mA bus powered LED lamp: 24 mA

Module capacitance

75 pF typical

Bus clock frequency operating range

10 kHz to 200 kHz

Operating temperature

-25

°

C to +70

°

C (-13

°

F to +158

°

F)

Storage Temperature

-40

°

C to +85

°

C (-40

°

F to +185

°

F)

Relative Humidity

5 to 95%, non-condensing

Electromechanical Relay Rating (UL)

250 Vac, 30 Vdc, 2.5 A resistive pilot duty: AC - 180 VA, DC - 15 VA, C300

Micro-environmental category

II (per IEC664-1, Section 2.5.1)

Shock (IEC 68-2-27)

30 g, 3 axes, 11 ms duration, half sine pulse

Vibration (IEC 68-2-6)

10 to 55 Hz, 1 mm peak-to-peak, 2 hour in 3 axes

Noise immunity: Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI) Fast transients Impulse

IEC801-2IEC801-3IEC801-4IEC255-4

Compliance standards

UL File E114926, CSA File LR53531 (submitted), NOM-117

Screw terminal block specifications (relay versions only) conductor capacity

Screw terminal torque Fracture torque

Wire strip length

single conductor: UL 14 - 22 AWG, CSA 14 - 26 AWGtwo conductors: 18 AWG - 28 AWG0.4 N•m (3.5 lb-in)0.8 N•m (7.0 lb-in)7 mm (0.3 in.)

Maximum allowable standard contact blocks mounted on a SERIPLEX dedicated module

One Contact Block (Class 9001 Type KA1 through Class 9001 Type KA6)

Bus cable connectionPart #SPX 5IDC22, reference

Bulletin #30298-050-01 for installation

white (data)

blue (clock)

red (V+)

black (common)

bare (sheild drain)

Relay (output B)

S

L

FieldSupply

L=Class 9001Type KM

Light ModuleLED Indicators

OB IB IAP

Locating notch on Operator for selector switch applications

Actuating stem for input address B (N.O.)

Actuating stem for input address A (N.C.)

Wiring and LED Indicators

LED Color Function and Address

I

A

yellow Input A Active

I

B

yellow Input B Active

P green Bus Power Applied

O

B

yellow Output B Active

®

File LR 53531

File E114921CCN NRAQ

Class 2252 01


SERIPLEX

Control Bus Version 2


136

11/97

Square D offers specialized control packages through the Modified Panels Group. Assemblies can be manufactured to meet your specific design criteria, incorporating special dimensions, enclosure types, and component makeup.

Specific control operator needs can be satisfied with products ranging fromstandard 30 mm push buttons to printed circuit board mounted pilot device assemblies.

In addition, Square D offers the widest variety of control products in numerous enclosure types to meet your electrical, environmental, anddimensional needs. Use of CAD designs, prototype assembly before production, and personalized service insures the product you receive will be exactly what you ordered...Guaranteed.

For additional information or receive a personalized proposal, contact your local Square D sales office.

Modified Panels by Square D


Type B and 30 mm Control Stations

Class 9001

CONTENTS


Type B Standard Duty Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Type B Standard Duty Control Stations Accessories and Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Type B Standard Duty Control Stations Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Type B Standard Duty Control Stations Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Type K, SK, and KX Industrial Duty Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Type K and Sk Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Type K, SK, KX, and T Flush Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Type K and SK Enclosure Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Type KY and KZC Security Control Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Type K, SK, KX, and T Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Hazardous Location Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152


Class 9001, Type B — Standard Duty Control Stations


138

11/97

Standard duty control stations are designed for use with magnetic motor starters to govern the starting, stopping, or reversing of all types of electricmotors. Push buttons are momentary contact unless otherwise indicated. Selector switches are maintained contact.

Control Stations

Many items are stock or can be furnished as a quick ship using a “Universal” station plus accessories.

No.of

UnitsNameplate Markings and Features Contact Symbol

See page 141

Surface MountingNEMA Type 1

t

Stainless SteelFlush Plate

(Pullbox

k

not included)

t

Watertight andDusttight

NEMA Type 4

t

For Hazardous Locations

Class I, Div. I & IIGroups B, C and DClass II Div. I & II

Groups E, F and GNEMA Types 7 & 9

t

Type Type Type Type

1

Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stop (Mushroom Button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stop (Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Universal (w/o Legend Inserts)

q

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1333

16

BG101BG102BG103BG104BG107

BF101BF102

.....

.....BF107

BW146BW147BW151BW148BW159

BR101.....

BR103BR104BR107

Off-on (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Hand-Off-Auto (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Universal Selector Switch (w/o Legend Insert)

q

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1917

19 or 17

BG111BG112BG114

BF111BF112BF114

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

Red Pilot Light: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Green Pilot Light: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pilot Light (w/o Lens): 120 Vac or dc

q

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

121121121

BG121BG122BG123

BF121BF122BF123

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

2

Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start-Stop (Mushroom on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start-Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start-Stop (Mushroom on Start and Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Forward-Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Open-Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Up-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Raise-Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Universal (w/o Legend Inserts)

q

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start-Stop (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .On-Off (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Hand-Auto (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start-Stop

(Red Mushroom on Stop, Both Buttons Maintained). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Universal (Maintained Contact w/o Legend Inserts)

q

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

145146145145145146146146146145146251010101010

BG201BG202BG203BG204BG205BG206BG207BG208BG209BG210BG211BG214BG215BG216BG217

.....BG218

BF201BF202

.....

.....

.....BF206BF207BF208BF209BF210BF211BF214BF215BF216BF217

.....BF218

BW240BW252BW250BW241BW246BW242BW244BW243BW253BW245BW254BW260BW255BW256BW257

.....BW258

BR204BR202BR203BR204BR205BR206BR207BR208BR209BR210BR211BR214BR215BR216BR217BR219BR218

Off-On (Selector Switch), Red P.L.: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Hand-Off-Auto (Selector Switch), Red P.L.: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Universal Selector Switch & Pilot Light 120 Vac

or dc (w/o Legend Insert & w/o Lens)

q

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hand-Off-Auto (Selector Switch) & Start (Push Button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Universal Selector Switch & Push Button

(w/o Legend Inserts)

q

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19 & 12117 & 121

17 or 19& 121

17 & 1

17 or 19& 16

BG221BG223

BG224

BG225

BG226

BF221BF223

BF224

BF225

BF226

q

“Universal” designates control stations without legend inserts, lenses or accessory kits. Universal stations plus separate legend inserts and other acces-sories listed on page 139 allow the user to conveniently build up standard or custom stations.

k

Use standard 2.0 or 2.13 inch deep wall boxes, single gang for Types BF1 – and BF2 – and two gang for Type BF3 –.

t

For replacement interiors, see page 140.Replacement enclosures (case and/or cover) are not available for Type BR devices.

Lockout must be factory installed on NEMA Type 4 devices. However, replace-ment covers are available with the lockout feature as standard. See page 139.

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 139Replacement Parts. . . .Page 139-140Replacement Interiors . . . . Page 140Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 141Contact Symbols . . . . . . . . Page 141

Fast-Slow-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Forward-Reverse-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Open-Close-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Raise-Lower-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Up-Down-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .High-Low-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start-Jog-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Forward-Reverse-Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Up-Down-Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .High-Low-Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Universal (w/o Legend Inserts)

q

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

109109109109109109109109109109

8

BG301BG302BG303BG304BG305BG306BG316BG322BG325BG326BG307

BF301BF302BF303BF304BF305BF306

.....

.....

.....

.....BF307

3

Start-Stop, Red Pilot Light: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Universal Push Buttons (2) & Pilot Light: 120 Vac

or DC (w/o Legend Inserts & w/o Lens)

q

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start-Stop (Maintained Contacts) & Red Pilot Light: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . .On-Off (Maintained Contact) & Red Pilot Light: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . . . . .Hand-Auto (Maintained Contacts), & Red Pilot Light: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . .Universal Push Buttons (Maintained Contact) & Pilot Light: 120 Vac or DC (w/o Legend Inserts & w/o Lens)

q

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hand-Off-Auto (Selector Switch), & Start-Stop (Push Buttons) . . . . . . . . . .Universal Selector Switch & 2 Push Buttons (w/o Legend Inserts)

q

. . . . .

145 & 121

25 & 12110 & 12110 & 12110 & 121

10 & 12117 & 145

17 or 19 & 25

BG308

BG309BG310BG311BG312

BG313BG314BG315

BF308

BF309BF310BF311BF312

BF313BF314BF315

NEMA Type 4Type BW243

NEMA Types 7-9Type BR103

NEMA Type 1Surface Mounting

Type BG201

NEMA Type 1Flush Mounting

(w/o pullbox)Type BF201

File E42259CCN NKCR


Marking


Class 9001, Type B — Standard Duty Control StationsAccessories and Legends

139


Mushroom Caps – Kits do not include legendinsert; order separate legend insert from thetables below.

EX: For red mushroom button marked STOP,order one 9001 Type B301 plus one 9001Type B102.

Lockout Kit – For

NEMA Type 1

surfacemounting stations, bottom unit only. Can beused on either push button or on 2 or 3position selector switch. Lockout cannot beused with mushroom cap.

Color Type

For NEMA TYPE 1 surface mounting stations

Red B301

Black B302

For NEMA Type 4

Red B303

Type

B321

Pilot Light Lenses

ColorFor NEMA Type 1Surface Mounting

For NEMA Type 1Flush Mounting

Type Type

Red B331 B341

Green B332 B342

Interchangeable Push Button Legend Inserts

Marking

ForNEMA Type 1

Surface Mounting

Push Button& Mushroom

Caps

ForNEMA Type 1

Flush Mounting

For NEMA Type 4 and

NEMA Types 7-9Lever Type

Square

For NEMA Type 4Button Type

Round

MushroomButton Inserts

For NEMA Type 4

Type Type Type Type Type

StartStopFastSlowForwardReverseOpenCloseRaiseLowerUpDownHighLowOnOffHandAutoJogBlank-BlackBlank-Red

B101B102B103B104B105B106B107B108B109B110B111B112B113B114B115B116B117B118B119B129

B129R


B159R


B189R

B259B260. . . .. . . .

B255B256B263B264B261B262B253B254. . . .. . . .

B257B258B265B266. . . .

B251B252

B282B283. . . .. . . .

B278B279B286B287B284B285B276B277. . . .. . . .

B280B281B288B289. . . .

B251B252

Order must specify quantity of 10 or multiples of 10.

t

Replacement cover has lockout factory installed on cover.

Replacement Covers for BF and BW

For Types Types

BF101-BF123BF201-BF226BF301-BF315BW146-BW147BW148

t

BW149-BW159BW240BW241

t

BW242-BW260

304000031130400003023110104301

BWD108BWD109BWD108BWD219BWD220BWD219

Selector Switch Knob for Types BG & BF Selector Switches

SylvaniaLamp No.

120PSB

Replacement Lamp

SylvaniaLamp No.

Square DPart No.

120PSB 2550105005

Replacement Lamp Holder

Type

BGC124

Interchangeable Selector Switch Legend Plates

MarkingFor NEMA Type 1Surface Mounting


Type Type

Off-OnHand-Off-AutoManual-AutoFoward-ReverseOpen-CloseOpen-Off-CloseHand-AutoForward-Off-ReverseSummer-WinterSummer-Off-WinterLow-Off-HighUp-Off-Down

B201B202B203B204B205B206B207B208B209B210B211B212

B231B232B233B234B235B236B237B238B239B240B241B242


Legend Insert Kits

(Kit includes one each of standard legend inserts as indicated below, TypeNo. of kit.)

Where Used: Type

For NEMA Type 1Surface Mounting

Push Buttons B100 (Incl's 1 eachof B101 thru B119)

Selector Switches B200 (Incl's 1 eachof B201 thru B212)


Push Buttons B130 (Incl's 1 eachof B131 thru B149)

Selector Switches B230 (Incl's 1 eachof B231 thru B242)

For NEMA Type 4 andNEMA Type 7-9 Lever

Type, SquarePush Button B160 (Incl's 1 each

of B161 thru B179)

For NEMA Type 4Button Type, Round Push Button B250 (Incl's 1 each

of B253 thru B266)

For NEMA Type 4Button Type Mushroom Button B300 (Incl's 1 each

of B276 thru B289)


Class 9001, Type B — Standard Duty Control StationsReplacement Parts


140

11/97

Replacement Interiors For Type B Standard Duty Push Button Stations

For Control Station Types

Contact Symbol Contact Block Assembly

TypeTerminal Block Wiring Receptacle

Type

BF101—BF107 16 BOC107 BFB107

BF111—BF114 19 or 17 BOC114 BFB114

BF121—BF123 121 BOC123 BFB123

BF201—BF214 25 BOC214 BFB214

BF215—BF218 10 BOC218 BFB214

BF221—BF224 7 or 19 & 121 BOC224 BFB224

BF225—BF226 17 or 19 & 16 BOC226 BFB226

BF301—BF307 8 BOC214 & BOC107 BFB214 & BFB107

BF308—BF309 25 & 121 BOC214 & BOC123 BFB214 & BFB123

BF310—BF313 10 & 121 BOC218 & BOC123 BFB214 & BFB123

BF314—BF315 17 or 19 & 25 BOC214 & BOC114 BFB214 & BFB114

BG101—BG107 16 BGC107 BGB107

BG111—BG114 17 or 19 BGC114 BGB114

BG121—BG123 121 BGC123 BGB123

BG201—BG214 25 BGC214 BGB214

BG215—BG218 10 BGC218 BGB214

BG221—BG224 17 or 19 & 121 BGC224 BGB224

BG225—BG226 17 or 19 & 16 BGC226 BGB226

BG301—BG307BG316—BG326 8 BGC307 BGB307

BG308—BG309 25 & 121 BGC309 BGB309

BG310—BG313 10 & 121 BGC313 BGB309

BG314—BG315 17 or 19 & 25 BGC315 BGB315

BR101—BR107 16 BOC107 BFB107

BR202—BR214 25 BOC214 BFB214

BR215—BR219 10 BOC218 BFB214

BW101—BW107 16 BOC107 BFB107

BW202—BW214 25 BOC214 BFB214

BW215—BW218 10 BOC218 BFB214

BW146—BW159 16 BOC360

BW240—BW260 25 BOC361

BW255—BW258 10 BOC362

Note:

Contact block assemblies for all Type BG stations include cover and contact block.Replacement contact block assemblies and terminal block wiring receptacles for push buttons have provision for 1 N.O. & 1 N.C. circuit on each button. Unneeded circuits need not be wired.

q

Order separate legend plates, if required, from listing on page 139.

Electrical Contact Ratings

AC – NEMA Type B600 DC – NEMA Type P600

Volts

Inductive

35% Power Factor

Resistive

75% Power FactorVolts

Inductive

and

Resistive


Make, Breakand Continuous

Carrying Amperes

Make andBreak

Amperes

ContinuousCarryingAmperesAmps VA Amps VA

120240480600

30.5 15 7.5 6

3600360036003600

3.751.50.750.6

360360360360

5555

5555

120240600

1.10.550.2

555

Type BGC214(Type BGC contact block

assemblies include cover.)Type BGB214

BOC361

“C” Shaped Mounting Bracketfor 9001 BR Interior

3110112001


Class 9001, Type B — Standard Duty Control StationsDimensions

141


Contact Symbols


1

3 8 10 16

17

19 25 109 145 146

121

120 V Com

Surface Mount

Type BG

Glass Filled Polyester Cover

0.47

12

2.76

70

3.6994

0.34

9

0.72

18

1.38

35

0.48

12

2.34

60

0.19

5(2) Dia Mtg Holes

2.06521.03

26

0.174

2.5364

0.8822

K.O. for 1/2-3/4 cond.both ends

C 30064-834

0.4512

4.09

104

5.00

127

0.34

9

0.72

16

1.38

35

0.48

12

2.34

60

(2)0.19

5Dia Mtg Holes

2.0652

0.174

2.1956

2.4161

0.8822

K.O. for 1/2-3/4 cond.both ends

withmushroom button

C 30052-834

1.0326

Hazardous Location

Type BR

Cast Aluminum Enclosure

3.951001.37

35

0.308 2X

6.36162

5.75146

ON

OFF

0.287O

0.7018

1.3735

conduit centerline

0.318

2X Mtg Holes0

4.35110

1.19

30

1/2-14 NPT Pipe TapBottom Only

Padlock Hole

Watertight & Dusttight

Type BW

Cast Zinc Enclosure

2.76702.2557

3.7595

4.25108

1.38

35

.38

10

B 65075-060

.218 Dia.Mtg. Hole(2) Plcs.

Flush Mount

Type BF

Stainless Steel

0.6115

4.50114

3.2883

1.6341

2.1354

0.164

(4) Dia Mtg Holes

C 30064-835A

3.3886

2.2557

1.8146

1.3835

4.561162.28

58


Class 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mmIndustrial Duty Enclosures


142

11/97

➀

Type K Series A through Series G operators were rated NEMA Type 1, 3, 12, and 13. Type K Series H operators are rated UL Types 1, 3, 4, 6, 12 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 6, 12, and 13.

➁

Only KN200 series legend plates will fit upright on these enclosures with their long axis vertical.

➂

For machine cavity mounting. Pull box not available.

➃

Type KN1, KN6 and KN7 a series of legend plates will not fit on these enclosures.

➄

Standard Type KYSS enclosures are supplied with Type 304 stainless steel — Use Form Y35 and order by description — contact your local Square D sales office.

Custom Built Control Stations

The catalog numbers shown include the enclosure only. A complete assembled control station is the enclosure plus all control units to be installed.

Ordersmust be accompanied with a key sheet (M-7687)

➅

or sketch showing all control units in their desired locations. Specify the marking on thenameplates for the enclosure.

The standard nameplate size is 1.69" (43 mm) by 0.5" (13 mm) inches. It has a black field with white letters. For name-plates other than our standard, contact your local Square D Sales Office. There is an additional charge to move or add an additional conduit hole or changethe diameter of the conduit.

Example:

Add a 1 inch conduit to the top (nonstandard location) of a KY6 enclosure and increase the bottom conduit from 3/4" to 1 inch (19 to 25 mm).There would be an additionall charge for the top conduit and the bottom conduit. If 20 or more identical stations are ordered at one time, there is no ad-ditional charge.

➀

Type K Series A through Series G operators were rated NEMA Type 1, 3, 12, and 13. Type K Series H operators are rated UL Types 1, 3, 4, 6, 12 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 6, 12, and 13.

➁

Only KN200 series legend plates will fit upright on these enclosures with their long axis vertical.

➂

For machine cavity mounting. Pull box not available.

➃

Type KN1, KN6 and KN7 a series of legend plates will not fit on these enclosures.

➄

Standard Type KYSS enclosures are supplied with Type 304 stainless steel — Use Form Y35 and order by description — contact your local Square D sales office.

➅

For a copy of M-7687 keysheet, reference D-Fax

#1143 or see pages 148-149.

Enclosures Only (For Customer Assembly)

No. of Units

UL Types 1, 3 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3 and 13 UL Types 1, 3, 4 and 13NEMA Types 1, 3, 4 and 13

➀

UL Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13

➀

Surface Mounting Flush Mountingwithout Pullbox

➂ ➃

Surface Mounting Surface Mounting

Sheet Steel Cast Zinc Die Cast Aluminum

➃

Stainless Steel (304)

➄

Polymeric (Plastic)


123469

1216202530

KYAF1KYAF2KYAF3KYAF4KYAF6KYAF9

KYAF12KYAF16KYAF20KYAF25KYAF30

KZ11KZ21

➁

KZ31

➁

KZ41

➁

KZ6KZ9

KZ12KZ16

Not Avail.Not Avail.Not Avail.

KY1KY2

➁

KY3

➁

KY4

➁

KY6KY9

KY12KY16


KYSS1KYSS2KYSS3KYSS4KYSS6KYSS9

KYSS12KYSS16KYSS20KYSS25KYSS30

SKY1SKY2SKY3SKY4SKY6SKY9

SKY12SKY16SKY20SKY25

Not Avail.

No. of Units

UL Types1, 3 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3 and 13 UL Types 1, 3, 4 and 13NEMA Types 1, 3, 4 and 13

➀

UL Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13 (1)

Surface Mounting Flush Mountingwithout Pullbox

➂ ➃

Surface Mounting Surface Mounting

Sheet Steel Cast Zinc Die Cast Aluminum

➃

Stainless Steel (304)

➄

Polymeric (Plastic)


123469

1216202530

KYAF100KYAF200KYAF300KYAF400KYAF600KYAF900

KYAF1200KYAF1600KYAF2000KYAF2500KYAF3000

KZ110KZ210

➁

KZ310

➁

KZ410

➁

KZ60KZ90

KZ120KZ160


KY10KY20

➁

KY30

➁

KY40

➁

KY60KY90

KY120KY160


KYSS100KYSS200KYSS300KYSS400KYSS600KYSS900



SKY1200SKY1600SKY2000SKY2500Not Avail.

Standard Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 143-144Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 146-147Key Sheet for Custom Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 148-149


Class 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mmControl Stations

143


Control Stations

Enclosures have sufficient depth to accommodate two contact blocks in tandem (total of four blocks) on non-illuminated operatorsand two contact blocks side-by-side on illuminated operators.

Control stations are UL Listed for use in areas classified as Class II Division 2 Group G and Class III.

Control station consists of components that are UL Listed for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C or D.

Assembled Control Stations – UL Types 1, 3, 4 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4 and 13

Die Cast Aluminum Enclosures

No ofUnits

Legend Plate MarkingAnd Features Type

Consists Of

Enclosure Operators Contact Blocks Legend Plates

1

Hand-Off-Auto (Sel. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hand-Off-Auto (Sel. Switch) (With Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jog-Run (Selector Switch). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off-On (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off-On (Sel. Sw). (With Sealed Contacts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KYK111KYK121

KYK18KYK110

KYK122

KY1KY1KY1KY1KY1

KS43BKS43BKS11BKS11BKS11B

KA1KA51KA1KA1

KA51

KN260KN260KN242KN244KN244

Red 120 Vac Pilot Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start (With Sealed Contacts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start (Mushroom Button). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop (Mushroom Button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KYK120

KYK11KYK125

KYK12KYK13KYK14

KY1KY1KY1KY1KY1KY1

KP1R31KR1BKR1BKR4BKR1RKR4R

. . .KA1

KA51KA1KA1KA1

. . .KN201KN201KN201KN202KN202

Stop (With Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop (With Sealed Contacts and Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop Mushroom (With Sealed Contacts and Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To Stop - Break Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To Stop - Break Glass (Red Enclosure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KYK15KYK124

KYK123

KYK116KYK117

KY1KY1KY1KY1

KY1S1

KR3R,K4KR3R,K4KR4R,K4

K15K15

KA1KA51KA51KA1KA1

KN202KN202KN202

KN799RPKN799RP

2

Forward-Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jog-Stop (Lockout on Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Off (With Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Off (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KYK24KYK224KYK218

KYK222

KYK221KYK26

KY2KY2KY2KY2KY2KY2

KR1B,KR1BKR1B,KR3R,K4

KR1B,KR3RKR1B,KR3R

KR11GRKR1B,KR1B

KA1,KA1KA1,KA1KA1,KA1

KA51,KA51KA1

KA1,KA1

KN206,KN207KN218,KN202KN203,KN204KN203,KN204KN203,KN204KN209,KN208

Start-Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop (With Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop (Lockout on Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop (With Maintained Sealed Contacts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop (Mushroom on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KYK21KYK223

KYK23KYK27

KYK220

KYK22KYK25

KY2KY2KY2KY2KY2KY2KY2

KR1B,KR3RKR1B,KR3R

KR1B,KR3R,K4KR11GRKR11GR

KR1B,KR4RKR1B,KR1B

KA1,KA1KA51,KA51

KA1,KA1KA1

KA51KA1,KA1KA1,KA1

KN201,KN202KN201,KN202KN201,KN202KN201,KN202KN201,KN202KN201,KN202KN211,KN210

3

Forward-Reverse-Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward-Reverse-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward-Reverse-Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward-Reverse-Stop (With Sealed Contacts and Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-Low-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KYK35KYK31

KYK326

KYK322

KYK34

KY3KY3KY3

KY3KY3

KS11B,KR1B,KR3RKR1B,KR1B,KR3R

KR1B,KR1B,KR3R,K4

KR1B,KR1B,KR3R,K4KR1B,KR1B,KR3R

KA1,KA1,KA1KA1,KA1,KA1KA1,KA1,KA1

KA51,KA51,KA51KA1,KA1,KA1

KN239,KN201,KN202KN206,KN207,KN202KN206,KN207,KN202

KN206,KN207,KN202KN214,KN215,KN202

Jog/Run-Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-Close-Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-Close-Stop (Lockout on Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-Close-Stop (With Seated Contacts and

Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red 120 Vac Pilot Light-Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KYK36KYK33

KYK327

KYK323

KYK317

KY3KY3KY3

KY3KY3

KS11B,KR1B,KR3RKR1B,KR1B,KR3R

KR1B,KR1B,KR3R,K4

KR1B,KR1B,KR3R,K4KP1R31,KR1B,KR3R


KA51,KA51,KA51KA2,KA3

KN242,KN201,KN202KN209,KN208,KN202KN209,KN208,KN202

KN209,KN208,KN202KN200,KN201,KN202

Red 120 Vac Pilot Light-Start-Stop(With Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Red 120 Vac/dc Pilot Light-Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up-Down-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up-Down-Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up-Down-Stop (With Sealed Contacts and

Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KYK321

KYK324KYK32

KYK325

KYK328

KY3KY3KY3KY3

KY3

KP1R31,KR1B,KR3RKP38R31,KR1B,KR3R

KR1B,KR1B,KR3RKR1B,KR1B,KR3R,K4

KR1B,KR1B,KR3R,K4

KA51,KA51KA1,KA1

KA1,KA1,KA1KA1,KA1,KA1

KA51,KA51,KA51

KN200,KN201,KN202KN200,KN201,KN202KN211,KN210,KN202KN211,KN210,KN202

KN211,KN210,KN202

Standard Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 143-144Custom Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 142Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 146-147Key Sheet for Custom Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 148-149

Type KZ310Type KY30 Type SKY200Type KYSS300Type KYAF900


Class 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mmControl Stations


144

11/97

Control Stations are UL Listed for use in areas classified as Class II Division 2 Group G and Class III.



Control Stations are UL Listed for use in areas classified as Class I Division 2 Groups A, B, C and D.

Assembled Control Stations - UL Types 1, 3, 4, and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4 and 13

No. ofUnits


Consists Of


1

Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stop (Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Off/On (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hand/Off/Auto (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



KR1BKR3R

KR3R with K5KS11BKS43B

KA1KA3KA3KA1KA1

KN201KN202KN202KN244KN260

2

Start/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Up/Down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start/Stop (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KYSS201KYSS203KYSS205KYSS210


KR1B,KR3RKR1B,KR3R with K5

KR1B,KR1BKR11U

KA1,KA3KA1,KA3KA1,KA1KA1,KA1

KN201,KN202KN201,KN202KN211,KN210KN201,KN202

3

Forward/Reverse/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up/Down/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open/Close/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High/Low/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward/Reverse/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . .Up/Down/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Open/Close/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . .High/Low/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KYSS301KYSS302KYSS303KYSS304KYSS308KYSS309KYSS310KYSS311


KR1B,KR1B,KR3RKR1B,KR1B,KR3RKR1B,KR1B,KR3RKR1B,KR1B,KR3R

KR1B,KR1B,KR3R w/K5KR1B,KR1B,KR3R w/K5KR1B,KR1B,KR3R w/K5KR1B,KR1B,KR3R w/K5

KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3

KN206,KN207,KN202KN211,KN210,KN202KN209,KN208,KN202KN214,KN215,KN202KN206,KN207,KN202KN211,KN210,KN202KN209,KN208,KN202KN214,KN215,KN202

Assembled Control Stations - UL Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 4X, and 13

No. ofUnits


Consists Of

Enclosures Operators Contact Blocks Legend Plates

1

Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop (Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Off/On (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hand/Off/Auto (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KYSK101KYSK103KYSK105KYSK110KYSK111


SKR1BSKR3R

SKR3R with K5SKS11BSKS43B

KA1KA3KA3KA1KA1

KN101WPKN102RPKN102RPKN144WPKN160WP

2

Start/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Up/Down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start/Stop (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KYSK201KYSK203KYSK205KYSK210


SKR1B,SKR3RSKR1B,SKR3R with K5

SKR1B,SKR1BSKR11U

KA1,KA3KA1,KA3KA1,KA1KA1,KA1

KN101WP,KN102RPKN101WP,KN102WPKN111WP,KN110WPKN101WP,KN102WP

3

Forward/Reverse/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up/Down/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open/Close/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High/Low/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward/Reverse/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . .Up/Down/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Open/Close/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .High/Low/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KYSK301KYSK302KYSK303KYSK304KYSK308KYSK309KYSK310KYSK311


SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3RSKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3RSKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3RSKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R

SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R w/K5SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R w/K5SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R w/K5SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R w/K5

KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3

KN106WP,KN107WP,KN102RPKN111WP,KN110WP,KN102RPKN109WP,KN108WP,KN102RPKN114WP,KN115WP,KN102RPKN106WP,KN107WP,KN102RPKN111WP,KN110WP,KN102RPKN109WP,KN108WP,KN102RPKN114WP,KN115WP,KN102RP

Assembled Control Stations - UL Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 4X, and 13

No. ofUnits


Consists Of


1

Hand-Off-Auto (Sel. Sw. with Sealed Contacts) . . . . .Hand-Off-Auto (Sel. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Jog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Man-Auto (Sel. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Off-On (Sel. Sw. with Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . . . .Off-On (Sel. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start (With Sealed Contacts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop (With Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stop (With Sealed Contacts and Lockout) . . . . . . . . .

SKY121

SKY111SKY107SKY108

SKY122

SKY110

SKY101SKY125 SKY103SKY105

SKY124


SKY1SKY1SKY1SKY1SKY1

SKS43BSKS43BSKR1BSKS11BSKS11BSKS11B

SKR1BSKR1BSKR3R

SKR3R,K5SKR3R,K5

KA51KA1KA1KA1

KA51

KA1KA1

KA51KA3KA3

KA51

KN160WPKN160WPKN118WPKN143WPKN144WP

KN144WPKN101WPKN101WPKN102RPKN102RPKN102RP

2

Forward-Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Start-Stop (Lockout on Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start-Stop (With Maintained Sealed Contacts). . . . . .Start-Stop (With Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Up-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SKY204SKY222 SKY206SKY201

SKY203SKY220 SKY223 SKY205

SKY2SKY2SKY2SKY2

SKY2SKY2SKY2SKY2

SKR1B,SKR1BSKR1B,SKR3RSKR1B,SKR1BSKR1B,SKR3R

SKR1B,SKR1R,K5SKR11GR

SKR1B,SKR3RSKR1B,SKR1B

KA1,KA1KA51,KA51

KA1,KA1KA1,KA3

KA1,KA3KA51

KA51,KA51KA1,KA1

KN106WP,KN107WPKN103WP,KN104RPKN109WP,KN108WPKN101WP,KN102RP

KN101WP,KN102RPKN101WP,KN102RPKN101WP,KN102RPKN111WP,KN110WP

3

Forward-Reverse-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward-Reverse-Stop (With Sealed Contacts

and Lockout on Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .High-Low-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-Close-Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-Close-Stop (With Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . .

Red 120 VAC Pilot Light-Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start-Jog-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up-Down-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up-Down-Stop (With Sealed Contacts

and Lockout on Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SKY301

SKY322 SKY304SKY303

SKY323

SKY315ASKY305SKY302

SKY328

SKY3

SKY3SKY3SKY3SKY3

SKY3SKY3SKY3

SKY3

SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R

SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3RSKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3RSKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3RSKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R

SKP1R31,SKR1B,SKR3RSKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3RSKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R

SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R

KA1,KA1,KA3


KA51,KA51,KA51

KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3

KA51,KA51,KA51

KN106WP,KN107WP,KN102RP

KN106WP,KN107WP,KN102RPKN114WP,KN115WP,KN102RPKN109WP,KN108WP,KN102RPKN109WP,KN108WP,KN102RP

KN101WP,KN102RPKN101WP,KN118WP,KN102RPKN111WP,KN110WP,KN102RP

KN111WP,KN110WP,KN102RP


Flush Plates


Stainless Steel NEMA Type 1 Flush Plates

These flush plates accept Type K, SK, KX and T operators andcontact blocks and may be used with a standard 2 x 3 generalpurpose switch box. A 21/2" deep box should be used with twoType K contact blocks mounted side by side. If two Type K con-tact blocks mounted in tandem are needed, a 31/2" deep boxshould be used. Although oiltight/watertight operators are used,an assembled station using the flush plates is not oiltight/wa-tertight. The kits include the stainless steel flush plate, coverscrews and a set of liners. The liners must be used to maintainelectrical clearance.

Center to center of operators is 113/16" (46 mm).

Dimensions (Type KZP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 147

Numberof

UnitsDescription Type

Number

1 1 Unit flush plate, cover screws, insulating liners K25




Numberof Units

Dimensions (inches)

A B

1 125/32 " (45 mm) 23/4 " (70 mm)

2 319/32 " (91 mm) 49/16 " (116 mm)

3 513/32 " (36 mm) 63/8 " (162 mm)

4 77/32 " (183 mm) 83/16 " (208 mm)

General Purpose NEMA Type 1 Flush Mounting Control Station With Pull Box For Type K Control Units (Stations Are Not Oiltight)

Number ofUnits

Enclosure OnlyFor Customer Assembly

Custom Built FactoryAssembled Control Stations

Type Type

12345678

KZP1KZP2KZP3KZP4KZP5KZP6KZP7KZP8

KZP10KZP20KZP30KZP40KZP50KZP60KZP70KZP80

Special Features

Type 304 Stainless Steel Flush Plate (Form Y242)

No. of Units1-4

5-8

Omit Pull Box (Form Y243)

No. of Units1-2

3-4 5-6 7-8

Two Unit


A

B

3.1379.5

2.050.8

Commercial Pull Box

Commercial Pull Box

2.6366.9

4.50114.3

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mmEnclosure Dimensions


11/97

KY16KYAF16KZ16KYSS16SKY16

KYAF20KYSS20SKY20

KYAF25KYSS25SKY25

KYAF30KYSS30

Table for Type KY and KZ

No.of

Units

OverallDimensions Mounting Dim. Conduit Other Dimensions Cover

Thickness

A B CKY KZ

H R J K LKY KZ

D E F G M N

123469

1216

35/8 35/8

35/8 35/8 63/4 91/4 91/4113/4

4 53/4 71/2 91/4

8 8 10

101/2

317/32317/32317/32317/32327/32327/3245/3245/32

3 3 3 3

55/881/881/8

105/8

23/441/261/4

8 67/867/887/893/8

31/831/831/831/861/483/483/4

111/4

31/251/4

7 83/471/271/291/210

11/811/811/811/813/813/8

119/32119/32

3/4-143/4-143/4-143/4-143/4-141-111/2

11/4-111/211/2-111/2

—13/413/413/4

2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

21/4

10-24 x 5/810-24 x 5/810-24 x 5/810-24 x 5/8

8-328-328-328-32

1.181.181.181.181.061.06.88.88

.50

.50

.50

.501.061.06.88.88

Table for Type KYAF and KYSS

No.of

Units

OverallDimensions

MountingDimensions

InsideDim.

ConduitFor Type

KYSSOnly

A B C D E FG

IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm

1 4.18 106 5.24 133 3.63 92 2.25 57 4.62 117 3.41 87 3/4-14

2 4.18 106 7.74 197 3.63 92 2.25 57 7.12 181 3.41 87 3/4-14

3 4.18 106 10.24 260 3.63 92 2.25 57 9.62 244 3.41 87 3/4-14

4 4.18 106 12.74 324 3.63 92 2.25 57 12.12 308 3.41 87 3/4-14

6 7.43 189 11.37 289 4.34 110 5.50 140 10.75 273 4.13 105 3/4-14

9 9.68 246 11.37 289 4.34 110 7.75 197 10.75 273 4.13 105 1-111/212 9.68 246 13.87 352 4.34 110 7.75 197 13.25 337 4.13 105 11/4-111/216 11.93 303 13.87 352 4.34 110 10.00 254 13.25 337 4.13 105 11/2-111/220 11.93 303 16.37 416 4.34 110 10.00 254 15.75 400 4.13 105 11/2-111/225 14.18 360 16.37 416 4.34 110 12.25 311 15.75 400 4.13 105 (2)11/2-111/230 14.18 360 18.87 479 4.34 110 12.25 311 18.25 464 4.13 105 (2)11/2-111/2

Location Of Control Units

Type KY Type KZ

Type KYAFType KYSS




KY4KYAF4KZ41KYSS4

SKY4




(4)0.22

6 Dia. Mtg. Holes

Gasket cementedto coverL

M-N

0.164

C65075-239

C30052-170

0.256 F

E

K

JG

B

0.256

A

D2.50

64

2.13

54

C

H

R-Pt. in bottom as std.

AD

2.5064

318

B

E

(4).318

Dia. Mtg. Holes

2.5064

A

C F1.7043

C65075-176 G Conduit HubBottom Only(Type KYSS Only)


Enclosure Dimensions


Glass Polymeric Type SKYMtg.Hole

ConduitSize

ConduitLocation Height Mtg. Dim. Overall Dim. No.

ofUnitsH G F E D C B A

IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm

0.31 8 0.75 19 1.34 34 3.88 99 4.88 124 2.94 75 6.63 169 3.81 97 1

0.31 8 0.75 19 1.34 34 3.88 99 4.88 124 2.94 75 6.63 169 3.81 97 2

0.31 8 0.75 19 1.34 34 3.88 99 7.13 181 2.94 75 8.88 226 3.81 97 3

0.31 8 0.75 19 2.00 51 4.72 120 6.75 172 4.00 102 7.53 191 7.53 191 4

0.31 8 0.75 19 2.00 51 4.72 120 8.88 226 4.00 102 9.50 241 7.50 191 6

0.31 8 1.00 25 1.75 44 4.25 108 10.75 273 6.00 153 11.34 288 9.41 239 9

0.31 8 1.00 25 1.75 44 4.25 108 10.75 273 6.00 153 11.34 288 9.41 239 12

0.31 8 1.50 38 2.00 51 5.25 133 12.75 324 8.00 203 13.41 341 11.44 291 16

0.31 8 1.50 38 2.00 51 5.25 133 12.75 324 8.00 203 13.41 341 11.44 291 20

0.31 8 1.50 38 2.00 51 6.25 159 14.63 372 10.00 254 15.47 393 13.47 342 25

Class 9001 Type KZP

Type

Letter Dimensions

A B C D E

IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm

KZP1 7.56 192 5.56 141 6.38 162 3.78 96 – –

KZP2 9.43 240 7.44 189 8.25 210 3.72 94 2.00 51

KZP3 11.30 287 9.31 236 10.12 257 3.65 93 2.00 51

KZP4 13.18 335 11.18 284 12.00 305 3.59 91 2.00 51

KZP5 15.06 383 13.06 332 13.88 353 3.53 90 2.00 51

KZP6 16.93 430 14.94 379 15.75 400 3.47 88 2.00 51

KZP7 18.81 478 16.81 427 17.62 448 3.40 86 2.00 51

KZP8 20.68 525 18.69 475 19.50 495 3.34 85 2.00 51

Flush Mount Sheet SteelType KZP

A

CH (4 pls)

B

B

D

D

E

F

E

0.215

Dia.(4 pls)

2.2557

GFor 1, 2 & 3 unit only

D30464-152

3.3685

1.6843

2.0051

sky 25 only(2)1.50

38 Dia. holes

F

G

2.2557

H (4 pls)

A

C

2.2557

Type SKY Enclosures

K.O. for 1/2, 3/4, 1conduit Top, Bottom& Back

4.00

108

CMtg.

E

E

D

(4) 0.256

Dia. Mtg. Holes

D

AB

1.00

0.65 maxplaster alignment

.7519

2.5063

0.287

3.4587

3.0076

1.0627

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mmKey Sheet


11/97

CONTROL GROUP

KEY SHEET FOR ORDERING CLASS 9001 TYPE “K”, “KX”, “SK” OR “T” ASSEMBLED OILTIGHT CONTROL STATIONS

INVOICE NUMBER

CUSTOMER

CLASS 9001 TYPE

CUSTOMER ORDER NUMBER

DATE QUANTITY LIST PRICE EACH, DS-1

TOPTYPE NUMBER KEY

Select Type Numbers from Catalog Digest

1. Operator or Closing Plate. Include “H” No. for Contact Blocks Assembled to Operator. Example – KR1B-H13

2. Attachment or Protective Cap. Example – KU-1

3. Legend Plate Type Number.Example – KN-201

4. Legend Plate Marking.– Use Only if Special Mark-ing is Required. Example: Line 3. – KN-299Line 4. – ”Panic”

For Further Instructions – See Reverse Side

1 A 1 G 1 N 1 U 1 AA

2 2 2 2 2

3 3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4 4

1 B 1 H 1 P 1 V 1 BB

2 2 2 2 2

3 3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4 4

1 C 1 J 1 Q 1 W 1 CC

2 2 2 2 2

3 3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4 4

1 D 1 K 1 R 1 X 1 DD

2 2 2 2 2

3 3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4 4

1 E 1 L 1 S 1 Y 1 EE

2 2 2 2 2

3 3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4 4

1 F 1 M 1 T 1 Z 1 FF

2 2 2 2 2

3 3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4 4


Ordering Instructions


INSTRUCTIONS FOR ORDERING ASSEMBLED CONTROLSTATIONS1. Use separate Key Sheet for each different control station ar-

rangement on order.

2. Select locations on sketch (reverse side) which illustratemanner in which station is to be mounted. Example: Selec-tion of location A, B, C and D indicates a four unit stationmounted with its long axis vertical and the legend platesmounted accordingly. Selection of locations A, G, N and Uindicates mounting with long axis horizontal.

3. Each interlock attachment Type K-3 must be specified attwo adjacent locations. Type KR-11 or Type KR-12 must bespecified at two adjacent locations. Type KRD Time DelayUnits require space equal to two push button mountingholes. The unused hole must be covered with at Type K-51or K-52 Closing Plate. The time delay unit must be posi-tioned with the contacts adjacent to the unused hole. Theunused hole may be located above, below, right or left of theunit.

4. Types KN-3 and KN-4 legend plates will not fit upright on 2,3 or 4 unit Type KY or Type KZ enclosures with long axis ver-tical. Type KYC enclosures must use Type KN-8 legendplates.

5. Large (2 1/4” Dia.) mushroom button operators can not bemounted in adjacent locations.

6. Enclosures have sufficient depth to accommodate two con-tact blocks side-by-side on illuminated operators (Types K,SK and T only).

Location of Control Units – Types K, KX, SK and T

KY-160KYAF-1600KYSS-1600KZ-160SKY-1600

KYAF-2000KYSS-2000SKY-2000

KYAF-2500KYSS-2500SKY-2500

KYSS-3000




KY-40KYAF-400KYSS-410KZ-410

SKY-400




Suffix No. (Add to

Operator Type No.)

Positions Total Circuits

Circuit Symbol

1 2 3 4

H1 KA-1 1 N.O.1 N.C.

H2 KA-1 KA-1 2 N.O.2 N.C.

H3 KA-1 KA-1 KA-1 3 N.O.3 N.C.

H4 KA-1 KA-1 KA-1 KA-1 4 N.O.4 N.C.

H5 KA-2 1 N.O.

H6 KA-3 1 N.C.

H7 KA-2 KA-2 2 N.O.

H8 KA-3 KA-3 2 N.C.

H9 KA-4 KA-11 N.O.

1 E.C.N.O.2 N.C.

H10 KA-4 KA-51 E.C.N.O.1 E.C.N.C.

1 N.C.

H11 KA-1 KA-1 KA-1 3 N.O.3 N.C.

H12 KA-2 KA-3 KA-2 KA-3 2 N.O.2 N.C.

H13 KA-1 1 N.O.1 N.C.

H14 KA-3 1 N.C.

H36 KA-2 1 N.O.

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types KY and KZC — Security Control StationsApplication Data, Features


11/97

Standard Features• All cylinders are random keyed.• Key operators are all spring return from both sides to cen-

ter, maintained contact not available.• Key withdrawal is in the center position only.• Cover is mechanically interlocked with the box to make it

difficult for unauthorized people to gain entrance into theenclosure.

• Cover is securely held in place by allen screws.• Cylinders are of builders hardware type, which permits key-

ing stations to the rest of the cylinders in a development.• Cylinder legend plate marking is “OPEN-CLOSE.”• An optional push button is available. The legend plate mark-

ing is “STOP.”

Meets NEMA Type 3R requirements. When Best Lock stations are supplied with core, customer should contact local Best Lock

representative to change core. When Best Lock stations are supplied without core, customer must purchase core separate-

ly from Best Lock Company, and customer can subsequently change core at his conve-nience.

Contact Your Local Square D Sales Office If:• Master keying is required.• Keying several stations alike is required.• Station is to be keyed to a specific key number.• Nonstandard legend plates are required.• Extra keys are required.• A specific type of keyway is required.

Repair PartsReplacement or duplicate keys: Emhart, Yale, or Schlage - localdistributor, hardware store, or lock shop that duplicates keys.Square D can supply and deliver in 5 weeks. BEST – Must pur-chase from local Best Lock Corporation representative. Sargent –must purchase from Square D. Keys supplied with our securitycontrol station are registered to the Square D Company.

Description Type ofCylinder

CylinderFinish Special Features

CastAluminum

Enclosure

SatinChrome Finish

Flush Mtd.W/Box

Type Type

KeyOperator

Only

EmhartYaleBest

Best

Best

Best

Schlage

Sargent

ChromeBrass

Chrome

Chrome

Chrome

Chrome

Chrome

Chrome

Complete With Core (6 Tumbler Pins)Lock Cylinder Only - Core Omitted (6 Tumbler Pins)Complete With Core (7 Tumbler Pins)Lock Cylinder Only - Core Omitted (7 Tumbler Pins)

Maximum Security Cylinder

KY198KY199KY197

KY196

KY195

KY194

KY193

KY192

KZC198KZC199KZC197

KZC196

KZC195

KZC194

KZC193

KZC192

KeyOperator

WithStop

Button

EmhartYaleBest

Best

Best

Best

Schlage

Sargent

ChromeBrass

Chrome

Chrome

Chrome

Chrome

Chrome

Chrome

Complete With Core (6 Tumbler Pins)Lock Cylinder Only - Core Omitted (6 Tumbler Pins)Complete With Core (7 Tumbler Pins)Lock Cylinder Only - Core Omitted (7 Tumbler Pins)

Maximum Security Cylinder

KY298KY299KY297

KY296

KY295

KY294

KY293

KY292

KZC298KZC299KZC297

KZC296

KZC295

KZC294

KZC293

KZC292

Electrical RatingsKey Operator: One Class 9007 Type AO2 snap switch is used forthe “OPEN” position and one snap switch is used for the “CLOSE”position. See page 151 for electrical ratings of the 9007 AO2.

Stop Button: One Class 9001 Type KA1 contact block is used on theoptional push button. See page 151 for 9001KA1 electrical ratings.(Note: The KA1 contact block has a maximum voltage rating of300 volts (NEMA A300) when used in the Type KZC station.)

Dimensions

Replacement enclosures are not sold. Replacement cores orcylinders are not sold.

3

3

3

Mtg

Mtg

Mtg

Mtg

8

8

88 16

16

4

8

28

1

5

55 5

5

3

5

17

4 2

3

45

B30064-682

Surface Mount Type KY

Dia. Mtg. Holes

Conduit TopDim.Inside

32133

811

327(4)

-1443

2169

3

1"K.O. forTop, Bottom and Back

Conduit

Wall Surface

B30064-683

33

3

1632

1616

32

32 32

4

4

2

2

8 4Mtg.Mtg.

Mtg.

Mtg.

1616

1616

16

16

2 416

16

161313

77

MinAdjustmentPlasterMax

04

4

19

19 27

3

3

1

1

3 199

1"

11

1

1

7

2

2

6 857

22

2

2

1"

(14 )1/4 Dia. Mtg. Holes

1 37

11

3

932

Flush Mount Type KZC

UL ListedFile E42259CNN NKCR

CSA ListedFile LR25490Class 321103

Type KY192

Type KZC299


Contact Blocks


The Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks have been improved. The most noticeable change is that the terminals are FINGERSAFE®

contact blocks (meeting VDE 0106 Part 100). They also have one screw mounting and captive backed out plus/minus terminalscrews. These contact blocks still use the same reliable double break direct acting contacts used since 1965. Because of the wipingaction of these contacts, they are suitable for use with programmable controllers. All contact blocks listed below will accept up to2 #12-#24 solid or stranded wires. Types KA1, KA31, KA3, and KA33 N.C. contacts are direct opening.

For push buttons or two position selector switches (Types K or SKS11, K or SKS12, K or SKS25, K or SKS34, K or SK11J, K or SK12J, K or SK25J and K or SK34J) only. For sequencing or overlapping contacts on other operators — consult local Square D Sales Office.


(Clear Cover)

KA1

(Green Cover)

KA2

(Red Cover)

KA3

(Clear Cover)


KA4

(Red Cover)


KA5

(Green Cover)


KA6

Additional Circuit Arrangements Available

Sequencing N.O. Contact of KA4 closes before N.O. Contact on KA1 KA4 KA1


Overlapping N.O. Contact of KA4 closes before N.C. Contact

of KA5 Opens KA4 KA5


Maximum Current Ratings for Control Circuit Contacts – Class 9001 Type KA1-KA6, KA21-25, KA31-35, KA1G-KA6G

Volts

AC

Volts

DC

Inductive (NEMA Type A600) 35% Power Factor Resistive 75% Power Factor Make, Break and Continuous Amperes

Inductive and Resistive (NEMA Type A600)

Make Break ContinuousCarrying Amperes

Make and Break ContinuousCarrying AmperesAmperes VA Amperes VA KA1 KA2, KA3 KA4 KA5, KA6

120240480600

60301512

7200720072007200

6.03.01.51.2

720720720720

10101010

10101010

125250600

1.10.550.2

1.10.550.2

1.1..........

1.10.550.2

101010

Maximum Current Ratings for Control Circuit Contacts – Class 9007 Type AO2

SwitchType

Contact Action

Direct Opening Contacts to Meet IEC 947-5-1

Requirements for Positive Opening Contacts

AC – 50 or 60 Hz DCAC or DC

Volts

Inductive 35% Power Factor Resistive 75% Power Factor

Volts

Inductive and Resistive

Make Break Make and BreakAmperes

Make and Break Amperes ContinuousCarrying AmperesAmps VA Amps VA Single Throw Double Throw

AO-2 SPDT No

120240480600

4020108

4800480048004800

151065

1800240028803000

151065

125250600. . . .

2.00.50.1. . . .

0.50.20.02. . . .

15151515



Contact Blocks, But Provide:• Terminals that accept ring tongue/fork tongue connectors• Short single circuit contact blocks (0.75" deep vs. 0.97" deep

on the FINGERSAFE® Contact Blocks)• Same as old style Series G product available prior to 3/89. • Use form Y238 (add to catalog # as suffix)

Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not FINGERSAFE® Con-tact Blocks, But Have “Quick Connect” Terminals.

Symbol

Contact Blocks With Binder Head Screws (not FINGERSAFE®

Contact Blocks)

Gold Flashed Contacts With Standard Pressure Wire Terminals

Type Quantity Type

KA21 25-Up KA31

KA22 25-Up KA32

KA23 25-Up KA33

N.O. EarlyClosing

KA24 25-Up KA34


KA25 25-Up KA35


KA1G


KA4G


KA5G

KA3G


KA6G

Symbol Type

KA12

KA13

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mmReed Contact Blocks & Hazardous Location Information


11/97

In hazardous locations, it is not always required to use explosion-proofequipment like the Class 9001 Type BR control stations. Knowing whattype of hazardous location exists will permit you to select the most eco-nomical solution to your application. If you're not sure what type of haz-ardous location exists, the “Summary of Classification” chart may help.If not, contact your local electrical inspector. When you know whatclass, division, and group(s) exists, see the table in the lower lefthandcorner of this page for what Square D has to offer.

① An intrinsically safe system requires either a Class 8501 Type TO or NY2 barrier relay or anintrinsically safe barrier to restrict the energy available in the area classified as a hazardousarea to a level less than that required to cause an explosion. In an intrinsically safe system,any non-illuminated Class 9001 operator or control station with standard contacts can beused. No illuminated operators, except the Class 9001 Type KP44 intrinsically safe pilot light,may be used.

➁ Any Class 9001 Type K, SK or KX operator can be used in an area classified as Class I, Divi-sion 2 hazardous locations.1. Only logic (KA40 series) or power (KA50 series) reed contact blocks are used.2. All Type K and SK illuminated operators are UL approved for use in Class I Division 2

areas. 3. Type KX illuminated operators do not use 4 lamp light modules, or 2 lamp light modules

other than the transformer type. 4. The operators are mounted in Type KY, KYSS, KYAF, SKY enclosures.

➂ Any Class 9001 Type K, SK, or KX operator mounted in a Class 9001 Type KY, KYSS, KYAF,SKY enclosure may be used, except potentiometer operators.

For : Add Form Y243 to single lamp Push To Test pilot lights.

Summary Of Classification Chart

Class Division Group

I. Gas 1. Hazard May ExistMay Exist In Atmosphere Under Normal Operating Conditions.

A. Acetylene







A. Acetylene




II. Dust 1. Hazard May ExistMay Exist In Atmosphere Under Normal Operating Conditions.


F. Carbonaceous Dusts (Resistivity >102 ohm/cm but ≤ 108ohm/cm)





III. Fibers1. Production Areas Easily Ignitable Fibers or Flyings


ForUse

Class Division Group(s)

I 1 A 1. Intrinsically Safe System ①

I 1 B, C, D 1.2.


I 2 A1.

2.

9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➁Intrinsically Safe System ①

I 2 B, C, D

1.2.

3.


II 1 E, F, G 1.2.


II 2 E, F

1.2.

3.


II 2 G

1.2.

3.

9001 BR station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➂Intrinsically Safe System ①

III 1, 2 –

1.2.

3.

9001 BR Station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➂Intrinsically Safe System ①


The maximum number of logic and/or power reed contact blocks per operatoris the same for standard contact blocks, except:• On 3 position selector switches with cams “C,” “D,” “E,” “F,” “G,” “L,” or “M”

mount reed blocks on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem.• On 4 position selector switches, mount reed blocks on one side only (ei-

ther side), maximum 2 in tandem.• On joysticks or on Type KR8 or SKR8 push-pull operators, mount reed blocks

on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem.

The power reed contact blocks can be used with standard industrial relays and starters throughNEMA Size 4. Minimum voltage is 5 volts and the minimum current is 1 mA.

➃ Inductive Rating – 35% Power Factor.➄ Inductive and Resistive Ratings.



KA41

KA42

KA43

KA44

KA45



120/1000.25 A 8 VA

0.10 A3 VA

0.5 A0.5 A


KA51

KA52

KA53

KA54

KA55

Volts

AC NEMA Type C300 ➃Make Break Continuous


120240

10.005.00

12001200

1.0000.500

120120

3.03.0

Volts

DC NEMA Type Q150 ➄Make Break Continuous


115 0.50 58 0.50 58 3.0

Pilot Light For Intrinsically Safe Circuits — NEMA Type 4XIntrinsically safe equipment must not release electrical or thermal en-

ergy capable of igniting certain explosive or combustible hazardous at-mosphere, for which the equipment has been tested.

Listed below are pilot lights that are intrinsically safe when used with a suitable approved barrier or barrier relay (Class 8501 Type TO or NY2. These pilot lights are Factory Mutual FM# J.I. OH4A2,AX,3610 (FM ap-proved). Consult your local Square D Sales Office for further details.

These pilot lights are fully encapsulated – there are no replaceable parts – except for the SK40 ring nut. Use KN100 series plastic legend plates.

OperatingVoltageRange

NominalCurrent

LensColor Type

V max. = 32 V 20-30 VAC/DC 25 mA

RedGreenYellow

KP44RKP44GKP44YI max. = 165 mA


Type XDP Heavy Duty Monolever

CONTENTS


General Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Type XDP•••••C1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Type XDP•••••C4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Type XDP•••••C5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156


XDP Heavy Duty Monolever


154

11/97

General Description

The XDP exterior, heavy duty monolever was designed for aircraft unloading equipment, where exposure to severe environments and mechanical abuse are inevitable. These switches have been engineered to withstand adverse conditions such as smog, dust, high humidity and extreme temperatures experienced in an airport environment. The XDP is currently being used for aircraft unloading service in Alaska. Other applications include snow plow controls and cherry pickers.

4 Types of hand operations are offered:

A 2-position monolever operator that operates 2 contacts*, one contact per direction. The operator is spring returned to the center position (momentary).

A 2-position monolever operator that operates 4 contacts*. This is a “Z” cam operation; the lever is spring returned to the center position (momentary). The first contact actuates with 15

°

operator movement; the second contact actuates with an additional 90

°

movement of the operator while still in the 15

°

position. Both contacts are actuated with the second movement.

A 4-position monolever operator that operates 4 contacts*, one contact per direction. The operator is spring returned to the center position (momentary).

An 8-position monolever operator that operates 4 contacts*. Movement to the north, south, east, or west positions activates a single contact. Movement to the NE, NW, SE, or SW activates two contacts. The lever is spring returned to the center position (momentary).

* Contacts on monolevers with Telemecanique blocks are stackable with up to 3 contacts in any position.

Specifications

Electrical ratings 10 A resistive/inductive up to 15 Vdc ZB2 contacts NEMA A600, Q600

HousingMain body: diecast ZAMAC 3Contact mounting base: weather-resistant nylonHandle boot: polyester elastomer (extremely temperature resistant)

Operating temperature -40

°

F to +140

°

F-40

°

C to +60

°

C

Mechanical/electrical life In excess of 1 million actuations per direction at rated load

Enclosure

NEMA Type 4 (IP65) when installed in a suitable enclosure.Exposed components:• Unaffected by oil or grease• Ozone resistant• Does not age or crack with prolonged outdoor exposure

Mechanism

• Lever operated• Momentary action (spring return to center)• Panel mounted• Anti-rotational, mounts with 4 screws (not provided)• Mounting nuts remove from the rear, rounded bolt heads exposed on operator side• Withstands severe operator abuse



155


Monolever switches with 1 NO ZB2 contact block (ZB2BE101) in each position (up to 3 stackable in any position). NC contacts available, consult factory.

Monolever switches with micro-switch V3 contacts (NO/NC).

Description Function Catalog Number

2 positions2 contacts XDPA1010C1

2/4 positions4 contacts XDPB1111C1

4 positions4 contacts XDPC1411C1

8 positions8 contacts XDPD1111C1






2.5665

1.7544

Square

.0621.6

4.44113

NeopreneGasket

XDP****C1, C2, C3, C6, P1, P3Monolever with “ZB2” type contact

2.5665

2.0652

0.3910

Square

.0621.6

4.44113

NeopreneGasket

3/16" Quick ConnectTab Terminals

Tolerance = ±0.06 in (1.5mm)

XDP****C4Monolever with V3 switches



®




Inches




156

11/97

Monolever switches with Burgess sealed switch V3S9 contacts (NO/NC).

Panel Mounting Dimensions






1.8848

2.051

2.0

51

4 X 0.20 dia.

dia.

5

0.102.5 2.17

55

.0621.6

4.44113

NeopreneGasket

0.11 in (2.8mm) Quick ConnectTab Terminals

XDP****C5Monolever with sealed switches (V3S9)


Inches

CONTENTS

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page

Type BW General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Type BW Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Type BW Application Data and Order Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Seriplex Control Bus Version 2, Material Pull Pendant Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Type XACA Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Type XACA Standard Duty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Type XACA Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Type XACA Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Type XACA Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Type XACA Exploded Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Type XACA Lamps and Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Type XACA Order Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Type XACA Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Type SKYP Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Type SKYP Application Data and Order Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Type SK Operators, Application Data and Order Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Type SKYP Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Type SKYP Order Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173


Type BW, SKYP & XACA Pendant Stations

Class 9001


Class 9001, Type BW — Pendant StationsGeneral Information


158

11/97

Type BW Standard Duty Pendant Stations

The Class 9001 Type BW Pendant Station is a pre-assembled,2 button station well suited for standard hoist applications.Oversized finger grips on the rear of the enclosure make iteasy to grip and operate.

Features and Options

• Made of high impact thermoplastic with self-extinguish-ing flammability rating (UL 94V)

• NEMA 1, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 13 Watertight, Dusttight, Oiltight,Corrosion Resistant

• UL Listed and CSA Approved• 1/2" conduit opening• Internal strain relief post• Momentary contact• Maintained contact• Single speed• Two speed• With or without mechanical interlock• Optional external hanger bracket and seal• Ribs on top of enclosure prevent hanger bracket from

rotating and coming loose• Contoured for easy grip• Easy to hold with one hand

• Interchangeable legend inserts• Field installable mushroom button• Full cover gasket to exclude harmful contaminants

• Jumper included on all single speed buttons (except uni-versal types), saves wiring time

• Self-lifting pressure wire connectors for easy wiring

Off and Stop are WhiteLetters on a Red Background


Class 9001, Type BW — Pendant StationsSpecifications

159


OSHA Regulation, Section 1910.170 Overhead and Gantry Cranes, limits the voltage at pendant push buttons to 150 Vac or 300 Vdc.


Specifications

Electrical ratings AC - NEMA B600 DC - NEMA P600

Enclosure type NEMA Type 1, 3, 3R, 4, and 4X

Operating temperature - 25

°

C to + 60

°

C- 13

°

F to + 140

°

F

Housing material Polycarbonate/PET Polyester Blend

Storage temperature - 40

°

C to + 70

°

C- 40

°

F to + 158

°

F

Cable entry 1/2 inch NPT

Approvals File E42259CCN NKCR


Electrical Contact Ratings(BW70’S AND BW80’S)

AC – NEMA B600

Volts

Inductive35% Power Factor

Resistive75% Power

Factor


Make, Breakand Continuous

CarryingAmperes

Amps VA Amps VA

120240480600

30.015.0

7.50.6

3600360036003600

3.01.50.750.6

360360360360

5555

5555

DC – NEMA P600

Volts

Inductive and Resistive

Make andBreak

Amperes

ContinuousCarryingAmperes

120240600

1.100.550.20

555

2.1956

0.9123

1.0928

4.69119

1.0627

2.94750.43

11

0.25 0.50Mtg. Slot

12

- 14

NPT

Inchesmm

Dual Dimensions:

Type BW70B through Type BW82Y

Marking



Class 9001, Type BW — Pendant StationsApplication Data and Order Information


160

11/97

Contact Symbol

Screws not included. Order quantity 4 of a 21930-14281 for the screws.

For Dimensions ..................................................................................... Page 159

Hanger Bracket and Seal Kit

Type

B350

File E42259 File LR 25490

MarkingCCN NKCR Class 3211 03

Replacement Enclosures 9001BW70’S and 9001BW80’S

Description Yellow Red Black

Box 3110113201 3110113202 3110113203

Cover 3110114750 3110114751 3110114752

Mushroom Button (less button insert) –For NEMA Type 4X, BW70 and BW80

Color Type

Red B303

10

25 100

147146145150

Speed 1

Speed 2

Speed 1

Speed 2

The Class 9001 BW70 and BW80 pendant stations are used for hoist applications, requiring either single speed or two speed but-tons. The thermoplastic enclosure is provided with a 1/2 inch conduit entrance at top to accept a pendant cable and has internal strain relief provided as standard. The stations are rated NEMA Type 1, 3, 3R, 4 and 4X. The enclosure is available in three colors. All universal stations have double circuit blocks (1 N.O. — 1 N.C.) on each button and come without legends so they can be as-sembled to fit the application. For convenience, push buttons have interchangeable legend inserts. The complete line is UL listed and C.S.A. certified.

Maintained contact

No.of

UnitsDescription Legend Insert

MarkingsMechanical

Interlock

Enclosure ColorContactSymbol

Replacement Interior

Yellow Black Red 9001Type

ContactSymbol

2

SingleSpeed

Up-Down Yes BW72Y BW72B BW72R 146 BOC368 146

Forward-Reverse Yes BW73Y BW73B BW73R 146 BOC368 146

On-Off

Yes BW74Y BW74B BW74R 10 BOC358 147

Start-Stop No BW75Y BW75B BW75R 145 BOC359 25

Start-Stop

Yes BW76Y BW76B BW76R 10 BOC358 147

On-Off No BW77Y BW77B BW77R 146 BOC359 25

On-Off No BW79Y BW79B BW79R 145 BOC359 25

Up-Down Yes BW78Y BW78B ..... 100 ... ....

W/O Legend Inserts Yes BW70YU BW70BU BW70RU 25 BOC366 25

W/O Legend Inserts No BW71YU BW71BU BW71RU 25 BOC359 25

W/O Legend Inserts

Yes BW74YU BW74BU BW74RU 147 BOC358 147

TwoSpeed

W/O Legend Inserts Yes BW80YU BW80BU BW80RU 150 BOC367 150

Up-Down Yes BW82Y BW82B BW82R 150 BOC367 150


Addition of External hanger bracket (similar to the one used on Class 9001 Type SKYPPendant Stations). Use when polymeric cord connectors are required.

Interchangeable Push Button Legend Inserts

Marking

ForNEMA Type

4XType BW70’sand BW80’s

Mushroom Button

Inserts ForNEMA Type

4X Type BW70’s

and BW80’s

Marking

ForNEMA Type

4XType BW70’s and BW80’s

Mushroom Button

Inserts ForNEMA Type

4X Type BW70’s

and BW80's

Type Type Type Type

StartStopForwardReverseOpenCloseRaiseLowerUpDown

B259B260B255B256B263B264B261B262B253B254

B282B283B278B279B286B287B284B285B276B277

OnOff

HandAuto

Blank- BlackBlank- Red

B257B258B265B266

B251

B252

B280B281B288B289

B251

B252

Legend Insert Kit –

Kit includes one each of standard legend inserts as indicated below Type No. of kit.

Where Used: Type

For NEMA Type 4XType BW70’sand BW80

Push ButtonB250 (includes

1 each ofB253 through B266)

MushroomButton

B300 (includes1 each of

B276 through B289)

Hanger Bracket

Form

Y236


SERIPLEX Control Bus Version 2Material Pull Pendant Station

161


The

Material Pull Pendant Stations

provide an interface be-tween the SERIPLEX

control bus and a single input push but-ton operator enclosed in a pendant station. Single-bit businterface circuitry is used in this unit. If multiplexed operation isused by the CPU interface card, the pendant is scanned everyframe. This pendant is not capable of being multiplexed (Seepage 9 for details).

Features

• Durable enclosure rated NEMA Type 12.• Bus powered lamp modules don’t require an auxiliary power

supply or additional power conductors.• Bus powered lamp modules use high visibility, low current

consumption LED lamps, providing long life and greater sys-tem flexibility.

• Mini-style quick-change connectors provide for easy pendantinstallation and change out.

• LED indicators provided on the SERIPLEX module showpower-on status, input status and output status – a conve-nient installation and troubleshooting aid.

About Material Pull Systems

A SERIPLEX Material Pull Pendant is used to control the floorstock of parts being installed during a final assembly operation.Typically, as an assembly worker uses parts they monitor thestock of material being used. When stock falls to a predeter-mined level, the assembly worker pushes the button on the Ma-terial Pull Pendant and a signal is sent to the computerrequesting parts for that specific assembly operation. The illu-minated push button in the pendant flashes to indicate the loca-tion where the parts are needed and a lift truck driver isdispatched with the parts. The lift truck driver presses the pen-dant push button to indicate that the parts have been deliveredand to reset the system.

Electrical Specifications

Voltage: 24 VdcCapacitance: 75 pF (typical)Max Current: 20 mA

Catalog Number

Input TypeAddress A

Input TypeAddress B

Output TypeAddress B Description

SPX BWPEND5

— N.O. LED Lamp - Amber

Pendant enclosure, single illumi-nated push button, bus powered amber LED lamp, 5-pin mini-style

quick change connector

9001AEQ3370

— N.O. LED Indica-tor - Red

Pendant enclosure, single non-illuminated push button, red LED indicating lamp inserted in bottom of pendant, 5-pin mini-style quick

change connector

Pin 5Data Line

Pin 4Clock Line

Pin 1Shield Drain

Pin 2V+ DC

Bus Power

Pin 3 Extended Pin Bus Common

Male Receptacle Pin-out

Dimensions (SPXBWPEND5 only)

Replacement Parts

Internal Wiring to SERIPLEX Module

For additional information, see catalog 8330CT9601R11/96.

Part Number Description

SPXLEDA1

LED Lamp - Amber

9001B350

BW Pendant Hanger Bracket

9001A31

Push button Lens - Amber

SPXHH2P2CABLE

Hand-Held Set-Up Tool Adapter Cable for 5-Pin Mini-style Connectors

4.65(118)

3.12(79.2)

4.10(104)

2.20(55.9)

5.50(140)

Pendant connector receptacle: Torque nut to 23 - 27 lb-in. Pendant enclosure screws: Torque screws to 15 lb-in.Operator ring nut: Torque 6 - 8 lb-ft.

Note: Gasket must be in place to maintain enclosure rating.

in.(mm)

Module LED Indicators

Input address B (N.O.)

O PB IB

white (data)

blue (clock)

red (V+)

black (common)

orange (shield drain)

LED Color Function and Address

I

B

yellow Input B Active

P green Bus Power Applied

O

B

yellow Output B Active


Type XACA — Pendant StationsSpecifications


162

11/97

XACA08

(Shown with optional operators and accessories)

XAC pendant stations are designed for standard or medium duty control circuit applications. The en-closures are made from rugged, double insulated thermoplastic material. These stations have beendesigned for easy handling and operation, even with heavy work gloves.

Two styles of stations are offered; “small hoist” pistol grip stations with integral parts (see page 163),and "general purpose" station components with modular assembly required. The general purpose com-ponents are available as custom factory assembled stations. For custom applications, a wide range ofoperators, contact blocks, legend plates and accessories are offered.

Features Applications

•

1 and 2 speed versions

•

Overhead cranes

•

Double insulated

•

Tower cranes

•

Shock and corrosion resistant

•

Fixed hoists

•

2, 4, 6, 8, 12 element versions

•

Beam hoists

•

Ease of operation

Specifications

Electrical ratings NEMA A600, Q600

Enclosure XACAO* NEMA Type 4, 4X (Indoor/Outdoor), 5IP 65

XACAO* (Pistol grip) NEMA Type 4, 4X (Indoor), 5IP 65

Operating temperatures -15

°

C to +70

°

C-5

°

F to +158

°

F

Housing Yellow polypropylene

Storage temperatures -40

°

C to +70

°

C-40

°

F to +158

°

F

Shock resistance 100 g

Vibration resistance 15 g for f = 40 to 500 Hz

Mechanical life

1 million operations(The product life expressed is based on average usage and normal operating conditions. Actual operating life will vary with conditions. The above statements are not intended to nor shall they create any express or implied warranties as to product operation or life. For information on the limited warranty offered on this product, please refer to Square D terms and conditions of sale found in the Square D Digest.)

Operating force

XACA Multi-element types-with contact ZB2BE:1 daN (36 oz.) for 1N.O.,1.3 daN (46.8 oz.) for 1N.O./1N.C.-with contact XENG1491:1.4 daN (50.4 oz.) for 1N.C./2N.O.-with contact XENG1191:1.4 daN (50.4 oz.) for 1st step,2.5 daN (89.9 oz.) for 2nd step

Cable entry XACD - 7 to 18 mmAll other models - 8 to 26 mm

CablingScrew and captive cable clamp terminals. Recommended torque 15.62 in lbs. Capacity: minimum 1 x .5 mm

2

(20 AWG) solid or stranded, maximum with or without cable end: 2 x 1.5 mm

2

(16 AWG) or 1 x 2.5 mm

2

(14 AWG) or by cable quick connector conforming to NF C 20- 20 (on request).

Approvals



Marking


Type XACA — Pendant StationsStandard Duty

163


XACA03(Shown with optional operator)

XACA06

XACA2013

ZB2BE10

XENG1191

XENG371

XACS10

q

These XACD units are available with factory installed E-stops. Add a “3” to the end of the catalog number for standard E-stop or add a “4” for a “Trigger Action” E-stop.

t

Standard enclosures include internal mounting plate, cable sleeve for 8 to 26 mm, internal cable clamp, suspension ring and cable tie.

j

Cannot be used with

XACA03

pendant.

Wiring diagrams

Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3 Fig. 4

Pistol grip stations

Description Speeds Function1 Speed / 2 Speed Catalog Number

1 N.O. contact per operator2 Mechanically interlocked operators 1 XACA201

q

2 N.O. (staggered) contacts per operator2 Mechanically interlocked operators 2 XACA207

q

1 N.O. + 1 N.C.2 Mechanically interlocked operators 1 XACA205

q

1 N.O. contact per direction1 Mechanically interlocked 2 way toggle 1 XACD21A0101

1 N.O. + N.O. staggered1 Mechanically interlocked 2 way toggle 2 XACD21A1231

1 N.O. & 1 N.C. contact per direction1 Mechanically interlocked 2 way toggle 1 XACD21A0105

1 N.C. + 1 N.O. + 1 N.O. staggered1 Mechanically interlocked 2 way toggle 2 XACD21A1241

General purpose pendants

t

Enclosures Catalog Number

2 hole enclosure XACA02






Contact Blocks For Operators In Cover

Description Wiring Diagram Catalog Number

1 N.O./spring return/1 speed – ZB2BE101

1 N.C./spring return/1 speed – ZB2BE102

1 N.O. early close & 1N.C.&1N.O./spring return/2 speed Fig. 1 XENG1191

1 N.C. & 2 N.O./spring return/1 speed Fig. 2 XENG1491

1 N.O. & 1 N.O. latching/1 speed/interlocked Fig. 3 XENG3781

1 N.O. & 1 N.C. latching/1 speed/interlocked Fig. 4 XENG3791

For operators in base of enclosure

j

1 N.O./1 speed XACS101

1 N.C./1 speed XACS102

2 N.O./1 speed XACS103

2 N.C./1 speed XACS104

1 N.O. & 1 N.C./1 speed XACS105

13 14

21 22

33 34

13 14

21 22

33 34

13 14 13 14 13 1411 12


Type XACA — Pendant StationsOperators and Accessories


164

11/97

Booted push buttons are for cover mounting only. All other operators can be mounted on cover or bottom.

Trigger action mushroom heads are “tamper proof” whereby a change of contact state is not possible by “teasing” or floating the operator.

Not for use with XEN G contact blocks.

Operators

Description Color Catalog Number

Booted push button

White XACA9411

Black XACA9412

Green XACA9413

Red XACA9414

Yellow XACA9415

Blue XACA9416

Brown XACA9419

Description Mushroom Size Color Catalog Number

Mushroom head, momentary 30 mmBlack ZA2BC24

Red ZA2BC44

Mushroom head, momentary 40 mmBlack ZA2BC2

Red ZA2BC4

Mushroom head, push to maintain/turn to release30 mm Red ZA2BS44

40 mm Red ZA2BS54

Mushroom head, push to maintain/turn to release (trigger action)

30 mm Red ZA2BS834

40 mm Red ZA2BS844

Mushroom head, push to maintain/key turn to release30 mm Red ZA2BS74

40 mm Red ZA2BS14

Mushroom head, push to maintain/key turn to release (trigger action)

40 mm Red ZA2BS844


Selector switch/2 position - maintained

Black ZA2BD2

Selector switch/3 position - maintained

Black ZA2BD3

Selector switch/2 position - maintained key operated - key removal from left or right position

NA ZA2BG4

Selector switch/3 position - maintained key operated - key removal from left or right position

NA ZA2BG5

Wobble stick (bottom mounting recommended)Black ZA2BB2

Red ZA2BB4

Pilot light components


Direct supply base/without lamp (for 6 to 120 V applications) (AC/DC) ZB2BV006

Resistor supply base/with 130 V lamp (for 220-240 V applications) (AC/DC) ZB2BV007

Pilot light operators for incandescent lamps

Green ZA2BV03

Red ZA2BV04

Amber ZA2BV05

Blue ZA2BV06

Clear ZA2BV07

Pilot light operators for LED lamps

Green ZA2BV033

Red ZA2BV043

Amber ZA2BV053

Enclosure Accessories

Description Catalog Number

Blank hole plug ZB2SZ3

Mechanical interlock (momentary). For use with XAC booted operators only XACA009

Adapter for self-supporting cable XACB961

Low suspension ring for single row station XACA971

Protective guard for bottom mounted mushroom head XACA982

Protective guard for bottom mounted selector switch or key switch XACA983

Booted push button

Mushroom head

Selector switch

Selector switch(key operated)

Wobble stick

XACA982

XACB961 XACA971

XACA983


Type XACA — Pendant StationsExploded Drawing

165


XAC-A941

ZA2-BC4

ZA2-BC44

ZA2-BS54

ZA2-BS44

ZA2-BS14

ZA2-BS74

ZB2-SZ3

ZA2-BD ZA2-BB

XAC-A971

XAC-A983

XAC-B961

XAC-A009

XAC-S

ZB2-BE

ZA2-BG ZA2-BC BS

XAC-A982

ZB2-BV00

XEN-G1 91

XEN-T1192

XEN-G37 1

ZB2-BY

ZB2-BY

ZA2-BG

ZA2-BD

ZA2-BV0

30075-16


Type XACA — Pendant StationsLamps and Legend Plates


166

11/97

Lamps

a

All nameplates are black w/white lettering except “Stop”, “Emergency Stop” and “Reset” which are red w/white lettering.For black “Reset” change final digit of catalog number to 2.

j

Please specify lettering when ordering. Two lines with 11 characters (including spaces) maximum on each line.

Type Voltage (AC/DC) Watts Catalog Number

Replacement bulbs (Type BA9s)Incandescent

6 1.2 DL1CB00612 2.0 DL1CE01224 2.0 DL1CE02448 2.4 DL1 CE048

130 2.6 DL1CE130


120 - NE51HRT120V220 - NE51HRT220V380 - NE51HRT380V


LED, BA9s base for Direct Supply blocks

Green 6 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS0063Red 6 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS0064

Amber 6 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS0065Green 12 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS0123Red 12 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS0124



Amber 120 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS1205

PVC Standard legend plates 30 x 40mm

Text

a

Catalog number Text

a

Catalog number

Bridge Forward ZB2BY2343 Off ZB2BY2312Bridge Reverse ZB2BY2344 On ZB2BY2311Close ZB2BY2314 Off On ZB2BY2367Down ZB2BY2308 Open ZB2BY2313Emergency Stop ZB2BY2330 Open Close ZB2BY2376Fast ZB2BY2328 Open-O-Close ZB2BY2388Forward ZB2BY2305 Out ZB2BY2339For Rev ZB2BY23 Power On ZB2BY2326For-O-Rev ZB2BY2384 Raise ZB2BY2335Hand Off Auto ZB2BY2387 Reset ZB2BY2323High ZB2BY2338 Reverse ZB2BY2306High Low ZB2BY2369 Right ZB2BY2309Hoist Down ZB2BY2342 Run ZB2BY2334Hoist Up ZB2BY2341 Slow ZB2BY2327In ZB2BY2503 Start ZB2BY2303Inch ZB2BY2321 Stop ZB2BY2304Jog For ZB2BY2381 Stop Start ZB2BY2366Jog Rev ZB2BY2380 Trolley Right ZB2BY2345Jog Run ZB2BY2365 Trolley Left ZB2BY2346Left ZB2BY2310 Up ZB2BY2307Low ZB2BY2336 Up Down ZB2BY2370Lower ZB2BY2337 Up-O-Down ZB2BY2389Man Auto ZB2BY2372

Type Description Catalog number

PVC blank legendBlank Black or red background-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY2101Blank Yellow or white background-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY4101

PVC custom engraved

Special engraving

j Black background, white letters-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY2002Special engravingj Red background, white letters-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY2004Special engravingj White background, black letters-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY4001Special engravingj Yellow background, black letters-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY4005

DL1CE0**(Incandescent)

DL1CJUS****(LED)

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType XACA — Pendant Stations

Order Form


XACA Order guide instructionsCustom built pendant stations

1. The first step in putting together your pendant station is to determine the number of operators that you require. This enables you to choose theenclosure based on the number of holes needed.

2. Select the type of operator, contact block and appropriate nameplate for each function required from pages 163-166. Enter the componentsfor each function on the order form below.

3. Check for special functions that may be required. These items could include mechanical interlocks, adapters for self-supporting cable, lowersupport rings, protective guards etc.

Photocopy this form and complete all information.

TO BE COMPLETED BY SQUARE D TO BE COMPLETED BY CUSTOMERName Branch/Sales office Firm Sheet No.

Date Order No. Delivery date Date Cust. Order No. Delivery date

No. ofidentical unitsrequired

Unit referenceof enclosure

XACA

Functions(optional)

Mechanicalinterlock(draw a linebetween the 2units to beinterlocked)

Legends Contact blocksand pilot light bodies

push buttonpilot light orblanking plug

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Mechanical interlock XACA009 Number of XAC A009 required

Unit mounted in base of station (facing downwards)

13

AttachmentsPosition Type Catalog No.

Cross theappropriatebox if required

14 Adapters for self supporting cable type BBAP(only available with 8 to 26 mm dia. cable sleeve) XACB961

15 Lower support ring XACA971

16 Protective guard for base mounted selector switchor 40 mm emergency stop push button XACA982

17 Protective guard for key switch XACA983

123456789101112

13

14

15

16

17

1 1

22

3 34 4

5 5

6 6

1

2

34

5

6

* Mechanical interlock

Possible combinations

Impossible combinations

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType XACA — Pendant StationsDimensions


11/97

No. of HolesIN/mm

2 3 4 6 8 12

IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm

A 15.00 380 15.00 380 17.33 440 19.70 500 22.10 560 26.78 680

B 7.50 190 7.50 190 9.85 250 12.20 310 14.57 370 19.30 490

1.948

2.3660

Internal dia.9 to 13 mm

Small hoist typeXAC A201 and A205

1.6642

1.9750

8.5

216

10.8

727

6

General purpose typeXAC A••••

2.7570

3.5590

.35 81.1

28

1.3

33

3.1580

2.25 57

3.1580

.79

20

3.1580

B

A

XAC A982

XAC A971

XAC A983

Internal dia.8 to 10 mm

11 to 14 mm

15 to 17 mm

18 to 22 mm

22 to 26 mm

823.23

1013.9791

3.58

240

9.45

300.

511

.83

Small HoistXACD

8 mm dia.

inner dia.

16 to 1813 to 1510 to 127 to 9 mm

General purpose typeXACA

Small hoist typeXACA201 and A205

Small hoistXACD

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SKYP — Pendant Stations

Specifications


OSHA Regulation, Section 1910.170 Overhead and Gantry Cranes, limits the voltage at pendant push buttons to 150 Vac or 300 Vdc.

Specifications

Electrical ratings Types SKRU2 - SKRU5: AC - Nema B300 DC - Nema P600Types SKRU1, 10, 11: AC - Nema A600: DC - Nema P600

Enclosure type UL Type 1, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, and 13

Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 60 °C- 13 °F to + 140 °F

Housing material Polycarbonate

Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 70 °C- 40 °F to + 158 °F

Cable entry 1/2 inch NPT

Approvals File E42259CCN NKCR


Electrical Contact Ratings (Types SKRU2 Through SKRU5)

AC – NEMA Type B300

Volts


Resistive75% Power Factor

Make Break ContinuousCarrying Amperes

Make, Break and Continuous Carrying

AmperesAmps VA Amps VA

120240

3015

36003600

31.5

360360

55

55

Electrical Contact Ratings (Types SKRU1, 10 and 11)

AC – NEMA Type A600 DC - Standard Duty - NEMA P600

Volts


Resistive75% Power Factor

Volts

Inductiveand

Resistive

Make Amperes Break AmperesContinuous

Carrying Amperes

Make, Break and Continuous

Carrying Amperes

Make and Break Amperes

Continuous Carrying Amperes

120240480600

60301512

63

1.51.2

10101010

10101010

120240600

1.10.550.2

101010

Marking For Declaration of Conformity, see page 229.

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SKYP — Pendant StationsApplication Data and Order Information


11/97

This line of pendant stations consists of polymeric enclosures(2 through 10 units), push button units (1 through 5 speed) andlaminated legend plates. All enclosures have an extra singleunit space near the top which permits the installation of a tog-gle switch ➀, a Type SK operator or pilot light ➁ or a warninglabel. All enclosures come with a stainless steel hanger brack-et and internal strain relief post, as standard. Enclosures areyellow and have a threaded opening in the top. The completeline is UL Listed and CSA Certified with NEMA Type environ-mental ratings 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13.

Class 9001 SK push-to-test pilot lights and remote test pilot lights will not fit in these enclo-sures.

Assembled pendant stations consist of an enclosure, operators and legend plates. Theprice of the total station consists of the prices of the individual components - there is nocharge for assembly. All custom orders must include the pendant key sheet available asshown on page 173.

Threaded conduit hole

Hanger bracket (Part no. 6509101801)

Space for toggle switch, a type SK operator or pilot light. Use appropriate legend plates.

Type SKYP enclosure

Type SKRU1 through SKRU11 operators. Any Type SK pilot light or operator can be mounted in this enclosure. The enclosure depth will accommodate 1 Type KA1 thru KA6 (total of 2) contact blocks.

Type SKN2 legend plate

Types SKRU 1, 10 and 11 use Type KA contact blocks. Types SKRU 2 thru 5 are factoryenclosed contact blocks.

Multispeed Contact Symbols (“X”= Contact Closed)

Enclosures

Size Conduit EntranceSize

Enclosure OnlyEnclosure For

Assembled Station

Type Type

2 Button4 Button6 Button8 Button

10 Button

3/4"-14 NPT3/4"-14 NPT1"-111/2 NPT

11/4"-111/2 NPT11/4"-111/2 NPT

SKYP2SKYP4SKYP6SKYP8SKYP10

SKYP20SKYP40SKYP60SKYP80SKYP100

Push Button UnitsNumber of

ButtonsPer Unit

DescriptionContact

Symbol –See Below

Type

2 Single Speed –Momentary Interlocked 7 SKRU1

2 Single Speed –Momentary Non-Interlocked 5 SKRU10

2 Single Speed –Maintained Interlock 10 SKRU11

2 Two Speed –Momentary Interlocked 87 SKRU2

2 Three Speed –Momentary Interlocked 88 SKRU3

2 Four Speed –Momentary Interlocked 89 SKRU4

2 Five Speed –Momentary Interlocked 90 SKRU5

Terminals

87

2868-D30

C

1

2

2 1

SPEED POSITIONOFF

1 2

C

1

2

Terminals

TerminalsC

1

2

3

4

4 3 2 1

SPEED POSITIONOFF

2868-D31

89

1 2 3 4Terminals

C

1

2

3

4

C

1

2

3

3 2 1

SPEED POSITIONOFF

2868-D29

88

1 2 3 Terminals

C

1

2

3

Terminals

TerminalsC

1

2

3

4

4 3 2 1

SPEED POSITIONOFF

2868-D32

90

1 2 3 4Terminals

C

1

2

3

4

5 5

55

➀ Can be supplied by Square D as Class 9001 Type SKSTS1- includes boot for NEMA Type 4X.

➁ See Class 9001 Type SK on page 171.➂ Includes legend plate, gasket and ground plate to be used with toggle switch.➃ Tri-laminated legend plate having a yellow or red background on a black core. ➄ 19 characters each side max.

Single Speed Contact Symbols

Dimensions ........................................................................................... Page 172Key Sheet for Custom Assembled Pendant ........................................... Page 173

Legend PlatesWhere Used Marking Type

For SKRU1throughSKRU11

Blank-BlankHoist: Up-DownTrolley: East-WestTrolley: Fwd.-Rev.Trolley: North-SouthBridge: Fwd.-Rev.Bridge: East-WestBridge: North-SouthStart-StopReset-StopAux Hoist: Up-DownPower: On-OffSpecify Marking

SKN200➄SKN201SKN202SKN203SKN204SKN205SKN206SKN207SKN208SKN209SKN210SKN211SKN299➄

With ToggleSwitch➀ inTop Space ofEnclosure

BlankOff-OnOn-OffSpecify Marking

SKN500➂SKN544➂SKN545➂SKN599➂

WithType SKOperator orPilot Light➁in Top Spaceof Enclosure

BlankOnOffEmerg. StopRunPower OnOff-OnSpecify Marking

SKN100➃SKN103SKN104SKN105SKN124SKN138SKN144SKN199➃

Closing PlateType

SK52

LIFETIMEENCLOSUREWARRANTY

1057

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SK — Operators

Application Data and Order Information


(1) Red knob available with “Push Emergency Stop” printed on the red knob.See note (3) below for additional options.

(1) Red knob available with “Push Emergency Stop” printed on the red knob.See note (3) below for additional options.

Shallow Depth Light Modules For Type SK Control Units• UL listed and CSA certified• LED light modules use lamp with 7 element LED cluster that provides illumination similar to incandescent illumination.• LED light modules require the color cap color and the LED color be the same or use a clear color cap.

➀ 9001 SK

(3) For additional Type SK push button operators (illuminated and non-illuminated), light modules, and contact blocks, see document 9001CT9601: 30mm Push Buttons Type K and SK. All illumi-nated push button operators must use a shallow depth light module listed above. Only standard pilot lights and non-illuminated selector switches can be used in Type SKYP enclosures.

Non-illuminated

Description Color Catalog

2 Position Red SKR9R

Maintained Pull Red (1) SKR9R05

Maintained Push (2) SKR9 (2)

Illuminated

Description Color Voltage Catalog

2 Position Red 120 Vac/dc - Full Voltage SKR9P58R

Maintained Pull Red (1) 24 Vac/dc - Full Voltage SKR9P55R05

Maintained Push (2) 24 Vac/dc - Full Voltage SKR9P55 (2)

Voltage DescriptionFor Use With Single Lamp

Ill. Operators as Indicated ➀

Light Module Type

No.

Voltage Assembly

CodeRating

Replacement Lamps

Lamp Number(ANSI)

Lamp PartNumber


Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

All AllAll All


5555LR55LG55LY

1.2 VA0.5 VA0.5 VA0.5 VA

757 2550101002650880520465088052066508805205


Full VoltageLED Red

LED GreenLED Yellow

AllAllAll All


5858LR58LG58LY

3.0 VA0.5 VA0.5 VA0.5 VA

120MB 2550101027650880520465088052066508805205


Volts

AC

Volts

DC

Inductive (NEMA Type A600)35% Power Factor Resistive 75%

Power FactorMake, Break




Make and Break Continuous

CarryingAmperes

Amperes VA Amperes VA KA1 KA2KA3 KA4 KA5

KA6

120240480600

60301512

7200720072007200

6.03.01.51.2

720720720720

10101010

10101010

125250600

1.10.550.2

1.10.550.2

1.1––

1.10.550.2

101010

Color (2) Other Color Codes

Black B

Red R

Green G

Blue L

Yellow Y

White W

Orange S

Clear C

Amber A

These colors are not available on illuminatedpush buttons.

Both N.C. contacts are direct opening.

Contact Blocks (3)

Description Symbol Catalog

(Clear Cover)

KA1

(Red Cover)

KA3

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SKYP — Pendant StationsDimensions


11/97

682.68

1024.00

111

See Chart for NPT Size

Type SKYP

4.38

54.48

2.15"A"

542.12

1104.33

1224.79

592.32

843.31

D65075-140B

893.50

522.0489

3.49

3.19 81

7.37187


Inches

Type SKYP


Type SKYPClass 9001 Type SK Push-To-Test Pilot Lights and Remote TestPilot Lights will not fit in these enclosures.Standard Pilot Lights will fit in these enclosures. For illuminatedoperators, in the SKYP, the shallow depth light module(9001KM55 or 9001KM58) must be used.

Units

“A” Dimensions Conduit Opening

Inches mm NPT

2 11.70 297 3/4” -14

4 16.03 407 3/4” -14

6 20.36 517 1” -11 1/2

8 24.69 627 11/4” -111/2

10 29.02 737 11/4” -111/2

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SKYP — Pendant Stations

Order Form


1. Operator or Closing Plate.Example - SKRU1

2. Legend Plate Type NumberExample - SKN201

3. Legend Plate Marking – Used Only if Special Marking is RequiredExample:

Line 2 - SKN299Line 3 - A.) Hoist

B.) FWD C.) REV

ENCLOSURES – NEMA 4X, 13

PUSH BUTTON UNITS – NEMA 4X, 13

CLOSING PLATE

Control Products KEY SHEET FOR ORDERING CLASS 9001 TYPE SKYPASSEMBLED PENDANT CONTROL STATIONS

CUSTOMER CUSTOMER ORDER NO.

Class 9001 Type SKYP -________DATE LIST PRICE EACH, DIB QUANTITY

SizeConduitEntrance

Size

Enclosurefor Assembled

Station

Type

2 Button 3/4” -14 NPT SKYP20

4 Button 3/4” -14 NPT SKYP40

6 Button 1” -14 NPT SKYP60

8 Button 11/4” -11 1/2 SKYP80

10 Button 11/4” -11 1/2 SKYP100

Assembled pendant stations consist of an enclosure, operators, and legendplates. The price of the total station consists of the prices of the individualcomponents – there is no charge for assembly.

Number of Buttons per

UnitDescription Contact

Symbol Type

2 Single Speed - Momentary Interlocked 7 SKRU1

2 Single Speed - Momentary Non-Interlocked 5 SKRU10

2 Single Speed - Maintained Interlocked 10 SKRU11

2 Two Speed - Momentary Interlocked 87 SKRU2

2 Three Speed - Momentary Interlocked 88 SKRU3

2 Four Speed - Momentary Interlocked 89 SKRU4

2 Five Speed - Momentary Interlocked 90 SKRU5

Type

SK52

A

1

C

B 23

SKRU1SKN201

123

SKRU1SKN201

Hanger bracketThreaded conduitholeSpace for toggleswitch ➀, a Type SKoperator or pilot lightor a warning label.Use SKN5 or SKN1legend plates.

Type SKYP enclosure

Type SKRU1 throughSKRU11 operators.Type SKN2 legendplate

LEGEND PLATES – NEMA 4X, 13

➀ Can be supplied by Square D as 9001SKSTS1➁ Includes legend plate, gasket and ground plate to be

used with toggle switch.➂ Tri-laminated legend plate having a yellow or red

background on a black core.➃ 19 characters each sides. Class 9001 Type SK Push-To-Test Pilot lights and Re-

mote Test Pilot lights will not fit in these enclosures.

Where Used Marking Type

For SKRU1 throughSKRU11

Blank-BlankHoist: Up-DownTrolley: East-WestTrolley: Fwd.-Rev.Trolley: North-SouthBridge: Fwd.-Rev.Bridge: East-WestBridge: North-SouthStart-StopReset-StopSpecify Marking

SKN200➃SKN201SKN202SKN203SKN204SKN205SKN206SKN207SKN208SKN209SKN299➃

With Toggle Switch ➀ in Top Space of Enclosure

BlankOff-OnOn-OffSpecify Marking

SKN500 ➁SKN544 ➁SKN545 ➁SKN599 ➁

With Type SK Operator or Pilot Light in Top Space of Enclosure

BlankOnOffEmerg. StopRunPower OnOff-OnSpecify MarkingSpecify Marking(Red Background)

SKN100 ➂SKN103SKN104SKN105SKN124SKN138SKN144SKN199 ➂SKN199R ➂

When operator and legend plateuse 2 adjacent holes - specifysame in both locations. Example:

1

2

3

1

2

3 A)

B)

C)

1

2

3 A)

B)

C)

1

2

3 A)

B)

C)

1

2

3 A)

B)

C)

1

2

3 A)

B)

C)

1

2

3 A)

B)

C)

1

2

3 A)

B)

C)

1

2

3 A)

B)

C)

1

2

3 A)

B)

C)

1

2

3 A)

B)

C)

Space for tog-gle switch ➀, a Type SK opera-tor or pilot light, or a warning la-bel. Use SKN-5 or SKN-1 leg-end plates.

Type SKRU1 through SKRU 11 operators or Type SK operators and Type SKN-2 leg-end plate.

TYPE NUMBER KEY



11/97

CONTENTS

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page

General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 181-182XVAL Single Stage Indicating Beacons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Accessories and Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177XVAC Indicating Bank Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Prewired Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178LED Cluster Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179-180Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181-182


Type XVA Indicating Banks and Beacons


Type XVA — Indicating Banks and BeaconsGeneral Description


176

11/97

The XVA indicating bank is an illuminatedstackable modular system of signaling lightsthat can be used for indicating the status of amachine and verifying that status from a dis-tance and in all directions (360

°

). The modularsystem of lenses allows the unit to be construct-ed from any combination of 1 to 5 lenses. Con-stant, flashing and strobe units are available.

Examples: Indicates machine shutdown, short-age of materials, paging of supervisor or main-tenance personnel, hazardous or dangerousconditions to name a few. It is a perfect solutionfor status indication on factory floors utilizingJIT methods.

Machines, instrument panels and work stationsequipped with the XVA allow personnel to reactmore quickly to any situation or incident.

Some industries that currently use or could use XVAs:

Automotives CanningOEMs Test EquipmentElectronics Computer IndustryGarment Food ProcessingPharmaceuticals RoboticsPublishing SemiconductorTextiles Machine ToolAgriculture

Typical applications for the XVA include:

Conveyor Systems Industrial Baking OvensMachine Tools Automated Paint BoothsPrinting Presses Automated Test EquipmentRetro-fit Just-In-Time ManufacturingAssembly Lines Automated Manufacturing LinesTextile Looms Assembly Work Stations

Specifications

• One complete single stage beacon or components con-sisting of 1 to 5 lenses forming an indicating bank.

• Five colors to select from: green, red, orange, blue andclear.

• Signal can be continuous, flashing or strobe.• Visible from a distance and on a 360

°

radius.• Shock and vibration resistant.• One common base for 1-5 lenses, only one cable entry

required.• Aluminum tubes of 4 in. (100 mm), 16 in. (400 mm), and

31.5 in. (800 mm) lengths for extension of column.• Audible signal available

Mounting

• Two screws affix base when units are direct mounted orfour screws used for tube and tulip mounted.

• The tube and base of column mount directly on the tulip.• All wiring done into saddle clamp screws in the base.

See page 181 for wiring diagram.• Lenses stack on one another by use of a captive screw

through the lens.

Specifications

Protective treatment

Standard version, treatment TC “all climates”

Ambient temperature

Storage: -40

°

F to +158

°

F (-40

°

C to +70

°

C)Operating: -13

°

F to +158

°

F (-25

°

C to +70

°

C)

Degree of protection

Approval per UL508. Meets NEMA Type 1 and 12 protection, IEC Type IP54

Material

Cover and lenses: polycarbonateBase: PolyamideTube: Anodized aluminumGasket: Neoprene

Rated insulation voltage 250 V

Approvals


File LR 44087Class 3211 03 andClass 3211 07

Marking For Declaration of Conformity, see page 226

Lamps 5 W minimum, 7W maximum, length: 1.61" (41 mm) for DL1BA

1.93" (49 mm) for DL1BL

Terminal marking Terminal marked “O” common to 5 elements and ground

WiringCaptive terminal with screw saddle clamp, minimum capacity:2 size #18 AWG seriesmaximum capacity: 2 size #12 AWG series


Type XVAL — Indicating Banks and BeaconsSingle Stage Indicating Beacon

177


XVAL471(One circuit only)

XVAC09

XVAC02, 027XVAC03, 037XVAC04, 047

XVAC01XVAC11

DL1B

XVACO5 XVAC06

XVAC12

(1) XVAC211Base + cover

Indicating Beacons

For Additional Lamps see LED Lamps on page 179 and 180.

Description Signal Color Catalog Number

Complete assemblycomprising:1 cover1 illuminated lens unit1 base

Steady lightlamp type BA15d (not supplied)

≤

240 Vac/dc

Green

XVAL331

Red

XVAL341

Orange

XVAL351

Blue

XVAL361

Clear

XVAL371

Standard flashing lightlamp type BA15d (not supplied)24 V - 240 Vac only (

±

10%)

Green

XVAL431

Red

XVAL441

Orange

XVAL451

Blue

XVAL461

Clear

XVAL471

Strobe light(integral discharge tube)24 Vdc, 260 mA max.

Green

XVAL73C024

Red

XVAL74C024

Orange

XVAL75C024

Blue

XVAL76C024

Clear

XVAL77C024

Strobe light(integral discharge tube)110-120 Vac, 110 mA50-60 Hz

Green

XVAL73B120

Red

XVAL74B120

Orange

XVAL75B120

Blue

XVAL76B120

Clear

XVAL77B120

Strobe light(integral discharge tube)220 Vac (

±

10%), 80 mA50-60 Hz

Green

XVAL73A220

Red

XVAL74A220

Orange

XVAL75A220

Blue

XVAL76A220

Clear

XVAL77A220

Accessories and spare parts for indicating beacons and banks

TypeSize/Type

Voltage

CatalogNumber

Accessoriesfor tube mounting

4" metal tubes 100 mm

XVAC02

16" metal tubes 400 mm

XVAC03

31.5" metal tubes 800 mm

XVAC04

4" black anodized metal tubes 100 mm

XVAC027

16" black anodized metal tubes 400 mm

XVAC037

31.5" black anodized metal tubes 800 mm

XVAC047

1/2" NPT conduit adaptor Metallic

XVAC00

Tube support/fixing plate - Black Anodized Plastic

XVAC01

Tube support/fixing plate - Black Anodized Metallic

XVAC11

Wall mounting bracket Metallic

XVAC12

Gaskets for use at point of mounting

For direct base mounting

XVAC05

For tube support/mounting plate

XVAC06

For between lenses, base, cover - replacement

XVAC09

AC or DC

Lamps typeBA15d

Length 49 mm (BL)41 mm (BA)

2.5 W 12 V

DL1BA012

4 W 24 V

DL1BA024

6.5 W 24 V

DL1BL024

4 W 48 V

DL1BA048

7 W 110 V

DL1BA110

7 W 120 V

DL1BL120

5 W 160 V

DL1BA160

6 W 260 V

DL1BA260


Type XVAC — Indicating Banks and BeaconsIndicating Bank Components


178

11/97

(1) XVAC211Base + cover

(1) XVAC027

(1) XVAC11

+

(1) XVAC06

+

(3) DL1BL120

+

+

1 exampleof a complete

indicating bank=

(1) XVAC94

+

(1) XVAC341

+

(1) XVAC331

+

Indicating banks are supplied as sub-assemblies, individually referenced and boxed, for assem-bly by the user.

Maximum number of units:

5, including 1 (max.) top mounted strobe.

See page 177 for Accessories and Spare Parts.

Example: XVAC73C024

Pre-Wired Bases (1)

(1) Common and ground wires are provided with all of the above options.(2)

Standard wire

provides 2 feet of wire as standard length.(3) #14 AWG wire cannot be used with tube support/fixing plates (XVAC01 or XVAC11)and

wall mounting bracket (XVAC12).

(Components for variable composition)

Description Signal Color CatalogNumber

Lens unit sub assembly Steady light lamp type BA15d (not supplied)

≤

240 Vac/dc

Green

XVAC331

Red

XVAC341

Orange

XVAC351

Blue

XVAC361

Clear

XVAC371

Standard flashing light lamp type BA15d(not supplied)24 V to 240 Vac only (

±

10%)

Green

XVAC431

Red

XVAC441

Orange

XVAC451

Blue

XVAC461

Clear

XVAC471

Lens unit sub assembly with strobe light (only 1 strobe may be used on each bank and must be mounted in the top position).

Strobe light(integral dis-charge tube) 24 Vdc, 260 mA max. common negative (for com-mon positive, take off digit 1 at the end of the refer-ence.

Green

XVAC73C0241

Red

XVAC74C0241

Orange

XVAC75C0241

Blue

XVAC76C0241

Clear

XVAC77C0241

Strobe light(integral dis-charge tube) 110-120 Vac, 110 mA, 50-60 Hz

Green

XVAC73B120

Red

XVAC74B120

Orange

XVAC75B120

Blue

XVAC76B120

Clear

XVAC77B120

Strobe light(integral dis-charge tube)220 Vac (

±

10%), 80 mA50-60 Hz

Green

XVAC73A220

Red

XVAC74A220

Orange

XVAC75A220

Blue

XVAC76A220

Clear

XVAC77A220

Audible sounder sub assembly (90 db. at1 meter, 3KHz)

(for common positiveremove digit 1 at the end of the reference

Example: XVAC91

)

Continuous tone12 to 48Vdc, 13 mA max.common negative

XVAC911

110 to 220 Vac, 3.3 mA

XVAC93

Intermittent tone12 to 48 Vdc 13 mA max.common negative

XVAC921

110 to 220 Vac, 3.1 mA

XVAC94

Cover and one to five unit base

XVAC211

Cover only

XVAC081

Base only

XVAC07

Wire Gauge Standard Wire (2)

#14 AWG (3) XVAC211S5

#16 AWG XVAC211S1

#18 AWG XVAC211S10

#22 AWG XVAC211S11


Type XVA — Indicating Banks and BeaconsLED Cluster Lamps

179


Lens

Lamp

How to choose between the standard incandescent bulband the LED cluster lamp

Average P.O. costs

$25 - $50

to process; assume bulbs ordered twice each year.

Assume maintenance worker rate of approximately

$20

/hr. or

$5

/15 minutes to changebulb.

LED Lamp & Lens Assemblies

Yellow lamps can be installed in either yellow or clear bases.

The flashing circuitry is in the LED lamp, not the lens.

Yellow lamp installed in a yellow lens. Order components XVAC381 (for indicating banksand beacons) with XVAD381B120 (steady light) or XVAD481B120 yellow (flashing) LED lamp. Lead time based on components.

Yellow installed in a clear lens (both items are in stock).

Yellow lamps can be installed in either yellow or clear bases.

The flashing circuitry is in the LED lamp, not the lens.

Yellow lamp installed in a yellow lens. Order components XVAC381 (for indicating banksand beacons) with XVAD381C024 (steady light) or XVAD481C024 yellow (flashing) LED lamp. Lead time based on components.

Yellow installed in a clear lens (both items are in stock).

Use standard incandescent bulb when desiring: Use upgraded LED cluster lamp when desiring:

average operating life

≤

2,000 hours

a universal bulb

–

each bulb can be used with any color lens

–

Bipolar (e.g. 120 V bulb can be used with either 120 Vac or 120 Vdc)

low initial bulb cost for short term cost savings

bulb is normally OFF

extended lamp life (industry average for an LED is approx. 100,000 hrs.) - lamp is normally ON

resistance to vibration (e.g. direct machine mounting, conveyor mount, etc.)

to avoid machine and/or process downtime due to changing lamp, or if process is complicated to reset

lower power consumption

long range cost savings (see table below)

Product Cost Comparison

Lamp Type Average Life(approximate) Miscellaneous Illumination Cost Savings (over 11 years)

Incandescent ~ 2,000 hours

+ Low initial cost+ Many color options+ AC or DC power- Generates heat- Prone to shock and vibrationdamage

• Maximum brightness

$5 List Price/bulb x 50 ($30 cost/P.O.) (2 P.O.'s/yr.) (11yr.) ($5/bulb change) (50 bulb changes)

This price does not include cost of ma-chine or process downtime.

= 250.00= 660.00= 250.00—————

$ 1,160.00

LED

~ 100,000 hours (11.4 years)

“LED Industry Average”(~50 times life of incandescent)

+ Extremely long life+ Resistant to shock/vibration+ Cool operation+ Low power consumption

LED ColorBrightest Red

OrangeYellowGreen

Least bright Blue

$150 List Price/LED lamp x 1 ($30 cost/P.O.) (1 P.O.) ($5/lamp change) (1 lamp installation)

This price does not include savings from reduced power consumption.

= 150.00= 30.00= 5.00—————

$ 185.00

Color Steady Unit LED Catalog Numbers Flashing Unit LED Catalog Numbers

(Lamp/Lens) Voltage Indicating Banks and Beacons Indicating Banks and Beacons

Green/Green

120 VAC

XVACD331B120 XVACD431B120

Red/Red XVACD341B120 XVACD441B120

Orange/Orange XVACD351B120 XVACD451B120

Yellow/Yellow XVACD381B120 XVACD481B120

Yellow/Clear XVACD371B120 XVACD471B120

Color Steady Unit LED Catalog Numbers Flashing Unit LED Catalog Numbers

(Lamp/Lens) Voltage Indicating Banks and Beacons Indicating Banks and Beacons

Green/Green

24 VAC/DC

XVACD331C024 XVACD431C024

Red/Red XVACD341C024 XVACD441C024

Orange/Orange XVACD351C024 XVACD451C024

Yellow/Yellow XVACD381C024 XVACD481C024

Yellow/Clear XVACD371C024 XVACD471C024

NEW LAMP/LENSCOMBINATION

FREE LENS!

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType XVA — Indicating Banks and BeaconsLED Cluster Lamps


11/97

No twisting orturning–insertstraight in andclick.

LED Cluster Lamp

LED Cluster Lamp Selections

These LEDs will not fit in XVA flashing lenses (i.e. XVAC4••) nor in steady lenses manufactured with date codes before 9221 (21st week of1992 Example of date code before this date would be 9210, 9138, etc.). LEDs will fit into lenses with a two letter date code, e.g. MA, CB, etc.

The flashing circuitry is in the LED, not the lens. *Yellow lens is not UL listed. Note: The LEDs have a separate negotiation category from the standard XVA Line.

Product CapabilitiesOur new XVA LED Cluster Lamp has passed (and even surpassed) exhaustive testing to en-sure the highest level of quality. The following are a few of those tests:

Reliability — predicted minimum mean time between failure (MTBF) of 200,000 hours.

Vibration Resistant — passed the following standard tests: IEC68-2-6: Cycling from 10 Hzto 55 Hz for 5 minutes, and holding at resonance on 55 Hz for 30 minutes.

Low Power Consumption — Approximately 40% less power dissipation than the incandes-cent lamp.

Current Regulated — Illumination will not vary in intensity from 85% to 120% of rated volt-age.

Leakage Current — Device will not illuminate with leakage current up to 3 mA.

UL Recognized, CSA Certified, with CE Marking

Noise Immunity — Meets requirements of IEC801. Passed the following standard tests:

IEC801-2: Electro-static discharge

IEC801-4: Fast transient burst

IEC801-5: Line-to-line surge withstand

IEC801-5: Line-to-ground surge withstand

Shock Resistant — Passed the following standard test: IEC68-2-27 (30 g, for 11 ms, 1/2 sinewave).

Shipping Test — Passed National Safe Transit Committee Project 1A Test

Thermal Cycling Test — Passed 35 cycles from -25 °C to 75 °C (one cycle = -25 °C to +75 °C to -25 °C in 1 hr.)

Salt Spray Test — Passed (96 hours). Test = 96 hours of direct spray.

Immune to interference from portable communication devices.

Storage Temperature -40 °C to + 70 °C (-40 °F to + 158 °F)

Operating Temperature -25 °C to + 55 °C (-13 °F to + 158 °F)

Color Steady Unit Flashing Unit

(Recommended Lens Color) Voltage Current LED Catalog No. Current LED Catalog No.

Red 120 Vac 25 mA XVAD341B120 25 mA XVAD441B120

(Red) 24 V AC/DC

AC: 80 mADC: 95 mA XVAD341C024 AC: 80 mA

DC: 95 mA XVAD441C024

Orange 120 Vac 25 mA XVAD351B120 25 mA XVAD451B120

(Orange) 24 VAC/DC



Green 120 Vac 25 mA XVAD331B120 25 mA XVAD431B120

(Green) 24 VAC/DC



Yellow 120 Vac 25 mA XVAD381B120 25 mA XVAD481B120

(Yellow or Clear) 24 VAC/DC





Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType XVA — Indicating Banks and Beacons

Dimensions


Indicating beacon, 1 stage

b2

dia.2.769

1.6542

= =

4.2

107

dia.2.769

1.6542

= =

= =

b1

dia. 2.6768

2.1254

.63

16

dia..9825

4.2

107

2.769

b

= =

b1

dia.2.6768

2.1254

.63

16

dia..9825

b2

1.57 40

b

Indicating bankColumn 1 to 5 stages

Mounting with tube

Mounting with tube

Dual Dimensions:mm

Inches

Note: For strobe unit add 3.19" (81mm) to total stack height.

Note: For strobe unit add 3.19" (81 mm) to total stack height.

Tube length b b1

in. mm in. mm in. mm

3.9 100 7.3 186 2.5 63

15.7 400 19.1 486 14.3 363

31.5 800 34.9 886 30.0 763

No. oflenses Tube length b b1 b2

1

in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm

3.9 100 7.3 186 2.5 63 4.2 107

15.7 400 19.1 486 14.3 363 4.2 107

31.5 800 34.9 886 30.0 763 4.2 107

2

3.9 100 9.25 238 2.5 63 6.25 159

15.7 400 21.2 538 14.3 363 6.25 159

31.5 800 36.9 938 30.0 763 6.25 159

3

3.9 100 11.4 290 2.5 63 8.3 211

15.7 400 23.2 590 14.3 363 8.3 211

31.5 800 39.0 990 30.0 763 8.3 211

4

3.9 100 13.4 342 2.5 63 10.3 263

15.7 400 25.3 642 14.3 363 10.3 263

31.5 800 41.0 1042 30.0 763 10.3 263

5

3.9 100 15.5 394 2.5 63 12.4 315

15.7 400 27.3 694 14.3 363 12.4 315

31.5 800 43.0 1094 30.0 363 12.4 315

1st unit

2nd unit3rd unit

4th unit

5th unit

** “—” pole to “common” terminal

Common**

Cabling(base viewed from above)

5

4

3

2

1

L2L1

0 (+)

Wiring Diagram

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType XVA — Indicating Banks and BeaconsDimensions


11/97

Baseplate 1

Lite Tube

Wall Mount Front

0.3910

r =

30°

40°

0.0591.5

r =

0.195

65°

0.9825

0.3910

0.9524

0.0591.5

r =

0.4010.5

0.225.5

Inchesmillimeters

M23 x 2

4.02102

1.4637

0.9123

0.4311

0.0471.2

@ 45°

4.50114.3

2.6868

1.5038

0.174.32

0.5012.7 0.59

15

0.5513.97

0.7619.30

0.7619.30

0.174.32

0.205.08

Dia. (Qty. 2)

Dia. (Qty. 4)

0.266.60

0.9022.86

Dia.

Wall Mount Side

Wall Mount Bottom

Drilling and tapping of support

0.9022.86

4.50114.3

2.2055.88

0.287.11

2.0451.82

0.5313.5

0.051.27

0.133.30

0.174.32

0.5313.5

Inchesmillimeters

1.2030.5

0.0551.4

2.6868

0.0551.4

0.7017.8

0.307.62

0.153.81

Dia.

1.5038

0.5313.5

0.4611.68

0.143.56

0.235.84

Dia.(Qty.3)

2.0451.82

0.205.08

0.205.08

Tubing and Thread DimensionsWall Mounting BracketTo be Drawn

2.1254

2.12 54

1.5740

1.6542

1.3343 2 size M4 screws

(dia. 4)

2 size M5 screws(dia. 5)


Type K – Rotary Cam Switch

Class 9003

CONTENTS


General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Type K Rotary Cam Switch: 2, 3 and 4 Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Type K Rotary Cam Switch: 5, 6 and 7 Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Type K Rotary Cam Switch: 8, 9 and 10 Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Type K Instrument Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Type K Rotary Cam Switch Operators and Handles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Accessories and Legends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Type K Rotary Cam Switch Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Type K Rotary Cam Switch Markings and Special Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196


Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch


184

11/97

The Class 9003 Type K2 rotary cam switch is a versatile means of providing inexpensive logic control. The Class 9003 Type K cam switch is available with:• Up to 12 switching positions • Worldwide acceptance • Attractive operator/handle appearance• Up to 20 contacts • Standard or custom configured sequencesA complete rotary cam switch consists of up to four items. This includes the contact block assembly, the operator/handle, a legend (if desired), and anyspecial accessories (if required).A. There are two ways of ordering a Class 9003 Type K rotary cam switch contact block assembly.1. If the desired contact sequence can be found on pages 185 through 189, order the class and type of the device.2. If the contact sequence cannot be found on pages 185 through 189, use the keysheet on pages 193 through 195. Indicate the exact contact config-

uration desired.

Devices will be assembled at the factory per this keysheet.

B. Operators/handles are listed on pages 190 and 191. The operator/handle is chosen depending on the application and size of the rotary cam switch.C. Many operators/handles come standard with a blank legend plate. Separate legends for operators without blank legend plates or when an additional

legend is desired are listed on page 192. Page 194 contains a chart on the maximum characters allowed on all legend plates.D. All accessories are listed on page 192.

Example

– Below is an explanation of the Contact Sequence/Wiring Diagrams found on pages 185 through 189.

1. Vertical arrow indicates contact status at 0

°

(up) handle position.2. Terminal identification, terminals 1 and 2 are one contact.3. Contact 3-4 is closed between 2nd and 4th position. The “H” indicates

that the contact does not open while switching from one position toanother.

4. Contacts 5-6 and 7-8 overlap between positions 4 and 5.5. Jumpers installed by factory between terminals 2 and 4, 6 and 12, 8

and 10.6. Horizontal arrow indicates spring return to

previous position

.7. Contact 1-2 is open in third position.8. Contact 1-2 is closed in second position.9. A “1” in adjacent boxes does not assure that the contact remains

closed while switching between adjacent positions.10. Contact 11-12 closes momentarily when switching from position 3 to

position 4. This contact is not closed at position 3 or at position 4.

Contact Ratings

The following contact rating charts are to be used in properly sizing a Class 9003 Type K rotary cam switch to a particular application. The UL ratings chartbelow reflects the ratings to UL specifications. The UL file is E164864. The Class 9003 Type K2 is UL Listed per guide NLRV. The Class 9003 Type K3through KA9 are UL component recognized per guide NLRV2. The lower chart is contact ratings per German specification VDE 0660. The CSA file isLR 44087, Class 3211 03 or Class 3211 05.

c

All dimensions are in millimeters (mm). To convert to approximate inch dimensions, divide mm by 25.4.

UL Ratings

Contact Block Assembly

MaximumV

General Purpose

A

Horsepower 1 PH - 2 pole 60 Hz Horsepower 3 PH - 3 pole 60 Hz110V-120V

200V-208V

220V-240V

440V-480V

550V-600V

110V-120V

200V-208V

220V-240V

440V-480V

550V-600V

HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HPK2 300 12 0.5 1 1 – – 1.5 2 3 – – X XK3 120 20 0.75 – – – – 2 – – – – XK4 600 25 2 3 3 7.5 7.5 3 5 7.5 15 20 X XK5 600 32 2 3 5 10 15 5 7.5 10 20 25 X XK6 600 45 – – – – – 7.5 15 15 30 40 X XK7 600 63 – – – – – 10 15 20 40 50 X XK8 600 110 – – – – – 15 25 25 60 60 XK9 600 195 – – – – – 15 30 30 75 75 X

Electrical Ratings (VDE 0660)

Con-tact

Block

ShaftDi-

men-sions

Rated Cur-rentas

LoadBreakSwitch

I

a

ContinuousCurrent I

th2

InFreeAir

Utiliza-tion

Cate-gory

AC1 I

e

Utilization CategoryAC1

RatedOperational Current I

e

Utilization CategoryAC2 and AC3

Rated OperationCurrent I

e

Operational VoltagesUtilizationCategory AC11

Utilization CategoryAC3 and AC3 1 PH

InFreeAIr

En-closed

3 PH 3 Pole 1 PH 2 Pole 3 PH 3 Pole 1 PH 2

Pole For Y

q

-Starters

240 V 415 V 500 V

RatedInsu-lationVolt-age

MainSwitches

Emer-gencyStop

Switch

Emer-gencyMain

Switch220 V 415 V 500 V 660 V 240 V 415 V 220 V 415 V 500 V 660 V 240 V 415 V 220V 415 V 500 V 660 V

c

mm A A A A kW kW kW kW kW kW kWA

kWA

kWA

kWA kW kW kW kW kW kW A A A V V V V

K2 6 20 20 16 16 6 10.5 14 14 4.5 7.5 2.28.5

48.5

46.5

45 1.3 2.2 2.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4 3 2 660 500 660 500

K3 6 32 32 25 32 12 21 27.5 27.5 7 12 4.315

7.515.5

7.512

7.59 2.5 4.3 6.5 11 11 11 6 4 3 660 500 660 500

K4 8 63 63 50 40 15 26 34 34 14 24 5.520.5

1122

1122

1113 – – 8.5 15 15 15 12 8 6 660 500 660 500

K5 8 63 63 50 40 15 26 34 34 14 24 8.529

1530

1523

1517.5 – – 12.5 22 22 22 – – – 660 500 660 500

K6 8 80 80 63 63 24 41.5 54 54 17.5 30 1139

2040

2030.5

2023 – – 17 30 30 30 – – – 660 500 660 500

K7 8 100 100 80 80 30 52.5 69 69 22 38 1759

3057

3044

3033 – – 26 45 45 45 – – – 660 660 660 660

K8 8 160 160 125 125 48 83 108 108 35 61 2481.5

4585

4565

4549 – – 32 55 55 55 – – – 660 660 660 660

K9 8 250 250 200 200 75 130 170 170 55 95 34115

60114

6085

6065 – – – – – – – – – 660 660 660 660

Only an example! – Contact your local Square D Sales Office for conditions on Spring Return and Jumper options and pricing.

1

7

2

8

11 129 10

5 63 4

1 6

2 25

5

5

8

3

4

4

9

10

7



185


A complete rotary cam switch consists of: 1) Contact block assembly — see below. 2) Operator/handle — see pages 190 and 191. 3) Legend — see pages 192, 195. 4) Any required accessories — see page 192.

t

Contact local Square D Company sales office for ordering information on base mounting contact block assemblies.

2 and 3 Contacts

Contact SequenceWiring Diagram Switching Angle

Panel Mounting

t

Type

45

°

K2B001S

45

°

K2B001UA

45

°

K2B002AK3B002AK4B002AK5B002AK6B002AK7B002AK8B002AK9B002A

45

°

K2B002GA

45

°

K2B002NA

45

°

K2B002QA

45

°

K2B003T

45

°

K2B004T

45

°

K2B006T

45

°

K22C002LA

45

°

K2C003AK3C003AK4C003AK5C003AK6C003AK7C003AK8C003AK9C003A

45

°

K2C003GA

45

°

K2C003NA

45

°

K2C003QA

45

°

K2C007T

13

24

13

24

13

24

13

24

13

24

13

24

13

24

13

24

13

24

1

5

2

63 4

1

5

2

63 4

1

5

2

63 4

1

5

2

63 4

1

5

2

63 4

1

5

2

63 4

Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 184Contact Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 184Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 190

4 Contacts


Panel Mounting

t

Type

45

°

K2D002S

45

°

K2D002UA

45

°

K2D003LA

45

°

K2D004AK3D004AK4D004AK5D004AK6D004AK7D004AK8D004AK9D004A

45

°

K2D004GA

45

°

K2D004NA

45

°

K2D004QA

30

°

K2D005T

30

°

K2D012GA

45

°

K2D012NA

45

°

K2D012QA

1

7

2

85 63 4

1

7

2

85 63 4

1

7

2

85 63 4

1

7

2

85 63 4

1

7

2

85 63 4

1

7

2

85 63 4

1

7

2

85 63 4

1

7

2

85 63 4

1

7

2

85 63 4

1

7

2

85 63 4

1

7

2

85 63 4




186

11/97

6 And 7 Contacts


Panel Mounting

t

Type

45

°

K2F013GA

45

°

K2F013NA

45

°

K2F013QA

60

°

K2F013UAK3F013UK4F013UK5F013UK6F013UK7F013UK8F013UK9F013U

45

°

K2F022GA

45

°

K2F022NA

45

°

K2F022QA

45

°

K2G007NA

45

°

K2G007QA

45

°

K2G007AK3G007AK4G007AK5G007AK6G007AK7G007AK8G007A

1

11

2

129 10

7 85 6

3 4

1

7

2

8

11 12

9 10

5 63 4

1

11

2

129 10

7 85 6

3 4

1

7

2

8

11 12

9 10

5 63 4

1

7

2

8

11 12

9 10

5 63 4

1

7

2

8

11 12

9 10

5 63 4

1

7

2

8

11 12

9 10

5 63 4

1

7

2

8

13 1411 12

9 10

5 63 4

1

7

2

8

13 1411 12

9 10

5 63 4

1

7

2

8

13 14

11 12

9 10

5 63 4

t


5 and 6 Contacts


Panel Mounting

t

Type

45

°

K2E003WAK3E003WK4E003WK5E003WK6E003WK7E003WK8E003W

45

°

K2E005AK3E005AK4E005AK5E005AK6E005AK7E005AK8E005AK9E005A

45

°

K2E005NA

45

°

K2E005QA

45

°

K2F003SA

45

°

K2F006AK3F006AK4F006AK5F006AK6F006AK7F006AK8F006AK9F006A

45

°

K2F003UAK3F003UK4F003UK5F003UK6F003UK7F003UK8F003UK9F003U

45

°

K2F006NA

45

°

K2F006QA

1

7

2

8

9 10

5 63 4

1

7

2

89 10

5 63 4

1

7

2

8

9 10

5 63 4

1

7

2

8

9 10

5 63 4

1

11

2

129 10

7 85 6

3 4

1

7

2

8

11 12

9 10

5 63 4

1

7

2

8

11 12

9 10

5 63 4

1

7

2

8

11 129 10

5 63 4

1

7

2

8

11 129 10

5 63 4

A complete rotary cam switch consists of: 1) Contact block assembly — see below. 2) Operator/handle — see pages 190 and 191. 3) Legend — see pages 192, 195. 4) Any required accessories — see page 192.

Application Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184Contact Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 190



187


A complete rotary cam switch consists of: 1) Contact block assembly — see below. 2) Operator/handle — see pages 190 and 191. 3) Legend —see pages 192, 195. 4) Any required accessories — see page 192.

8 Contacts


Panel Mounting

t

Type

45

°

K2H004S

45

°

K2H004UAK3H004UAK4H004UAK5H004UAK6H004UAK7H004UAK8H004UA

45

°

K2H008NA

30

°

K2H008QA

45

°

K2H014GA

45

°

K2H014NA

45

°

K2H014QA

45

°

K2H032NA

45

°

K2H032QA

1

15

2

1613 14

11 129 10

7 85 6

3 4

1

15

2

1613 14

11 129 10

7 85 6

3 4

1

7

2

8

15 1613 1411 12

9 10

5 63 4

1

7

2

8

15 1613 1411 12

9 10

5 63 4

1

15

2

1613 14

11 129 10

7 85 6

3 4

1

15

2

1613 14

11 129 10

7 85 6

3 4

1

15

2

1613 14

11 129 10

7 85 6

3 4

1

15

2

1613 14

11 129 10

7 85 6

3 4

1

15

2

1613 14

11 129 10

7 85 6

3 4

t


9 and 10 Contacts


Panel Mounting

t

Type

30

°

K2I009NA

30

°

K2I009QA

45

°

K2I023GA

45

°

K2I023NA

45

°

K2I023QA

45

°

K2K005SA

1

7

2

8

17 18

13 1415 16

11 12

9 10

5 63 4

1

7

2

8

17 18

13 1415 16

11 12

9 10

5 63 4

1

17

2

1815 16

13 14

11 129 10

7 85 6

3 4

1

17

2

1815 16

13 14

11 129 10

7 85 6

3 4

1

17

2

1815 16

13 14

11 129 10

7 85 6

3 4

1

19

2

20

17 1815 16

13 14

11 129 10

7 85 6

3 4

Application Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184Contact Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 190




188

11/97

Class 9003 Type K instrument switches are a specialized form of a control circuit rotary cam switch. These switches have the proper contact sequencesand jumpers to provide measurement of either voltage or amperage of more than one source on one meter.


Description Type

Suggested Operatorand Legend Marking.

See pages 190 –191, 195for other operators.

Wiring Diagram Contact Sequence

VOLTMETERFor reading3 phase toneutral voltageswith off position

K2D023M KBF1C 4-13

VOLTMETERFor reading3 phase to phasevoltageswith off position

K2D024M KBF1C 4-10

K2D1049M KBF1C 4-534

K4D1049M KBF2F4-534

VOLTMETERFor reading1 phase to neutraland 3 phase tophase voltageswith off position

K2E025M KBF1C 4-11

VOLTMETERFor reading3 phase to phasevoltages of twodifferent supplieswith off position

K2H026M KBF1C 4-12

VOLTMETERFor reading3 phase to phaseand 3 phase toneutral voltagesof one supplywith off position

K2F1050MKBF1C 4-14

orKBF1C 4-535

K4F1050M KBF2F4-535

AMMETERFor reading theamperage on threelines using 2 CT'swith off position

K2D1047M KBF1C 4-536

K4D1047M KBF2F4-536

Application Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184Contact Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 190



189


Class 9003 Type K instrument switches are a specialized form of a control circuit rotary cam switch. These switches have the proper contact sequencesand jumpers to provide measurement of either voltage or amperage of more than one source on one meter.


Description Type

t

Suggested Operator and Legend Marking. See pages 190 –191, 195 for other operators. Wiring Diagram Contact Sequence

AMMETER/VOLTMETERReads 3 currenttransformers and3 phase to neutralvoltages. Withoutoff position.

K2K1014M KBF1C 9-14

AMMETER/VOLTMETERReads 3 currenttransformers and3 phase to phasevoltages. Withoutoff position.

K2K1021M KBF1C 9-14

AMMETERReads 3 currenttransformers withoff position.

K2F003M KBF1C 9-4

K2F1051M KBF1C 4-536

K4F1051M KBF2F4-536

AMMETERReads 3 currenttransformers withoutoff position.

K2F013M KBF1C 9-14

AMMETERReads 4 currenttransformers withwith off position.

K2H004M KBF1C 6-2

AMMETERReads 4 currenttransformers withoutoff position.

K2H014M KBF1C 9-5

Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 14-136Contact Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 14-136Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 14-142




190

11/97

t

Key withdrawal codes.When ordering a Key operator for a contact block assembly, the switching angle of the contact block assembly must first be known. From the chart at right, choose the appropriate suffix for the desired switching angle. This suffix is added to the end of the operator/handle's type number.

Example: 45

°

switching for 9003KAB1S KAB1S16

Note: Key is removable in all positions.Replacement Key is Class 9001Z18.

q


The following operators/handles are for the Class 9003 Type K2 Rotary Cam Switches. These are single hole mounting, and are mounted in a 22mm (

7

/

8

inch) diameter mounting hole. All meet protection category IP-65.

Description Style

BlackBezelBlackKnob

ChromeBezelBlackKnob

YellowBezelRed

Knob

Dimensions

q

mm

Bezel – Small square similar to 9001D1 and D2 operators.

Does not includeblank legend plate.

Knob KAB1A KBB1A --

Key

t

KAB1S KBB1S --

Bezel – Small round similarto 9001D3 and D4 operators.

Does not includeblank legend plate.

Knob KAA1A KBA1A --

Key

t

KAA1S KBA1S --

Bezel – Large round.Does not include

blank legend plate.

Knob KAA2B KBA2B KCA2L

Key

t

KAA2S KBA2S --

Bezel – 45 x 45 mm.Includes blanklegend plate.

Knob KAC1B KBC1B KCC1L

Key

t

KAC1S KBC1S --

Bezel – 60 x 60 mm.Includes blanklegend plate.

Knob KAD1C KBD1C KCD1M

Key

t

KAD1S KBD1S --

The following operators/handles are for the Class 9003 Type K2 Rotary Cam Switches with 90˚ switching angle and only two positions.

Description Black BezelBlack Knob

Yellow BezelRed Knob

Dimensionsmm

q

For Size K2-K3Bezel – 60 x 60 mmMounting – 22 mm

(

7

/

8

inch)

Marked 9-30(see page 195).

No other markingsavailable.

KAD1X KCD1Y

Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 192Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 192, 195

Angle Code

30

°

45

°

60

°

90

°

Not Available1616



191


a


The following operators/handles are for 4 hole mounting of the Class 9003 Types K2 through K9 rotary cam switch. They are suitable for panel mounting or base mounting of contact block assemblies. See description below for proper sizing of operators/handles and contact block assemblies. These operators provide protection category IP-40. See page 192 for gaskets.

Description Black LegendBlack Knob

Chrome LegendBlack Knob

Yellow LegendRed Knob

Dimensionsmm

a

Mounting

Includes blankbezel legend

For size K2-K3Bezel 45 x 45 mm KAE1B KBE1B KCE1L

For size K2-K3Bezel 60 x 60 mm KAF1C KBF1C KCF1M

For size K4-K6Bezel 60 x 60 mm KAF2F KBF2F KCF2R

Includes blankbezel legend plate

For size K7-K9Bezel 90 x 90 mm

KAG2G KBG2G KCG2T

KAG2H KBG2H KCG2U

The following operators/handles are for 4 hole mounting of the Class 9003 Types K2 through K9 rotary cam switches with 90˚ switching angle and only two positions.

Description Black OperatorBlack Knob

Yellow OperatorRed Knob

Dimensionsmm

a

Mounting

For size K2-K3Bezel 60 x 60 mm KAF1X KCF1Y

For size K4-K6Bezel 60 x 60 mm KAF2X KCF2Y

For size K4-K9Bezel 90 x 90 mm

KAG2X KCG2Y

Marked 9-30 (see page 195) No other markings available.

Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 192, 195Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 192




192

11/97

Description Type

Shrouds Number ofContacts

For K2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

121620

KZ35KZ36KZ37KZ38KZ39

For K3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

KZ53KZ54

For K4-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

KZ58KZ59

For K6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

KZ59KZ75

For K7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

KZ60KZ61

For K8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

KZ61KZ63

For K9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 KZ64

Ring Nut Wrench –for use with all operators/handles listed on page 190.

9001Z01

Gasket used with operators/handles listed on page 191 to provide IP-65 protection – for panel mounting contact block assemblies.

45 x 45 mm KZ65

60 x 60 mm KZ66

90 x 90 mm KZ67

For small square bezel. See page 190 to determine size of operator.

Holder with blank legend 900101Q

Blank legend only 900101W

Empty holder only 9001Z15

For small round bezel. See page 190 to determine size of operator.

Holder with blank legend 900101R

Blank legend only 900101W

Empty holder only 9001Z16

Replacement ring nut for all operators/handles listed on page 190. KZ30

t

Last letter of the “operator/handle” type number is the “handle code.”

Description Type

For large round bezel. See page 190 to determine size of operators

Holder with blank legend KZ33

Blank legend only 9001 01V

Empty holder only KZ34

Additional legend for 45 x 45 mm bezel opera-tors. See page 190 to determine size of operator.


Blank legend only KZ76


Additional legend for 60 x 60 mm bezel opera-tors. See pages 190-191 to determine size of operator.


Blank legend only KZ77


Blank legend platebezel inserts

Size Color

45 x 4545 x 4545 x 45

60 x 6060 x 6060 x 60

90 x 9090 x 9090 x 90

BlackSilverYellow

BlackSilverYellow

BlackSilverYellow

KZ17KZ18KZ19

KZ20KZ21KZ22

KZ23KZ24KZ25

DescriptionTypeReplacement Knobs

for K2-K3 OperatorsHandleCode

t

Color Length(d)

ABCDLMN

BlackBlackBlackBlackRedRedRed

29 mm34 mm42 mm57 mm34 mm42 mm57 mm

KZ26KZ27KZ28KZ29KZ41KZ42KZ43

FGHRTU

BlackBlackBlackRedRedRed

42 mm57 mm116 mm42 mm57 mm116 mm

KZ44KZ46KZ48KZ45KZ47KZ49

Replacement KnobsK4-K9 Operators



193


Instructions

1. Choose the chart below with the switching angle as determined on thekey sheet. This identifies the angular location and the position numbersfor the various positions of the rotary cam switch.

Zero degrees orstraight up is always position 1.

Use these position numbers whencompleting the target table on page 194.

2. Terminals on the cam switch have the same numbers as the terminalnumbers on the target table.

Contact 1-2 is a single contact.

3. WHEN INDICATING A CONTACT CLOSURE, PLACE “X” WITHINTHE SQUARE AS SHOWN IN THE CONTACT SEQUENCEEXAMPLE AT RIGHT.

Explanation Of Example Below

1. Contact 1-2 is open in all positions but position 2.2. Contact 3-4 is closed from the 2nd through the 4th position. The

contact does not open while switching from one position to another.3. Contacts 5-6 and 7-8 overlap between positions 2 and 3.4. Contact 9-10 is closed in positions 2 and 3. It is open momentarily

while switching between positions 2 and 3.5. Contact 11-12 closes momentarily when switching from position 2 to

position 3. This contact is not closed in position 2 or position 3.6. Position 1 is an off position.

6. Based on the number of contacts, determine the price of the contactblock assembly below. Prices of operators/handles, legendmarkings, and any accessories are listed on their respective page(s).

POSITIONS




194

11/97

To order custom cam switches:

1. Indicate the contact size at right (9003K2-K9).

2. Indicate desired switching angle at right.

If the switching angle is notindicated, the factory will determine the angle from the recom-mended column of the table on right.

3. Per the example on page 193, fill in target table below.

4. Indicate operator/handle type.

5. If operator/handle bezel has legend and legend marking is desired,indicate legend marking on back of this form.

6. If separate legend is required, indicate legend type on right andmarking on back of this form.

See page 184 forTarget Table Explanation

Customer F.O. NO.

Date P.O. Number Qty.

Switching Angle MaximumNumber of Positions

See OrderingInstructions at left

90

°

60

°

45

°

30

°

468

12

2-34-56-7

8-12

Contact size

Switching angle

Operator/Handle type

Separate legend

Class 9003

Class 9003

Class 9003

Type

Type

Type

K

____________

______________

______________

______________

39-40

11-1213-1415-1617-1819-2021-2223-2425-2627-2829-3031-3233-3435-3637-38

9-10

1-2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

3-45-67-8

PositionsTargetTable

TERMINALS

Target TablePositions



195


Standard Markings

The following legend markings are standard for the 45 x 45 mm and60 x 60 mm bezel operators. To order one of these size bezel operators with a standard marking, add the code below of the desired marking as a suffix to the operator type number. Example: 9003 KBC1B 4-3.

1 2

6-1

10

43

2

6-2

HAND AUTO STOP L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

START

STOP START

START

6-6 6-8 6-11 6-12 6-30 6-31 6-32 6-33

10

2

120

10

32

10

02

2

1

210

300

0

10

2

1

2

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

4-57 4-58

L1-NL1-L2

L2-L3L3-L1

HANDAUTO

VOLTMETER VOLTMETER

OFF

4-59 4-534 4-535 4-536

4-21 4-23

HAND AUTOMIN. AUTO

MAX.

4-34 4-38 4-43 4-44 4-51 4-54 4-55 4-56

4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-19 4-20

L1-L2L2-L3L3-L1

0 1

4-1

2

4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10

0 12

3

0 12

3

0

4

12

3

0

45

126

3

0

45

1

1 23

1 23

4

1 23

4

1

5

23

4

1

56

237

4

1

56

2

263

0

45

7 1

374

1 0 0

2

2

3

3 11-

2

2-3

3-1

1OFF

AMMETER

OFF

2 31

56

8 2 012

AUTO0

12

3

L1L2

L3

L1-L2L2-L3L1-L3

L1-NL2-NL3-N

021

10 2 2

1 3

120 1

2

0

1.2

0

L1-L2L2-L3L3-L1

L1-N0

L1-L2L2-L3L3-L1

L1-L2L2-L3L3-L1

0L1-NL2-NL3-N

0L1-NL2-NL3-N

L1-L2L2-L3L3-L1

0

1

2

3

0

9-1

0

9-2 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-10 9-14 9-30

01

3

24 1

0

6-34

0

6-35 6-36 6-37 6-38 6-39

60° Marking

45° Marking

0 1

3-1

10

456 67

832

3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10

30° Marking

90° Marking

1START

L2

L1L3

START

0

12

4

L3

L2

L1

L3

L2

L1

L4 12

10

457

8392

6

10

457

839

10 2

6

10

457

839

1011

21 0 21

567 78

943

21

568

94103

7

21

568

9410

11 3

7

21

568

9410

1112

3

Special Markings

All other legend engraving is considered special. To order, clearlyindicate the position of the desired marking. See below for the maximumcharacters allowed on a specially engraved legend.

Rectangular Legends

Type LegendSize

For OperatorSize

Maximum# CharactersPer Position

900101Q900101R900101W

26 x 19 mm – 7

900101V9003KZ33 37 x 22 mm – 11

9003KZ119003KZ139003KZ76

42 x 13 mm 45 x 45 mm 12

9003KZ159003KZ77 57 x 27 mm 60 x 60 mm 17

Square Legends

Type For BezelSize

LegendSize

Maximum# CharactersPer Position

KZ17KAC1BKAE1BKAC1S

KZ18KZ19KBC1BKBE1B

KBC1SKCC1LKCE1L

45 x 45 mm 42 x 42 mm 3

KZ20KAD1CKAF1CKAF2FKAD1S

KZ21KZ22KBD1CKBF1CKBF2F

KBD1SKCD1MKCF1MKCF2R

60 x 60 mm 57 x 57 mm 5

KZ23KAG2GKAG2H

KZ24KZ25KBG2G

KBG2HKCG2TKCG2U

90 x 90 mm 87 x 87 mm 6

All dimensions in mm. To convert toapproximate inches, divide mm by 25.4.

Positions of engravable locations on blank legends.

Rectangular Legends Square Legends

t

Maximum number of characters for these positions is one (1) less than the listed maximum in the chart above.




196

11/97

With Shrouds

The door interlock mounting radius is the length of the radius between the center of the mounting hole of the operator/handle and the pivot point (hinge) of the panel front.

Contact Block Assembly Depth

Numberof Contacts

K2Length

a

t

mm

K3Length

a

t

mm

K4, K5Length

a

t

mm

K6Length

a

t

mm

K7Length

a

t

mm

K8Length

a

t

mm

K9Length

a

t

mm

1-2 52.5 50.5 58.5 64.5 67.5 77.5 120.5

3-4 62.5 63 74.5 86.5 86.5 106.5 192.5

5-6 72.5 76 90.5 108.5 105.5 135.5 264.5

7-8 82.5 89 106.5 130.5 124.5 164.5 –

9-10 92.5 102 122.5 152.5 143.5 193.5 –

11-12 102.5 115 138.5 174.5 162.5 222.5 –

13-14 112.5

t

Dimension

a

for the 9003K2 is for 4 hole mounting operator/handle. Add 18 mm to dimension a when using single hole mount operator/handles.

15-16 122.5

17-18 132.5

19-20 142.5

mm K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9

b 48 54 85 85 85 111 111 180

c 26 27 40 40 40 50 50 88

Base Mount

Panel Mount

Push Buttons andOperator InterfaceSpecifiers GuideMAGELISTM XBT Message Display andTerminal Products

CONTENTS

Description ....................................................................................................... PageGeneral Information ............................................................................................. 198Features and Characteristics ............................................................................... 202Message Displays - 2 Lines: XBTH ..................................................................... 204Operator Terminals with 2-Line Display: XBTP ................................................... 206Operator Terminals with 2 or 4-Line Displays: XBTE .......................................... 208Message Displays - 1 and 2 Lines: XBTK, XBTM ................................................ 210Operator Terminals with 1-Line Display: XBTA ................................................... 212Software and Accessories ................................................................................... 214XBT Cable Configuration Guidelines ................................................................... 217Compatibility Tables ............................................................................................. 218XBT Software and Environmental Compatibility .................................................. 219Dimensions .......................................................................................................... 220Technical Documentation .................................................................................... 222Communication Protocols for XBTH/P/E ............................................................. 223Selection of Data Exchange Protocol for XBTA/K/M ........................................... 224

198

Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products

© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97

The MAGELiS XBT is a state-of-the-art industrial operator interface product line. It comprises three families—XBTH message displays, XBTP operatorterminals, and XBTE operator terminals—designed for machine builders, panel makers, and end users.From a simple 2 x 20 character display to a 24 function key 4 x 40 character terminal, many flexible solutions are available to meet the customer's needs.MAGELiS XBT products have a unique design—combining good looks, ergonomics, and practicality— providing unsurpassed value in terms of price andperformance. Windows software-based configuration software, simple page concept programming (messages and alarms), and downloadablecommunication protocols make the MAGELiS XBT an outstanding choice for globally accepted, low cost operator interfaces.

MAGELiS Operator Terminals

Offer flexible solutions with a wide range of features.

Maximize access to information through simple keypad prompting.

Allow customization of function keys and front panel.

Utilize downloadable protocols for ease of installation and support.

Provide LCD and fluorescent displays based on cost and performance needs.

MAGELiS Software

Allows design of effective operator messages, prompting, and data entry.

Provides simple WYSIWYG configuration tools, on-line help, and examples.

Benefits designer with integrated alarming and communication setup.

Offer flexible solutions with a wide range of features.

Maximizes development with multi-language support.

Compliments application training with on-line simulation.

MAGELiS XBT operator terminals meet the requirements of the European Machinery Directive for function keys, symbols, icons, alarm handling, andability to structure information. MAGELiS XBT operator terminals carry the CE mark.

European Machinery Directive: 89/655 EEC: Minimum Health and Safety Regulations for the Protection of Machine Operators.Low Voltage Equipment: IEC 947-1, General Electrical Requirements

IEC 947-5, Control Equipment and Switching Devices

Other relevant standards met: IEC 1131, Programmable ControllersIEC 801, Electromagnetic Compatibility for Industrial Control EquipmentIEC 255, Electrical RelaysIEC 529, Degree of Protection Provided by EnclosuresIEC 68, Environmental Testing

UL 508 : Type 4 CSA C22.2 No. 14 : Type 4

199



Square D, Groupe Schneider is pleased to provide you a complete line of rugged message display terminals. This family of display terminals is availableto meet a host of needs by establishing dialog and simplifying data exchanges between the programmable controller and the operator. With featuresranging from simple message readouts to user-programmable function keys, operators may adjust machine parameters through direct communications.

Some of the key features offered as a part of the XBT line are listed below. XBTs have been designed with the industrial environment in mind.

MAGELiS Message Displays, Terminals, and Configuration Software (XBTH, P, and E) Refer to page 204

MAGELiS XBT industrial message displays and operator terminals are suitable to most any automation application. The product lin e can adaptto almost any control system environment—from nano to micro to larger PLC systems of varying brands.

MAGELiS Message Displays:

XBTH: 2-line x 20 characters - Vacuum Fluorescent Type, available with 4 Service Keys, 4 Function Keys, or No Keys.

XBTH: 2-line x 20 characters - LCD Type, available with 4 Service Keys, 4 Function Keys, or No Keys.

Store up to 200 messages.

MAGELiS Operator Terminals:

XBTP: 2-line x 20 characters - Vacuum Fluorescent Type, available with 9 Service Keys, 8 or 12 Function Keys.

XBTP: 2-line x 20 characters - LCD Type, available with 9 Service Keys, 8 or 12 Function Keys.


XBTE: 2-line or 4-line x 40 characters - Vacuum Fluorescent Type, available with 10 Service Keys, 24 Function Keys.

XBTE: 2-line or 4-line x 40 characters - LCD Type, available with 10 Service Keys, 24 Function Keys.


MAGELiS Windows-based Configuration Software:

XBTL1000: Multilingual: English, Spanish, French, German, Italian.

XBTL1***: Downloadable protocols: Modbus®, Uni-Telway, Siemens, etc.

This family of XBT products is configured through a single, Windows® software-based package, reducing your investment and installation costs.

Message Displays (XBTK, XBTM) Refer to page 210

The XBTK and XBTM are Square D's single and two line display units. Display units establish one-way communication between the operatorand the machine. Messages contain machine status or fault indication.

XBTK: 1-Line x 20 1/2-inch characters.

XBTM: 1-Line x 10 1-inch characters, 2-Line x 21 1/2-inch characters.


Operator Terminals (XBTA) Refer to page 212

The XBT-A operator terminal establishes two-way dialog between the operator and the machine for monitoring and adjusting systemparameters.

1-line display of 16 characters.

8-12 Function Keys, 12 Edit Keys, 3 Service Keys.


As you will see, Square D offers a full range of industrial grade message displays and terminals. From the simple display devices through moresophisticated operator terminals, Square D can be your single source supplier for message displays and terminals. For specific ordering informationand pricing, contact your local Square D Field Office.

General Information

200



XBTH/P/E message displays and terminalsavailable :- no operating system- no protocol- no application

+XBTL1000 configuration software used withcompatible PC to:- select the XBT-H/P display unit or terminal- select the protocol used- design an application on screen- simulate the functions with the control system- download the application

+XBTL downloadable communication protocols :- operating system of downloadable products- downloadable applications.

Design:- of application pages- of alarm pages

Configuration:- Windows compatible software- user-friendly- “WYSIWYG” type entry

(what you see is what you get)

Message Displays or terminals:- Automatic execution of commands transmitted

by the PLC

PLC:- Programming communication configured

by dialogue table

Product Line

Communication

Application

XBT-L1000

UTW

Compatible PC

MOD

UNI-TELWAY Siemens Modbus/Jbus

XBTH

+

Pg 2

Pg 1Pg 0

Pg 3

XBTP

Dialog Table

Pg 3TEMPERATURESPEED

Pg 2MAINTENANCE

Pg 0AUTOMATICOPERATION

Pg 1MACHINE ADJUSTMENT

TSX07

+

Design of the XBTH/P/E range of message displays and terminals

XBTP

XBTE

...

ModiconOmron

SIE

General Information

201



Presentation

The XBTH/P/E range of message displays and terminals comprise 3 families of products :

• XBTH display units- Fluorescent or back-lit LCD display- 2 lines of 20 characters- With or without function keys- 128/256 kb Flash EEPROM memory, 200

application pages (approx), 256 available alarmpages

- Optional Printer/Log function

• XBTP terminals- Fluorescent or back-lit LCD display- 2 lines of 20 characters- Function and service keys- 256 kb Flash EEPROM memory, 400 application

pages (approx), 256 available alarm pages- Optional Printer/Log function

• XBTE terminals- Fluorescent or back-lit LCD display- 2 or 4 lines of 40 characters- Function, service and alphanumeric keys- 384 kb Flash EEPROM memory, 800 application

pages (approx), 256 available alarm pages- Optional Printer/Log function

Description

XBTH/P/E message displays and terminals comprise :Front panel :

1 2 indicator LEDs

2 Fluorescent or back-lit LCD display

3 Function keys with LED, and removable,customizable legend

4 Service keys

5 Numeric keys (for XBTP)Alphanumeric keys (for XBTE)

Rear panel :

- Plug-in terminal block for power supply, 3 screwterminals (5.08 mm pitch)

- Serial port, 25-pin female SUB-D connector

- Printer port, 9-pin male SUB-D connector

XBTH

2

5

1

3

4

XBTP

XBTE

General Information

202



Display

Keyboard

Signalling

Memory

Message Displays Operator Terminals

XBTPXBTH

Fluorescent green matrix, (5 x 7 pixelsper character), height 5 mm or LCDbacklit (5 x 7 pixels), height 9 mm.- 2 lines of 20 characters (scrolling to 25).

Fluorescent green matrix, (5 x 7 pixelsper character), height 5 mm or LCDbacklit (5 x 7 pixels), height 9 mm.- 2 lines of 20 characters (scrolling to 25).

Flat membrane keypad with tactilefeedback and 2 mm travel.- 1 version without keys- 4 function keys + 1 service key- 5 service keys

Flat membrane keypad with tactilefeedback and 2 mm travel.- 8 function keys + 9 service keys- 12 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 numeric keys

- 2 system indicator LEDs- 7 service key LEDs- 8-12 function key LEDs

128 kB Flash EEPROM200 application pages256 alarm pages

- 1-2 system indicator LEDs- 0 or 2 service key LEDs- 0 or 4 function key LEDs

128/256 kB Flash EEPROM400 application pages256 alarm pages

Transmission

Real-time clock

Printer

Protocols

RS232/RS485/RS422asynchronous serial link

Access to programmable controllerreal-time clock.

Access to programmable controllerreal-time clock.

RS232 serial link RS232 serial link

UNI-TELWAY/Mod Bus/Siemens UNI-TELWAY/Mod Bus/Siemens


For selection Refer to page 204 Refer to page 206 Refer to page 208

XBTE

Operator Terminals

384 kB Flash EEPROM800 application pages - 2 lines/page256 alarm pages - 2 lines/page400 application pages - 4 lines/page128 alarm pages - 4 lines/page

UNI-TELWAY/Mod Bus/Siemens

RS232 serial link

Incorporated real-time clock.


Fluorescent green matrix, (5 x 7 pixelsper character), height 5 mm or LCDbacklit (5 x 7 pixels), height 9 mm.- 2 lines of 40 characters (scrolling to 25)- 4 lines of 40 characters (scrolling to 25)

Flat membrane keypad with tactilefeedback and 2 mm travel.- 24 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 alphanumeric keys

- 2 system indicator LEDs- 7 service key LEDs- 24 function key LEDs- 1 buzzer

Features and Characteristics

203



14 segment fluorescent green, height10 mm, legible from up to 4 m.- 1 line of 16 alphanumeric characters (scrolling to 32).

3 operator guide inputs(external buttons)

4 system indicator lamps

SRAM with 5 year lithium batterybackup, holding 160 or 180 messagesof 20 characters.

EEPROM cartridge, size 24K:600 messages of 21 charactersLog RAM with backup:100 messages of 21 characters

27 key keypad with tactile feedbackand 2 mm travelNumeric models:- 12 programmable function keys- 12 numeric input keys- 3 service keys.Alphanumeric models:- 27 alphanumeric input keys- Flat 12 key keypad (F1 to F12 with LED) with covering membrane.

EEPROM holding 100 messages of16 characters.

1 buzzer

Operator Terminals

14 segment fluorescent green, height10 mm, legible from up to 4 m.- 1 line of 20 alphanumeric characters (scrolling to 40).

Fluorescent green matrix display(128 x 20 pixels)- 1 line of 10 alphanumeric characters (scrolling to 40) height 20 mm, legible from up to 8 m.- 2 lines of 21 alphanumeric characters (scrolling to 2 x 84) height 10 mm, legible from up to 4 m.

Message Displays

Display

Keyboard

Signalling

Memory

Parallel linkRS 232C/CL 20 mA/RS 422-485 asynchronous serial link

Asynchronous serial link

Built-in and backed up by removablelithium battery.

RS 232C serial link

ASCII/ADJUST/UNI-TELWAY/SYMAX®/MODBUS

ASCII/ADJUST/UNI-TELWAY

Transmission

Real-time clock

Printer

Protocols

For selection Refer to page 210 Refer to page 210 Refer to page 212

XBTK1-line display

XBTA1-line display(keypad with tactile feedback)Compact flush-mounting

XBTM1- or 2-line display(configurable)

Features and Characteristics

204



Type of display unit XBTH0 •2•10 (fluorescent) XBTH0 •1010 (back-lit LCD)

Environment

Conforming to standards IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14 IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14

Product approvals UL File E164866 CSA File LR 44087 UL File E164866 CSA File LR 44087CCN NRAQ Class 2252 01 CCN NRAQ Class 2252 01

Temperature Operation 32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C) 32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)

Storage -40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C) -4 °F to +140 °F (-20 °C to +60 °C)

Degree of protection IP 65, conforming to IEC 529 IP 65, conforming to IEC 529NEMA and UL Type 4 NEMA and UL Type 4

Mechanical characteristics

Type of mounting and fixing Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts(supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 mm thick) (supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 mm thick)

Material Enclosure Polyphenylene oxide with 10% fiberglass (PPO GFN1 SE1)Keypad Anti-UV coated (Autoflex EB AG) hardened polyester

Electrical characteristics

Display Fluorescent green matrix for each character, Back-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels),(5x7 pixels) 2 lines of 20 characters, height 5 mm 2 lines of 20 characters, height 9 mm

Keys - 1 version with no keys (XBTH002010) - 1 version with no keys (XBTH001010)- 4 function keys + 1 service key (XBTH022010) - 4 function keys + 1 service key (XBTH021010)- 5 service keys (XBTH012•10) - 5 service keys (XBTH011010)

Power supply Voltage 24 Vdc 24 Vdc

Voltage limits 18-30 Vdc 18-30 Vdc

Ripple 25 % maximum 25 % maximum

Consumption 10 W 10 W

Operating characteristicsSignalling - 1 LEDs (XBTH002010) - 1 LEDs (XBTH001010)

- 6 LEDs (XBTH022010) - 6 LEDs (XBTH021010)- 4 LEDs (XBTH012•10) - 4 LEDs (XBTH011010)

Memory - 128 kb Flash EEPROM, 256 kb (XBT-H011010) - 128 kb Flash EEPROM, 256 kb (XBT-H011010)- 200 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page - 200 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page- 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page - 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page

Log function Possibility of storing application and/or alarm pages Possibility of storing application and/or alarm pages

Transmission RS 232C/RS 485/RS 422 RS 232C/RS 485/RS 422(asynchronous serial link)

Downloadable protocol Multiple (see page 214) Multiple (see page 214)

Real-time clock Access to PLC real-time clock Access to PLC real-time clock

Printer port RS 232 (XBTH012110) –(asynchronous serial link)Relay – –

Connection Power supply Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block3 terminals 3 terminals

Serial port 25-pin female SUB-D connector 25-pin female SUB-D connector

Printer port 9-pin male SUB-D connector –

Message Displays - 2 Lines: XBTH

205



Display units with 2 lines of 20 characters (fluorescent)Download- Possible Supply Language Number of Reference Weightable links voltage version keysexchangeprotocol Vdc lb (kg)

Refer to No printer 24 Multilingual No keys XBTH002010 1.3 (0.6)page 214 port

No log

4 function keys XBTH022010 1.3 (0.6)1 service key

5 service keys XBTH012010 1.3 (0.6)

Printer 24 Multilingual 5 service keys XBTH012110 1.3 (0.6)portand log

Display units with 2 lines of 20 characters (back-lit LCD)Download- Possible Supply Language Number of Reference Weightable links voltage version keysexchangeprotocol Vdc

lb (kg)

Refer to No printer 24 Multilingual No keys XBTH001010 1.3 (0.6)page 214 port

No log

4 function keys XBTH021010 1.3 (0.6)1 service key

5 service keys XBTH011010 1.3 (0.6)

Documentation (to be ordered separately)

Operating manual (A5 format) for XBTH/P/E XBTX000US 0.4(0.2)(1)

(1) Replace the US at the end of the reference with FR for a documention in French, DE in German, ES in Spanishand 1T in Italian.

XBTH002010

XBTH012010

XBTH001010

XBTH021010

Message Displays - 2 Lines: XBTH

206



Type of terminal XBTP0 •2•10 (fluorescent) XBTP0 •1•10 (back-lit LCD)

Environment







Type of mounting and fixing Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts(supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 mm thick) (supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 mm thick)

Material Enclosure Polyphenylene oxide with 10% fiberglass (PPO GFN1 SE1)

Keypad Anti-UV coated (Autoflex EB AG) hardened polyester


Display Fluorescent green matrix for each character, Back-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels),(5x7 pixels) 2 lines of 20 characters, height 5 mm 2 lines of 20 characters, height 9 mm

Keys - 8 function keys + 9 service keys (XBTP012010) - 8 function keys + 9 service keys (XBTP011010)- 12 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 numeric - 12 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 numeric keys keys(XBTP022•10) (XBTP021•10)





Operating characteristics

Signalling - 17 LEDs (XBTP012010) - 17 LEDs (XBTP011010)- 21 LEDs (XBTP022•10) - 21 LEDs (XBTP021•10)

Memory - 256 kb Flash EEPROM - 256 kb Flash EEPROM- 400 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page - 400 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page- 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page - 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page


Transmission RS 232/RS 485/RS 422 RS 232/RS 485/RS 422(asynchronous serial link)Downloadable protocol Multiple (see page 214) Multiple (see page 214)

Real-time clock Access to PLC real-time clock Access to PLC real-time clock

Printer port RS 232 (XBTP022110) RS 232 (XBTP021110)(asynchronous serial link)Relay – –

Connection Power supply Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block3 terminals 3 terminals


Printer port 9-pin male SUB-D connector 9-pin male SUB-D connector

Operator Terminals with 2-Line Display: XBTP

207



Terminals with 2 lines of 20 characters (fluorescent)Downloadable Number of keys Supply Language Reference Weightexchange Funct. Service Num. voltage versionprotocol Vdc lb (kg)

No printer port, no log

Refer to 8 9 – 24 Multilingual XBTP012010 1.8 (0.8)page 214

12 10 12 24 Multilingual XBTP022010 1.8 (0.8)

With printer port and log

Refer to 12 10 12 24 Multilingual XBTP022110 1.8 (0.8)page 214

Terminals with 2 lines of 20 characters (back-lit LCD)Downloadable Number of keys Supply Language Reference Weightexchange Funct. Service Num. voltage versionprotocol Vdc lb (kg)

No printer port, no log

Refer to 8 9 – 24 Multilingual XBTP011010 1.8 (0.8)page 214

12 10 12 24 Multilingual XBTP021010 1.8 (0.8)


Refer to 12 10 12 24 Multilingual XBTP021110 1.8 (0.8)page 214


Operating manual (A5 format) for XBTH/P/E XBTX000US 0.4 (0.2)(1)

(1) Replace the US at the end of the reference with FR for a documentation in French, DE in German, ES in Spanishand 1T in Italian.

XBTP022010

XBTP021010

Operator Terminals with 2-Line Display: XBTP

208



Type of terminal XBTE014 •10/XBTE016•10 (fluorescent) XBTE013 •10/XBTE015•10 (back-lit LCD)

Environment







Type of mounting and fixing Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts(supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 m thick) (supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 m thick)

Material Enclosure Polyphenylene oxide with 10% fiberglass (PPO GFN1 SE1)

Keypad Anti-UV treated (Autoflex EB AG) hardened polyester


Display Fluorescent green matrix for each character (5x7 pixels) Back-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels),- 2 lines of 40 characters, height 5 mm - 2 lines of 40 characters, height 9 mm- 4 lines of 40 characters, height 5 mm - 4 lines of 40 characters, height 9 mm

Keys - 24 function keys - 24 function keys- 10 service keys - 10 service keys- 12 alphanumeric keys - 12 alphanumeric keys






Signalling - 33 LEDs + 1 buzzer - 33 LEDs + 1 buzzer

Memory - 384 kb Flash EEPROM - 384 kb Flash EEPROM- 800 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page - 800 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page- 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page - 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page- 400 application pages (approx) of 4 lines per page - 400 application pages (approx) of 4 lines per page- 128 available alarm pages of 4 lines per page - 128 available alarm pages of 4 lines per page


Transmission RS 232/RS 485/RS 422 RS 232/RS 485/RS 422(asynchronous serial link)Real-time clock Yes (incorporated) Yes (incorporated)

Printer port RS 232 (XBTE014110/XBTE016110 ) RS 232 (XBTE013110/XBTE015110 )(asynchronous serial link)Relay 0.5 A, 24 Vdc 0.5 A, 24 Vdc

Connection Power supply and Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal blockparallel port 5 terminals 5 terminals


Printer port 9-pin male SUB-D connector 9-pin male SUB-D connector

Operator Terminals with 2 or 4-Line Displays: XBTE

209



Terminals with 2 lines of 40 characters (fluorescent)Downloadable Number of keys Supply Language Reference Weightexchange Funct. Service Alphanum. voltage versionprotocol Vdc lb (kg)No printer port, no log

Refer to 24 10 12 24 Multilingual XBTE014010 2.2 (1.0)page 214



Terminals with 4 lines of 40 characters (fluorescent)

Downloadable Number of keys Supply Language Reference Weightexchange Funct. Service Alphanum. voltage versionprotocol Vdc lb (kg)No printer port, no log




Terminals with 2 lines of 40 characters (back-lit LCD)





Terminals with 4 lines of 40 characters (back-lit LCD)






Operating manual (A5 format) for XBTH/P/E XBTX000US 0.4 (0.2)(1)

(1) Replace the US at the end of the reference with FR for a documentation in French, DE in German, ES in Spanishand 1T in Italian.

XBTE015010

XBTE013010

XBTE016010

XBTE014010

Operator Terminals with 2 or 4-Line Displays: XBTE

210



Type of display unit XBTK XBTM

Environment



Degree of protection IP 65, conforming to IEC 529 IP 65, conforming to IEC 529

Mechanical characteristicsType of mounting and fixing Flush-mounting by 2 retractable fasteners Flush-mounting by 2 retractable fasteners

Enclosure Zinc alloy. Front panel coated with black Zinc alloy. Front panel coated with blacksatin-finish polyurethane paint satin-finish polyurethane paint


Display Fluorescent green, 14 segment Fluorescent green matrix (128 x 20 pixels)- 1 line of 20 characters, height 10 mm - 1 line of 10 characters, height 20 mm

- 2 lines of 21 characters, height 10 mm


Voltage limits 18 to 30 Vdc 18 to 30 Vdc




Visual signalling – 4 system indicator lights

Memory Messages SRAM with 5 year lithium battery backup EEPROM cartridge 160 or 180 messages of 20 chars. (depending on model) 24 K bytes : 600 messages of 21 characters

Log – RAM with lithium battery backup100 messages of 21 characters

Transmission Parallel link Yes Yes

Asynchronous RS 232C/CL 20 mA/RS 422-485 RS 232C/CL 20 mA/RS 422-485serial link

Protocol ASCII/ADJUST/UNI-TELWAY (depending on model) ASCII/ADJUST/UNI-TELWAY

Real-Time Clock – Yes, with lithium battery back-up

Printer link – RS 232C(Asynchronous serial link)Relays – 1 N/O contact (min. 1 mA/5 Vdc, max. 0.5 A/24 Vdc)

Cabling Power supply and Plug-in terminal block Power supply and relays:parallel link 17 screw terminals (5.08 mm pitch) Plug-in terminal block with 5 screw terminals (5.08 mm

pitch)Clamping capacity: 1.5 mm2 Capacity: 1.5 mm2

Parallel link:Plug-in terminal block with 17 screw terminals (5.08 mm pitch)Clamping capacity : 1.5 mm2

Serial link SUB-D 25-pin female connector SUB-D 25-pin female connector

Printer link – SUB-D 9-pin male connector

Message Displays - 1 and 2 Lines: XBTK, XBTM

211



1-line display units (1 x 20 characters)Data Possible links Supply Language Reference Weightexchange voltage versionprotocol VDC lb (kg)

ASCII No printer link 24 Multilanguage XBTK801010 4.2 (1.9)ADJUST No real-time clockUNI-TELWAY

Display units with 1 line (1 x 10 characters) or 2 lines (2 x 21 characters)

ASCII No printer link 24 Multilanguage XBTM801010 5.3 (2.4)ADJUST No real-time clockUNI-TELWAY No operator guide

ASCII With printer link 24 Multilanguage XBTM804110 5.3 (2.4)ADJUSTUNI-TELWAY

Note:XBTM display units are supplied without a TSXMC70E324 EEPROM memory cartridge. Memory cartridges mustbe ordered separately. (Refer to Software and Accessories on page 214).

XBTK801010

XBTM801010

Message Displays - 1 and 2 Lines: XBTK, XBTM

212



Type of terminal XBTA keypad with tactile feedback

Environment

Temperature Operation 32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)

Storage -40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C)

Degree of protection IP 65, conforming to IEC 529.


Type of mounting and fixing Flush-mounting with 4 retractable fasteners

Enclosure Front panel Zinc alloyBlack satin-finish polyurethane paint

Rear cover Zinc alloy

Keypad Function keys 8 to 12 depending on model

Input keys 12

Service keys 3

Alphanumeric keys 26 (alphanumeric model)


Display unit (fluorescent/green 1 line of 16 characters14 segment, height 10 mm)

Power supply Voltage 24 Vdc

Voltage limits 18 to 30 Vdc (ripple 25 %)

Consumption 10 W


Signalling Visual 0 or 4 user indicator lights (depending on model)

Audible 1 buzzer

Memory Messages EEPROM:100 messages of 16 characters

Transmission Asynchronous RS 232C/CL 20 mA/RS 422-485serial link

Protocol ASCII/ADJUST/UNI-TELWAY/SYMAX/MODBUS

Real-time clock –

Printer link –

Connection Power supply Plug-in terminal block3 screw terminals (5.08 mm pitch)Clamping capacity: 1.5 mm2

Serial link SUB-D 25-pin female connector

Printer link –

Operator Terminals with 1-Line Display: XBTA

213



Flush-mounting compact terminals, keypad with tactile feedbackData Function keys Supply Language Reference Weightexchange Number Marked voltage versionprotocol Vdc lb (kg)ASCIIADJUST 12 F1 to F12 24 Multilanguage XBTA801010 4.3 (1.95)UNI-TELWAY without LED

Legend-plate 24 Multilanguage XBTA811010 4.3 (1.95)carrier

12 with LED Legend-plate 24 Multilanguage XBTA821010 4.3 (1.95)carrier

8+4 indicator Legend-plate 24 Multilanguage XBTA831010 4.3 (1.95)lights carrier

SY/MAX

12 F1 to F12 24 Multilanguage XBTA301010 4.3 (1.95)without LED



ModBus/JBus 12 F1 to F12 24 Multilanguage XBTA401010 4.3 (1.95)

without LED



XBTA801010

Operator Terminals with 1-Line Display: XBTA

214



XBTL software (1)

Description Compatibility Language Operating Reference Weightversion system lb (kg)

Configuration XBT•3 Multilingual (2) DOS XBTL100 1.4 (0.65)and terminal XBT•7/•8 Multilingual Windows XBTL900 1.4 (0.65)software DOS XBTL100 1.4 (0.65)

XBT•4 Multilingual Windows XBTL900 1.4 (0.65)DOS XBTL400 1.4 (0.65)

XBT•4/•7/•8 Multilingual X-TEL (V4 and V5)XBTL940 1.4 (0.65)

Configuration software XBTH/P/E Multilingual Windows XBTL1000 1.4 (0.65)for display unitsand terminals(1) XBTL software is supplied in an A5 box including a user's guide and one or two installation diskettes : one 5“1/4and one 3“1/2 (XBTL900), one 3"1/2 (XBTL940/L1000). (2) English, Spanish, French, German, Italian.

Downloadable protocols (for use with XBTL1000 software)Type of protocol Compatibility Reference WeightAllen-Bradley XBTH/P/E XBTL1AB01 lb (kg)Omron XBTH/P/E XBTL1OMR01UNI-TELWAY XBTH/P/E XBTL1UTW01 1.4 (0.65)Modbus XBTH/P/E XBTL1MOD01 1.4 (0.65)Siemens XBTH/P/E XBTL1SIE01 1.4( 0.65)

InterfacesConnection Link Compatibility Mounting Reference Weight

rail lb (kg)

Screw terminals CL/CL Any XBT " XBTZ9011 0.3 (0.12)' XBTZ9012 0.3 (0.12)

CL/RS 232C or Any XBT " XBTZ961 0.3 (0.12)RS 232C/CL

SUB-D connector CL/RS 232C XBTKL/KN/ML XBTZ939 0.1 (0.04)25-pin/25-pin

DC power supplyInput voltage Supply voltage Compatibility Reference Weight

lb (kg)24 Vdc/1 A Any XBT TBXSUP10 0.1 (0.04)

100-240 Vac

24 Vdc/320 mA Any XBT 8440 PS24 0.1 (0.04)

EEPROM memory cartridgesSize Compatibility Reference Weight

lb (kg)

4 Kb XBTKN/M/ML XBTZ800004 0.1 (0.04)

16 Kb XBTKN/M XBTZ800016 0.1 (0.04)

24 Kb XBTKN/M/TSX 17 TSXMC70E324 0.1 (0.04)

56 Kb XBTKN/M XBTZ800056 0.1 (0.04)

88 Kb XBTKN/M XBTZ800088 0.1 (0.04)

120 Kb XBTKN/M XBTZ800120 0.1 (0.04)

Lithium batteryUse Compatibility Reference Weight

lb (kg)

For real-time clock back-up XBTKN/M/TSX 17 TSX17ACC1 0.04 ( 0.02)

XBTL1000

PS24

XBTZ800016

Software and Accessories

215



Connection cables for XBTH/P/EPort Transmission Connection Compatibility Length Catalog numberRS 232C PC/PS 9-pin (male) Any XBT (3) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ915

programming 25-pin (female) Any XBT (3) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ90525-pin (male) Any XBT (3) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ9052

ASCII – Any XBT (1) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ905Serial printer Any XBT (1) 16.4 (5) XBTZ936XBT/XBTZ961 Any XBT (1) 6.6 (2) XBTZ933

Current loop ASCII – Any XBT 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ906RS 485 UNI-TELWAY TSXSCA 62 Any XBT (1) 5.9 (1.8) XBTZ908

TSXSCM 21•6 Any XBT (1) 16.4 (5) XBTZ918TSXP•••425 Any XBT (1) 16.4 (5) XBTZ948TSXSCG 1161 Any XBT (1) 16.4 (5) XBTZ928TSX17 XBTH/P/E 16.4 (5) XBTZ958

Plug TSX07/37 Any XBT (1) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ968(1) Including XBTH/P/E terminals(2) XBTH/P/E in UNI-TELWAY master function.(3) For XBTH/P/E in version V2.2.

Cables for Open Protocol for XBTH/P/EPort/Transmission Connection Compatibility Length Catalog numberRS 232/RS 485 25-pin (male)-RJ45 XBTH/P/E 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ915RS 232 25-pin male-5 pin XBTH/P/E 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ909

male

SUB-D Adaptors for Open ProtocolAdaptor Connection Compatibility Catalog numberFemale adaptor RJ45-25 pin female XBTZ900 XGVSZ2510Female adaptor RJ45-9 pin female XBTZ900 XGVSZ0910Male adaptor RJ45-9 pin male XBTZ900 XGVSZ0920Male adaptor RJ45-15 pin male XBTZ900 XGVSZ1520Male adaptor RJ45-25 pin male XBTZ900 XGVSZ2520RS232/Current Loop 25 pinmale-25 pin XBTZ939 XBTZ939

female

Cables for ModBus ProtocolPort/Transmission Connection Compatibility Length Catalog numberRS 232/RS 485 RJ45-RJ45 XBTH/P/E 3 (.91) 110XCA28201RS 232/RS 485 RJ45-RJ45 XBTH/P/E 6 (1.8) 110XCA28202RS 232/RS 485 RJ45-RJ45 XBTH/P/E 12 (3.6) 110XCA28203

SUB-D Adaptors for ModBus ProtocolAdaptor Connection Compatibility Catalog numberMale adaptor RJ45-9 pin 9male XBTH/P/E 110XCA20301Female adaptor RJ45-9 pin female XBTH/P/E 110XCA20302Male adaptor RJ45-25 pin male XBTH/P/E 110XCA20401Female adaptor RJ45-25 pin female XBTH/P/E 110XCA20402 feet (meters)

InterfacesConnection Link Compatibility Mounting rail Catalog numberDual port connection UNI-TELWAY TSX07/37 – TSXPACC01Simulation RS 485/RS 232 TSX07/37 – TFTXCBP025

converterCurrent Loop CL/RS 232C or Any XBT – XBTZ961

RS 232C/CLSUB-D connector CL/RS 232C XBTH/P/E – XBTZ93925-pin/25-pin


216



Connection cables for XBTA/K/MPort Trans- Connection Compatibility Length Reference Weight

mission ft (m) lb (kg)RS 232C PC/PS 9-pin (male) Any XBT (4) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ915 0.4 (0.2)

25-pin (female) Any XBT (1) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ905 0.4 (0.21)

25-pin (male) Any XBT (1) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ9052 0.4 (0.21)

ASCII – Any XBT (1) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ905 0.4 (0.21)

Serialprinter XBTM 16.4 (5) XBTZ936 0.4 (0.2)

XBT/XBTZ961 Any XBT (1) 6.6 (2) XBTZ933 0.4 (0.2)

XBT/SYMAX Any XBT 8.2 (2.5) 8010CC108 0.4 (0.2)

Current ASCII – Any XBT 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ906 0.4 (0.21)loop

ADJUST TSX47-40 Any XBT (2) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ902 0.4 (0.21)

RS 485 UNI- TSXSCA62 Any XBT (1) 5.9 (1.8) XBTZ908 0.5 (0.24)TELWAY

TSXSCM 21•6 Any XBT (1) 16.4 (5) XBTZ918 0.5 (0.23)

TSXP•••425 Any XBT (1) 16.4 (5) XBTZ948 0.5 (0.23)

TSXSCG 1161 Any XBT (1) 16.4 (5) XBTZ928 0.5 (0.24)

TSX17 XBTH/P/E (3) 16.4 (5) XBTZ958 0.5 (0.24)

ADJUST TSX17 Any XBT (1) 16.4 (5) XBTZ917 0.5 (0.21)

1.6 (0.5) XBTZ9171 0.5 (0.21)

Plug TSX07/37 Any XBT (1) 0.8 (0.25) XBTZ968 0.4 (0.18)

Function key labelsColor Number Use with Number Reference Weight

of sheets of labels lb (kg)Grey 1 XBTH02•010 12 XBLYH4 0.2 (0.1)

XBTP01•010 24 XBLYP8 0.2 (0.1)XBTP02••10 24 XBLYP12 0.2 (0.1)XBTE01••10 32 XBLYE24 0.2 (0.1)

(1) Including XBTH/P/E terminals.(2) Add the XBTZ939 module for XBTKL/KN/ML.(3) XBTH/P/E in UNI-TELWAY master function.(4) For XBTH/P/E in version V2.2.

XBTZ902

XBTZ928


217



TSX 17

XBTM

FTX417FTX507

25-pin(male)

25-pin(female)

9-pin(male)

PC RS 232

TSX07

TSXSCG1161

TSX17

TSXSCA 62

TSXP•••425 + TSXLES 64

TSXSCM 21•6TSX47-40

Printer

ADJUST

ASCII

UNI-TELWAY

ASCII

ASCII

ASCII

UNI-TELWAY

UNI-TELWAY

ADJUST

UNI-TELWAY

UNI-TELWAY

UNI-TELWAY

tsx07 Te

Serial

XBT Cable Configuration Guidelines

Cables for connecting XBT terminals and devices/peripherals

Devices Protocols Connecting cables

XBT XBT XBT XBT XBT XBT XBT XBT- XBT XBT XBTZ902 Z905 Z9052 Z908 Z915 Z917 Z918 Z928 Z948 Z968 Z958(1) (2)

Peripherals Links Connecting cables

XBTZ936

Connecting cables to be used. Example : XBTZ917 cable to connect TSX17 (ADJUST) PLC with XBT

(1) Add XBTZ939 module (20 mA current loop/RS 232C interface) for XBTKL/KN/ML(2) XBTH/P/E in UNI-TELWAY master function.

218



Compatibility Table for Protocols/Cables for MAGELiSTM

PLC PLC Model Connection XBT Status Protocol Protocol Name Type of Type of CableSeries Type (Part Number) to Install Physical Layer Connection PLCTELE TSX07 Terminal Port Slave XBTL1UTW01 Unitelway 2.0 RS 485 DIN XBTZ968

TSX37 Terminal Port Slave XBTL1UTW01 Unitelway 2.0 RS 485 DIN XBTZ968TSX37 Terminal Port+SCA Slave XBTL1UTW01 Unitelway 2.0 RS 485 DIN XBTZ968+SCA62+ACC01TSX37 + PCMCIA Terminal Port+SCA Slave XBTL1UTW01 Unitelway 2.0 RS 485 DIN XBTZ908+SCA62TSX17 Terminal Port Master XBTL1UTW01 Unitelway 1.0 RS 485 SUB-D XBTZ958TSX17 TSXSCG 1161 Slave XBTL1UTW01 Unitelway 1.0 RS 485 SUB-D XBTZ928TSX Series 7 TSXP...425 Slave XBTL1UTW01 Unitelway 1.0 RS 485 SUB-D XBTZ948

+TSXLES 64TSX Series 7 TSXSCA 62 Slave XBTL1UTW01 Unitelway 1.0 RS 485 SUB-D XBTZ908TSX Series 7 TSXSCM 21.6 Slave XBTL1UTW01 Unitelway 1.0 RS 485 SUB-D XBTZ918

MODICON MICRO COMM 1 Master XBTL1MOD01 MODBUS RS 232 RJ 45 XBTZ900+XGVSZ+Adapt.MODICON 984 984 ModBus Port Master XBTL1MOD01 MODBUS RS 232 SUB-D 25 male XBTZ900+XGVSZ0910QUANTUM ModBus Port Master XBTL1MOD01 MODBUS RS 232 SUB-D 25 male XBTZ900+XGVSZ0910

SIEMENS S5-90U Terminal Port – XBTL1SIE01 AS511 Current Loop SUB-D 15 female XBTZ939+XBTZ909S5-95U Port communication – XBTL1SIE01 3964R RS 232 SUB-D 15 female XBTZ900+XGVSZ1520S5-95U Terminal Port – XBTL1SIE01 AS511 Current Loop SUB-D 15 female XBTZ939+XBTZ909S5-105U Module – XBTL1SIE01 3964R RS 232 SUB-D 25 female XBTZ900+XGVSZ2520S5-105U Terminal Port – XBTL1SIE01 AS511 Current Loop SUB-D 15 female XBTZ939+XBTZ909S5-115U Module – XBTL1SIE01 3964R RS 232 SUB-D 25 female XBTZ900+XGVSZ2520S5-115U Terminal Port – XBTL1SIE01 AS511 Current Loop SUB-D 15 female XBTZ939+XBTZ909S5-135U Module – XBTL1SIE01 3964R RS 232 SUB-D 25 female XBTZ900+XGVSZ2520S5-135U Terminal Port – XBTL1SIE01 AS511 Current Loop SUB-D 15 female XBTZ939+XBTZ909

ALLEN SLC500 Terminal Port Master XBTL1AB01 DF1 RS 232 SUB-D 9 male XBTZ900+XGVSZ0910BRADLEY

PLC5 Terminal Port – XBTL1AB01 DF1 RS 232 SUB-D 25 female XBTZ900+XGVSZ2520

OMRON COM1 Terminal Port Master XBTL1OMR01 SYSMAC RS 232 SUB-D 9 female XBTZ900+XGVSZ0920C200Hx Terminal Port Master XBTL1OMR01 SYSMAC RS 232 SUB-D 9 female XBTZ900+XGVSZ0920CV Terminal Port Master XBTL1OMR01 SYSMAC RS 232 SUB-D 9 female XBTZ900+XGVSZ0920

Chemical Compatibility Table for MAGELiSTM

Resistance of Chemical Agents Concentration Temperature Enclosure KeypadPolyester

PPO • PET ••ACIDS

Nitric Acid 10% +20 °C S LSulfuric Acid 50% +20 °C S NCitric Acid 10% +20 °C S S

Chloric Acid 50% +20 °C S SALCOHOLS

Ethanol 100% +20 °C S SGlycol 100% +20 °C ? S

Methanol 100% +20 °C L LHYDROCARBONS

Hexan 100% +20 °C S SGasoline, Fuels 100% +20 °C N S

Grease 100% +20 °C S SHydraulic Oils 100% +20 °C S SCutting Oils 100% +20 °C S SSOLVENTS

Trichlorethylene 100% +20 °C N LTrichlorethane 100% +20 °C N L

Acetone 100% +20 °C N LWhite Spirits 100% +20 °C L S

AGRO-CULTURAL PRODUCTSVegetable Oils 100% +20 °C S SAnimals Fats 100% +20 °C L SFruit Juices 100% +20 °C ? ?

Milk (Lactic Acid) 100% +20 °C S SS: Satisfactory for the temperature indicatedL: Limited for the temperature indicatedN: Non-satisfactory?: Unknown, testing required• Polyphenylene oxide with 10% fiberglass (PPO GFN1 SE1)•• Anti-UV coated (Autoflex EB AG) hardened polyester

Compatibility Tables

219



XBT Software and Environmental Compatibility

XBT software/XBT terminal compatibility

Terminal Software

XBTL100 XBTL100 XBTL100 XBTL100 XBTL400 XBTL400 XBTL900 XBTL900 XBTL940 XBTV1.0 V2.1 V2.2 V2.3 V1.1 V1.2 V ≤ 1.2 V ≥ 1.3 V1.1 L1000and V1.1 (DOS, (DOS, (OS/2, (DOS,

Windows) Windows) X-TEL) Window)

XBTA7/K7/KL7

XBTA8

XBTA3

XBTA4

XBTM/ML

XBTKN

XBTH/P/E

Compatible

XBT environmental compatibility

The XBTA series of flat keyboards with covering membrane has been subjected to trials in collaboration withDIVERSEY and HENKEL HYGIENE, whose detergents and disinfectant products are commonly used in the agri-foodstuffs industry.Under normal conditions of use, the XBTA series of flat keyboards with covering membrane suffered no ill-effects after200 hours being immersed in the following products :

DIVERSEY detergent and disinfectant productsSEPTINEIGE PLUS Self-lathering disinfecting neutral detergent, 1 to 4% and 20 °C.DIVOSAN MEZZO Broad spectrum oxidizing acid disinfectant, 0.5% and 20 °C.DILAC NEIGE Self-lathering acid detergent, 3 to 5% and 20 °C.DIVONEIGE ML Self-lathering mild alkaline detergent, 2 to 5% and 20 °C.CHLORINEIGE 400 Chlorinated self-lathering alkaline detergent, 1 to 5% and 20 °C.

HENKEL HYGIENE detergent and disinfectant productsP3 - FORMAKLAR Broad spectrum non-oxidizing neutral disinfectant, tested at 4 % and 20 °C.P3 - OXONIA ACTIF Strong oxidizing disinfectant, tested at 0.5% and 20 °C.P3 - TOPAX M ACIDE Self-lathering acid disinfectant, tested at 2% and 40 °C.P3 - TOPAX M 55 Chlorinated self-lathering disinfecting alkaline detergent, tested at 5 % and 50 °C.P3 - HOROLITH M Self-lathering acid detergent, tested at 5% and 20 °C.

220



Message displayXBTH

± 0.5 mm

Operator terminalXBTP

± 0.5 mm

Operator terminalXBTE

Dimensions Inches mm

10.5264

0.49.20.3

70.37

7.2

182.

5

0.513

2.3

58

11.6292

820

2.5

+1

-1

MOD

ESC MENU

HOME SYST

ALARM

ENTERSHIFT

PRINT

DEL 7 8 9

ABC DEF GHI

+/± 0 ∑

1 2 3

STU VWX YZ

4 5 6

JKL MNO PQR

0.718.8

7.3183.8

2 50

0.512.4

0.35.9

ENTER

8202

4 102

0.37

3.6

89.6

0.36.2

0.36.2

7.953(202)

7.28(185)

4.016(102)

3.58(91)

.335(8.5) .335

(8.5)

.217(5.5)

1.96(50)

Depth =

in(mm)

CUT-OUT

.472(12)

10(253)

6(152)

5.295(134.5)

.315(8) .374

(9.5)

.217(5.5)

2.18(55)

Depth =

9.308(235.5)

.472(12)

CUT-OUT

7.953

7.244(184)

(8.5) .709(18)

.236(6)

2.28(58)

Depth =

in(mm)

CUT-OUT

.472(12)

11.496(292)

10.453(265.5)

(202)

.335

Dimensions

± 0.5 mm

+1

-1

MOD

ESC MENU

HOME SYST

ALARM

ENTERSHIFT

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

+/- 0 .

DEL

PRINT

10253

6 152

9.3234.5

0.38.5

0.410

2.2

55.4

0.37.1

5.3

133.

3

0.512.5

0.36.2

221



Message displays

XBTK XBTM

(1) Dimensions for support cut-out: (1) Dimensions for support cut-out:276 x 61.5 ±0.5 mm(10.87 x 2.42 ± 0.02 in) 275.5 x 88.5 ± 0.5 mm.(10.85 x 3.48 ± 0.02 in)

(2) Support thickness: from 1.5 to 6 mm. (0.06 to 0.24 in.) (2) Support thickness: from 1.5 to 6 mm. (0.06 to 0.24 in)Terminals

XBTA

(1) Dimensions for support cut-out: 231 x 145.5 ± 0.5 mm. (9.09 x 5.73 ± 0.02 in)(2) Support thickness: 10 mm (0.39 in)

Dimensions Inches mm

Dimensions

222



Type Language ASCII + ADJUST UNI-TELWAY MULTI-PROTOCOL

XBTH/P/E French XBTX000FRterminals German XBTX000DE

English XBTX000USSpanish XBTX000ESItalian XBTX000IT

XBTK French XBTXK700F XBTXK800Fmessage displays German XBTXK700D XBTXK800D

English XBTXK700E XBTXK800ESpanish XBTXK700S XBTXK800SItalian XBTXK700T XBTXK800T

XBTM French XBTXM800Fmessage displays German XBTXM800D

English XBTXM800ESpanish XBTXM800SItalian XBTXM800T

XBTA French XBTX63255 XBTXA800Fterminals German XBTX63257 XBTXA800D

English XBTX63256 XBTXA800ESpanish XBTX63258 XBTXA800SItalian XBTX63259 XBTXA800T

XBT Terminal French XBTXD800 FRUtilization German XBTXD800 DEHandbook English XBTXD800 EN

Spanish XBTXD800 ESItalian XBTXD800 1T

XBT installation bulletins supplied with the product are in English. If additional technical manuals or specific catalogs areneeded, they may be purchased separately.

For specific ordering information and pricing regarding the products shown in this catalog, contact your localSquare D Field Office.

Technical Documentation

223



Downloadableprotocol

TSX07 XBTH

Downloadableprotocol

XBTP

Control system architecturesBy remotely downloading protocols from a variety of manufacturers, MAGELiS terminals can easily be integrated with many popular PLCs. Remoteloading of protocols also provides:

minimum stock with maximum effectiveness.

convenient updating of installed base of products and protocols as new versions are introduced.

point-to-point or multidrop PLC communication.

MachineControlLevel 1

• Programmable controllers

• Numerical controllers

• Workshop terminals(factory floor programming)

• Inter-product communication

• Operator interface

SupervisionLevel 2

Single Machine

UNI-TELWAY busTSX7

XBTE

XBTH

TSX17

XBTP

Dow

nloa

dabl

e

prot

ocol

Factory network

ETHERNET/ETHWAY/FIPWAY/…networks

Third party PLC

Modicon

Communication Protocols for XBTH/P/E

224



Selection ofdata exchangeprotocol

ADJUST protocol

Serial link Point-to-point data exchange

protocol with TSX7® PLCs.

Using the XBT terminal with TSX7 PLCs. Connect to the terminal port of the

TSX7 PLC (no special board in thePLC).

Direct access to the TSX7 PLCvariables. The PLC program is veryreduced or non-existent.

ASCII protocol

Serial link Universal data exchange protocol

compatible with SY/MAX PLCs.

Using the XBT terminal with a Serial Link Connect to any programmable

control system which has a seriallink, including SY/MAXprogrammable controllers.

Parallel link (24 V)

Using parallel connected messagedisplays Connect to any hard wired or

programmable control system. No special board required.

UNI-TE protocol

Serial link Multi-station UNI-TE data exchange

protocol.

Using the XBT terminal in a multi-stationnetwork architecture. Automatic data exchanges with

numerous Telemecanique devices:- variable speed controller- weighing system- numerical controller

Direct access to the device variables.The PLC program is very reduced ornon-existent.

UNI-TELWAY

Selection of Data Exchange Protocol for XBTA/K/M

225



Declaration of Conformity

MANUFACTURER’SDECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

INDUSTRIAL CONTROL BUSINESS UNITMan-Machine Dialogue Activity ManagementWE: SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC SA

40, Avenue A.Morizet92100 Boulogne-BillancourtFRANCE

declare under our own responsibility that the products(s):

TRADEMARK: TELEMECANIQUENAME, TYPE:

Display units

MODELS: XBT-K, -KL, -M,-KN, -HL, -HNAME, TYPE:

Operator dialogue terminals with keypad LEDs

MODELS: XBT-BBNAME, TYPE:

Operator dialogue terminals

MODELS: XBT-A, -E, -PNAME, TYPE:

Operator dialogue terminals

MODELS: XBT-VA, -VM

to which this declaration refers conform to :

STANDARDS OR NORMATIVE DOCUMENTS:

Low-voltage Switchgear and Controlgear,General rules IEC 947-1 (EN60947-1)Programmable controllers IEC 1131Electromagnetic compatibility EN 50081-2

Subject to installation, maintenance and use conforming to its (their) intended purpose, to the applicable regulations and standards, to the supplier’s instructions and to standard practice,the products conform to the requirements of the applicable European Directives:

Low-voltage Directive N

°

73/23/EECEMC Directive N

°

89/336/EEC

The CE mark on the products and/or their packaging signifies that Schneider Electric holds thereference technical file available to the European Union authorities.

Done at ANGOULEME : 28 November 1995 Authorized Signatory

Name: Xavier Robineau BourgneufTitle: DHM Activity DirectorSignature:

ALL DISTRIBUTION OR REPRODUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION IS FORBIDDEN.




226

11/97


INDUSTRIAL CONTROL BUSINESS UNITMan-Machine Dialogue Activity ManagementWE: SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC SA

40, Avenue A.Morizet92100 Boulogne-BillancourtFRANCE

declare under our own responsibility that the products(s):

TRADEMARK: TELEMECANIQUENAME, TYPE:

Pushbuttons and pilot lights

MODELS: XB2-B.., ZA2-B.., XB2-M.., Domino, XB2-E.., XVL...NAME, TYPE:

Control Stations

MODELS: XAL-.., XAP-..NAME, TYPE:

Rotary switches

MODELS: XBC-D.., K1.., K2..NAME, TYPE:

Illuminated indicator bank

MODELS: XVA..

to which this declaration refers conform to :

STANDARDS OR NORMATIVE DOCUMENTS:

Low-voltage Switchgear and Controlgear,General rules IEC 947-1 (EN60947-1)Electromechanical control circuit devices IEC 947-5-1 (EN60947-5-1)

Subject to installation, maintenance and use conforming to its (their) intended purpose, to the applicable regulations and standards, to the supplier’s instructions and to standard practice,the products conform to the requirements of the applicable European Directives:

Low-voltage Directive N

°

73/23/EECEMC Directive N

°

89/336/EEC

The CE mark on the products and/or their packaging signifies that Schneider Electric holds thereference technical file available to the European Union authorities.

Done at ANGOULEME : 28 November 1995 Authorized Signatory

Name: Xavier Robineau BourgneufTitle: DHM Activity DirectorSignature:

ALL DISTRIBUTION OR REPRODUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION IS FORBIDDEN.

227




DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

We, Schneider Limited, Cheney Manor, Swindon, Wiltshire, SN2 2QG.

declare that the product range:-

Square D Class 9001 Type T Push Buttons,

Selector Switches, Pilot Lights and Contact Blocks.

Provided that the said products are installed, maintained and used in the application for which they were made, in accordance withcurrently accepted professional practices, relevant installation standards and manufacturer’s instructions,

complies with the provisions of Council Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EECAmendment 1 93/68/EEC

EMC Directive 89/336/EECAmendments 91/263/EEC

92/31/EEC93/68/EEC

The above product is in conformity with the following standards:

BS EN 60947-1Underwriters Laboratory UL 508

National Electrical Manufacturers Association ICS 1 and ICS 2Canadian Standards Association C22.2 No. 142-M1987

Additional information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . if required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The CE Marking regarding the Low Voltage Directive was first affixed to the product type in 95.

Name . . . . . . . . J FRENEHARD ....................................

Function . . . . . . Director Industrial Controls ...................




228

11/97

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

We, Schneider Limited, Cheney Manor, Swindon, Wiltshire, SN2 2QG.

declare that the product range:-

Square D Class 9001 Type TY and KY Enclosures

Provided that the said products are installed, maintained and used in the application for which they were made, in accordance withcurrently accepted professional practices, relevant installation standards and manufacturer’s instructions,

complies with the provisions of Council Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EECAmendment 1 93/68/EEC

The above product is in conformity with the following standards:

BS EN 60947-1Underwriters Laboratory UL 508

National Electrical Manufacturers Association ICS 1 and ICS 2Canadian Standards Association C22.2 No. 142-M1987

Additional information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .if required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The CE Marking regarding the Low Voltage Directive was first affixed to the product type in 95.

Name. . . . . . . . . J FRENEHARD.....................................

Function. . . . . . . Director Industrial Controls ...................

229





WE: Square D Company

128 Bingham Road

Asheville, NC 28802

Declare that the products:

BRAND: SquareDNAME, TYPE: Class 9001, Type KM, KMF, “Light Modules”

“ “ , Type KA, “Contact Blocks”“ “ , Type K, KX, SK, SKRU, “30 mm Operators”“ “ , Type BW, SKYP “Pendant Stations”

Class 9002, Type AW, “Foot Switches”

To which this declaration refers are in conformity with:

The following Standards or Normative Documents:

- General rules: EN60947.1- Electromechanical control circuit devices: EN60947.5.1

subject to installation, maintenance and utilization in accordance with their purpose, regulations, current standards, manufacturer’s instructions and industry standards.

Meet the provisions of the following Directives:

No. 73/23/CCE of

February 19, 1973, named Low-voltage Directive, modified by Directive 93/68/E

C

of July 22, 1993.

No. 89/336/CEE of May 3, 1989, named Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive,modified by Directives 92/31/CEE of April 28, 1992 and 93/68/CEE of July 22, 1993.

The CE marking on the product and/or the packaging signifies that Square D holds thereference technical file available to the European Authorities.

Executed at Raleigh:

October 22, 1997

Authorized Signature:

Name: Neil TollasPosition: Director, Logic ControlSignature:




230

11/97


WE: Square D Company

128 Bingham Road

Asheville, NC 28802

Declare that the products:

BRAND: TelemecaniqueNAME, TYPE: XVA LED LAMPSMODELS: XVAD•••B120, XVAD•••C024

To which this declaration refers are in conformity with:

The following Standards or Normative Documents:

- General rules: EN60947.1- Electromechanical control circuit devices: EN60947.5.1

subject to installation, maintenance and utilization in accordance with their purpose, regulations, current standards, manufacturer’s instructions and industry standards.

Meet the provisions of the following Directives:

No. 73/23/CCE of

February 19, 1973, named Low-voltage Directive, modified by Directive 93/68/E

C

of July 22, 1993.

No. 89/336/CEE of May 3, 1989, named Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive,modified by Directives 92/31/CEE of April 28, 1992 and 93/68/CEE of July 22, 1993.

The CE marking on the product and/or the packaging signifies that Square D holds thereference technical file available to the European Authorities.

Executed at Raleigh:

April 10, 1997

Authorized Signature:

Name: Neil TollasPosition: Director, Logic ControlSignature:

231




NOTES:

Catalog No. 9001CT9701 November 1997 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved.

Square D and are registered trademarks of Square D Company.

Square D CompanyP.O. Box 27446Raleigh, N.C. 27611, USA

Schneider Canada6675 Rexwood RoadMississauga, Ontario L4V 1V1

www.squared.com

O/S2

is a registered trademark of IBM Corporationand are registered trademarks of Underwriters Laboratoryis a registered trademark of Canadian Standard Association

Windows

is a registered trademark of the Microsoft CorporationModbus

is a registered trademark of AEG Schneider Automation Inc.SY/MAX

is a registered trademark of AEG Schneider Automation Inc.MAGELiS

is a trademark of Schneider Electric SAUNI-TELWAY

is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA X/TEL

is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SATSX 7

is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SAFINGERSAFE

is a registered trademark of Square D Companyis a trademark of Square D Company

SERIPLEX

is a registered trademark of Square D Company

™

9001CT9701 replaces the following:

9001CT9501, dated 1/969001CT9601, dated 11/969001CT9602, dated 11/969001CT9603, dated 11/969001CT9604, dated 1/979001CT9605, dated 1/979001CT9606, dated 1/979001CT9607, dated 1/979001CT9608, dated 1/979001CT9609, dated 2/97